The Electric Review


Home Page

Features & Profiles

From Rat's Notebook

Rat on Photography

Rat on Poetry

Rat on Reference

Rat on Music Books

Rat on Fiction & Nonfiction

On the CD Watch

Quick Picks

Industry News

Email Us

Home Page

Archive Review Page

The Columnists

Bob Dylan
The Daily Bleed

Empty Mirror Books

Expecting Rain

Allen Ginsberg

Harper Collins

Jack Magazine

Michael McClure

Shana Morrison

Small Press Distribution

The 3rd Page

Elsevier Health Science

Continuum International Publishing Group

Rat on Reference

November/December 2006

Archive Review Page

McGraw-Hill (Health Sciences)
McGraw-Hill (Social Science and Literature)
Roundtable Discussions (More Wiley Science and Technology)

EDITOR'S NOTE: For a comprehensive library resource that brings the best general and academic reference sites together in one place, go to:

www.libraryspot.com


Click ad for John Aiello's review.

MEDICINE

MEDICINE AND CARE OF THE DYING. Milton J. Lewis. Oxford University Press.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

Sociologist Otto Frank has observed that Western medical treatment involves a compromise between care and efficiency by creating the illusion of involvement. However, this illusion is now showing signs of severe strain as the costs of technology and health services, particularly in America, reach an unconscionable level.

Simply put, few will be able to afford the benefits of scientific medicine or obtain entry into arrogant and greedy healthcare systems which often treat patients as little more than an opportunity to bill an insurance company. Somewhere, in the quest for medical research and research dollars, the physician’s commitment to caring for patients has been lost.

In Medicine and Care, Milton J. Lewis notes that outspoken critics such as Thomas McKeown, Archibald Cochrane, Daniel Callahan and Eric Cassell have argued that high-cost, high-technology medicine is resulting in diminishing returns and an unsustainable system:

It was a health care system with acute separated from chronic patients, home care form hospital care, and preventative measures from curative services. .. In the United States, Daniel Callahan and Eric Cassell were also calling for medicine to rediscover the lost art of caring. Callahan, on the grounds of humanity and economic sustainability, claimed that the health system had to cease giving primacy to high-technology medicine that aimed to cure all diseases and, in a godlike way, forestall death.” [p. 61]

Lewis further notes that in the mid 1990s, attention was focused on providing palliative care (especially after the publication of a report by the Institute of Medicine of the National Academy of Science, entitled, Approaching Death.And Lewis writes:

“[The report] identified four broad deficiencies in the care of people with incurable conditions: too may suffered from the failure of caregivers to offer effective palliative and supportive care; from caregivers who pursued aggressive treatment known to be ineffectual and even harmful to the dying patient; from regulations and other issues that frustrated the administration of adequate pain control; from fragmented organization that complicated the coordination of care; from Medicare hospice benefits requirements that could not be reconciled with the progression of many terminal illnesses that lack the steady progression of incurable cancer; from fee structures that induced overuse of procedural services but underuse of patient management and supportive services; from deficiencies in the education of health professionals that meant they did not know how to adequately care for dying patients; and finally from insufficient research (biomedical, clinical, epidemiological, and health services) into end-of-life care.” [p. 117]

Palliative care is defined by the author as the alleviation or mitigation of suffering, while palliative medicine is recognized as the management of patients in the throes of far-advanced diseases for whom the focus of care is enhancing quality of life. However, in present-day America, both the government and the healthcare industry appear to staunchly resist the focus on palliative care in favor of generating revenue of the massive medical industry:

Under Medicare, home care programs did best, but for cost reasons, they used nursing homes for inpatient purposes. These homes, however lacked proper pain control services . . . Physicians tended to resist involvement in hospice programs, often referring only for the home support they offered...Medicare regulations sharpened physician opposition by requiring that patients be classified as terminal before admission to the hospice and the recommendations of the hospice team take precedence over the physician’s.

Hospices were often in competition for referrals with area hospitals, nursing homes and home health agencies in a period when health care as a whole was facing financial cutbacks resulting form the government’s wish to contain expenditures...Educated, middle-class people disproportionately used the hospice programs. Neither ethnic minorities nor rural patients had adequate access to them

Two decades after the first hospices came into being in the United States, conventional health care structures were apparently more able to co-opt hospice than hospice was able to change traditional medical care.” [pp. 138-139]

Lewis writes in a clear and straight-forward manner and does not skirt difficult topic areas, choosing instead to open the eyes of his readers to the fact that sometimes the best medicine is resisting scientific intervention and providing comfort until the hour of death.

In addition to the illuminating information on palliative care and ways that physicians might integrate it into patient-plans, Medicine and Care also contains excellent chapters on the public debate involving pain control and euthanasia and the current state of the ‘right-to die’ movement (which grabbed international headlines recently in the Terri Schiavo case).

Readers and students should pay careful attention: The issues raised Lewis are not going away anytime soon.

Recommended as a primary text in courses that address new approaches to caring for the terminally ill. Further recommended to Health Science libraries as a general reference text – an in depth exploration of medical, sociological and philosophical issues focused on how to help people die in peace and with dignity. ~The Editor.


© Frank Aiello. 2006. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.
Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work (with a particular expertise in matters of insurance law). He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco. Reach him via
The Electric Review.

MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY : A MOLECULAR AND BIOCHEMICAL APPROACH. Thomas Nogrady. Donald F. Weaver. Oxford University Press.

By John Aiello

Now in its 3rd edition, this text from Oxford is recognized for its readability and clear-honed pitch, as the authors delve deeply into the mechanical specifics of how drugs take action on the human body.

As inferred by its title, Medicinal Chemistry focuses on molecular and biochemical principles, looking to unlock some of the mystery of how narcotics work, analyzing the mechanics of drug action on a broad and incisive molecular plane.

The text begins with a strong overview of the primary principles of medical chemistry, before graduating into exploration of the properties of drug molecules and the characteristics of drug receptors (in turn deftly outlining" drug receptor interactions"). Finally, through analysis of these receptors, the reader will be able to draw a discernible link between how disease stalks a human cell and how science might design better chemical compounds that hold the power to isolate pathogens (and then eradicate them from the host).

Nogrady’s and Weaver’s third edition is noted for updated information on myriad areas of study. However, the revised chapter on the immune system is of major importance: As Public Health offices in cities across the world struggle to prepare for a possible outbreak of Avian flu, a more acute understanding of how to use drugs to forestall the spread of viral and bacterial disease is desperately needed. To this end, the data Norgrady and Weaver share is vital, as scientists fight against the clock to build medications which have more striking power against pathogens (but don’t alter the overall balance of the body). Sections on specific drug classes (including medicines for antihypertensive, antiviral, and anticancer drugs) have also seen vast revision, with recent advances in pharmacological research smartly noted.

Aside from its organization (linear in fashion, building from one topic section to the next so as to create an ordered course of study), the value of this manuscript is in its greater social importance: When researchers come to understand the exact way each different drug class acts on human cell structure, they will then be able to design better medicines with fewer side effects and a more complete ability to counter-act disease. This will result in better medicines at more cost-effective pricing, in turn boosting the world-wide economy.

Recommended as a teaching text in any Pharmacy or Medicinal Chemistry course which concentrates on teaching students how to dissect the mechanics of drug action on human cell structure. Further recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

Also recommended from Oxford:

HUMAN BRAIN ANATOMY IN COMPUTERIZED IMAGES. Second Edition. Hanna Damasio. Oxford University Press. Oxford’s place as an academic publisher is personified by this medical science selection: In short, this book is about understanding the makeup of the human brain, a cell-by-cell scientific dissection of our quest for knowledge, this academic testament to our insatiable need to perfect an understanding of the human mind. Here, Damasio presents a compilation of normal brain scans that have been created through the expert anlayis of three-dimensional magnetic resonance images. This title is noteworthy because of the sharp and concrete detail with which it allows the reader to peer into the dimensions of the brain and then assess the varied depths of its neurological landscape.

Recommended as a teaching text in all Radiology and Nuerology courses that dedicate themselves to interpretations of brain-scan images. Further recommended to all practicing Radiologists an in-office reference source with practical value.

TEXTBOOK OF PALLIATIVE NURSING. Second Edition. Betty R. Ferrell and Nessa Coyle. Oxford University Press. In medicine’s ultimate journey to cure disease, it sometimes overlooks an obvious issue: What do we do when the patient can’t be cured? How do we gently usher them into death in a dignified and humane manner? In this text, Betty Ferrell (City of Hope National Medical Center)and Nessa Coyle (Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center) do an exemplary job answering these questions for us in their well-conceived and important nursing manual. Palliative Nursing (now in its second edition) offers concrete direction for hospice and palliative care nurses who are charged with comforting patients in the throes of dying. This title is worthy of firm consideration by both instructors and practicing nurses because it integrates scientific principles (how do we adequately and effectively manage pain) with personal and private topics (how do we help one embark on the journey into the next state) in both compassionate and human terms. Upon completion of this book, the reader is left with a deeper understanding that medicine can only go so far. And when that point is reached and the doctor has taken the patient to the end of the road, it becomes the sole responsibility of the care-giver to be able to alleviate the fear and denial the terminal patient is often struggling against. Simply, no nurse who cares for the terminally ill should be without access to this text.

Recommended as a teaching guide in advanced nursing courses that confront palliative care topics. Required for all hospice care centers as an ‘on-the-job’ resource. Finally, recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

Order from booksmd.com

PATHOLOGY OF THE OVARY. Jaime Prat. Saunders.

This text by Dr. Prat (Chairman of Pathology University of Barcelona) is unique in both scope and construction -- a manual built for use by the practicing pathologist in the course of patient evaluation, it outlines the anatomy and pathology of the ovary in complete terms.

Pathology begins by surveying the basics of the ovary -- including anatomy and histology. From here, we move into a detailed analysis of the diseases that most commonly strike this region of the body. Well-detailed exploration of all forms of malignancy found in the ovarian system is presented, including discussion of the general features of ovarian cancers (and hereditary factorswhich also influence predisposition to the disease). In addition, readers will find outstanding chapters on Steroid Cell tumors and various Endocrine Syndromes as related to the incidence of ovarian cancer. Over 500 color plates come together to provide quick diagnostic reference points for the clinician, further assisting in swift diagnosis.

The key element to this text is in the fact that it has been written with a keen and practical eye - with an eye focused on the way that pathologists think and work, the information is presented so as to allow it to be accessed in the course of the treatment room. In short, Pathology is not reserved for research or theoretical discussion, but instead, it is also at home in the hands of the doctor who is in the midst of trying to diagnose a patient who presents with ovarian abnormalities.

Prat, known throughout the world as a leading voice on the subject, wrote this text alone and without co-authors. Accordingly, he achieves a continuity in style and presentation here that is sometimes lacking in other medical science texts. It is this trait (coupled with the fact that the book will beimmediately meaningful to the practicing physician) which makes Pathology the authoritative reference in the field.

Recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text. Further recommended to all Gynecologists and Gynecologic Pathologists.

Order from booksmd.com;or go to elsevierhealth.com

THE SHOULDER. Charles A. Rockwood Jr. Frederick A. Matsen III. Michael A. Wirth. Steven B. Lippitt. Saunders.

This text marks the primary reference available to the medical community on afflictions of the shoulder, collecting the work of 60 authorities in the field and examining the topic in full detail.

The text begins with an over-view of the anatomy of the shoulder (both gross and developmental). From here, the authors move through exploration of how clinicians can most effectively examine and diagnose patients. A complete discussion of the primary problems that surface during examination is included, with fine chapters on rotator cuff injuries, fractures of the clavicle, fractures of the scapula and nerve abnormalities. Finally, the reader will note that material on tumors and related malignant conditions common to the region has also been included - giving the physician a complete summary of everything that is likely to be encountered in this area of the body. In addition, discussion on all treatment options presently available to the patient is provided.

This third edition contains the latest data available to the clinician regarding both diagnosis and treatment. The authors have done a splendid job in chronicling their subject, directing their audience on every aspect of the shoulder practice:

Employing a comprehensive approach in their style, The Shoulder presents information on anatomy, physical examination, x-ray examination, primary symptoms/causes of disease, as well as the most up-to-date treatment options available. And it is here that the meat of the text is realized: Rockwood (Department of Orthopaedics, University of Texas Health Science Center) and co-authors have done an excellent job in discussing how to proceed with treatment according to the individual needs of the patient.

Cutting edge data on arthroscopic procedures establish the far-reaching advancements that have taken place in the field, and further evidence how this area of medicine has evolved. Obviously, the way that physicians evaluate and treat disorders of the shoulder has changed drastically during the last decade, and this selection gathers the most relevant analysis from the top scholars in the field in one place. In light of this fact, The Shoulder is likely to be the only reference text physicians will use on a daily basis in the course of their practice.

Recommended to all health Science libraries as a general reference text in the area of orthopedics. Further recommended as an in-office reference for all orthopedic specialists reflecting the most current research on the subject. Would also prove useful for sports medicine specialists and physical therapists who work with patients suffering from shoulder injury/disease.

Order from booksmd.com;or go to elsevierhealth.com

Of Related Importance

CAMPBELL’S OPERATIVE ORTHAPEDICS. 10th Edition. In 4 Volumes, with CD-ROM . S. Terry Canale. Mosby.

Campbell’s Operative enjoys an esteemed reputation in surgical circles -- for this biblical reference is all-inclusive and contains the most recent data available on invasive orthopedic procedures. Here, Dr. Canale (Campbell Clinic University of Tennessee) and his co-writers analyze over 1,800 surgical procedures in full and comprehensive detail. These four-volumes feature an amazing 9,000 illustrations and graphics which are designed to direct the surgeon through the often delicate intricacies of these procedures. There is literally something for a reviewer to expand on within very page of this text, but the thing that stands out is in the fact that the writers offer multiple treatment approaches for many of the conditions: the lesson here is that the treating physician should tailor therapy to the individual patient and not fall into a routine when presented with typical clinical problems. Also, there is new research and analysis of hip fractures, which will prove especially meaningful to doctors with vast geriatric practices. In addition, the data on elbow and wrist arthroscopy offers sound alternatives for physicians whose focus is sports medicine and injury (or injury related to repetitive motion). Note: The CD-ROM is an added bonus, as it features video clips of ten procedures that are detailed in the text -- creating a hands-on lecture on video thus allowing the practicing surgeon to absorb this information into the deepness of the mind for long-lasting retention.

SKELETAL TRAUMA. 3rd Edition: Basic Science, Management, and Reconstruction. In 2 Volumes. Bruce D. Browner. Jesse B. Jupiter. Alan M. Levine and Peter G. Trafton. Saunders.

In keeping with Campbell’s Operative, Skeletal focuses on advancements in treatment of bone injury. Here, the authors have come up with the definitive specialty text that outlines in comprehensive detail the matters of skeletal trauma. As noted, the focus here is comprehensive, and information on myriad conditions is presented, including cutting-edge material on trauma reconstruction, infection, and management of limb-length discrepancies. 93 contributing writers look into the skeleton of the human body with an eye towards treating common and not-so-common problems. Accordingly, there is a wealth of information on how to confront foot injuries, as well as analysis on total hip-replacement and direction on deformity correction. In light of the myriad subject matter collected here, this text will prove valuable to the many layers of the medical community who routinely encounter skeletal trauma - from Radiologists and Emergency Room personnel to Orthopedic Surgeons (and Physical Therapists responsible for post-op care).

SHOULDER ARTHROSCOPY. Gary M Gartsman. Saunders.

Like the Rockwood title reviewed above, Gartsman (University of Texas Health Science Center) has developed a text that covers the burgeoning arena of arthroscopic surgery of the shoulder in bright detail. Gartsman, widely considered an expert in the field, offers analysis of both complex and simple procedures, with especially relevant material on rotator cuff injuries, as well as treatment options for osteoarthritis (a huge problem in many female geriatric patients). Nearly 1,000 images augment Gartsman’s treatise -- offering the surgeon a visual demonstration as he makes his way through the material. Additionally, the video portion of the CD-ROM provides a step-by-step road map advising the surgeon on how to proceed through an arthroscopic procedure. A wealth of information is presented in a clear and practical package, making this required reading for all Orthopedic Surgeons who treat afflictions of the shoulder.

Each selection is recommended tohealth Science libraries for their value as general reference texts. Further recommended asin-office references for all orthopedic specialists reflecting the most current research on the subject. Would also prove useful for sports medicine specialists and physical therapists who work with patients suffering from skeletal injury/disease. Finally, recommended to Emergency Room physicians for relevant direction on assessing and treating traumatic injuries of the human skeleton.

Order from booksmd.com;or go to elsevierhealth.com

AlCAMO’S FUNDAMENTALS OF MICROBIOLOGY. Jeffrey C. Pommerville. Jones and Bartlett.

Now in its 7th edition, Alcamo’s Fundamentals of Microbiology marks the consummate teaching text in the discipline, reviewing each of its major components. The text begins with a broad overview, exploring how Microbiology came to be recognized as an independent area of study.

From here, the reader will be able to examine the basic concepts of chemistry in relation to Microbiology. With the foundation now built for deeper study, the reader will be engaged in an analysis of bacteria and how it constructs the various diseases that impact the human species; this includes a well-researched chapter on airborne bacterial disease. Further, information on micro-organisms (the virus and the fungi) is presented, in addition to thorough discussion on resistance and immune-related disorders.

Because of the way it’s written, Alcamo’s makes complex material accessible to the student reader. Microbiology is one of the most complex areas of study in all the medical sciences, and Pommerville (Professor of Biology at Glendale Community College) does an admirable job in keeping Alcamo’s readable.

Too many times science writers tend to become taken with their knowledge of the subject material, losing sight of the fact that the young reader cannot "keep up." However, this problem does not befall Alcamo’s. Instead, the time has been taken to present introductory notes to the student on how to use a textbook. As "basic" as this may sound, do not over-look its importance: instead of jumping into the core of the course material, Pommerville moves into it slowly, allowing the student to absorb the basics that must be learned before advancement in the subject area can be achieved.

There is also a continual impetus here to teach "science as a process of knowing" - a concept which is vital as the student begins to explore the idea of Microbiology in conjunction with the modern practice of medicine. In short, this book has been written for application within the profession rather than mere theoretical study, and it achieves its mission admirably.

Recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text - the material here is presented in a clear and concise manner, with the idea to inspire the student to more in depth study. Further recommended as a classroom text in all Allied Health subjects, and in all nursing programs which explore Microbiology theories.

Order from booksmd.com

GRAY’S ANATOMY E-DITION. The Anatomical Basis Of The Clinical Practice. 39th Edition. Edited by Susan Standring. Churchill-Livingstone/Elsevier.

There is a reason this text has been around for nearly 150 years -- it is simply the best at what it does - surveying the scope of the human anatomy so that the health care community can use it as a resource in the daily course of patient treatment.

Gray’s offers so much to its audience that it is impossible for a reviewer to touch on all its significant attributes. However, wrapped up here in its brand new format, the design has been updated to better reflect how doctors practice medicine. The idea here is practicality, and E-Edition is organized according to body region rather than organ system, making it easier for physicians to use in the examining room. This 39th edition is also careful to reflect the changing course of medicine, with inclusion of data on the inner ear, pelvic floor and endoscopic imaging (among so many other relatively new interests of concentration).

To last for a century and a half, you have to be very good at what you do. And that’s why we have to recommend Gray’s - it is abundantly good at everything it does. And it’s best selling point is that it is bold enough to keep up with the times. This E-Edition (the package contains the text, plus the CD-ROM, plus the on-line access) is quite a bold undertaking - bringing Gray’s amazing breadth of knowledge to the age of technology.

Remember, the many generations that grew up on Gray’s were use to seeing it in its stodgy book form, unaccustomed to seeing it spruced up on computer disk, unaccustomed to seeing the text come springing to electronic life. But by issuing this text in a companion electronic edition, Elsevier has given doctors the chance to obtain continuing web site updates on the subject matter in the comfort of their own offices. Further, these doctors can also use the CD-ROM in conjunction with the text to gain even more from the elaborate images/illustrations. Obviously, our new generation of physicians who have grown up on computers will relish the E-Edition because it has kept up with the way medicine is moving throughthe 21st century.

Even though its 150 years old, Gray’s has been careful to stay current with the changes in medicine, maintaining its place as the elder master of every doctor’s medical library.

Recommended to all physicians as an in-office reference manual. Recommended as a class text in all anatomy courses at both the medical schooland general college level. Recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text. The best anatomy text for the last century.

Order from booksmd.com;or go to elsevierhealth.com

PHOTOAGING. Edited by Darrell S. Rigel. Robert A. Weiss. Henry W. Lim. Jeffrey S. Dover. Marcel Dekker.

This collection of treatises by some of the leading voices in Dermatological Science examine the effects of the sun on the aging process of skin, looking at the phenomenon in connection with the various treatments clinicians can use to combat symptoms and pathology.

The authors, led by Darrell Rigel (a Professor of Dermatology at New York University School of Medicine) do an exceptional job looking at photoaging in comprehensive terms, beginning their text by exploring the reasons why skin ages in the first place. From here, we are led into a discussion of the effects of UV rays on the human body. It is believed that long-term exposure to UV is at the root of photoaging, and the authors do a fine job is dissecting this topic, instructing the physician on what to look for in the patient who presents with sun-compromised skin (further speaking to how clinicians should approach the study of the effects of UV on the skin).

In addition, a full analysis of all available treatments doctors can use to help restore damaged skin is included (along with achapter reviewing the particular legal issuespertinent tophysicians who treat patients with photoaged skin).

The comprehensive nature of this text gives it immediate, broad-based reference value to physician, student and researcher. The best aspect of Photoaging is that it deals with the whole of the subject in a detailed and well-organized format. Although it will be of deep value to practicing Dermatologists, the book does a good job in addressing the subject in terms that will be meaningful to the internist and primary care physician as well.

All available treatment options have been examined, with vital chapters on Chemical Peels, Ablative Laser Resurfacing and Fat Transplantation. However, the most timely chapter expands on the use of Botulinum Toxin A in Photoaging, as Bo-Tox is being used more frequently across the country to combat sagging skin. Since patients are likely to be coming to their doctors requesting Bo-Tox treatments more and more in the future, doctors need to have a full understanding of what this course of therapy entails.

Moreover, the authors have also taken the time to address the fact that differences in patient skin require the doctor to tailor treatments to individual needs and genetics - in short, this is not a "one size fits all" area of medicine, and these authors do a laudable job in bringing the point across.

Recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text. Further recommended to all Dermatologists and internists as an in-office reference presenting cutting-edge research and discussion on the effects of photoaging on human skin.

Order from booksmd.com

COLOR ATLAS OF COSMETIC OCULOFACIAL SURGERY. William PD Chen. Jemshed A. Khan. Clinton D. McCord Jr. Butterworth Heinemann.

This text sets the standard in the field of Oculofacial Surgery, addressing this burgeoning field in comprehensive terms.

In Color Atlas, Chen and his co-authors (each recognized authorities) have put together a benchmark text on the subject of facial surgery. Beginning with clear direction on how to approach the preliminary examination of the patient, the authors deftly move into the anatomical structure of the eyelid. At this point, the reader begins exploration of topics such as preoperative preparation and safely anesthetizing the patient.

By formatting the text in this step-by-step manner, the authors work to build a sound and solid foundation which lets the reader absorb the finer points of oculofacial surgery. Accordingly, this is where the meat of the text is found: Chen, Khan and McCord provide vital counsel in all phases of reconsturctive surgery, touching on the latest advancements in technique and treatment.

Physicians who access Color Atlas will receive expert instruction on Botox application and laser surgery, as well as laser resurfacing procedures to be used in conjunction with drug therapy. There is also an in depth chapter on Asian blepharoplasty with cross-sectional line drawings that note the differences between the Asian and Caucasian upper eyelid structure - a segment that allows the surgeon to study the intricate nature of this facial region in detail before scalpel ever touches skin. Well-used illustrations abound, including line-drawings and color frames which address anatomy as well as surgical methods.

In Color Atlas, Chen and his co-authors have provided a deeply layered text: this book will be looked on as "the authority" in the realm of Oculofacial Surgery for decades to come.

Recommended as in office reference for plastic surgeons, ophthalmologists and head/neck surgeons. Also recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text. Finally, Color Atlas would be a sensible choice as a teaching text in any course addressing oculofacial surgical techniques.

Order from booksmd.com;or go to elsevierhealth.com

CAMPBELL’S UROLOGY. In the 8th Edition.Patrick C. Walsh. Alan B. Retik. E. Darracott Vaughan Jr. Alan J. Wein. W.B. Saunders. Touted as the "Bible of Urology" by many a reviewer since it was initially published in 1954-- there is a reason this text is held in such high regard. Basically, everything a physician needs to know about Urologic disease is contained in these pages, the information presented in a series of chapters that build textbooks within textbooks - comprehensive and impeccably detailed, sewing together the leading voices on the subject.

In this four-volume set, readers will find full analysis of both adult and pediatric urology - developing its analysis (of Urologic disease) in aspects related to both diagnosis and treatment. It is simply impossible to note highlights here, since the book as a whole constitutes a benchmark in academic medical publishing. Volume 1 addresses the foundational basics, addressing the anatomy of the Urologic systems, including the Kidneys, Ureters and Genitalia. At this point begins the real journey into the subject, as full and in depth analysis of the myriad layers of the Urinary Tract moves into the identification and treatment of the primary Urologic afflictions (Volumes 1 through 4).

As previously noted, the authors’ analysis is not limited to adult disease. Instead, physicians will find that Pediatric Urologic dysfunction is also reviewed, including well-developed data on evaluating Pediatric Urologic patients and treating Renal disease in children.

Obviously, the fact that Campbell’s has been around for five decades evidences how invaluable this text has become to the medical community. Aside from its value to practicing physicians, Professors of Medicine have used the book as a teaching tool to help residents begin to explore the sub-specialty of Urology. The 8th edition should only continue the tradition of using Meredith Campbell’s treatise to instruct aspiring physicians.

In the end, it does not seem plausible that a Urologist would not want have Campbell’s Urology in their office as a definitive reference. Also recommended to Internists and physicians with family practices as a reference tool (Urologic disorders are common maladies and HMOs often limit the ability of the patient to seek specialty care; thus, family doctors are being called upon to treat more and more Urologic disease). Also recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

Note: Campbell’s is also available in CD-ROM applicable to both Windows and Macintosh systems. The CD contains the full text of the four volume set, additional images, plus the second edition of the Campbell’s Urology Study Guide (see our review of the Study Guide in the Library Advisory on the Industry News Page).

Order from booksmd.com;or go to elsevierhealth.com

MALE AND FEMALE SEXUAL DYSFUNCTION. Allen D. Seftel. Associate Editors: Harin Padma-Nathan. Chris G. McMahon. Francois Giuliano. Stanley E. Althof. Mosby.

Male and Female Sexual Dysfunction is a text marked by many revolutionary features, including cutting-edge analysis of new research in the field of female sexual dysfunction (and appropriate treatments). In light of the attention focused on the advent of Viagra to treat impotency, sexual dysfunction is no longer a topic that must remain hidden from view. Instead, patients are more comfortable talking to their physicians about their problems and ways to deal with them.

Accordingly, Mr. Seftel’s has written a book to assist the clinician with diagnosis and treatment plans -- his text truly comprehensive in scope, written in a succinct and economical style, always careful never to lose sight of the fact that doctors need information in a clear and straight forward manner (noting that) "...sexual medicine has matured into an almost full-fledged subspecialty of the medical sciences...which does not belong to either sex or to one specialty area of medicine It deals with one of the most common international human maladies..." (From Ira D. Sharlip’s Foreword).

Male/Female covers all facets of sexual dysfunction as they relate to both sexes, with well-developed chapters on "Prostate Cancer and Erectile Dysfunction" and Peyronie’s Disease. As previously noted, the book does not ignore female dysfunction as many of its predecessors have; instead, women’s issues are addressed in detail, with an emphasis on treatment.

Recommended for urologists, internists and primary care physicians as an in-office reference manual. Should also be considered as a class text by instructors in advanced urology programs because of its detailed analysis of the subject matter - the writing clear, concise and conducive to addressing the focus of the student. Further recommended to Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

Order from booksmd.com; or go to http://www.us.elsevierhealth.com

Of Related Interest

PELVIC FLOOR DISORDERS. Alain P. Bourcier, PT. Edward J. McGuire, MD. Paul Abrams, MD. Elsevier/Saunders. Textbook that serves as the authoritative voice on afflictions of the pelvic floor, detailing the subject from multiple angles, with comment offered from urologists, specialized physical therapists, gynecologists and nurses coming together to create a thorough analysis of all facets of this complex and often misunderstood problem. Includes comprehensive coverage of all pelvic floor disorders (damage from childbirth, urinary incontinence in the elderly patient, post-prostatectomy incontinence, pediatric bedwetting, male/female sexual dysfunction, among several others). What’s really best about Pelvic is that it includes the basics -- providing an overview of how the pelvic floor system works before exploring the myriad ways it can malfunction. By doing this, the authors stress the fact that a physician cannot competently address treatment unless he firsts understands the way this complex system of muscles is meant to function. Well-developed chapters provide direction on both diagnosis and treatment -- with the emphasis on long-term management of symptoms.

Recommended for all urologists and nurse practitioners who deal with patients presenting with pelvic floor disorders. Further recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

Order from booksmd.com; or go to http://www.us.elsevierhealth.com

PROSTATE CANCER UNDERSTANDING. Fernand Labrie. Michael Koutsilieris. Paschalidis Medial Publications (A McGraw-Hill Professional Book). This new text addresses the affliction of prostate cancer in its entirety - -a comprehensive study of a disease that is attacking men more and more frequently today. The authors have written Prostate Cancer in a classical academic style, outlining the way this type of cancer spreads and the best ways for a physician to treat the patient after the onset of disease. However, Labrie and Koutsilieris don’t stop there; instead, they expend a great deal of effort discussing the fact that the best treatment option for this killer disease is in early detection of the cancer cells: if a doctor can begin to treat the disease before the tumor takes deep root and spreads, then the prognosis becomes more positive for the patient. As the authors point out, it is only through screening and early treatment that medicine can hope to improve the survival rate for those who fall sick with this type of cancer. In addition to these topics, prostate cancer susceptibility genes are discussed, data which can help urologists and other internists better understand the factors that make certain men more likely to present with malignancy. Well-written and impeccably researched, this is a magnificent textbook that can serve the student and practicing physician equally well. In the end, Prostate Cancer functions as both a teaching text and a treatment manual - the authors careful not to "talk down" to their readers, but instead, presenting information in an even-handed and deeply detailed manner.

As noted, the book is recommended as a teaching text in the fields of urology and urologic oncology. Further recommended as a manual for the internist or urologist to use in-office in the course of patient examinations. Finally, would be a welcome addition to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

Order from booksmd.com; or go to mcgraw-hill.com


HANDBOOK OF OBESITY. George A. Bray. Claude Bouchard. Marcel Dekker. Today, more than ever, people are obsessed with their weight and how they look. The topic is foremost in everybody’s mind, and there has even been litigation in recent years over weight discrimination related to the work place.

We are simply an obsessed culture - obsessed with being fat, yet still unable to control our eating patterns.

Handbook Of Obesity by George Bray and Claude Bouchard compiles the latest information on the subject of treating obesity and lowering patient risk factors created by being over weight. The text focuses on new ways that doctors are able to treat this ever-growing problem (including drug therapies and exercise regimens designed to prevent obesity):

"Behavioral strategies help to reinforce changes in diet and physical activity. Without new habits, long term weight reduction is unlikely to succeed. Most people unfortunately return to baseline weight without continued behavior modification. Learning how to include behavior modification in weight reduction therapy is essential. Behavior therapy is designed to permanently alter eating and activity habits."

(Page- 127)

This study peers at the problem of obesity from myriad perspectives, examining the latest research in the field so that physicians can better manage the obese patient. However, the issue of weight gain is not a simple, cut-and-dried problem. As the authors note, there are many social stigmas which accompany the condition, and these have to be carefully assessed in conjunction with the way the doctor addresses treatment. Bray and Bouchard are careful not to flee from these issues, instead discussing themin relation to their medical analysis.

All facets of the condition of obesity are investigated, including patient evaluation, prevention, and treatment options. To reiterate, the authors do a nice job in dissecting the fact that this problem is both a medical and social one that requires careful consideration on the part of the health care professionalbefore treatment ensues.

Recommended for all primary care physicians as an in-office reference, providing deep insights into how doctors might deal with over-weight patients. Should also be considered as a possible teaching text for dietitians and medical students studying diabetes and in courses that deal with obesity treatment and prevention.

Order from booksmd.com


ENDORSED FOR ADOPTION

BY THE ELECTRIC REVIEW


Fall - 2006

Reviews in this section written by Editor unless otherwise noted.

ENGINEERING

MATHEMATICAL METHODS FOR PHYSICS AND ENGINEERING. A Comprehensive Guide. 3rd Edition. K.F. Riley. M.P. Hobson. S.J. Bence. Cambridge University Press.

The disciplines of physics and engineering are based in mathematical method – in essence, math is the cornerstone of scientific study allowing for researchers to dissect a problem and then reassemble it, revealing its core in the nakedness of the process. In this text, Riley (University of Cambridge) and co-writers have created a magnificent primer that offers comprehensive coverage of all mathematical principles relevant to the physical sciences. In turn, the following topics are analyzed: Preliminary algebra; preliminary calculus; complex numbers and hyperbolic functions; series and limits; partial differentiation; multiple integrals; vector algebra; matrices and vector spaces; normal modes; vector calculus; line, surface and volume integrals; Fourier series; integral transforms; first-order ordinary differential equations; higher-order ordinary differential equations; series solutions of ordinary differential equations; eigenfunction methods for differential equations; special functions; quantum operators; partial differential equations (general and particular); partial differential equations (separation of variables); calculus of variations; integral equations; complex variables; application of complex variables; tensors; numerical methods; group theory; representation theory; probability; and statistics. In addition, the authors have included over 800 practice exercises, half of which contain solutions. This feature is note worthy because it re-enforces the time-honored foundational principles behind teaching mathematics: Basically, the study of higher mathematics is a process of trial and error, and students do not retain their lessons unless they are able to investigate problems, point-by-point, through rote practice. To this end, the exercises provided allow readers to immediately apply the theories of the text to the actual process of mathematics. Recommended as a supporting class text in any engineering or physical science class, serving as a trusty companion for the student whose course of study is predicated on the realms of advanced mathematics.

NONLINEAR PROGRAMMING: THEORY AND ALGORITHMS. 3rd Edition. Mokhtar S. Bazaraa, Hanif D. Sherali, C. M. Shetty. John Wiley.

This important text covers the theory and algorithms of nonlinear programming in comprehensive terms – a tried and true resource that has the potential to open myriad doors within the mind of the student, this in depth exploration into a subject that marries aspects of applied mathematics and industrial engineering. As noted in the publisher’s summary of Nonlinear Programming, this work is premised on “the problem of optimizing an objective function in the presence of equality and inequality constraints [since] many realistic problems cannot be adequately represented as a linear program owing to the nature of the nonlinearity of the objective function and/or the nonlinearity of any constraints…” In turn, this text covers the three major parts of nonlinear programming (convex analysis; optimality conditions; algorithms and their convergence) in clear and insightful prose that employs richly illustrated examples in order to bring the student to the core principles of the discipline. Now in its fully-updated third edition, readers will benefit from coverage of topic areas such as interior point methods and nonconvex optimization that represent the latest research in the field. In addition, the numerical problems and advanced theoretical exercises serve to test the reader on retention as material is presented. Noted and recommended for its logical format and sharp editing that never wavers in its focus. Highly recommended as a core-classroom text in the fields of Operations Research, Management Science, Industrial Engineering or Applied Mathematics (with an emphasis on those engineering disciplines that utilize analytical optimization techniques).

MATH REFRESHER FOR SCIENTISTS AND ENGINEERS. 3rd Edition.
John R. Fanchi. John Wiley.

This text serves to help students in the advanced sciences review myriad mathematical concepts. The mission of this text is to allow students to revisit core principles in mathematics as they apply to the sciences and to engineering. The book focuses on practical applications and includes exercises that test readers on problems likely to be encountered in real-world situations. Includes chapters on integral equations; calculus of variations; tensor analysis; and partial fractions. Fanchi is an accomplished writer who is able to communicate in a clear and straight-forward manner – drawing the student into the material rather than creating deeper layers of intimidation. Recommended as a supporting class text in all science and engineering courses where graduation from the curriculum includes a re-testing of mathematical skills/ efficiency.

LAW

LITIGATION TRIAL PRACTICE, SIXTH EDITION. William M. Hart. Roderick D. Blanchard. Thomson-Delmar Learning.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

This text is now in its Sixth Edition and, after even a cursory reading, it’s easy to see why. Here, Hart and Blanchard present a full overview of the litigation process, with an emphasis on the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure -- working in a systematic manner, providing complete examples of each of the documents customarily dealt with in the trial process (such as answers, interrogatories and motions, with review of the format required for each document). In addition, the authors offer examples of myriad form letters; a list of key terms augmenting each chapter; and useful guides called “Technology Notes.” For example, the Notes for a chapter on medical examinations and records list various web sites where the practitioner can obtain on-line assistance focused on pertinent medical issues. Hart and Blanchard also provide an insert entitled “Cite-Mate” written by Deborah Bouchoux which sets forth an invaluable citation reference for busy practitioners and their aides. In the real world, such assistance is invaluable – saving attorneys untold time which then can be used for more pressing assignments such a preparing for trial. Although Hart and Blanchard state that the text is intended to prepare paralegal students to work with lawyers, the breadth of information and the manner in which it is presented makes this an valuable reference guide for the whole of the legal community (including budding paralegals, law students, and young lawyers whose hands-on litigation training was either markedly limited or all-together-ignored by law school faculty). In sum, this well-organized and well-designed text should be in use in law school procedure courses as a supporting class manual. It is further recommended to advanced paralegal students who will be greatly benefited by the practical information it collects.


© Frank Aiello. 2006. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.
Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work (with a particular expertise in matters of insurance law). He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco. Reach him via
The Electric Review.

LABOR LAW AND EMPLOYMENT. VICTORIA E. ULLMANN. Thomson-Delmar-Learning.

In the corporate workplace, the threat of litigation remains a major concern – any mistake by a supervisor in managing his staff often results in a costly lawsuit (made even worse by Defendant’s attorneys’ fees and bad PR). So what can businesses and employers do to stem the tide of labor-based litigation? Demand that the Human Resources Department get current with the law – and fast. In Labor Law, Ullmann (an experienced and well-regarded attorney) has drafted a textbook that cuts to the core of the subject, taking students through the terrain of Employment Law with clarity and precision. Rather than create a one-dimensional text for the paralegal student, Ullmann has instead built a book that is also relevant to advanced business management students (as well as to mid-level managers in all segments of the business world). It is obvious at page one that Ullmann is a tremendous legal writer, and she never wavers from her mission – which is to give accurate and practical meaning to the ultra-complicated web of legal standards that govern labor in the United States. Accordingly, the author includes analysis of the Federal System; at-will employment (which has become an increasingly prickly area); implied contracts; worker’s compensation; drug testing; infliction of emotional distress; the Fair Labor Standards Act; statues governing discrimination; reasonable accommodation and disability; the procedural framework of the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission; erudite analysis of McDonnell-Douglas; and a review of ERISA. Throughout, Ullmann presents summary of the applicable or governing case law within the text of her analysis, thus allowing readers to digest ‘the law’ in relation to the author’s extrapolation. In turn, students are given every opportunity to review key points of information and then apply it to the context of the law in the manner that the Courts do (a method that shows the reader how the legal process works beyond the confines of the classroom). This text is recommended as a primary teaching text in any paralegal course that is focused on Employment Law. Further recommended as a supporting class text for Business Administration courses based in Human-Resource topics. Finally, Labor Law should be considered as an in-office reference by Human Resource Directors who hold positions in companies where they are in effect the ‘first-line of defense’ charged with diffusing potential legal problems before they reach an actionable stage.

Of Related Interest

MEDICAL MALPRACTICE. Law and Litigation. Beth Walston-Dunham. Thomson/Delmar-Learning.

Another smoldering spot for attorneys and their staffs comes via the realm of medical malpractice, as changes in the legal landscape have altered how these cases are litigated. In this text, Walston-Dunham first reviews the history of medical malpractice in America before moving into a step-by-step analysis of the typical med-malpractice case. Walston-Dunham’s historical overview provides a nice segue into the meat of the book, which is looking at the different forms medical malpractice takes and the ways that attorneys evaluate and litigate such claims. The author’s “Anatomy of a Lawsuit” is a perfect tool for the classroom in that it effectively dissects the complexities of the courtroom for the student, cutting the material into neat ‘bite-sized’ chunks that promote reader comprehension. However, the value of this text is in the way that Walston-Dunham presents the case from both the Plaintiff’s and Defendant’s perspective, demonstrating to the student how the same fact situation can be manipulated as each side puts their ‘spin’ on an event. Practically, this demonstrates to students how much a forum of debate the practice of the law really is, further demonstrating that success in this arena requires acute factual analysis in addition to the ability to move a jury to an understanding of complex legal and scientific concepts. Walston-Dunham has done an admirable job in both the writing and organizing of this text, setting elements of theory against typical ‘real world’ situations in order to immediately test a student’s ability to apply what they have just learned. Medical Malpractice is recommended as a primary teaching text in paralegal programs surveying the litigation process in Tort and professional negligence claims. Further recommended as an in-office reference for practicing paralegals, serving as a compact review of key information.

AN INTERVIEW

WITH LEGAL WRITER

BETH WALSTON-DUNHAM

Examining the landscape of the law, what changes have altered how attorneys presently assess and litigate medical malpractice cases?

Over the last 10-20 years, there have been dramatic changes in the legal profession concerning medical malpractice cases. For one, things are a lot more competitive – from a marketing standpoint, attorneys must be able to litigate these kinds of cases, yet they also must be selective in evaluating them, because of restrictions on recovery and the penalties that are imposed on lawyers who file frivolous lawsuits. Now lawyers must approach medical malpractice claims from a practical business-perspective rather than on a purely emotional level, which used to be common place.

In terms of medical malpractice litigation, what particular challenges are presented for a trial lawyer and his staff as they enter the courtroom?

Evidence is the key. But in these kinds of cases, evidence can be difficult to acquire, especially if you’re the Plaintiff. The Defense and its employees are usually in control of all the evidence and of many of the witnesses. Obviously, this can be problematic. But, it should be remembered that this control only goes as far as the loyalty of the employees. Medical malpractice claims are not like a car accident, where you can visit the scene and interview witnesses who are not directly connected with the case. Instead, most of the witnesses in medical malpractice cases are connected to the Defense side, which creates obvious problems.

Do you think lawyers are seeing an increase of actionable medical negligence claims given the growing problem with physician errors during the course of patient treatment?

Absolutely. The large numbers of errors [as reported in recent studies] have caused an increase in litigation. I think the reasons for this are easy to understand: The more patients that doctors see the more likely there are to be errors. And with errors there is the very real potential for lawsuits. Basically, the increased numbers of patients being seen in hospitals produce mistakes and the mistakes often produce litigation. And I think this trend will only increase, given the fact that the Baby-Boomers are all growing older. And as they age, they will need medical care, resulting in even more patients seeking treatment in hospitals over the next 10 years.

Do you see lawsuits as beneficial to keeping the process in check? Do they serve as an effective deterrent against physician negligence?

I don’t think the goal has ever been for lawsuits to deter recklessness. Instead, the primary goal of the process has been to provide compensation to the injured party. Yet, from a secondary standpoint, it is true that doctors know the potential for litigation is always looming. That’s just a fact of life of their profession. And physicians are aware of it. These suits can take a heavy toll on a doctor, and the attorneys who prosecute these cases should be aware of this fact. A lawyer must remember that you do not jeopardize someone’s career with a lawsuit unless the claims are well-founded.

Do you think that the caps on damages/recovery now in force in many states have colored attorney-perceptions with regard to litigating medical malpractice claims? And are injured parties suffering as a result?

Well, the vast majority of these cases fall into a gray area and Plaintiffs often have little access to evidence. Therefore, it can be hard for them to find a lawyer who will pursue a claim. It’s a very difficult proposition for the lawyers evaluating these cases. The reality of medical malpractice cases is that the cost of prosecution can many times exceed recovery, creating a negative situation for both the attorney and the client. The reality is that damage caps can make many cases impractical to prosecute, ending in a travesty of justice for those people who have been injured but who can’t find lawyers to help them…

~John Aiello

Of Related Interest

ENTERTAINMENT LAW. Jeffery Helewitz. Leah Edwards. Thomson/Delmar-Learning.

Another specialty-area within the American Courts comes via the practice of entertainment law. The common image one conjures when the word “entertainment” is blurted is of a high-powered lawyer battling a studio executive for an extra ‘mil’ for his client. Sexy fantasy, but hardly all that common. In actuality, this arena is much like other civil concentrations, dependent on a practitioner’s ability to apply statutory arguments to unique fact structures. Here, Helewitz and Edwards offer a deep glimpse into the nuts-and-bolts aspects of entertainment law. Chapter topics include full review of pertinent Constitutional issues; Federal regulation of intellectual property; contracts; partnerships; the legal structure of the entertainment industry (as related to television, film, theater, records, music publishing, book publishing and sports law). In addition, there is a well-developed chapter on entertainment law and cyberspace. This material is especially relevant given the growth of the internet, which has made information instantly available and instantly open to be copied and re-circulated. The author’s inclusion of this topic serves to stress that the changing landscape of the world and its reliance on technology-driven mediums also alters the way lawyers and their staffs approach a case/client. This text is notable for the effortless way it presents its data: Helewitz and Edwards write with the student in mind, setting important terms off in the margins and providing succinct definitions, emphasizing core-concepts with multiple examples in an attempt to integrate the reader with the text. Too often, legal writers are overly-broad and overly-technical in their presentation, losing less advanced readers along the way. However, Helewitz and Edwards do not fall into such a trap; instead, they realize that their mission is not to write like lawyers, but to teach complicated concepts to a student audience. Accordingly, Entertainment Law meets this mission in workman-like fashion. This text is recommended as a primary teaching text in paralegal courses devoted to entertainment-law topics.

BIOLOGY/CHEMISTRY/PYSICS

MOLECULAR AND CELLULAR BIOPHYSICS. Meyer B. Jackson. Cambridge University Press.

This selection marks an outstanding addition to the field of biophysics, premised on both molecular and cellular principles. In the past, texts in this area have often been staid and singular in focus, looking at biophysics in purely foundational terms. Here, however, Jackson (University of Wisconsin Medical School) has created a sharp and multidimensional resource that marries different aspects of the scientific journey together in one volume, in turn helping the advanced college student refine his ability to apply principles of physical chemistry to the multiplicities of biological research.In his treatise, Jackson covers myriad topics, including global transitions in proteins; molecular forces in biological structures; conformations of macromolecules; and molecular associations, in addition to erudite analysis of diffusion and Brownian Motion. Further, the appendices provide a fantastic overview of applicable mathematical concepts (i.e. matrix algebra; Fourier analysis). These appendices serve as a refresher course of sorts and are meant to give students the chance to revisit the whole of their mathematical backgrounds (applying the core of their knowledge to relevant principles of molecular and cellular biophysics). More than anything, this text is note worthy for its ability to cross-over the boundaries of multiple disciplines (mathematics, physical chemistry, physics, biology, statistics), in an effort to show the student that the study of science requires a mastery of vast principles and the innate ability to synthesize theory and then reapply it to new sets of problems. As noted, Jackson’s treatise presupposes some level of competency in both advanced mathematics and chemistry and is written for students who are embarking on dedicated graduate-level study in the field. Recommended as a primary teaching text in all Biophysics courses that teach the application of molecular and cellular biophysical principles to various biological systems. Further recommended to all college-level libraries as a general reference text with long-term value.

Of RelatedInterest

PRINCIPLES AND TECHNIQUES OF BIOCHEMISTRY AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY (6th Edition). Edited by Keith Wilson and John Walker. Cambridge University Press.

This text, edited by two of the most esteemed faculty from the University of Hertfordshire, will be of interest to all serious students in the sciences. Principles and Techniques of Biochemistry serves as an expanded edition of the previous Principles And Techniques of Practical Biochemistry. In essence, this text provides analysis of the theoretical principles and the applications of those principles as they relate to the disciplines of biochemistry and molecular biology. During the last two decades, the landscape of modern medicine has changed a great deal, with discoveries in areas like stem cell research and genomics making it necessary for chemists and biologists to have extensive knowledge of the molecular structure of the human form. Accordingly, Wilson and Walker have constructed afundamental course book that not only looks to discuss the principles of these concentrations of study, but also looks at the ways scientists should go about applying theory to the every-day practice of medicine and laboratory research. Topics of coverage include cell culture techniques; centrifugation; molecular biology (including bioinformatics and basic techniques); recombinant DNA and genetic analysis; and protein structure (including purification, characterization and functional analysis). We note this textbook because of its ability to merge the disciplines of biochemistry and molecular biology and illuminate the links that render these areas of study interdependent. Well-edited and clearly written, providing students with a stable point of reference which they will be able to utilize beyond the confines of the classroom. Recommended as a primary text in classes that connect the principles and practices of biochemistry with molecular biology. Imperative reading for those students entering pre-med programs. Finally, recommended to all Health Sciences libraries as a general reference text.

PSYCHOLOGY

OBESITY AND MENTAL DISORDERS. Susan L. McElroy. David B. Allison. George A. Bray. Taylor and Francis/Informa.

By John Aiello

This volume very much warrants serious review by the medical community as a whole, and not just by physicians dedicated to psychiatric care. In 21st century society, there is a literal epidemic of obesity, as individuals sometimes carrying as much as double their required body weight suffer from myriad secondary disorders, including heart disease; crippling arthritis; and diabetes.

Further, there has been on-going investigation among scientific researchers as whether a true correlation exists between obesity and mental illness. And the authors write: “Many emerging lines of evidence suggest that reexamination of the relationship between obesity and mental disorders are in order, particularly for mental health professionals. In this regard, the significant overlap between obesity and psychopathology in clinical populations may be the most important…”

In this volume, McElroy and her co-writers carefully deconstruct their subject in careful terms, attempting to draw tangible links between the life-altering afflictions of obesity and mental illness.

After reviewing the history of obesity, the authors look to the connection between being over-weight and the onset of psychotic disorders. Accordingly, there are insightful and thought-inducing chapters on topics like mood disorders and obesity; the increase of cardiovascular risk factors concurrent with schizophrenia; obesity and impulsive/compulsive mood disorders; and a crisp breakdown of the relationship between body fat and various diseases (hypertension; diabetes; dyslipidemia). Moreover, relevant discussion as to treatment options for obesity with and without psychopathology has been included.

In addition to the in depth data presented here, this book is absolutely vital to the mindset of the medical professional, since this material seeks to draw tangible links between obesity and various mental breakdowns. And going further, the authors also examine ways that doctors and other healthcare professionals can begin treating individuals who present with obesity-related illness.

The most important bit of data for the doctor to take from this book is to understand that an overweight person might be fighting more than physical illness; in addition, they may be suffering from some form of mental disorder, too. Thus, when dealing with an obese patient, a course of therapy should be developed that accounts for concomitant attention to both the mind and the body.

This text should be a required reading for all student-doctors looking to gain certification in internal medicine, for there is an important lesson to be learned here: That physical illness is often the byproduct of myriad issues that require the patient’s mental state to be taken into full consideration. All doctors would be well- served to learn this early in their careers and then incorporate the perspective into rituals of daily patient care.

Order from booksmd.com

Of RelatedInterest

HYPNOSIS AND TREATING DEPRESSION. Michael D. Yapko, Editor. Routledge.

By John Aiello

Hypnosis has long been thought of as a taboo in traditional medical circles – a last-gasp backroom treatment option that only the most radical physicians would consider. However, the times have indeed changed, and hypnosis is now seen as quite a viable treatment plan to be used in conjunction with counseling and pharmacological therapies.

In this very profound text, Yapko (director of The Milton H. Erickson Institute of San Diego) gathers contributions from the leading thinkers in the field who write compelling essays on ways that therapists might be able to integrate hypnosis into care-plans for those suffering from myriad forms of on-going depression.

What is best about this text and Yapok’s perspective is that he is seeking to draw scientists out of their insulated cocoons and formulaic worlds, asking that they move within themselves and become creative - the idea is to use a broad sampling of different treatment options to help heal the wounds that bruise and cripple the human psyche.

This perspective is absolutely vital to students who are approaching the end of their programs and about to be licensed to practice psychiatric medicine. It seems obvious that future success in this field will require practitioners to abandon preconceptions about cutting-edge therapies like hypnosis, looking to consider such treatment options on an individual basis. To this end, Yapko and contributors make a compelling case for hypnotically-based treatment plans to become a common alternative for patients in the dark throes of depression.

Recommended a supporting text in courses that focus on treating depression. Further recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

Order from booksmd.com

MEDICINE

PROBLEM-BASED ANATOMY. Craig A. Canby. Saunders.

Anatomy is a basic prerequisite to all pre-med programs, as well as a requirement for all nursing and health-related professions. Anatomy and Physiology courses are simply the cornerstone of these fields, with students requiring a complete mastery of this material in order to move on to more advanced courses. Here, Canby (Des Moines University) has created a problem-based manual leading the student through multiple layers of anatomical data byway of a ‘case study’ model. Instead of ‘lecturing’ his readers, Canby instead thrusts us to the core of the material and forces an interaction with the clinical applications of the discipline: This ‘hands-on’ approach meant to focus the student’s attention on the ways that one human organ system builds on the next, forming a synchronized system of cells and vessels which keep the heart and brain fed with blood. In his problem-based approach, Canby brings students to the deep significance of our anatomical structure by helping them to examine its substructures or subspecialties. Topic coverage includes chapters on the back; thorax; abdomen; pelvis/perineum; lower limb/upper limb; and head/neck, with specific diseases/conditions discussed as part of the exploration of each region. Readers will find Canby’s style immediately effective, as he had built a platform on which to test the student’s ability to apply their understanding of anatomy to the clinical ‘stage’ of the examination room. Noted for its clarity, organization and illustrations which come together seamlessly, helping students with both comprehension and retention of complicated material. Recommended as a primary course text in Anatomy courses in pre-med programs. Further recommended to instructors as a secondary classroom manual in all nursing programs: Canby’s analysis provides a vital roadmap guiding readers through the intricacies of human construction.

Of Related Interest

CRASH COURSE: METABOLISM AND NUTRITION - With STUDENT CONSULT (Online Access). Albert Clark. Mosby.

Mosby’s Crash Course series provides a unique and effective way for a student to learn the core of a subject and retain its fine points – clearly written texts that test for comprehension immediately upon the presentation of the material. Here, Clark (Queen's University, Kingston, Ontario) offers a review of the scientific basis of metabolism and nutrition, with discussion of carbohydrate and energy metabolism; lipid metabolism and transport; the metabolism of proteins, purines, pyrimidines and heme; glucose homeostasis; and exploration of the principles of proper nutrition. In addition, Clark includes well-rounded chapters on ways physicians in the clinical setting assess metabolic disease. Given the reality of how much information is flying at medical students and residents at one time, this Crash Course series provides a tidy compendium of lectures that encourages young doctors to revisit vital information – these books cutting to the core of myriad subjects in sharp and shapely narrative style. Imagine a classroom where the instructor stands before you and just gives you the factual information that you have to have in order to facilitate understanding of the subject. Now hold that picture in your mind. In effect, you have just opened an installment of the Crash Course series. Here, the specific focus is on nutrition and the way that the metabolic processes of the human body synthesize food into energy.Readers will be able to use this text (priced at an affordable $30) as a secondary manual to many courses that intersect these topics. Recommended to medical and pre-med students as an invaluable self-study tool that will aid in exam preparation.

PROGNOSTIC FACTORS IN CANCER, THIRD EDITION. Edited by Mary K. Gospodarowicz, Brian O'Sullivan. Leslie H. Sobin. John Wiley.

This selection records important advances in medicine’s fight to better manage the onset of cancer and enhance quality of life issues for the patient. Prognostic Factors sets forth how physicians can better evaluate case-data in order to reach a proper prognosis. Cancer cases are often unpredictable, representing the most challenging situations any doctor will encounter during the course of their day-to-day practice. Accordingly, this is one of the only textbooks of its kind to focus on the clinical methodology for evaluating prognostic factors in order to arrive at humane and effective treatments for the cancer-sick patient. Comprehensive in tone, this book provides a deep overview of site-specific tumors; the lesson: different kinds of tumors require different treatment approaches on the part of the healthcare provider. Gospodarowicz (University of Toronto’s Princess Margaret Hospital) discusses various topic areas here, including head and neck tumors; Digestive System tumors; lung and pleural tumors; tumors of bone, soft tissue, and skin; breast and gynecologic cancers; Urological tumors; brain and ophthalmic tumors; Hematoglic malignancies; and Pediatric tumors. The text is noted for its organization and editing as the authors speak with clarity and precision, stressing that the physician’s role will always be different at different stages of the disease (thus creating the need for an individualized course of care that can only be determined by the immediate condition of the patient). Recommended as a primary text in courses where fellows and residents are taught how to evaluate symptoms in cancer patients. The mission of this book is to help doctors make effective prognostic decisions so as to arrive at practical and effective treatment plans.

CELL BIOLOGY PROTOCOLS. Robin Harris. John M. Graham David Rickwood. John Wiley.

This text is truly written for the modern curriculum, stitching together various areas of scientific study as they relate to the discipline of Cell Biology. In today’s research laboratory, the cell biologist is required to have a working knowledge of myriad subjects, including analytical biochemistry, molecular biology and molecular genetics. Accordingly, this text assembles data on various protocols (light and electron microscopy; concepts of cell culture and cell separation; subcellular fractionation; organelle and membrane isolation, and the use of in vitro reassembly systems in Cell Biology) in an effort to present students and practicing researchers with a text as vast as the cellular forms which create the human dynamic itself. Recommended as a primary teaching text in both Cell Biology and Molecular Biology courses, noted for its ability to show the reader that the study of science is the study of multiplicities drawing from the motion of the world.

TECHNOLOGY

IMPROVING ALMOST ANYTHING: IDEAS AND ESSAYS. Revised Edition. George E. P. Box. Foreword by Dr. J. Stuart Hunter.John Wiley.

Another standout science text from the ageless John Wiley and Sons, Mr. Box’s manuscript analyzes ways that researchers can improve myriad scientific processes and, in turn, enhance aspects of quality in the broad fields of manufacturing and technology. Box’s Improving Almost Anything is premised on ways science can intervene with the goal to improve processes as they relate to the theory and application of product design. In his treatise, Box analyzes the underlying philosophy of the scientific method in order to reconnect students with their own personal impulses of creativity. Basically, Box leads his readers back to themselves, trying to inspire advances in technology and research by leading students back to the ‘wheel’ whereby they might find new ways revitalize product quality. The book is divided into five key parts (Part A, “Some Thoughts on Quality Improvement,”; Part B, “Design of Experiments for Process Improvement;”Part C, “Sequential Investigation and Discovery;” Part D, “Control;” ,Part E, “Variance Reduction and Robustness” ) which come together to bring the student back to the point where scientist morphs into inventor, driven by the insatiable need to make the whole of the process (from design to production) more stable and efficient. Recommended as either a primary or supporting text in any course that explores the marriage of science and technology as each relate to product design and quality control.

NURSING

DEVELOPING EXPERTISE IN CRITICAL CARE NURSING. Julie Scholes. Blackwell.

The demands placed on the critical care nurse are, without a doubt, intense - -as physicians require nurses in this role to be able to function at the highest level while providing treatment and support for multiple patients who dwell in the throes of life-and-death illness. Accordingly, critical care nurses must test and retest their skills as they serve as the physician’s ‘second set of eyes,’ reading symptoms and administering treatment plans; simply, any error for a critical care nurse is a catastrophe with fatal consequences. In this text, Scholes analyzes the progression of skills that needs to occur for a nurse to be able to effectively master the requirements of the critical care ward. Scholes’ analysis grows from a clinical perspective and examines how critical care nurses should approach the study of nursing. The idea is to be able to take the core skills-set that all nurses must possess (the ability to be able to meet basic patient needs, administer medication, facilitate laboratory testing and support the mission of the physician) and then transfer them to the practice of critical care medicine – where the speed of the job is increased tenfold amid patients in grave condition. Basically, critical care nursing requires that a nurse be able to apply the essence of their skills to the most pressurized of all medical environments. Consequently, critical care nurses cannot just be competent; instead, they have to be variable experts in the field of nursing with the innate ability to read a situation and immediately assess patient stability (or instability), noting each subtle change in condition that could be the precursor to a bigger event. Here, Scholes tells us just what kind of mettle this job requires, looking at how skills are acquired, nurtured, polished and expanded so that an individual can maximize their potential while satisfying strict regimens of patient care. Well-written and impeccably organized, as Scholes leaves the reader more certain of the steps they will need to take in order to develop their capabilities to parallel the demands of ‘critical care.’ Recommended as a class text in advanced programs/courses that explore specialty-care in nursing.

FUNDAMENTALS OF NURSING. Sue Carter DeLaune. Patricia Kelly Ladner. Thomson/Delmar-Learning.

Reviewed by Karen C. Bagatelos, M.S.N.; N.P.

Fundamentals of Nursing
carries an appropriate title, for this text serves as a comprehensive reference appropriate for students as well as experienced nurses already in established practice.

Authors DeLaune and Ladner do an exemplary job at providing a through overview of the history of nursing; standards of care; professional accountability; proper health habits; and ways in which nurses can best respond to the basic psychosocial and physiologic needs of their patients. However, throughout this text, the main focus for the reader is on the nursing process itself.

Obviously, the science of nursing as we know it has taken many years to evolve, and Fundamentals provides an excellent summary of both the art and science of the discipline which, when stitched together, define the practice of nursing.

Even though the discipline is vast and marked with competing responsibilities, nurses spend the majority of their time tending to patients’ psychosocial and physiologic needs in an effort to assist them to regain their health. In essence, this is the beauty of the science of nursing.

Yet, beyond this, instructors in the discipline are charged with helping novice nurses attain an understanding of the art of nursing which develops over time and through experience – the ultimate goal is for a nurse to be able to use the whole of their knowledge to best address shifting patient needs.

Accordingly, DeLaune and Ladner present an excellent review of the nature and science of nursing in this multilayered text, with Fundamentals divided into six primary sections which comprehensively describe myriad aspects of the profession:

Section one describes the history of nursing (including the evolution of nursing practice; nursing theory; research and evidence-based practice; and health care delivery systems). The second section offers a sound review of the nursing process. Section three reviews the fine-points of professional accountability, including pertinent examination of both the legal and ethical responsibilities which accompany a nursing license. The fourth section thoroughly describes promoting client health, with a focus on the natures of the life cycle. The fifth section discusses the patient’s basic psychosocial needs (including the stress-response, spirituality, loss, and grief). Finally, section six reviews how nurses can best respond to the patient’s basic physiologic needs.

In addition, the authors have augmented their treatise with a full array of charts, tables, drawings and pictures that will help the reader retain the substantial amount of data being addressed. The authors have also included a comprehensive review of nursing diagnoses and care plans which provide a sharply-styled refresher course for practicing nurses in all sub-specialties.

In sum, Fundamentals of Nursing serves as an excellent resource for students – a text that allows beginners to develop a complete understanding of both the art and science of nursing while also presenting experienced nurses with a reference of long-term and wide-ranging value.

Go to Thomson/Delmar Learning for information.


Karen C. Bagatelos holds a Masters of Science degree in Nursing, serving as both a Nurse Practitioner in Gastroenterology and Assistant Clinical Professor of Community Health Systems at the nationally ranked University of California, San Francisco Medical Center. Reach her through The Electric Review.

CLINICAL DECISION MAKING: CASE STUDIES IN MATERNITY AND WOMEN’S HEALTH. Diann S. Gregory. Thomson/Delmar Learning.

Recently released byThomson Delmar, CLINICAL DECISION MAKING: CASE STUDIES IN MATERNITY AND WOMEN’S HEALTH byDiann S. Gregory (Miami Dade College) is presented with unique focus and delicate precision: A text meant to "bridge the gap" between knowledge and the student’s ability to apply that knowledge.

Here, Gregory has structured a manualmeant to assist nurses in the making of clinical decisions that relate directly to women’s health and to maternity-based cases. In this unique and practical series from Delmar Learning, nurses are summoned to the "front lines" of the classroom and confronted with real life scenarios; the idea is to present a "case" study and then step back while the nurse assembles the myriad information and offers the proper care. Gregory’s ultimate lesson is to show that the typical classroom is a sterile and completely controlled environment, while the hospital itself is a kinetic and unpredictable stage where anything can happen at any time. Good nurses mustmaster the transition, or lives willlikely be compromised.

Clinical Decision Making has been deemed worthy of consideration for classroom adoption because ofits boldness and breadth, a textbook that in effect marriesthe walls of the classroom to the hospital maternity ward and then demandsthe reader initiate an appropriate plan of action -- immediately testingthe nurse’s retention of material and their ability to transfer that knowledge directly to the care of the patient.

PEDIATRICS. From Thomson-Learning’s Case Study Series. Bonita Broyles. Thomson-Delmar Learning.

As part of the same series, Bonita Broyles Pediatrics uses an identical editorial format to stress the core idea of the Learning Case Study Series:to re-enforce principles of critical thinking so that the nurse is able to use proper judgment in assessing a case and initiating treatment. Divided into 20 independent studies, Broyles’ Pediatrics paints real life pictures ("case studies") and places the nurse smack-dab in the middle of the treatment room with a call to evaluate varied situations and provide appropriate remedies.Each case begins by setting the scene, asthe nurse/reader is presented with various pieces of personal data (such as patient age, gender, ethnicity, cultural considerations, pharmacological specifics, and spiritual considerations), before being confrontedwith a factual summary of why the patient requires care. At this point, the reader is pressedwith several questions of consideration which, when answered correctly, offer a "blue-print" to a suitable course of therapy. Aside from its pin-point writing and sharp organization, the best part of this text is that it forgoes the predilection to "lecture" (something so many medical texts fall prey to), instead dedicating its full focus to the practical world where patients are not names on paper but instead actual living breathing people whose well-beingis in their nurse'shands.

Each of these texts is presented in multiple versions, with either 20 or 40 case studies documented. Thecompact and streamlined versions offering 20studies are appropriate for use as a secondary class text in support of a more generalized manual on the foundationalaspects of nursing.

ENGLSIH/LANGUAGE ARTS

DEVELOPING CRITICAL READING SKILLS. 7th Edition. Deanne Spears. McGraw-Hill.

Among the new breed of college student, the two skills most lacking are 1) the ability to write a basic essay; and 2) the ability to effectively comprehend what has just been read. Arguably, these are two of life’s most important intellectual functions, processes which most of us repeat on an hourly basis. In this text, Spears expertly teaches students how to read and interpret information, beginning her treatise from a foundational stand-point, carefully leading the student through common trouble areas. After defining the reading process and its requirements, the author moves into an in depth discussion of vocabulary, stressing the fact that no one can read or write effectively unless they first hone their vocabulary (examining the way that words are used in different contexts). From here, Spears delves into related topics, including: how to make accurate inferences from the information being presented by a writer; how to determine tone and point of view in any piece of writing; and how to develop critical/analytical reading skills in order to effectively counter a given position. In addition to the core topics Spears presents, this text stands out because of its organization, with the author smartly adding exercises at the end of each chapter as a means to immediately test the student’s comprehension of material. In the end, the act of reading should not be drudgery for students, but instead, should excite and enliven their minds and promote intellectual discovery. The catch is that no one can reach this point unless they first learn how to approach the exercise. To this end, Deanne Spears’ Developing Critical Reading Skills marks one of the best texts of its kind currently available. Recommended to instructors of reading courses (beginning at the intermediate level). Noted for its clear perspective and for the way it involves the student in every step of the presentation.

AlsoFromMcGraw-Hill

THE AIMS OFARGUMENT. 5th Edition. Timothy W. Crusius. Carolyn E. Channell. McGraw-Hill.

This text/reader is vital to teaching the elements of argument. Among entry-level English composition courses, most students struggle mightily with any assignment that requires an argumentative essay. Simply, an astounding number of undergraduate students are unable to fashion an argument on paper that sways the audience to their side of the ball. Here, Crusius and Channell stress the “rhetorical context,” teaching students to approach the medium by first learning to read and analyze data before formulating a strategy to alter the course of their reader’s perspective. I think what sets The Aims of Argument apart from other books in this subject area is the way that it touches upon “mature reasoning” as the cornerstone to effective argument. Bluntly, too many students are influenced by the talk-show circuit, where specious arguments rule the stage. However, these authors are smart to talk about reasonable argument in the first pages of their manual, in effect creating the idea that any relevant argument is premised on a thorough understanding of the facts: The mission is to acknowledge the opposing point-of-view and then strip it away, point-by-point. This edition is also important for the incisive casebook it features – “After 9/11: Understanding Terrorism.” By including this material, the authors take a monumental event still bloody with emotion and use it as a tool to teach original tactics of argument the student-thinker can employ both inside and outside of the classroom for years to come. Recommended as a primary teaching text in all Rhetoric courses that stressthe elements of argument. Further recommended in Logic or Philosophy courses as a supporting class text, recognized for its ability to effectively dissect language and weaken opposing perspective.

Of Related Interest

REASONING AND WRITING WELL. 4th Edition. Betty Mattix Dietsch. McGraw-Hill.

This four-part handbook takes an interesting approach in that it features four elements of the writing process together in one handy volume. Reasoning and Writing presents as a reader; a guide on rhetoric; a research manual; and a handbook on the writing process itself – this centralized resource offering students one book that is meant to be used beyond these confines of the classroom. In addition to the chapters on argument and the fine-points of critical thinking (which form the real meat of this volume), the material Dietsch has included on the basics of writing (organization, sentence structure, drafts and revision) are critical to the development of the undergraduate writer, for these are the skills that allow for success at the college level. These days, too many students are winding their ways through school without being able to address complex assignments where a theory must be analyzed and the critical eye applied. Simply, one cannot write an effective argument without first being able to construct a logical sentence whereby each verb is presented in its proper tense. It’s easy to say, but not so easy to accomplish. Here, teaching through example, Dietsch writes with both sharpness and clarity, deftly using graphics to set off important details which need to be cemented in the mind of the reader. In the end, Dietsch’s style shows the student-writer just where mastery in the field can lead. Recommended as a primary class text in all college-level English-1A or 1B courses, a book spotlighted for its lucidity of detail and for the positive energy it builds in the eye of its reader.

Of Related Interest

ENGLSIH SKILLS WITH READINGS. 6th Edition. John Langan. McGraw-Hill.

A polar opposite to the Dietch text, the sixth edition of John Langan’s English Skills with Readings is singular in scope, seeking to create a manual that provides insight into those basic areas students must focus on in order to become competent writers. Accordingly, Langan’s text is best suited to students struggling to find their way through the requirements of college-level writing classes. In English Skills with Readings, Langan provides a comprehensive summary of the writing process, including analysis of sentence structure; the nuances of the thesis point; paragraph structure; how to support a thesis point with evidence/detail; and the importance of revisions/drafts (in addition to reviewing the fundamentals of grammar, punctuation and proper word usage). Langan augments this exhaustive exploration into the mechanics of writing by including seventeen readings (by Andy Rooney, Paul Logan, Amy Tan, Bill Wine and others), showcasing pieces which evince the subject matter of the text and show the student-writer just what an effective essay looks like. Recommended as a primary course text for classes which review the basic tenants of composition as a stepping-stone to English 1A. Notable for the author’s ability to strip information to its core principles, in turn creating a guidebook that invites rather than intimidates.

~John Aiello, Editor.

Order each from amazon.com


PHARMACY SCIENCE


PHARMACOLOGY FLASH CARDS. George M. Brenner. Stephen Back. Saunders.

This sheaf of flash cards will provide salient direction to medical students at both the undergraduate and graduate level, assisting in the development of a deeper understanding of Pharmacology. Brenner’s flash cards are notable for their design that facilities quick and easy reference. Accordingly, cards utilize a dual-sided format: on the first side of the card users will see the drug’s name and keys to its pronunciation. The flip side compiles relevant notes on each drug in short-form that serve to provide a basic outline for usage (with data on the primary clinical uses for each medicine). These cards offer information on more than 200 of the most commonly prescribed medications, with color-coding by drug category facilitating student use. Medications featured include: Verapamil; Diltiazem; Enalapril; Methadone; Ipratropium; Testosterone; Trastuzumab (among many others). This selection is a can’t miss for stressed out students looking to cut down on study time. For around $35.00, students can buy a classroom resource that in effect offers them a ticket to their own personalized Pharmacology review. ~John Aiello

Order from booksmd.com

WRITE IT DOWN. Guidance for Preparing Effective and Compliant Documentation. Second Edition. Janet Gough. CRC Press.

In light of recent controversies surrounding the safety of certain medications, the process the FDA uses to test and approve drugs has fallen under scrutiny. Beyond the FDA’s myriad processes, researchers and drug manufacturing companies are also being held to strict regulations in terms of recording and documenting their own data.

Write It Down, recently released by CRC Press (part of the Taylor and Francis Group and a leader in scientific publishing) is dedicated to providing salient direction on how the pharmaceutical industry should go about documenting its work. This selection is notable for its readability and for its concrete vision: a unique book that marries aspects of science with sharp comment on technical writing in order to provide a community of medical researchers a manual that keeps their specific needs in mind.

Here, Gough (an expert in compliant systems documentation) has drafted a text that strongly sets forth the fact that documenting the inter-workings of the pharmaceutical industry is not like any other kind of technical composition. Instead, this kind of report writing takes absolute focus and a deep attention to detail:

"The main purpose of the book is to help writers of English master the art o preparing effective documents. It includes extensive information o the structure of the language, with focus on those components that are particularly troublesome for non-native writers of English....[with] [m]any examples...provided by professionals in the industry..."

(From Gough’s Introduction)

Write it Down covers a wide range of topics, including discussion of writing within a regulated environment; first drafts/revisions; collaborative assignments; acting in the capacity of a reviewer; the writer's impact on his reader; how to write "negative news" letters; organization for written presentations; punctuation/grammar/parts of speech; and how to support reported data with detail, in addition to instruction on constructing manuals and methodology reports that speak to a broad audience (to cite obvious centerpieces). Moreover, the analysis of punctuation and the guidance on ways to construct a sentence are especially noteworthy segments, as the author makes her points in a manner that is at once conducive to developing a general understanding of these lost skills.

In short, Gough has presented her readers with a book that is rare in the world of science writing: rather than authoring a tome about throwing out the facts in any-old haphazard style, she has taken the time to stress "voice" and the importance of the presentation. In the end, Ms.Gough instills in her reader the idea that even scientific reports deserve to be put in an original frame.

This book is recommended to all facets of the pharmaceutical industry for its clear-sighted direction on how to write for a scientific audience. In addition, Write It Down is appropriate for all Health Science libraries as a general reference with long-range academic value.

Order from booksmd.com

THE AMERICAN PHARMACIST'S ASSOCIATION

Over the last year, news reports have surfaced that directly question the safety of certain popular cholesterol and arthritis medications, further questioning the effectiveness of the methods currently in use to test medicine safety before these chemical potions hit the retail market.

Even though recent advancements in such medical therapies have revolutionized the treatment of disease, they also pose some new considerations for physicians - forcing doctors and pharmacists to move toward a closer relationship in order to prevent deadly drug interactions.

To this end, the American Pharmacists Association’s list of publications is note- worthy because these books speak to the most relevant concerns physicians and pharmacists are likely to have in the course of dispensing medication to patients. Hallmark selections include:

HANDBOOK OF BASIC PHARMACOKINETICS. Wolfgang A. Ritschel. Gregory L. Kearns. American Pharmacists Association. This handbook, now in its sixth edition following its initial release in 1976, addresses the way drugs influence reaction in the human body though absorption, distribution and elimination. Without such specific information, health care providers would be at a loss to provide the correct dosing regimen for a given drug.

Unfortunately, many doctors today are so pressed for time that they fail to thoroughly research the possible effects a medicine might have on a patient before scribbling out a prescription -- probably leaning on the idea that the pharmacist and his trusty electronic computer brain will be there to red flag a possible problem. Yet, sometimes these safety mechanisms fail and potentially fatal reactions occur.

Accordingly, the only way to stem these kinds of problems is to insure that the medical community is educated with the most up-to-date research. Here, Ritschel and Kearns discuss basic pharmacokinetics with a focus on clinical application - rather than lecture to the classroom, the authors have written a book that is meant to assist the provider in the direct treatment of the patient. Topics covered include drug liberation, absorption, distribution, metabolism and elimination; analysis of medicine effects on the GI tract; and vital data on dispensing drugs to children, the elderly and the obese.

Clearly written and impeccably researched, will serve pharmacists, physicians, and instructors in the field equally well. Also further recommended for all Health Science libraries as a general reference text. Stamped at the bargain price of $54.95 -- it’s simply a must-have for the practicing physician.

PAGLIAROS’ COMPREHENSIVE GUIDE TO DRUGS AND SUBSTANCES OF ABUSE. Louis A. Pagliaros. With Ann Marie Pagliaros. The only text of its kind to examine the most common drugs responsible for substance abuse. Louis Pagliaros (Professor of Pharmacopsychology) and Anne Marie Pagliaros (Director of Substance Abusology at the University of Alberta) have come up with a different slant on this manual in that in addresses abuses prevalent in both prescription medication and street narcotics (which are usually left out of the standard texts on the subject).

Pagliaros’ is also noteworthy because of the way that the authors attempt to examine the hidden reasons why individuals become addicted to certain substances, thus encouraging the physician to thoroughly dissect the addiction potential in a particular patient before dispensing a drug.

In the end, Pagliaros’ has been assembled to further the physician’s understanding of the substances that are most abused throughout the world so that steps might be taken from the doctor’s perspective to mitigate these trends. Includes fine chapters on pyschodepressants and pyschostimulants, as well as discussion of the withdrawal syndromes that will often plague a patient trying to kick an addiction.

Recommended to all health care professionals as a general reference text meant to be used in the course of patient treatment.

HANDBOOK OF NONPRESCRIPTION DRUGS: AN INTERACTIVE APPROACH TO SELF-CARE. Multiple Editors, including Rosemary R. Berardi. American Pharmacists Association.

In this era when millions of Americans can’t afford basic health insurance coverage, more and more individuals are moving toward self care as a way to cope with non-life-threatening illness/injury.

In this handbook, the editors have compiled information for the health care provider to use in order to counsel patients on ways to safely and efficiently administer self care (with relevant in depth data on non-prescription drugs and their optimal usage). In addition, readers will note information on non-drug therapies and alternative treatment options all meant to help the patient help themself.

Even though the concept of the text is self care, the secondary theme is safety - the point is that self-care is not a plausible alternative unless patients have a full understanding of their role in the process and a full understanding of how to administer nonprescription medication (and other supportive treatments). To this end, Berardi and her co-editors have created a reference handbook that serves to escort the physician step-by-step through patient instruction on all home care procedures.

Recommended for all health care professionals, from physicians to nurses to pharmacists; in short, any health care provider who has direct contact with patients should have this book available as a teaching tool. Also recommended to public sector libraries as a general reference text.

Order from booksmd.com; or go to http://www.aphanet.org/

THE PHARMACY TECHNICIAN. A Comprehensive Approach. Jahangir Moini. Thomson/Delmar Learning.

The study of Pharmacy Science is one of the burgeoning areas of medicine, with many new challenges facing the young student whose goal is to dispense medication as part of a hospital pharmacy (or retail chain). Accordingly, Moini (Florida Metropolitan University) has written a text that addresses the major topics that comprise the National Certification Exam for pharmacists; simply, the pharmacy student will need to have a firm grasp on all of this data in order to gain licensing in the profession. The best aspect of Moini’s presentation is in the way he writes: instead of laboring over passages, he moves through the material in crisp fashion, immediately getting to the core of it. For example, in the chapter on Allergy and Respiratory Drugs, he begins with a quick over-view of the primary anatomy of the system before exploring the concepts of allergic reaction (including a brief but effective snapshot of Anaphylactic Shock). Once Moini’s defined the role of Histamines in the process, he begins to analyze the different drug therapies that physicians commonly use to treat allergic conditions - discussing mechanism of action, therapeutic uses, adverse effects and drug interactions for each. These well-organized and well-thought-out chapters lend themselves to the way in which an experienced pharmacy student should approach study for the certification exam: instead of just remembering factual data for a test, the idea here is to learn this information so that it can be used in the course of life-long service to the patient. And from page one onward, Moini meets this goal effectively. Although The Pharmacy Technician has many outstanding aspects to it, readers should take specific notice of the information on both pediatrics and geriatrics: this material is key to the student’s development because it illustrates the fact that every different patient presents with unique and individual needs. A Pharmacist can never forget this.

This text is simply imperative for all advanced Pharmacy students studying for the Certification exam; its review should be included as part of their Graduate School curriculum.

Order from delmar learning

DRUG DISCOVERIES FOR NERVOUS SYSTEMS. Franz F. Hefti. Wiley.

Diseases that attack the nervous system have traditionally been hard to treat with medication because of the complexities of the region - there has simply been limited understanding of what was causing these nervous system breakdowns; thus, physicians have often been unable to know when to prescribe a particular medicine.

However, because of advancements in the field of molecular biology, scientists have recently been able to lift the veil on the mind and begin to solve its many mysteries. Drug Discoveries dedicates itself to recording this mission, dedicated to pursuing treatment options for those afflicted with serious illness born of the brain:

"The human brain defines our place in the universe. What we are able to perceive, comprehend, and influence is determined by the brain and its ability to enhance its own function and devices. The quest to understand our brain, the research field "Neuroscience" bridges science and philosophy. Drugs affecting brain function will thus help us to understand our thought processes and our place in this universe ..."

-From Page 1 at the introduction-

Hefti'stext is revolutionary in scope because of this unique motivation to merge thephilosophical realms withthe world of medicine. Further, Drug Discoveries differs from similar manuals in that it is formatted by disease instead of drug class - the idea here is to continually juxtapose the affects of the disease against the affects of the drug on the afflicted segment of the nervous system. Thisperspective forces scientists to not lose sight of the fact that drug therapy cannot be used to maximum efficiency unless we look to discover more information about the area of the brain the drug is acting on:

"Why and how does a drug act? How do we find new and better drugs based on this knowledge? This volume addresses both questions for nervous system diseases ..."

-From Page 11-

Much new and intriguing data is collected here, including discussion of various nervous system diseases, including schizophrenia, depression, various anxiety disorders and ischemic brain events. There are also highly learned chapters on both Parkinson’s Disease and Alzheimer’s Disease -- two afflictions showing a marked increase of incidence during the last decade.

All in all, this is a marvelous text that offers the medical community a new perspective on both treatment and research regarding diseases of the nervous system. Beyond its present value to physicians, it should be referenced by future researchers pursuing advanced understanding of the subject.

Recommended as a class text in courses that focus on neurological and pharmacological research. Further recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference.

Order from booksmd.com, or go to wiley.com.


AMERICAN PSYCHIATRIC PUBLISHING INC.


COMPETENCY IN COMBINING PHARMACOTHERAPY AND PSYCHOTHERAPY: INTEGRATED AND SPLIT TREATMENT. From the Core Competencies in Psychotherapy Series. Michelle Riba. Richard Balon. Glen Gabbard, Editor. American Psychiatric Publishing Inc.

By John Aiello

American Psychiatric Publishing’s Core Competencies series [1] (Edited by Glen Gabbard) presents five texts on different aspects of psychotherapy, in turn offering both student and practitioner a full overview of the subject. The basic idea behind these textbooks is to impress upon the reader how complicated the human mind is, stressing the fact that treatment of patients with mental disorders requires nuanced care (with patients to be treated as individuals and not ‘classic case studies’).

Basically, the Core Competencies Series is about enveloping the student or reader in the material until maximum competency is attained. In this volume, doctors learn the intricacies of how to combine elements of psychotherapy with pharmacological (or drug) therapy. As Riba and Balon assert, placing a patient on a narcotic requires delicate understanding as the side effects and related consequences to the patient can be far-reaching and long term. In addition, patients cannot truly receive the full value of medication unless they are also receiving care by physicians skilled at integrating the one-on-one counseling session into a course of treatment that also includes some form of pharmacological therapy.

In this text, Doctors Riba and Balon do an exemplary of writing to their audience; rather than talking down as if lecturing from the classroom podium, the authors instead are able to weave the material into a comprehensive course of study which commands the reader listen and interact with the data on the page (in large part the same role they will play when trying to competently treat patients from a clinical setting). At all times, Riba and Balon speak in clear and concrete terms, marrying one element of the subject to the next, building a true depth of knowledge that is absolutely necessary for competent patient care.

[1] The material in this series is regarded as being at "the core" of the practice of Psychiatric Medicine as outlined by The Accreditation Council for Graduate Medical Education and The American Board of Medical Specialties.

Also Notable in The Series

INTRODUCTION TO SUPPORTIVE PSYCHOTHERAPY. From the Core Competencies in Psychotherapy Series. Arnold Winston. Richard Rosenthal. Henry Pinsker. American Psychiatric Publishing Inc.

Based on the same premise as the previous selection and serving as an installment in the Core Competency in Psychotherapy Series. This text uses skillfully constructed vignettes as a means to demonstrate how the clinician might formulate an effective doctor-patient relationship. Simply, this aspect of Psychotherapy is the cornerstone of the discipline: no matter the circumstance, a physician has to be able to effectively communicate with the patient; in addition, a patient must trust enough in his doctor to open up and reveal parts of the self. In essence, the physician must be able to support the patient in myriad ways in order to develop a true understanding of the patient’s problem and level of pain. Expertly written with a feel for both the physician and patient perspectives.

Each of these books are recommended as class texts for advanced students in the discipline as they serve to teach the nuances of effective combination treatments for patients who present with various mental disorders. Further recommended to Health Science libraries as general reference texts.

ALSO FROM AMERICAN PSYCHIATRIC PUBLISHERS

IMPROVING MENTAL HEALTHCARE. Richard C. Hermann. American Psychiatric Publishing Inc.

This text is quite unique in scope as it attempts to delineate a specific series of steps to improve healthcare for the patient in the throes of a mental disorder. Hermann’s treatise is steeped in "measuring the basics of the processes of mental healthcare," including: patient access; appropriateness of treatment; safety; and continuity of care (which is one of the most important factors to patients enjoying a sustained improvement of their condition). One of the best aspects of Hermann’s text is that is sets forth a dedicated plan of attack focusing on the unique issues mental health practitioners face. In this realm of medicine, the patient seeks treatment while fighting against traditional stigmas. Consequently, the physician is in a battle to gain the patient’s trust so that a positive course of treatment can ensue. Unfortunately, much of the healthcare community’s attention is focused on common medical issues like heart disease and cancer -- with little thought given to treating those whose suffering originates inside the cages of the mind. In essence, Improving Mental Healthcare is a book about 1) identifying ways to make the process of seeking care for a mental disorder better; and 2) implementing these measures in a practical and meaningful way. As a writer, Hermann is thoughtful in his analysis, and he speaks to all segments of the profession (with the material having a particular impact to the practicing clinician who should immediately see himself entwined in these pages).

Recommended as a general reference for all Health Science libraries. Further recommended for all hospital administrators and public health officials as guide on how to formulate measures which will streamline and bolster the way we treat those with mental illness.

THE AMERICAN PSYCHIATRIC PUBLISHING TEXTBOOK OF MOOD DISORDERS. Edited by Dan J. Stein. David J. Kupfer. Alan F. Schatzberg. American Psychiatric Publishing Inc.

Stitching together some of the leading voices in psychology, APPI’s Textbook of Mood Disorders is the literal bible in this arena detailing the most current data on mood disorders (including diagnosis and treatment). In terms of impact on society, mood disorders are one of the most prevalent forms of illness encountered by physicians and they place an extraordinarily high burden on America’s resources. Here, Stein and his co-writers dissect the topic from its foundational perspective in order to paint a clear picture for students and practitioners on how to identify symptoms and move toward effective treatment options. Topics covered are vast, including all types of mood disorders (Psychotic Depression; Seasonal Affective Disorder; Secondary Depression based on medical illness; Major Depression; Substance abuse; and Sleep Disorders). In addition, the authors document treatment options for each class of disorder (such as Pharmacotherapy; Brain stimulation techniques; and various Psychotherapies regimens). Stein and his co-writers also do an outstanding job of leading us through a comprehensive exploration of the epidemiology of these forms of mental illness (after placing them in a certain historical context which serves to give the reader a true understanding of the impact these conditions have had on the world at large).

Of Related Interest

THE AMERICAN PSYCHIATRIC PUBLISHING TEXTBOOK OF PSYCHOANALYSIS. Edited by Ethel S. Person. Arnold M. Cooper. Glen O. Gabbard. American Psychiatric Publishing Inc.

A natural companion to Stein’s treatise on Mood Disorders, this text talks about every aspect of psychoanalysis (from theory and concept to treatment and technique). The editors have created a resource here that would be particularly useful to doctors who are in the midst of treating patients as the authors’ability to discuss psychoanalysis in broad terms evinces that this is a complicated and ever-changing area that requires practitioners to be creative and search within (their ultimate goal to gain patient trust and unlock the hidden vaults of the self). Noted for its impeccable research and clear writing, Textbook of Psychoanalysis offers both students and physicians a wealth of data and inspires deeper study of the discipline.

Each of these selections are highly recommended as in-office references: practicing Psychiatrists/Psychologists will find these to be all-inclusive handbooks that speak to the reality that physicians on the ‘frontlines’ encounter. Further recommended to all Health Science libraries as general references -- these books embody the idea of a library reference in every way.

Go to appi.org for additional information


ASM PRESS


ANTIMICROBIAL AGENTS: ANTIBACTERIALS &ANTIFUNGALS. Editor: Andre Bryskier. ASM Press.

By John Aiello

This volume presents the reader with a comprehensive source of data pertaining to antibiotic medications. In his new edition, Bryskier (Sanofi-Aventis, France) has stitched together a definitive text that dissects antimicrobial agents from a ‘ground zero’ perspective, as independent elements of the topic build into the next to create a reference that documents the drugs available to physicians to combat infection and the risks that use of these medicines incite.

After providing a historical overview of antibacterial therapy (including the Penicillin and Post-penicillin eras), we move into a summary of the different classifications of antibacterial medications (with review of structure-activity relationship). In addition, Bryskier includes a well-devised chapter on the Epidemiology of Resistance to Antibacterial Agents.

In this segment, the author discusses how pathogens are able to change in structure to literally out-wit a medicine and become resistant. This data builds naturally into the next primary chapter, Development of An Antibiotic, in which Bryskier writes on the creation of infection-fighting drugs. Further discussion includes chapters on the pursuit of new antibiotics; systemic antifungal agents; and the effect of antibiotic treatments on the GI tract.

We recommend this book because of the relevance of this subject matter to both the practice of medicine and to myriad sociological factors. Given today’s war-torn consciousness, the threat of bioterrorism is quite real (some would say imminent). Accordingly, a physician’s ability to effectively treat patients with antibiotics has not been this challenging since before the advent of penicillin (and its distant cousins in the antibacterial chain). Anthrax poisoning; mutations of the Stapylococcus pathogen with its many ways to cause breakdown of the respiratory system; Helicobacter Pylori and its link to breakdown of the GI tract: These threats to human health represent only the tip of the iceberg.

If doctors are to have even a fighting chance against these crises, than they must be armed with an assortment of medicines with enough power to beat back the changing tides of disease. Look at the latest media coverage of international health issues: As the world prepares for a possible pandemic in the wake of the Avian Flu, it has become an immediate necessity for physicians across the globe to ready themselves to treat patients fallen victim to super-strong pathogens.

How do doctors guard against over-prescription of antibiotics and the weakening of the antimicrobial-agent arsenal? How do researchers attack the need for more efficient antibiotics in the face of a Bird-Flu germ forceful enough to kill millions? How do physicians cope with the destructive impact these medicines have on the human cell structure? The most up-to-date ruminations on these questions is contained in this reference, and it serves as the most complete and tightly structured summaries of antibiotic medications currently available to health care practitioners.

Recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text. Further recommended to all Infectious Disease researchers as an important component to the canons of medical literature (with specific relevance given the unique pathogens that are currently threatening the world).

Of Related Interest

MICROBIOLOGY OF FRESH PRODUCE (Emerging Issues in Food Safety). Editor: Karl R. Matthews. ASM Press.

Also from ASM Press, Microbiology of Fresh Produce continues along the same theme, focusing on how science can work to best control the growth (and spread) of the microorganisms that inhabit fresh fruits and vegetables. As this text documents, bacteria which grow on produce are responsible for myriad foodborne illnesses -- diseases with the potential to cause serious issues among the elderly, the very young, and those with impaired immune systems. Here, Matthews (Department of Food Science, Cook College, Rutgers) and his co-writers have developed a manual that peers into the core of this problem from all four corners of the topic. Readers will immediately see that this is not a one dimensional text that speaks to just one element of the question; instead, Matthews looks to trace how pathogens are born, charting a trail of transmission that extends from the farmer’s field to the consumer’s table. After reviewing the most common microorganisms found on fruits and vegetables, Matthews discusses how deeper awareness among food producers might serve to quash the onset of disease. From this point, we are given an overview of the Biology of Foodborne Pathogens (before exploring how more sanitary processing procedures might further eradicate many of the diseases which come to afflict the consumer). Finally, the reader is presented with data on how consumers themselves are the last line of defense in the equation: With better knowledge of how to handle produce before eating it, many bouts of illness can easily be avoided. In essence, Matthews’ book is about teaching physicians and researchers that control of foodborne disease (through the consumption of produce) is a problem that requires the dissemination of data. Basically, everyone who plays a role in the production of this food chain (farmer; processor; route driver; consumer) must learn how to handle fresh produce properly in its many phases in order to eliminate the microorganisms that thrive on its ‘skin.’

Recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text. Further recommended to Infectious Disease researchers because of its comprehensive examination of the ways produce can be infected with bacteria. Finally, this manual would prove valuable to public health workers charged with controlling the spread of disease through restaurants, hotels and school-based environments.

Order from booksmd.com


JOHN WILEY AND SONS


COATING AND DRYING DEFECTS: TROUBLESHOOTING OPERATING PROBLEMS. 2nd Edition. Edgar B. Gutoff. Edward D. Cohen. John Wiley.

By John Aiello

Now in its second edition, this volume continues Wiley’s journey as preeminent publisher in the realms of industrial and applied chemistry. Here, Gutoff and co-writers have developed a textbook that is completely unique to its audience, addressing common (and not so common) problems inherent with the drying and coating process. Topics of coverage include how to detect defects and eliminate them; the tools used for operation and analysis; problems associated with feed preparation (including filtration and temperature control); problems noted with roll coating; problems in slot, extrusion, slide, and curtain coating; problems inherent with static electricity; and problems that impede proper drying. The idea of this reference is to thoroughly educate manufacturers on how to identify possible trouble-spots within production so as to avoid product defect. As Gutoff and co-authors show us, this is a complicated process with many independent facets that all must come together in a delicate and precise ballet. Accordingly, if one aspect of the process goes awry, defects immediately occur and compromise production. Coating’s second edition has been thoroughly updated to address advances in technology affording scientists, engineers and controllers a more effective arsenal with which to improve operating procedures and mitigate corruption. Readers will quickly see that the text excels because it goes beyond basic trouble-shooting applications and instead looks at the methodology of the process: The goal to equip students and professionals with knowledge on how to identify and correct coating and drying defects as they work towards their ultimate prevention.

Recommended as a reference to compliment engineers and quality-control officers within the coating and drying industry. In addition, this text should be used in all advanced applied chemistry courses that teach aspects of this subject matter. Finally, this text belongs center-stage in all college-level libraries – a one-of-a-kind resource that speaks to its subject in eloquent and comprehensive terms.

MEANINGFUL SCENTS AROUND THE WORLD. Roman Kaiser. John Wiley.

The human animal is driven by scent – the animalistic psyche commanded by its interpretation of smell which enhances the quest for food, spirits sexual gratification and augments deeper sense-memory. In this text, flavor-chemist Roman Kaiser presents readers with an exhaustive resource that covers this ever-evolving topic. Meaningful Scents places the reader in the research center beside Kaiser, as he takes us on a tour of the myriad places across the world where he has studied the effect of scent on the development of culture and the individual. Accordingly, Kaiser expertly reviews the natural scents of the world and dissects their skeletons so that we might come to understand their impact on Biology. Simply, threads of fragrance and what we smell allow the animal to gauge danger and detect food, augmenting the senses of sight and hearing and enhancing our ability to taste food. Simply, man’s ability to smell allows him to savor the essence of life and investigate its holy depths. Kaiser’s intuitive understanding of this subject and his ability to take historical data and synthesize it and then apply it to the journey of man makes this textbook vital to the overall mission of the student of science. As readers will note, man’s sense of smell is a key component in his construction and in his unique physiology. Moreover, the way certain odors can be linked to certain cultures enable us to peel away the skin of our beings and engage in a study of anthropology that begins at the sinewy eye of the core. As Kaiser teaches us, there is a meaning within each distinct scent and odor; in turn, being able to investigate what each smell might mean broadens the depth of life and helps us gain a better grasp of ourselves in the process. From page one of this volume, it is apparent that Kaiser is a fine writer with a deep mind, and his ability to put us in touch with distant locations (such as Papua New Guinea and India) present the unique opportunity for us to see how scent helps to refine (and define) a given culture.

This text is recommended to all college-level libraries as a general reference text. In addition, it is recommended as a supporting class text is all science courses that explore the olfactory system.

EDITOR’S PICKS FROM JOHN WILEY

Even though the following books are not featured with full-length reviews, they have in fact been copiously examined by The Editor and they are recommended for consideration/adoption by instructors in each field – each noted for their clarity and breadth, recognized as benchmarks in their respective disciplines. ~John Aiello

DECHEMA CORROSION HANDBOOK. Corrosive Agents and Their Interaction Materials. Second Edition. Edited by Gerhard Kreysa and Michael Schûtze. John Wiley.

This is a major addition to scientific literature in the area of chemistry and chemical engineering. The Dechema Corrosion Handbook offers an authoritative compendium of data as it relates to corrosion and its myrtiad chemical processes, including analysis of metallic, non-metallic, organic and inorganic compounds. Amazing its breadth and depth, Dechema not only looks at the origin and phenonmemon of corrosive agents, it also examines ways that science might look toward prevention/protection. As a reference text, Dechema has profound value in that the data it collects will help guide researchers toward preservation of natural resources and the overall well-being of the environment.

MEMBRANE TECHNOLOGY: IN THE CHEMICAL INDUSTRY. Second Edition. Edited by Suzana Pereira Nunes and Klaus-Viktor Peinemann. John Wiley.

In keeping with the underlying mission of the Dechema Corrosion Handbook, Membrane Technology looks to further the health of the environment by showing ways science can look to preserve sources of energy while offering cleaner alternatives to myriad industrial processes. In turn, this text examines various aspects of chemical industry, exploring new technologies and production techniques. Accordingly, Membrane Technology is the only book we have seen that dissects membranes for the chemical industry, identifying how they might be integrated into various chemical processes in order to make these processes more efficient and effective. Readers will find the chapter on fuel cells especially timely and meaningful given the world-wide energy crisis we as a People are facing in the next 100 years. Recommended to both students and established researchers in the fields of chemical engineering, electrochemistry and environmental chemistry for its cutting-edge and comprehensive tone.

STRESS IN HEALTH AND DISEASE.Edited by Arvid Carlsson, Bengt B. Arnetz, and Rolf Ekman. John Wiley.

During the last two decades, the medical community has finally recognized the fact that stress has profound impact on the health of man. Previously, stress was often discounted and dismissed and not accepted as a real cause of breakdown in the health of the individual. But that line of thinking has changed. Here, the perspective of top experts in the field has been compiled, with pertinent discussion on different stressors and how they affect both cognitive and biological well-being. However, readers should note that this is not just a text that discusses its topic in secondary terms. Instead, the authors make a significant effort to provide ways the individual might mitigate stress – a tact meant to bring healthcare providers a step closer to offering practical counsel for their patients. This book is vital to physicians in the clinical setting and also to biological and psychiatric researchers looking to unlock the deep secrets of the human mind in order to understand its impact on the organ systems of the body.

UNDERSTANDING CARCINOGENESIS: AN INTRODUCTION TO THE MOLECULAR BASIS OF CANCER. Hippokratis Kiaris. John Wiley.

Cancer remains medicine’s greatest challenge, as researchers struggle to unravel the mystery of the cancerous cell so that doctors might reverse its effects before destruction of the human body occurs. In this selection, Kiaris attempts to forge a complete understanding of the molecular basis of cancer, attempting to present researchers and healthcare providers with a road map on how a cancer is born within the body and how it slowly takes hold of a blood source to gain strength and thrive. After introductory remarks detailing basic principles on the clonality of tumors and the hypermutability of the cancer cells, the author moves into a more detailed discussion of the genetic construction of a carcinogen, including comprehensive investigation of tumor biology. Understanding Carcinogenesis is an important moment in medical publishing, for this book is driven by a mission to dissect the moment of birth as it relates to a cancerous cell: The idea here is promote a complete understanding of the layered life of a tumor so that a reliable process to halt the spread of a cancer can be developed.Understanding Carcinogenesis is an indispensable resource for all healthcare professionals involved in cancer research. Further recommended as a teaching text in advanced oncology courses that touch upon the birth the cancerous cell.

HANDBOOK OF MENINGOCOCCAL DISEASE: INFECTION BIOLOGY, VACCINATION, CLINICAL MANAGEMENT. Edited by Matthias Frosch and Martin C. J. Maiden. John Wiley.

This book, edited by leading researchers Matthias Frosch and Martin Maiden, analyzes Meningococcal disease in comprehensive terms, presenting the latest data (as it relates to the onset/development of Meningococcal infection, management of symptoms by the physician, and the reliability of vaccination for this potentially fatal disease). Handbook of Meningococcal collects a vast amount of material. Highlights include chapters on new cutting-edge strategies in vaccine development; the genetics and epidemiology of Meningococcal disease; and aspects of immunobiology now vital to furthering research in the field. Given the threat that fledgling pathogens like SARS and Avian Flu present, the healthcare community’s ability to control Meningococcal disease and thwart mutations/variations of this phenomenon will be a key to preserving life should a widespread outbreak of ancillary infection occur. Accordingly, this handbook offers a starting point - a collection of the most expert analysis of the subject written in an impactive and concise style that facilitates deeper study. Appropriate not only for researchers and practicing infectious disease specialists/epidemiologists, but also for public health researchers and for graduate-level students who are preparing to enter this arm of healthcare-defense.

FUNDAMENTALS OF ECOGENETICS. Editors: Lucio G. Costa. David L. Eaton. Wiley-Liss.

This major new release from JohnWiley looks to tie together the threads that link the genetic make-up of the individual with his environment in hopes of better understanding how our surroundings might cause or instigate disease.

There has always been an ecogenetic focus within the scientific community as researchers have long sought to understand how passive elements within the environment (asbestos for example) can alter the molecular structure of a cell and then promote disease (as in lung cancer). However, in this text, Costa and Eaton have taken an incisive and comprehensive approach, building from basic concepts into the multi-layers of advanced study.

Fundamentals Of Ecogenetics is divided into four primary sections of focus. Section one is introductory in nature, with emphasis on fundamental genetics as related to environment. From here, the editors move into investigation of genetic polymorphisms and how these changes within the cell structure (based on genetics) come to shape the body’s response to external stimuli (including organic matter and chemical compounds). In the third section, the authors direct their attention to how any predisposed interaction (based on genetics) between an individual and environment can accurately forecast a person’s susceptibility to disease. Finally, in section four, the myriad social, legal and ethical questions that surface once the researcher begins such an analysis are examined in deep detail.

The importance of this text and its erudite discussions of genetic patterns cannot be understated, as its authors attempt to break down different codes of human genetics and then dissect their findings in relation to various environmental factors (in turn establishing a correlation between external factors and the body’s vulnerability to disease). The idea here is for the researcher to look deeper than the fact that certain chemicals are carcinogenic. Instead, the point of this research is to understand exactly what genetic traits might cause a specific reaction to environmental stimuli.

It is likely that once researchers grasp this knowledge they will then understand why some people become diabetic while others are crippled with degenerative arthritis while still others are struck with Alzheimer’s and Parkinson’s. Simply, it is only after scientists see where these diseases originate can preventive measures be developed.

This text would be a vital in-office reference for any scientific researcher dedicated to the study of genetics. Further recommended as a teaching text in molecular biology courses and or genetic studies courses which look into the impact of environment on the individual. In addition, this text could prove invaluable to Public Health researchers who are looking at how global threats like Avian Flu might spread to the general populous. Finally, serves as an indispensable reference to all Health Science libraries.

ROUNDTABLE DISCUSSIONS

John Wiley At The Reference Table

By John Aiello

As we have written many times, Wiley’s catalog shines among the stars of the academic publishing world. In light of this, the following books (rich and vital and varied) must be mentioned on our pages, since they serve to set the bar in their respective disciplines:

MATHEMATICAL TOOLS FOR PHYSICISTS. George L. Trigg, Editor. Wiley-VCH.

This selection collects 18 "review articles" by the leading voices in the field on advanced mathematical resources for the Physicist. Mathematical Tools is noteworthy because of the way it has been written and edited. Specifically, the authors have gone to great pains to insure that their analysis moves with seamless clarity. Science writers (and especially math writers) must take great care to make their work accessible to the student in a classroom environment. And this is no easy chore when one is dealing with complex ‘cross-over subjects’ which require authors to presume a certain level of expertise on the part of the reader. Trigg and co-writers are skilled instructors who do an artful job in establishing a continuity as one topic switches to the next. Discussion includes Algebraic Methods; Analytic Methods; Fourier and Other Mathematical Transforms; Fractal Geometry; Geometrical Methods; Mathematical Modeling; Monte-Carlo Methods; and Symmetries and Conservation Laws.

ENCYCLOPEDIA OF BIOTERRORISM DEFENSE. Editors: Richard Pilch. Raymond Zilinskas. Wiley-Liss.

Given the torn state of so many continents (in addition to the fact the that United States is at war with an enemy that boasts to possessing lethal biochemical agents), this encyclopedia has now become an absolute adoption requirement for academic libraries throughout the world. Readers will note that the volume collects data on myriad aspects of bioterrorism (as it analyzes various bioterrorism agents; tactics of biodefense and the characteristics of biotechnology; ways both government and individual can prepare for attack; likely threats facing the world; threat analysis; and discussion of previous biological warfare events). In the post 9-11 universe, the threat that terrorists will engage chemical agents that can kill large numbers of people from a distant stage is a very real possibility. The Anthrax attacks that rocked our consciousness in the days after the World Trade Center attack serve to prove just how susceptible Americans are to biological weaponry. Accordingly, this volume is an absolute necessity for all branch offices of Government (such as Public Health Departments and law enforcement). Finally, health care workers should also familiarize themselves with this material (since they embody our first line of defense against the effects of these deadly poisons).

SIGNALLING NETWORKS IN CELL SHAPE AND MOTILITY (CIBA FOUNDATION SYMPOSIA SERIES). Chair: Gary Borisy. John Wiley.

This selection stitches together the ruminations of leading scientists on matters of cell biology, genetics, neurobiology, immunology and structural biology, as they discuss the ways that cells morph and move. Specifically, the authors delve deeply into myriad topics, with the core data being exploration of the organized principles that incite cellular changes (the authors joining together to assess whether or not cells contain internal ‘switches’ which govern their movement and processes). The importance of this title from a medical standpoint is that it gives researchers another ‘bullet in their gun’ in the fight against diseases like cancer and diabetes. It is an unfortunate fact that true management of these afflictions will not take place until the health care community unlocks the hidden secrets of the cell (their mission demands that they dissect what exact phenomena are taking place within a cell’s perimeters that alter its shape and cause irreparable disease). Vital for all oncology researchers and endocrinologists, in addition to cell biologists and instructors within these fields.

AAA AND NETWORK SECURITY FOR MOBILE ACCESS: RADIUS, DIAMETER, EAP, PKI AND IP MOBILITY. Madjid Nakhjiri. Mahsa Nakhjiri. Wiley.

In our technology-driven society, the cell phone has become a necessary appendage for every pair of hands; over the course of the last decade, it has literally altered the shape of the world. Accordingly, the scientific community has been called upon to refine and streamline these systems of communication (‘AAA’ representing "authentication, authorization and accounting" as these concepts relate to mobile network systems). Here, the Nakhjiris offer a cogent reportage of the standards in place that insure secure network access for mobile users. In the course of their treatise, the authors further explore basic design concepts in use by the Mobile Networking industry. We have noted this selection because the authors are able to draw a box around the perimeters of their subject and then attack it issue by issue in order to allow readers to develop a foundational point of understanding. The importance of network security in an ‘age of terrorism’ has caused much scrutiny to be placed on management of this industry. In light of this, AAA And Network Security serves to provide planners and researchers in both academic and professional capacities a way in which to completely access pertinent data in a logical and clearly defined manner.

Also Of Note From John Wiley This Quarter

INTRODUCTION TO MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATIONS : APPLICATIONS, MIDDLEWARE, NETWORKING. Kamisetty Rao. Zoran Bojkovic. Dragorad Milovanovic. Wiley-Interscience.

In today’s competitive world of the internet, a business’ ability to integrate different media is often the difference between success and bankruptcy. And in the world of science, the development of wide-reaching multimedia systems often allow for researchers to interpret data at the most in depth of levels.

Here, the authors of this new text from Wiley have created a fundamental guide book that introduces the concepts of multimedia communications to the advanced student of science, engineering and information technology. To this end, the complexities and intricacies of this premise are set forth with spectacular clarity as the authors examine the various independent systems that must be linked together in order to create a multifaceted communications network.

Accordingly, Rao and co-writers dissect layer-by-layer just how the skills of the programmer must marry with different components of technology (graphic design, audio, video, text presentation) in a seamless union. After presenting a generalized introduction, the authors concentrate on analyzing the technologies that are vital to the creation of myriad communications systems. The underlying idea of this text is to demonstrate that a convergence must take place between technology and the capabilities of the user before man can move toward maximum application of his information systems.

The authors write in copious detail, and expand nicely on each division of the multimedia puzzle, with information on the elements of standardization frameworks (ITU-T, MEDIACOM 2004, and ISO/IEC MPEG-21 frameworks); the processes of application (including ITU, ISO MPEG, ETSI, DVB, ATSC, and IETF multimedia applications); the segments of the middleware strata (including media coding, conversion and media-streaming middleware); and an overview of the network strata (with discussion of quality controls and system management).

At its best moments, Intro To Multimedia serves as a crossover title with deep value to a wide demographic of readers, including graduate-level students in computer science and electrical engineering (in addition to research scientists who are charged with the development and maintenance of ever-evolving multimedia communications networks). As a compendium of the latest research in the field, this book will prove indispensable to both the student and the practicing scientist.

Recommended as a primary course text in graduate-level computer science courses which focus on how to develop and maintain multimedia systems -- an integration of various technologies that flow together in a ubiquitous medium of exchange and communication.

BIPOLAR PSYCHOPHARMACOTHERAPY : CARING FOR THE PATIENT. Hagop S. Akiskal. Maurcio Tohen. John Wiley and Sons.

Bipolar Disorder is of growing concern in the medical community as physicians struggle to recognize its symptoms and then effectively treat the condition before secondary health problems develop to cause the patient increased suffering.

As the authors note in their book, Bipolar Disorder is an affliction that requires life-long management on the part of patient if they are to control the symptoms and lead productive lives. In conjunction with therapy and a greater awareness of the self, a carefully defined drug-therapy regimen must be developed so as to adequately manage this problem.

Accordingly, Bipolar Psychopharmacotherapy (from Wiley) examines the major drug therapies available to physicians in relation to treating the myriad phases of Bipolar Disorder -- the authors careful to note that each differing stage of the condition requires a change in focus on the part of the physician. In short, the text reviews the most common medicines presently in use and further evaluates the existing research that’s been done to date on Bipolar Disorder, presenting the reader with a complete overview of this troubling malady.

The most valuable thing about this text for the practicing physician is the way that Bipolar Psychopharmacotherapy records the pharmacological advances that have taken place in this field of study. Now, no longer are doctors hamstrung by having only a few drugs to chose from (in the past Lithium and Chlorpromazine were the drugs of choice for various conditions caused by mania). However, today, clinicians have a wide array of drugs to choose from which allow for a course of therapy to be designed for the individual, emphasizing ways to best treat problematic symptoms while mitigating side effects.

In addition to the cutting edge discussion of the various drug therapies available to the Bipolar patient, Akiskal and Tohen also assert that combination courses of treatment (whichinclude psychotherapy and patient education) must be utilized in order to maintain long-term control over this disorder. Other notable features include data on "special management issues" (such as caring for elderly and child patients who present with Bipolar Disorder), thus rendering this a multifaceted text with broad clinical value.

Recommended as an in-office reference for the practicing physician who treats the Bipolar patient. Further recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

EVOLUTION OF STARS AND STELLAR POPULATIONS. Maurizio Salaris. Santi Cassisi. John Wiley and Sons.

This brand new book by Wiley will serve generations of students to come as an authoritative reference which details how stars and stellar populations come to develop (and then evolve) over long blocks of time. In creating this book, Salaris and Cassisi have not taken the typical ‘old-hat’ approach, instead looking to build a deeply invigorating text that incorporates theory with a summary of the primary study techniques currently in use by researchers (who follow the growth and evolution of galaxies). Although focused on astronomical topics, the underlying premise of this book speaks to the universe at large, allowing scientists in varied realms a sharply built road map in which to investigate how myriad forces and forms materialize. The authors begin their treatise with in depth discussion of the "theory of stellar evolution" (paying specific attention to stellar properties we can directly observe). From here, the reader is escorted through the role the scientist is meant to play in tracking the perpetual motion of galaxies and star clusters. As Salaris and Cassisi expand on their topic, they deftly analyze various research applications (such as stellar population synthesis), in turn allowing for a multidimensional understanding of the universe and our place within its limitless labyrinth.

Recommended as a primary teaching text in advanced Astronomy or Astrophysics courses dedicated to the investigation of how stellar properties evolve over time. Further suggested as a general reference text in all college-level libraries.

~John Aiello


THE TAYLOR AND FRANCIS MODEL


The new quarter has spawned the release of several more outstanding texts from Taylor and Francis/CRC in the realm of medical science publishing. To this end, we spotlight the following:

NUTRITIONAL STRATEGIES FOR THE DIABETIC/PREDIABETIC PATIENT (Nutrition and Disease Prevention).Edited by Jeffrey I. Mechanick; Elise M. Brett. CRC Press.

By John Aiello

During the last 25 years, the incidence of diabetes has sky-rocketed, due in part to a more sedentary lifestyle and our obscene dependence on fast and processed foods. Thus, the medical community has been charged with trying to cope with an ever-worsening problem that is often a precursor to breakdown in other organ systems.

In Nutritional Strategies, editors Mechanick and Brett examine the problem by looking at how both the diabetic and prediabetic individual might increase favorable prognosis and quality of life through proper diet.

In terms of this disease, there is not one ‘tried-and-true’ diet for the diabetic patient to follow. As the editors note, a dietician’s plan often must accommodate for the particular type of diabetes being treated; the patient’s food preferences; the course of treatment being implemented; and the over-all health condition of the patient. Given each of these extreme factors which intersect the diagnosis of diabetes, it has become quite the challenge for any doctor to be able to make useful dietary recommendations.

In this volume, Mechanick and Brett cover in comprehensive terms the impact of food on human health – their goal to counsel the practicing physician (and the dietician) on relevant considerations for constructing a nutritional regime aimed at the diabetic and prediabetic patient:

With diabetes, a diverse array of hormonal, metabolic and molecular alterations instigates and perpetuates a pathophysiological state that can markedly compromise a patient’s quality of life. In this chapter, a clinical and biochemical framework will be outlined that reveals potential sites for nutritional intervention.” (At page 16)

This series of essays by world-renowned researchers provides discussion on issues pertinent to a diagnosis of diabetes. After examination of the pathophysiology and clinical management of diabetes, the authors move into analysis of ways doctors might best use diet to either prevent the onset of the disease or to lessen its severity.

From here, readers will be presented with data on the impact of nutrition on Type-1 Diabetes Mellitus; the effect of carbohydrate-consumption on diabetes patients; insulin therapy; nutrition and hyperglycemia; and a wonderfully insightful chapter on nutrition and wound healing in the diabetic patient. In addition, there is also a cogent chapter on effective treatment of the pregnant diabetic patient. The editors have also provided well-defined graphics and charts which serve to augment the text and retest key-points.

In sum, Nutritional Strategies offers authoritative analysis on how nutritional regimes can be used by health care providers in conjunction with medicine-based therapies as a viable means to control diabetes. Aside from the sharp editing and clearly-defined points of concentration, the text is further noted for its presentation of the most up-to-date thinking on the subject - an invaluable reference-resource for multiple segments of the world’s healthcare community.

Recommended to all internists and to all primary care physicians as an in-office resource. Also recommended to nurse practitionersand dieticians who take an active role in treatment of diabetic patients. Finally, recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

Order from booksmd.com

Of Further Interest

FOOD, DIET AND OBSESITY. Edited by David J. Mela. CRC Press.

In terms of risk factors for diabetes, none is greater than obesity, which puts undue stress on multiple organ systems while altering the normal metabolic processes of the body. In this text, Mela looks to draw a definable link between diet and an increase in body weight. Mela chooses an interesting route to develop his treatise, first examining the global trends of obesity in order to create a foundation from which he is able to analyze just what risk factors might predispose the individual to obesity. In addition, subjects such as the impact of fats, proteins and carbohydrates on weight are dissected in comprehensive tones as medicine looks to increase the general health of the populous through a layered understanding of how to implement diet plans – the idea is to use nutrition as the first line of defense in controlling obesity (thus mitigating the onset of related problems like heart disease, stroke and diabetes). ~John Aiello

Recommended to all instructors who teach courses that examine 1) the role of diet in patient health; and 2) the role obesity plays in the breakdown of human health. Would further prove useful to dieticians charged with the creation of eating plans for patients with myriad health issues. Finally, recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

Order from booksmd.com

Related Titles

HANDBOOK OF PEDIATRIC OBESITY. Clinical Management. Edited by Melinda S. Sothern; Stewart T. Gordon; T. Kristian von Almen. CRC Press.

This handbook focuses its attention on the most disturbing component of the obesity issue – the overweight child. Insofar as obesity is concerned, children in alarming numbers are gaining too much weight, stuffing themselves with an array of junk foods while concurrently shunning exercise for extra hours in front of the computer screen. This text examines the subject of pediatric obesity in complete terms (medical, psychological, nutritional) in order to show the healthcare provider that child-patients are much different than adults and must be treated with a tempered hand. Basically, children who are battling weight issues are likely going through a series of psychological dilemmas in addition to numerous hormonal and social challenges. Accordingly, physicians need to approach treatment plans for children by specifically merging aspects of diet, counseling, pharmacology and exercise regimens; the goal is to teach children to become conscious of the things they are eating and the affects food has on ambition, health, energy-levels and appearance. To reiterate, this is quite a sensitive and complicated area which requires a careful approach by the healthcare community. Handbook of Pediatric Obesity is a clearly written textbook which presents a wealth of clinical data on all aspects of childhood obesity, with well-shaped chapters on the psychosocial and behavioral factors of obesity serving to demonstrate that each child-patient requires an individualized care-plan and extra patience. ~John Aiello

Recommended to all clinicians who treat the pediatric patient and counsel parents on how to care for an obese child. Also recommended to Health Science libraries as a well-rounded reference that covers both medical and psychological elements of obesity.

Order from booksmd.com

Of Related Interest

THE HANDBOOK OF PEDIATRIC OBESITY. Etiology. Pathophysiology. Prevention. Edited by Michael I. Goran; Melinda S. Sothern. CRC Press.

This volume is a natural companion to Handbook of Pediatric Obesity and serves as a specific counterpart to the title reviewed above, this one premised on 1) the reasons why children become overweight; and 2) the impact the extra weight has on the body. In addition, salient information is presented on how healthcare providers working together with parents and caregivers can help prevent the onset of obesity and its related organ breakdown through proper nutrition and regular physical activity. There are many highpoints in this handbook, however, the data on the relationship between exercise and body weight (and obesity-related diseases) is particularly well-done, marking the corollary between weight-gain and ill-health in certain terms. This title should be used as a counterpart to the Handbook of Pediatric Obesity (which focuses less on theory and more on clinical management of the patient). ~John Aiello

Recommended to all clinicians who treat the pediatric patient and counsel parents on how to care for an obese child. Also recommended to Health Science libraries as a well-rounded reference that covers both medical and psychological elements of obesity.

Order from booksmd.com

Of Further Interest

NUTRITION AND CANCER PREVENTION. Edited by Atif B. Awad; Peter G. Bradford. CRC Press.

Recent research shows that there is indeed a direct correlation between what we eat and certain forms of cancer (namely colon, breast and prostate cancers). Here, editors Awad and Bradford (State University of New York) stitch together the contributions of leading experts in the field who examine the role of nutrition in helping to forestall the onset of cancer. The authors here dissect the material in classic fashion, always looking for the elements of scientific evidence that elevate their premises and hypotheses. This treatise centers itself around the fact that certain classes of micronutrients appear to be able to strengthen the cell structure, allowing the body to then “resist” the birth of a cancer (these micronutrients include vitamins; minerals; phytosterols; polyphenols; isothiocyanates; and specialized dietary lipids). Furthermore, the authors are careful to note just what food sources hold these beneficial nutrients, in addition to documenting each micronutrient’s role in limiting inflammation and impeding tumor growth. The concluding chapters in the manual look at what risk factors increase the likelihood of cancer (risk-factors like obesity and alcoholism which seem to sharply weaken the body’s natural ability to keep cells in check, in turn leaving organs susceptible to tumor growth). ~John Aiello

Recommended to all oncologists and researchers who are seeking to explore the link between cancer and nutrition. Noted for the depth of information presented which serves to document the correlation between certain classes of micronutrients and the body’s ability to fight the onset of cancer. Also recommended to Health Science libraries for its rich and long-term reference value.

Order from booksmd.com

Of Related Interest

CANCER PREVENTION AND MANAGEMENT THROUGH EXERCISE AND WEIGTH CONTROL. Edited by Anne McTiernan. CRC Press.

According to estimates by the American Cancer Society, one third of all cancer deaths can be prevented by keeping body weight within acceptable guidelines and by exercising multiple times each week. As the Awad /Bradford text (reviewed above) notes, there is a corollary between nutrition and a decrease in tumor growth. Accordingly, these discoveries have forged a new set of roads: Now, people don’t have to just wait for cancer to strike and then hope it can be treated. Instead, individuals can work directly to prevent the onset of disease by 1) avoiding obesity; and 2) by implementing a regular exercise regimen. This volume in one of the only of its kind dedicated to helping healthcare providers establish a concrete plan allowing patients to control weight gain through exercise in order to forestall cancer. Expert researchers do an outstanding job delineating this material within a logical framework, looking at ways that physical activity impacts the incidence of cancer in the breast, prostate and colorectal regions (before moving on to examine obesity’s effect on a cancer prognosis in light of regular physical activity). The idea behind this text is for the cancer patient (or those predisposed to cancer) to seek out an “energy balance” through a combination of diet and exercise – a plan of attack which will strengthen the mechanisms of the body in natural and wholesome ways. The research presented in McTiernan’s text is truly ground-breaking, as it promotes a step away from drug-based therapies in favor of a more holistic approach to mitigating cancer risks. Bluntly, it’s a message those practicing medicine in the Western world should pay close and careful attention to. ~John Aiello

Recommended to all primary care physicians (in addition to dieticians and nurse practitioners) who serve as a patient’s first-line of defense against disease. In addition, this volume is highly recommended to all Health Science libraries because of its well-detailed and erudite examination of the influence physical activity has on the processes of cancer.

Order from booksmd.com

OBESITY AND MENTAL DISORDERS. Susan L. McElroy. David B. Allison. George A. Bray. Taylor and Francis/Informa.

By John Aiello

This volume very much warrants serious review by the medical community as a whole, and not just by physicians dedicated to psychiatric care. In 21st century society, there is a literal epidemic of obesity, as individuals sometimes carrying as much as double their required body weight suffer from myriad secondary disorders, including heart disease; crippling arthritis; and diabetes.

Further, there has been on-going investigation among scientific researchers as whether a true correlation exists between obesity and mental illness. And the authors write: “Many emerging lines of evidence suggest that reexamination of the relationship between obesity and mental disorders are in order, particularly for mental health professionals. In this regard, the significant overlap between obesity and psychopathology in clinical populations may be the most important…”

In this volume, McElroy and her co-writers carefully deconstruct their subject in careful terms, attempting to draw tangible links between the life-altering afflictions of obesity and mental illness.

After reviewing the history of obesity, the authors look to the connection between being over-weight and the onset of psychotic disorders. Accordingly, there are insightful and thought-inducing chapters on topics like mood disorders and obesity; the increase of cardiovascular risk factors concurrent with schizophrenia; obesity and impulsive/compulsive mood disorders; and a crisp breakdown of the relationship between body fat and various diseases (hypertension; diabetes; dyslipidemia). Moreover, relevant discussion as to treatment options for obesity with and without psychopathology has been included.

In addition to the in depth data presented here, this book is absolutely vital to the mindset of the medical professional, since this material seeks to draw tangible links between obesity and various mental breakdowns. And going further, the authors also examine ways that doctors and other healthcare professionals can begin treating individuals who present with obesity-related illness.

The most important bit of data for the doctor to take from this book is to understand that an overweight person might be fighting more than physical illness; in addition, they may be suffering from some form of mental disorder, too. Thus, when dealing with an obese patient, a course of therapy should be developed that accounts for concomitant attention to both the mind and the body.

This text should be a required reading for all student-doctors looking to gain certification in internal medicine, for there is an important lesson to be learned here: That physical illness is often the byproduct of myriad issues that require the patient’s mental state to be taken into full consideration. All doctors would be well- served to learn this early in their careers and then incorporate the perspective into rituals of daily patient care.

Order from booksmd.com

OF RELATED INTEREST

HYPNOSIS AND TREATING DEPRESSION. Michael D. Yapko, Editor. Routledge.

By John Aiello

Hypnosis has long been thought of as a taboo in traditional medical circles – a last-gasp backroom treatment option that only the most radical physicians would consider. However, the times have indeed changed, and hypnosis is now seen as quite a viable treatment plan to be used in conjunction with counseling and pharmacological therapies.

In this very profound text, Yapko (director of The Milton H. Erickson Institute of San Diego) gathers contributions from the leading thinkers in the field who write compelling essays on ways that therapists might be able to integrate hypnosis into care-plans for those suffering from myriad forms of on-going depression.

What is best about this text and Yapok’s perspective is that he is seeking to draw scientists out of their insulated cocoons and formulaic worlds, asking that they move within themselves and become creative - the idea is to use a broad sampling of different treatment options to help heal the wounds that bruise and cripple the human psyche.

This perspective is absolutely vital to students who are approaching the end of their programs and about to be licensed to practice psychiatric medicine. It seems obvious that future success in this field will require practitioners to abandon preconceptions about cutting-edge therapies like hypnosis, looking to consider such treatment options on an individual basis. To this end, Yapko and contributors make a compelling case for hypnotically-based treatment plans to become a common alternative for patients in the dark throes of depression.

Recommended a supporting text in courses that focus on treating depression. Further recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

Order from booksmd.com

SCIENTIFIC EVIDENCE FOR MUSCULOSKELETAL, BARIATRIC, AND SPORTS NUTRITION. Ingrid Kohlstadt. CRC/Taylor and Francis/Informa.

By John Aiello

New perspectives on nutrition are becoming the cornerstone of the medical frontier, as physicians and laboratory researchers look to connect the things that people eat with the overall health of the body.

In this text, Kohlstadt has created a reference that sets out to outline how medicine might integrate nutrition into its standard practice in order to treat the systems of the body. The basic premise of this book is formulated by showing medical specialists that the things their patients are consuming as fuel must work to serve the long-term health of the body.

Scientific Evidence is comprehensive in tone and covers many topics of relevance. Chapters on key nutrients include data on fats, carbohydrates, proteins and antioxidants, in addition to a wonderful section on water and its role in the balance of the musculoskeletal system.

The information on Bariatric Surgery is especially illuminating, as the author shows her readers that surgical intervention to reduce obesity is more effective and better tolerated when used in combination with a nutritionally balanced diet. This is an extremely important piece of data in that it is meant to show surgeons and internists who are performing Bariatric surgeries that they need to stress to their patients that this isn’t a perfect fix, but instead, a treatment option requiring patients to eat well in order to increase the potential rewards of the procedure.

The author has also included information on conditions such as fibromyalgia and osteoarthritis and ways that nutrition can facilitate effective management of these problematic diseases that cause untold hours of suffering for millions across the face of the world.

Readers will immediately note that Dr. Kohlstadt (Johns Hopkins University) is an outstanding scientific writer, her prose and perspective clear-minded, her ideas deep and well-developed, as she seeks to reduce these sometimes complicated chains of data into digestible chapters with universal meaning to the medical community at large.

This text is recommended to all instructors in courses which focus on marrying aspects of nutrition with healthcare. The text is also of practical value to primary care physicians and internists (in addition to Gastroenterologists) who will be able to apply Kohlstadt’s perspective to day-to-day patient care.

Order from booksmd.com

ENCYCLOPEDIA OF PHARMACEUTICAL TECHNOLOGY. Third Edition; in 6 Volumes. James Swarbrick. Informa Healthcare.

By John Aiello

Insofar as encyclopedic references on the subject of Pharmacology, this title by James Swarbrick (PharmaceuTech, Pinehurst, North Carolina) sets the standard in the field and creates the ultimate go-to-guide on all aspects of this ever-evolving area of concentration.

As inferred by its title, this selection speaks to the whole of pharmaceutical studies in deep detail, covering the subject with an erudite eye – an eye that only someone with Swarbrick’s layered expertise could bring to readers.

Here, we are presented with an encyclopedic reference that covers the ‘life’ of a typical pharmaceutical product from the birth-stage through development and marketing (and into the patient’s hands). In his treatise, Swarbrick provides the latest research and perspective on a field that seems to be in a constant state of flux (with new drugs and revised FDA guidelines continually challenging the healthcare community to stay current with pharmaceutical issues that directly impact patient care).

This particular edition offers myriad upgrades from its two predecessors, providing readers with a ‘one-stop’ resource that marries the technical aspects of drug manufacturing and research with the practical side of dosage questions and drug commercialization. Moreover, the information is delivered in clear and incisive prose, with many electronic-based features (such as customized RRS feeds) available to those readers who wish to bring this printed data to the convenience of their PCs.

As far as pharmacy-based reference books, we have not seen any title come close to James Swarbrick’s set of encyclopedias – these books that not only serve as a professional point of reference (for the practicing pharmacist and scientific researcher) but also could work as ‘on-reserve’ supplements to course-texts for students in advanced programs.

Simply, this book is like having a pharmaceutical library at your fingertips, notable for providing answers to the latest questions in a fascinating field of study that impacts each of our lives on a daily basis.

Recommended to Health Science libraries as a general reference text: this title is a must-have for every medical school library because of its breadth of intelligence and comprehensive tone. Additionally, it would prove useful to all researchers involved with drug development and product validation.

Readers – and especially reference librarians – will note that the 6 volume set is presently being offered at a 15% pre-publication discount (with commercial release set for October 2006).

Order from booksmd.com

PROCESS VALIDATION IN [THE] MANUFACTURING OF BIOPHARMACEUTICALS. Edited by Anurag Singh Rathore and Gail Sofer. CRC/Taylor and Francis.

Process Validation is an extremely timely release that should quickly become a primary reference tool in the pharmaceutical industry. Recent events calling into question the safety of certain medications has sparked renewed interest in the way companies proceed with drug manufacturing. In this selection, the editors have created an in depth study of the world-wide process of pharmaceutical production. In light of the fact that such a wide array of medications have recently fallen under close scrutiny (by the FDA, media and the medical community) as potential threats to patient safety, it is now clear that a second look must be taken at the way the world produces its medicines. Here, Rathore (a scientist based in California) and Sofer (Director of Regulatory Compliance at GE Healthcare in New Jersey) have complied the definitive reference that presents up-to-date information and analysis on varying aspects of this complicated process. Topics of coverage include an outline of the guidelines for process validation as related to biopharmaceutical production, new models for purification processes (with discussion on ways to approach and then apply these theories), life span studies for chromatography and filtration, analytical test methods for biological and biotechnological products (a hugely important component of the process), regulatory perspectives regarding facility design, and validation of computerized systems (which in effect help to control everything that is happening in production). In addition, the text is augmented by several successful validation case studies that will help to guide the researcher through problems he is likely to encounter in the midst of production and/or analysis. In short, Process Validation provides expert counsel on risk management as related to biopharmaceutical manufacturing: the lesson here is that better management of the process as a whole insures a greater degree of consumer safety while maintaining higher general regulatory standards within the industry.

Order from booksmd.com

COMPLICATIONS IN PEDIATRIC OTLARYNGOLOGY. Edited by Gary D. Josephson. Daniel L. Wohl. Taylor and Francis.

The possibility of a child choking is one of the most troubling threats to new-borns and infants, presenting both parents and health care providers with unique challenges. In addition, otolaryngology often has been an overlooked component of pediatric medicine -- something head and neck surgeons are aware of but don’t really focus their actual practices on. In this text, Josephson (Chief of Pediatric Otolaryngology at Nemours Children’s Clinic in Florida) and Wohl (Professor of Otolaryngology and Pediatrics at Medical College of Virginia) have constructed one of the first texts of its kind to delve into this subject matter. Complications In Pediatric Otolaryngology offers comprehensive study into the problems that sometimes arise with the child-patient. The reader will be treated to discussion of myriad situations, including complications that surface during head/neck surgery of the pediatric patient, emergency airway management and related critical care issues, pediatric otolaryngology imaging, hearing loss, coagulopathy, allergy and immunology, care of the child-cancer patient, pediatric sinonasal surgery, aerodigestive endoscopy, wound healing and ear surgery (to cite highlights). Aside from this being a one-of-a-kind reference stop focused on disease-management of the pre-teen patient, it also offers keen insight into how the physician can best treat children and thus increase the likelihood of more complete recovery. The underlying theme behind this text is to stress to the physician that children differ greatly from adults in their medical needs; in short, the medical community as a whole has a particular responsibility to provide the best for these patients who many times are unable to serve as their own advocates.

Order from booksmd.com

DR. AGARWALS’ STEP BY STEP CORNEAL TOPOGRAPHY. Editors: Sunita Agarwal. Athiya Agarwal. Amar Agarwal. Taylor and Francis.

In this text, Ophthalmologists will discover a handbook dedicated to the science of corneal topography. The Agarwals, who are pioneers in the field of eye care in Chennai, India, have written a text that is easy to use and quick to digest -- a guidebook meant to be used by the practicing eye surgeon in the course of preparing for surgery or as a refresher course allowing for the examination of inventive perspectives on ways to better improve patient recovery after surgery. Corneal Topography (the science of surveying the surface of the cornea in preparation for invasive surgical measures) is vital to all eye-care professionals as they strive to adequately treat patients and reduce post-operative complications. As its title implies, this text provides a literal "step-by-step" road-map through this very scientific art, addressing much of the current cutting-edge thinking in eye-care along the way. Topics of discussion include chapters on Corneal Topography in Cataract Surgery, Orbscan, Irregular Astigmatism and Topography-assisted LASIK. Affordably priced at thirty dollars, the current edition comes with a companion CD-ROM.

All Optometrists and Ophthalmologists will find this selection useful in their day-to-day practice.

Order from booksmd.com

HANDBOOK OF SEXUAL DYSFUNCTION. Edited by Richard Balon. R.Taylor Segraves. Taylor and Francis.

In terms of conditions which cause patients the most psychological trauma and consternation, issues of cancer and sexual dysfunction top the list -- they’re the afflictions that make us stutter and cringe and bite down on every word. This new text, edited by Richard Balon (Wayne State University) and R. Taylor Segraves (Case Western Reserve University) offers a thorough examination of the primary causes of sexual dysfunction, as well as ways the medical professional should go about treating the patient. What sets this text apart from others in its class is its depth and completeness, as the editors have taken great pains to dissect the subject and provide thorough analysis that is meant to make initial diagnosis and options of treatment more clearly identifiable by the physician. After introducing the common treatments currently in use for sexual disorders, the authors look at a wide array of subjects that form the foundation of this handbook. Specific problems analyzed include Female Hypoactive Sexual Desire Disorder, Male Hypoactive Sexual Desire Disorder, Sexual Aversion Disorder, Female Sexual Arousal Disorder and Erectile Dysfunction (included in the discussion is the practice of integrating sex therapy with pharmacotherapy as a viable means to confront sexual dysfunction). Aside from the learned reportage the text provides, we are also impressed with its format, as treatment is examined from both the psychotherapy and pharmacotherapy perspectives.

Recommended to urologists, internists and psychologists as an in-office reference tool useful to day-to-day practice.

Order from booksmd.com

CANCER RISK ASSESSMENT. Edited by Peter G. Shields. Taylor and Francis.

Dr. Shields, who holds multiple positions at the Georgetown Medical Center in Washington D.C. (including Program Director for Cancer Genetics and Epidemiology), has compiled a text with the dedicated purpose of assessing the risk for cancer in both individuals and groups. However, this is much easier said then done. In reality,it takes a relativeamount of practical expertise on the part of the researcher/pathologist/internist/oncologist in order to determine who is more likely to emerge with cancer. In order to accomplish this goal, physicians must analyze etiologic agents in relation to the environment while noting the rate of human exposure before they can draw a plausible conclusion. Still, before this process can ever begin, the physician has to first understand just how cancer develops and the reasons why certain agents attack cells and instigate tumor growth. Cancer Risk Assessment gives health care providers a true starting point, as it confronts its subject in absolute terms. Shields and co-authors present the most current information available on the carcinogens that pose the greatest threat to the populace, further examining how these agents alter the structure of a cell and cause cancer. In addition, the authors are careful to discuss the criteria agencies use to determine which agents will be termed "human carcinogens," thus necessitating strict regulation. Further, Shields also explores hereditary factors and the genetic influence responsible for cancer clusters in families and in specific ethnic groups. In the end, the goal of this text is singular: It’s mission to allow internists and oncology researchers the opportunity to predict which individuals are at the highest risk for malignancy and then take appropriate steps toward care/treatment.

Recommended to oncologists or internists who see a large number of cancer patients. It is also recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text. Finally, would prove to be a useful teaching text in courses that look to address the causes of cancer and ways the medical community can work toward prevention.

Order from booksmd.com

Other Noted Medical Science Titles From Taylor And Francis

PHARMACOINVASIVE THERAPY IN ACUTE MYOCARDIAL INFARCTION. Harold L. Dauerman. Burton E. Sobel. Taylor and Francis.

This new text by Taylor and Francis is revolutionary in that it speaks to new research in the realm of cardiac care -- an approach in which clinicians and surgeons use Pharmacoinvasive therapy (a combination course of treatment that couples percutaneous revascularization and pharmacologically based reperfusion strategies) to restore blood flow during acute ST elevation myocardial infarction.

Here, Dauerman (University of Vermont) and Sobel (University of Vermont) outline the procedure in its entirety, employing a classic academic style that uses graphs and illustrations to present statistical data which is then analyzed in layered detail. The text offers a summary of the latest research available on the subject through 2004, looking at current trends and perspectives related to Pharmacoinvasive therapy and the history of pharmacological reperfusion therapy dating back to 1958. This historical over-view proves important, because it allows the modern researcher or clinician to look at cardiac care through the last half century (in conjunction with the latest clinical trial data) to assess treatment options for the patient.

Notwithstanding the fact that it provides the most recent information on the subject, the authors also speak to the controversial aspects inherent in this developing area of cardiology. The idea here is to promote further clinical studies in order to delve deeper into the question of when a physician should implement Pharmacoinvasive therapy.

This text is highly technical and presupposes a high level of competency in the field. Thus it is not recommended for the student, per se, and instead is written for the cardiologist, thrombocardiologist or cardiovascular/thoracic specialist. Also recommended as a daily reference for the Emergency Room physician. Finally, will prove useful to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text - the authors presenting their readers with an in depth study of a treatment option that could increase the survival rate for coronary patients.

Order from booksmd.com

CLINICAL, INTERVENTIONAL AND INVESTIGATIONAL THROMBOCARDIOLOGY. Edited by Richard C. Becker and Robert A. Harrington. Taylor and Francis.

This fine new study by Becker (Duke University) and Harrington (Duke University) examines the study of the human heart in full detail and from multiple perspectives. Here, the authors have compiled the latest data in a text that explores the latest thinking and advancements in the field of cardiovascular disease. These discussions include analysis of coagulation factors and clot formations, an overview of genetic determinants relating to thrombosis, atherosclerosis and its risk factors, the pharmacodynamics of antithrombotic agents (including warfarin and heparin), precutaneous intervention therapies in myocardial infarction, and cost-effective drug selection in cardiovascular treatment (to name but a few of the most outstanding segments). Clinical Interventional is authoritative in both scope and vision, and presents the practicing physician with a one-stop reference in which the latest clinical, scientific and research data is contained (including treatment options related to drug therapy and assist-device alternatives).

Recommended to all cardiologists and internists as an in-office reference. Also should be included in all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

Order from booksmd.com

FRACTURES OF THE FOOT AND ANKLE. Diagnosis and Treatment of Injury and Disease. Edited by Jason H. Calhoun and Richard T. Laughlin. Taylor and Francis.

Fractures Of The Foot is one of the only studies of its kind to dedicate itself to a complete dissection of injury and disease as it relates to the foot/ankle region of the human anatomy. Well defined and impeccably researched, this text compiles the most recent scientific research and thinking on the foot. Calhoun (University of Missouri) and Laughlin (Wright State University) present the most common disorders that afflict the foot area, including in depth discussion of how physicians should confront treatment of patients who present with fractures and crush-type injuries. In addition, there is analysis of diagnosis and treatment of pediatric injury, soft tissue management and tendon rupture. Further, discussion of burns, amputation and chronic infection is included, along with strong direction on post-operative care and courses of rehabilitation therapy after surgery. One of the best attributes of this manual is in the editing: well-ordered chapters use illustrations and slides to create a text that will prove instantaneously useful to the practicing physician/surgeon in the course of patient treatment.

Recommended to all internists and orthopedic surgeons, as well as radiologists. Also recommended as a general reference text for all Health Science libraries.

Order from booksmd.com

SUNSCREENS. Regulations and Commercial Development. Third Edition. Nadim A. Shaath, Editor. Taylor and Francis.

Sunscreens, now revised in the third edition, is an important reference in support of dermatological healthcare in the 21st century. Skin cancer -- and specifically, skin disease caused by sun damage -- is a growing concern in the medical community which has sparked renewed attention among researchers. This selection by Nadim Shaath (President of Alpha Research in New York) features analysis of the most recent data available on sunscreen development. Many different groups play a role in the production of these wonder potions which are powerful enough to disarm the rays of the sun. New sunscreens are the product of many different perspectives that grow from private industry, regulatory agencies, medical doctors and academic researchers. Here, Shaath’s treatise chronicles the process, including discussion on regulations governing sunscreen production in the United States, Japan, Europe and Australia. This volume features information on the most recent advancements in the field, with valuable insight into the cosmetic aspects of sunscreen, waterproofing, daily use considerations, and occupational hazard protection.

A one-of-its-kind reference that is appropriate for use as an in-office reference by chemists and researchers in the field. Also recommended as a general reference text for Health Science libraries and other libraries that specialize in Pharmaceutical research and development.

Order from booksmd.com

TREATMENT OF PEDIATRIC NEUROLOGIC DISORDERS. Harvey S. Singer. Eric H. Kossoff. Adam L. Hartman. Thomas O. Crawford. Taylor and Francis.

This text is dedicated to the diagnosis and treatment of neurologic affliction of the child-patient. In depth in focus and acutely detailed, Treatment of Pediatric covers myriad neurologic disorders, including Crainiosynostosis, Cerebral Palsy, Hydrocephalus, febrile Seizures, multiple forms of Epilepsy, Tourette Syndrome, Muscular Dystrophies, Meningitis, Shaken Baby Syndrome, Lesch-Nyhan Disease, Syncope, learning disabilities, pediatric sleep disorders, ADHD, as well as invaluable discussion on anxiety disorders in the young patient. Chapters are well-designed and logically presented, with each affliction defined according to etiology and symptomology, before moving into diagnosis, evaluation, treatment, and management. We have recommended this book because of its vast and comprehensive tone: there is simply information here on every major pediatric disorder, with up-to-date recommendations regarding treatment and therapy.

Appropriate for all pediatric neurologists, as well as internists and primary care physicians who see a large number of child-patients. Also recommended as a teaching text in courses dedicated to the study of neurologic data as it relates to the pre-teen patient. Finally, should be included in all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

Order from booksmd.com


SOME OF THE BEST IN NEW MEDICAL TEXTS


BREAST IMAGING: THE REQUISITES. Second Edition. Debra Ikeda. Mosby/Elsevier.

New text by Debra Ikeda (Associate Professor Of Radiology at Stanford University) clearly outlines the basics on how to conduct and interpret diagnostic breast images. Ikeda’s study is truly in depth, as it covers the whole topic through illustration and careful discussion. The text includes coverage of the technology used to record images of the breast and investigation of the latest equipment used by radiologists, plus comprehensive dissertation on how to distinguish between various breast abnormalities (cancer masses, calcifications, etc.). Medical professionals will also be presented information on how to approach cancer (from diagnosis of tumor through the treatment phase). Although the natural audience for this text is Radiology Residents (and practicing Radiologists), it extends well beyond these boundaries: internists, all women’s health practitioners and primary care physicians will be well-served by Ikeda’s research, since the threat of breast cancer is one of the primary reasons many women under age fifty seek health counsel. As Breast Imaging reminds us -- the key to treatment of breast tumors is in early detection and in the ability of the radiologist to recognize potential problems. To this end, Ikeda offers vital direction.

Recommended as a teaching text in radiology programs; in addition highly recommended to Health Science libraries as a reference.

Order from booksmd.com; or go to http://www.us.elsevierhealth.com

CARDIAC PACEMAKERS STEP BY STEP. S. Serge Barold. Roland X. Stroobandt. Alfons F. Sinnaeve. Blackwell Futura.

The hard-core traditional medical community may resent this text -- because of its simplified design (and these oh-so-creative graphics!) that strive to teach the basics of cardiac pacing to those new to the field. However, the charm of this text is in its readability and in the smooth and quick-moving approach it employs. Why does medicine need be dull and stale and stagnate? The authors here say it doesn’t - and they’ve come up with a fresh perspective. Wonderful full-color diagrams and illustrations take the reader ‘step-by-step’ through the foundations of heart pacing, teaching the subject from its basic beginnings - the idea here is to take a doctor with foundational knowledge of electrocardiography and expand on that knowledge so the non-cardiologist can competently care for patients with pacemakers. Well-designed, well-written, with astute use of diagrams to illustrate all written analysis, Cardiac covers many topics (including the function of DDD pacemakers and the diagnosis of tachycardias).

Recommended as a teaching text for advanced medical students who are proceeding to a clerkship in cardiology. Also recommended to Health Science libraries as general reference text.

Order from booksmd.com; or go to www.blackwellpublishing.com

APPLIED BIOPHARMACEUTICS AND PHARMACOKINETICS. Leon Shargel. Susanna Wu-Pong. Andrew B.C. Yu. McGraw-Hill.

Hallmark text now its 5th edition teaches the student of pharmacology about the way drugs impact the body through absorption, distribution and elimination, thus allowing proper dosing regimens to be developed. As we all should know, the ability of doctors to prescribe a wide array of drugs to the sick has revolutionized the practice of medicine during the last century. Still, most people don’t appreciate just what these advancements in treatment have entailed: without in depth research on just how much medicine a typical patient can tolerate, over-dose would occur (along with grave complications). Simply, it is not enough to have the drugs available to prescribe. Instead, the magic is in knowing how to utilize them. And it is only through repeated analysis/testing that this information can be obtained. Applied is a foundational text on the subject, covering all aspects of biopharmaceutics and pharmacokinetics, outlining the methodology used to test the full effects of different chemical compounds on the human body (so that drug therapies can be employed safely and with maximum efficiency). This edition contains vital information on the physiologic factors as they relate to drug absorption. Moreover, it features "Learning Questions" at the end of the chapters to give students the immediate opportunity to test their retention of the subject matter.

Recommended as a teaching text in the Pharmaceutical Sciences. Further recommended to all Health Sciences Libraries as a general reference text.

Order from booksmd.com

ATLAS OF AESTHETIC FACE AND NECK SURGERY. Gregory LaTrenta. M.D. W.B. Saunders.

This atlas provides a detailed over view of how surgeons should approach procedures of the head and neck. During a time when elective plastic surgeries are becoming more and more common place, this manual illuminates how the physician can best approach these sometimes difficult cases. Moreover, Face and Neck strives to look beyond the instant of knife cutting skin; instead, it expertly guides the surgeon on ways to approach and manage the complicated proposal of invading the delicate tissues that comprise the human face, neck and eye.

What’s best about this atlas is the way LaTrenta presents his material: well-organized chapters come complete with concluding summaries that offer the physician clearly delineated reference points. Information is further augmented by full-color illustrations that demonstrate how procedures are performed (rather than merely "lecturing" on paper). This aspect of Face and Neck is quite important because it fosters an immediate interaction between writer and reader - an in depth "hands on" demonstration of the various approaches to facial and head surgeries.

This book is written (and recommended) for the practicing plastic surgeon and for other experts dealing with treatment of the head and face. It would also prove useful to Health Science libraries as a general reference text. However, because the book is so specific, it is not recommended as a general classroom text: these outlines presuppose the reader has some mastery of a subject matter which goes beyond the skill level of the medical student.

Order from booksmd.com; or go to http://www.us.elsevierhealth.com

MEDICINE. John Axford. Chris O’Callaghan. Blackwell Publishing.

Medicine marks a truly new and original concept in the world of Medical publishing: This is a book that has been partially formulated by medical students and junior doctors in collaboration with two distinguished physicians from the UK. The idea here is to offer students the information they need in a format that is conducive to the way in which they learn.

The result is a marvelous and in depth study of medicine. By melding science with clinical application, Axford and O’Callaghan begin to gradually introduce the student to the things they will encounter as doctors. Obviously, it’s not enough for a doctor to merely understand a concept, but instead, he must be able to take this understanding (of medicine) and apply it to the unique complexities of the human body:

"If you finish medical school without understanding the basics of medicine, then you will be in trouble. However, learning small print detail about a range of topics will seldom be of much use in your qualifying examinations or in clinical practise[...]The body of medical knowledge increases every day, but the capacity of the human brain does not. Therefore, we believe that it is essential to present medicine in a way that is comprehensive, but also concise and free of irrelevant details...."

(From the Introduction)

And this is exactly what the authors have produced: a text that is remarkably easy to use, promoting the ability of the student to retain what he is learning (rather than just remembering random facts in order to pass a certification exam). Axford and O’Callaghan have done a magnificent job in covering a broad range of material, writing in clear and vibrant prose - outlining data so as to facilitate deep understanding.

Topics covered include all the major organ systems, with consideration given to the basic structures and functions of each. From this point, the fledgling doctor is advised on how to address patient needs, with the importance of thorough clinical examination stressed (while the art of diagnosis and disease management are also made familiar to the student). Further, the"At a Glance" boxes allow students to immediately test their knowledge of a subject area - a feature that provides concrete direction on how they should be interpreting the course material.

As a textbook, Medicine is written for the way that the typical student approaches the classroom. Because of this, it is recommended as a teaching text/resource guide for the advanced medical student, resident and fellow. Also would be useful to the practicing physician as an in-office research tool to augment patient care.

Order from booksmd.com; or go to blackwellpublishing.com

A PRACTICAL APPROACH TO CARDIAC ANESTHESIA. Frederick A. Hensley. Donald E. Martin. Glenn P. Gravlee. Lippincott, Williams and Wilkins.

This manual is meant for the practicing anesthesiologist, nurse anesthetist, cardiologist and cardiac surgeon, surveying practical methods of anesthesia as they relate to the cardiac patient. Well-written and expertly detailed, the third edition of Practical Cardiac provides medical scientists with a first-rate reference guide that has been designed to be used - in the office and in the operating room. Simply, this text is about bringing information to the doctor so that he can apply it to the patient in the direct course of treatment.

There are many outstanding features which separate Practical Cardiac from other similar handbooks, but it’s best feature is in its outline format, a feature that allows the reader to answer questions quickly and logically and thoroughly - an in depth analysis of a complex subject matter in a simple to use package.

In the world of medicine, the idea of anesthesia isn’t very glamorous -- not when it’s compared to the work of cardiac surgeons whose very hands nurse the diseased heart back to health. However, the way that a patient is anesthetized is paramount to whether they will survive surgery. Accordingly, Practical Cardiac investigates these concepts in deep detail, examining how the anesthesiologist should approach the management of different kinds cardiac patients, exploring treatment options from converse angles. Readers will be enriched on many different levels, by information on pain management and by the very useful data that’s provided on new drugs now being used on cardiac-compromised individuals. Analysis of cardiac transplantation, circulatory support and organ preservation is also offered, with smart use of diagrams and graphs to support the authors’ point of view.

We would recommend this manual to all physicians involved in surgically treating cardiac patients. Moreover, it is a logical choice as a teaching text in the field, for it affords anesthesiology students a comprehensive and easy to use tool that brings the most up-to-date information to the classroom (and to the operating room). Would be further recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

Order from booksmd.com; or go to Lippincott, Williams and Wilkins.

FIRST EXPOSURE: EMERGENCY MEDICINE CLERKSHIP. Lance H. Hoffman. Richard A. Walker. Michael C. Wadman. Christopher C. Caudill II. Kristine L. Bott. McGraw-Hill.

Just released, this handy manual has been written for advanced medical students and junior residents - a tool to prepare these fledgling doctors to competently address a rotation through the Emergency Department. Co-written by five esteemed Emergency physicians, First Exposure is meant to be a companion for the student/young doctor during their month-long tour of the ER. Rather than focus on scientific exploration into disease and acute care, this book focuses on clinical concepts - the idea here is to teach medical students how to evaluate symptoms and gauge how sick the person on the table is; only after this is done can they then begin to address treatment options. Obviously, because of the fast pace of emergency-room medicine, doctors must be able to quickly evaluate patients through careful examination of body and symptom pattern and then make decisions on a proper course of therapy:

"Emergency medicine differs from many other specialties in the degree of emphasis placed on patient disposition. The majority of the evaluation centers around determining whether the patient should be admitted to the hospital or discharged safely with outpatient follow-up. Often, the goal for the emergency room physician is not to arrive at a specific diagnosis but instead to determine the likelihood of serious illness...At the very least, the practitioner should have a good sense for whether or not the patient will need to be admitted after the initial history and physical examination, prior to performing any further studies."

-Page 5

First Exposure is a well-organized and reader friendly - a definitive textbook on emergency room medicine. Divided into four chapters (Introductory Information, Procedures, Chief Complaints and Selected Topics), it takes the student step-by-step through a stint in the ER: covering everything from the concept of emergency medicine to outlines of basic diagnostic strategies, it’s all about helping young doctors to identify dangerous symptoms and move toward proper and expedited treatment. Each chapter here is well diagrammed and the information is presented in clear and cogent form -- the student will be able to logically follow these instructions and then apply them to the treating room.

In the end, First Exposure is not so much a study guide to be read in a library as it is a pocket companion meant to be carried and referred to daily as the ER doctor moves from one patient to the next. Priced at less then $35, this is an absolute prerequisite for any medical student (not only those contemplating careers as emergency specialists), for it covers emergency diagnosis from a clinical perspective as well as any text we’ve seen this year.

Also recommended to Health Science Libraries as a general reference text.

Order from booksmd.com

HANDBOOK OF THE VULNERABLE PLAQUE. Ron Waksman and Patrick W. Serruys. Taylor and Francis.

This ground-breaking handbook addresses the new research that has been done in the field of cardiology regarding "vulnerable plaque." For generations, doctors had believed that heart attack and stroke were by-products of plaque build-up along an artery wall snaking its way through the heart or brain. It was believed that over time this fatty build-up would clog arteries and obstruct blood flow, ultimately starving the body for oxygenated blood, thus causing either a brain or heart attack. However, new research has shown that this phenomenon is responsible for only 30% of all heart attacks. Now, researchers think "vulnerable plaque" is just as much a threat to heart health. Vulnerable Plaque is a type of build-up caused by several reactions within the body of a cell (reactions that cause inflammation, fat absorption and clotting). Over time and when combined with other factors such as hypertension, the outer "shell" of this distinct type of plaque can rupture and spill into the blood stream, causing a clot to form and shut down an artery; the probable result is heart attack and tissue death.

Handbook offers a definitive study of this phenomenon, offering the cardiologist insight into how to evaluate heart-sick patients and determine if vulnerable plaque is indeed at the core of their disease. Waksman and Serruys have written a book that is not so much a student text but instead a manual designed for the practicing physician to use in the course of evaluating and treating patients who present with such complicating factors. Accordingly, the authors have provided a "road-map" of sorts, first defining vulnerable plaque and its construction/origins, and then moving into how it is detected and what types of patients are likely to present with this type of condition. The goal of the writers (and they have attained it beautifully) is to illuminate a relatively new concept in the world of cardiology and then take the physician through identification and treatment options.

Recommended for all cardiologists and internists who treat patients with heart disease (and those who are at high risk for heart disease). Also recommended to Health Science libraries as a reference text in cardiology. As previously noted, this material is written more for the practicing physician than the medical student.

Order from booksmd.com

CANCER (Principles and Practice of Oncology). In Two Volumes. Vincent T. De Vita, Jr. Samuel Hellman. Steven A. Rosenberg. Lippincott, Williams and Wilkins.

This volume is known throughout the world as the definitive resource on the treatment of cancer. In its current sixth edition, it marks the finest reference text on oncology currently available to both physicians and classroom instructors. This textbook is comprehensive in scope and covers all points of the disease, addressing the affliction of cancer from a deeply detailed molecular perspective; from this point, the authors are able to show how advances in the investigation of molecular biology and cancer can assist the clinician in diagnosis and treatment approaches.

There are many note worthy things about this volume, but what really sets it apart from other books in the field is the way De Vita, Hellman and Rosenberg are careful to address cutting edge topics like cancer vaccines and prevention - the idea here is to note that the physician’s role is not only to treat the sick but to also take definite steps to avoid the incidence of disease altogether. The inclusion of these topics cannot be under-stated, as most textbooks of this kind tend to omit such information. In addition, Cancer includes analysis of cancer management, molecular pathology, cancer and genetics, drug therapy and symptom relief. Well- written and meticulously edited, this book is simply the authority on the topic of oncology.

Recommended to all cancer specialists. Also for internists who treat patients at high risk for the development of cancer. Further recommended for all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

Order from booksmd.com;or go to Lippincott, Williams and Wilkins.

MOLECULAR EPIDEMIOLOGY OF INFECTIOUS DISEASES. Lee W. Riley. ASM Press.

A unique and revolutionary textbook, Molecular Epidemiology presents information on ways molecular biology can be used to confront the incidence and the spread of infectious disease.

The way that bacteria multiply and the ease with which infectious disease spreads has always been difficult for the health care researcher to understand. And with the new century comes a new set of challenges: SARS, HIV, the global threat of biological weapons as war tools. As the Anthrax scare in the autumn of 2001 proves, the country as a whole is susceptible to mass infection (and the death and destruction that such infection brings). Accordingly, this text has been written to show scientists how they might better approach unlocking the mysteries of how infectious organisms take over the community of a cell and then spread.

In short, Molecular Epidemiology sews together the basic concepts of epidemiology with the vocabulary of molecular biology, in turn melding these two specialties so that clinicians can more efficiently investigate disease. From this unique perspective, scientists with varied and distinct backgrounds have now been presented with a reference point from which they can begin their work. Stylistically, the book is written in a standard scientific format. First, various techniques of molecular biology are explored in detail. Once this foundation has been laid, the idea of disease is addressed, with an eye toward identifying and distinguishing the different ways that infectious organisms spread.

Recommended as a teaching text in the both the fields of molecular biology and epidemiology for its logic and clear organization. Would further be of value to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text. Would not be appropriate for the internist or primary care physician with an office practice, as this text looks at the spread of disease from a researcher’s point of view and is meant for the study of the subject matter from that perspective.

Order from booksmd.com


PUBLISHER SPOTLIGHT


JONES AND BARTLETT NURSING & MEDICAL

Winter2006 Spotlight

By John Aiello

NURSE AS EDUCATOR. Second Edition. Susan B. Bastable. Jones and Bartlett.

Now in its second edition, this text marks a radical change in the medical profession’s traditional view of nurses. In the past, nurses we were seen only as support for the physician -- individuals whose mission was to deliver medication and monitor patients until the doctor returned.

However, that perception of the nurse is actually many decades old; now, nurses perform myriad duties in multiple settings, serving as key components in the American health care system charged with maintaining patient comfort and safety. Here, Bastable (State University of New York) presents to us a textbook with the primary focus of outlining the breadth of the nurse’s present role -- a role that includes not only patient care, but also patient education.

In this ever-changing landscape of the world, the responsibility of maintaining individual health has shifted from the medical professional back to the patient. Consequently, nurses are now on the frontlines and are expected to help guide patients through the intricate process of learning about their health. Now, the nurse is not only a giver of care, but also a teacher who must be able to show patients how to investigate their bodies.

In Nurse As Educator, Bastable has constructed a manual that looks to show both students and practicing nurses how to impart information and educate patients -- further demonstrating that in order to educate, one must first understand how people learn (speaking to the individual’s specific traits and predilections). Topics covered here are vast, beginning with an overview of the meaning behind nurse as educator, before moving into a complete examination of the methods used to assess to the learner’s needs and learning styles; analysis of the developmental stages of learning; and direction on how to compensate for differing levels of literacy among the patient population. In addition, Bastable takes a significant journey into technology’s role in patient education and the ways that the internet can be used to broaden the general populous’ understanding of the human body.

At its finest moments, Nurse As Educator not only covers a remarkable number of subjects, it carefully stresses the fact that nurses are central to the health care system itself. In the modern day structure, nurses serve not only as conduits responsible for guiding patients to information about maintaining their health, they are also the teachers who must insure that we are capable of comprehending the data in front of us.

Recommended as a primary teaching text in courses that focus on the practice of nursing as it pertains to teaching patients techniques of self-care.

Of Related Interest

CRITICAL THINKING TACTICS FOR NURSES. M. Gaie Rubenfeld. Barbara K. Scheffer. Jones and Bartlett.

This new volume from Jones and Bartlett is a key companion to Bastable’s text stressing the foundational aspects of the learning experience as it relates to the student nurse. In light of the pace of 21st-Century hospital care, it is imperative for nurses to be able to use critical thinking skills in order to properly assess patient needs and then provide care in varied environments. Basically, nurses must be able to note subtle changes in patients and then understand what these changes mean; in effect, the nurse is the doctor’s eyes and ears when the doctor is not present. Accordingly, Critical Thinking stresses ways that nurses should go about training their minds in order to think critically and beyond the perimeters of the obvious, teaching traits that ultimately serve as the cornerstone of the profession.

Recommended to instructors of advanced courses teaching nurses how to think through complex situations.

A PALLIATIVE ETHIC OF CARE. Clinical Wisdom At Life’s End. Joseph J. Fins. Jones and Bartlett.

In light of the Terri Schiavo case that captivated and divided the nation for months, this textbook cannot be ignored; bluntly, it should be required reading in every single nursing program throughout the United States. Palliative Ethic examines the role the health care provider should play in tending to the dying patient, in turn opening up detailed introspection on how to best make the terminally ill comfortable as they confront the ultimate test of moving from the living state into death. Even more than doctors, nurses bear the primary responsibility for comforting both the gravely ill patient and their family as this difficult process naturally moves forward. In his work, Fins (Cornell University) does an exemplary job of looking at both the myriad ethical and clinical questions that doctor, nurse and patient will come upon together. In essence, the idea here is to be able to provide humane care for the patient, addressing both physical and psychological pain in direct and compassionate terms.

Recommended as a primary text in courses that address care for the terminally ill. Further recommended to Health Science libraries as a general reference text exploring medical, sociological and philosophical issues of patient care.

PANCREATIC CANCER. Daniel D. Von Hoff. Douglas B. Evans Ralph H. Hruban. Jones and Bartlett.

Pancreatic cancer is one of the most pernicious and swiftestmoving of all cancers that afflict the human body (and currently ranked asthe 4th leading cause of cancer-death in America). In addition to these startling numbers, researchers presume that in the next decade the incidence of pancreatic cancer will continue to increase more rapidly than other forms of malignancy, in turn causing greater patient mortality.

In this volume, the unique perspectives of three different kinds of specialist (oncologist, cancer surgeon, pathologist) have been stitched together to build a one-of-a-kind text that serves as the comprehensive authority on cancers of the pancreatic system.

Accordingly, the unique wedding of these specialists allows the reader to peer into the labyrinth of this disease from every conceivable angle. For example, by studying the pathology of these cancers, a physician might better understand how the disease attacks the chain of organ systems and invades the cell structure. At this point, both surgical and medical-management options can be evaluated and the best course of treatment for an individual patient ascertained.

As this text carefully point outs, pancreatic cancer is a very real threat to the populous, and it will take a huge toll on America in terms of human life over the next several decades. Yet, from a practical standpoint, research into invasion of the pancreas by a neoplasm has paled in comparison to the energy and dollars we’ve invested into the exploration of prostate and breast cancers.

However, this volume by Von Hoff and his co-writers seeks to reverse this trend -- its primary mission to develop a keener interest in this specific area of the body so that deeper scientific research can take place into ways to better treat patients stricken with the disease (thus naturally enriching life in terms of quality and duration).

As previously noted, the authors cover every aspect of the disease, from genetic predisposition to symptom analysis to a comprehensive summary of treatment options, presenting internist and oncologist alike with a step-by-step manual that promotes thoughtful patient care.

Simply, if we are to effectively combat this disease, the medical community as a whole must flow together to investigate the ways that cancer over-takes the pancreatic system. The goal is for science to ultimately move toward prevention. And this text provides a natural starting point.

Recommended to all oncologists and internists as an in-office reference text that comprises an authoritative reference on a growing health concern. Further recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

BREAST CANCER ANSWERS. Understanding and Fighting Breast Cancer. Bruce A. Feinberg. Jones and Bartlett.

Jones and Bartlett’s "100 Questions Answered Series" (which we’ve touched upon on these pages before) is the ultimate patient resource addressing complex health topics in a way that the lay reader can readily understand.

Breast Cancer Answers by Dr. Feinberg (Georgia Cancer Specialists) continues this specialized editorial focus, offering a well-developed analysis of breast cancer that has been written from the point-of-view of the patient who is swimming in fear and questions, looking for straight-forward and unadorned answers.

Any diagnosis of cancer comes with a lifetime of baggage -- patients just diagnosed must feel as if they’ve received a death sentence from the judge with no hope of reprieve. Unfortunately, physicians don’t have enough time to hand-hold and provide deep comfort. Like it or not, the patient is many times left to help themselves and find their own way.

But where do you go?

If you’re a woman and you’ve just received the horrible news that there’s a tumor in your breast, this book is an affordable resource that touches on every layer of the disease (priced at only $19.95 it’s the equivalent of a library on the subject).

In addition to discussion of the clinical aspects of the disease (symptoms, treatment options, long-term management), Breast Cancer Answers also tells the story of a breast cancer patient and her husband. The personalized tone of this segment is meant to tell the reader that they indeed are not alone: the lesson here is that many others have been in your place and triumphed over their burden.

Breast Cancer Answers marks a wonderful consumer resource and should be recommended by oncologists to their patients upon diagnosis. Nurse Practitioners assisting in treatment should also make recommendations to patients about this book. Finally, pharmacies that feature counter-top book racks of useful consumer titles should include this title in their inventory: it offers straight-forward discussion of a common problem and it will naturally provide comfort to the reader/patient.

Of Related Interest

100 QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS ABOUT BREAST SURGERY. Joseph J. Disa. Marie Czenko Kuechel. Jones and Bartlett.

Any woman going through breast surgery (either for therapeutic or cosmetic reasons) will benefit from reading this title (which is part of the acclaimed Jones and Bartlett consumer series). About Breast Surgery discusses the topic of surgical invasion of the breast in broad detail (including types of surgery, precautionary measures for the patient to consider, how to locate a competent surgeon and psychological issues of which to be aware). The fact that American women are under such societal pressures to look a certain way means that the psychological ramifications that accompany breast surgery must not be ignored. Readers will find this discussion invaluable to their complete comprehension of the subject as the authors strive to help you understand - and accept - any procedure you might undertake.

Recommended to all pharmacies that feature health-related book racks: this title stands out for its well-developed focus and its dedication to educating the consumer/patient.

THE NURSE PRACTITIONER’S BUSINESS PRACTICE AND LEGAL GUIDE. Second Edition. Carolyn Buppert. Jones and Bartlett.

This text revised in its second edition is one of the most unique medical reference books we have seen this year. However, it’s probably not that unusual that it showed up under the J&B umbrella, since Jones and Bartlett (along with Thomson) is the most editorially creative of all the academic giants, with every aspect of their list quality-driven and chock full of interesting texts that simply aren’t found elsewhere.

And Ms. Buppert’s book is no exception.

Here, Buppert (St. John’s College) has come up with a legal guide/outline of general business practices dedicated exclusively to the work of nurse practitioners. As Buppert’s study infers, many nurse practitioners enter the field without the necessary business savvy to forestall problems that fall out of the immediate purview of scientific study:

"Risk management is what one does to avoid problems later. Compare risk management to preventive medicine; risk management is preventive law. Nurse Practitioners (NPs) are at risk for two categories of professional mishap: clinical mishap and business mishap [and] There can be great overlap between clinical and business problems; that is, a clinical problem can turn into a business problem and then into a legal problem..."

(At page -- 249)

This book is comprised of information that NPs need to keep in their minds at all times. Buppert is obviously a veteran writer and knows the fields of medicine and law equally well (she is a lawyer and also Director of Student Health Services at St. John’s). Consequently, Buppert is able to lend her personal experience to the subject matter, intensifying it with sharp and incisive insight that lets her readers know that this is indeed serious business that requires all NPs to remain vigilant in the daily activities of their practice in order to avoid ending up in court.

Many in depth chapters command immediate attention on the part of the reader, but the sections on Negligence/Malpractice and Risk Management seem especially relevant, as this material is directly related to helping the medical professional dodge legal proceedings. In addition, Buppert has provided a state-by-state breakdown of law as it relates to the scope of authority of the professional NP (including the rules that govern professional practice). Also included are tidy case examples that offer cogent comment on how to avoid malpractice suits -- advice that shouldn’t be discounted given Buppert’s background as a seasoned attorney.

It’s unfortunate to say, but today’s society is driven by the concept of "get even" lawsuits, and the medical professional is the veritablesitting duck. However, Buppert’s text provides a well-written road map which gives the NP serious counsel on the marriage of law and medicine. If you’re a NP, reading this text might actually save you a day in court.

Recommended to all practicing NPs for the reasons previously outlined in this review. Would further serve as a useful teaching text in all nursing programs dedicated to the study of the business practices of the NP. Finally, it is recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

VARNEY’S MIDWIFERY. Fourth Edition. Helen Varney Burst. Jones and Bartlett.

Varney’s marks the authority in the field of midwifery, and the 4th edition is notable for over 400 pages of new material that has been added in order to keep the practicing midwife current with changing demands in the field. Varney-Burst (Yale University) is the resident expert on midwifery, and this text is indeed a formidable effort. Here, the reader is greeted with a full and in depth analysis of the course of care for women from pre-puberty to old age -- a definitive resource that has not been approached by any other author in the discipline. The author begins with a nice series of chapters detailing the history of the profession before moving through the basics of primary care as it relates to the female patient (with specific analysis of different organ systems, preconception care, care for the newborn, pharmacology, in addition to a wonderful segment on nutrition for women). The nutrition data is especially pertinent, as many women today are battling weight concerns and eating inappropriately because of work and family obligations.

Recommended as a fundamental teaching text in nursing programs that feature midwifery courses or specialty nursing concentrations. Recommended as an in-office reference for Nurse Practitioners and/or Internists who have significant female patient rosters. Absolutely imperative to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text representing the most up-to-date discussion of the study of midwifery.

CANCER SYMPTOM MANAGEMENT. Third Edition. Connie Henke Yarbro. Margaret Hansen Frogge. Michelle Goodman. Jones and Bartlett.

This selection focuses on the professional oncology nurse and ways these care-givers can mitigate the suffering of the cancer patient. There are many titles out there that intersect this subject matter, but what sets Yarbro (University of Missouri- Columbia) and her co-writers’ effort apart is in its organization and formatting. The reader will be especially impressed with the clear and logical way the chapters are delineated, with nurses counseled on symptom management/ assessment, matters of pathophysiology, patient self care and various treatment therapies. For example, there are specific chapters dedicated to Arthralgias/Myalgias, Dyspnea, fatigue, pain, and sleep disturbances. The material on patient self-care is particularly important: people are often stunned by a diagnosis of cancer and that shock often manifests itself in an unwillingness to want to care for themselves. This text does not ignore this pattern, but instead, strives to motivate nurses to teach these patients techniques of self-sufficiency. In addition to assisting with issues of daily life, this allows the cancer-sick patient to redevelop vital self-esteem.

Recommended to nursing instructors who teach courses on care for the oncology patient. Recommended to any nurse who is assigned to an oncology ward. Finally, recommended to Health Science libraries as a general reference text for the nursing shelf - everything about this book speaks to editorial quality and readability.

Of Related Interest

ONCOLOGY NURSING DRUG HANDBOOK. Gail M. Wilkes. Margaret Barton-Burke. Jones and Bartlett.

This selection serves as a vital companion to the Yarbo text (reviewed above), outlining in complete terms the steps nurses should take to administer medication to the cancer-sick patient. Believe me -- everything is here, including discussion of nursing diagnoses, patient assessment, symptom evaluation, mechanism of action, dosing/metabolism, administration, as well as signs of toxicity (and side effects). Noted for its in-depth coverage on medicating the oncology patient, as well as for its inclusion of new and cutting-edge drugs (such as Abarelix).

Recommended to nurses in oncology wards as an on-the-job reference tool. Recommended to Emergency Room staffs as a reference guide for administering medication to the patient who presents because of cancer. Finally, recommended to nursing instructors who are teaching courses focused on the specialized treatment of the oncology patient (appropriate here as a supporting reference text).

MEDICAL AND PSYCHOLOGICAL ASPECTS OF CHRONIC ILLNESS AND DISABILITY. Third Edition. Donna Falvo. Jones and Bartlett.

Too many times, doctors and care-givers, over-stressed and under-staffed, fail to truly realize the psychological obstacles a person in the throes of chronic illness is trying to overcome. In this regard, Falvo’s text is ground-breaking: In addition to detailing the medical aspects of illness/disability, Falvo is careful to cover the mental impact of disease on the individual -- reminding the reader that the mind and body do, indeed, go together.

In chapter four, the author writes on vision impairments, noting:

"Vision loss often precipitates a sense of fear and reduced personal competence, which may result in isolation and social withdrawal....Adjustment to loss of vision depends on many factors, including the degree of loss and the age at which the individual becomes visually impaired. Those who are not congenitally blind, for example, have not had the opportunity to learn concepts such as distance, depth, proportion, and color....."

(At page -- 138)

The lesson here is to encourage the care-giver to understand that, beyond the physical manifestations of illness, there is a second wall to penetrate -- the wall of the mind. A person who has fallen sick is often bitter, angry and, many times, resistant to treatment. Therefore, it is the obligation of the health care provider to take steps to approach a treatment plan only after this factor has been duly considered.

Recommended to nurses in all sub-specialties as an on-the-job reference tool. Further recommended to physical therapists who are seeing patients after major traumatic illness/injury (such as stroke). Recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text. Finally, might make an interesting crossover text for Sociology instructors exploring the impact of illness on the individual.

ARRHYTHMIA RECOGNITION. The Art of Interpretation. Tomas B. Garcia. Geoffrey T. Miller. Jones and Bartlett.

One of the most vital aspects to competent emergency medical care is for the health care provider to be able to recognize a heart arrhythmia and then provide quick and effective treatment. But that’s all much easier said then done -- for this skill is one of the most difficult to master.

Arrhythmia by Garcia and Miller explores the subject in its entirety, offering clear and well-focused discussion on how the physician or cardiac-care nurse should approach the study of the heart’s rhythm and ways to detect life-threatening abnormalities.

The authors begin by introducing the material through an over-view of anatomy and physiology, then move quickly into analysis of the heart’s electrical system, including rhythm strips, calculating heart rate, arrhythmia recognition and electrocardiography. From here, we move into the different rhythm patterns of the heart, with in-depth investigation of Sinus rhythms, Atrial rhythms, Junctional rhythms, Ventricular rhythms, and heart block.

Garcia and Miller have done a comprehensive job in detailing the topic, discussing how and why the heart loses its ability to beat properly in addition to ways the health care professional should approach identification of the affliction. Notable for its full color graphic illustrations that assist in understanding the text descriptions, as well as for the hundreds of real-life rhythm strips that are included here as a seamless way to force the reader to immediately apply the lessons being learned.

Recommended to instructors in nursing courses dedicated to cardiac-care/intensive care nursing. Would also be highly useful to instructors teaching one of the cornerstones of paramedic/emergency-response care. Finally, recommended to Emergency Room physicians as a valuable ‘on-the-job’ resource that provides clear instruction on the interpretation of rhythm strips.

Order from jbpub.com

THE THOMSON-DELMAR- LEARNINGHEALTH CORNER

FOUNDATIONS OF NURSING. 2nd Edition. Lois White. Thomson/Delmar-Learning.

Reviewed by Karen C. Bagatelos, M.S.N.; N.P.

Lois White’s Foundations Of Nursing, now in its second edition, serves as a comprehensive summary of the nursing process and an excellent over-all resource with multiple focal points. Here, White (former faculty and chairperson, Department of Vocational Nurse Education, Del Mar College) has built Foundations Of Nursing into a practical nursing text which can also easily double as an on the job reference book for use by the practicing nurse.

Over the past twenty years, the nurse's responsibilities have increased tremendously, with myriad expectations awaiting both the novice and experienced nursing professional.Consequently, success in the field requires any student-nurse to command a thorough understanding of both medical diagnoses and treatment.

Accordingly, White’s texts provides an in depth review of disease processes (with focus on medical, surgical and pharmacologic treatments) – topics that are often overlooked in that annals of nursing literature which has, in the past, concentrated deeply on nursing diagnoses and intervention.

The Foundations of Nursing (in its second edition) is divided into three primary sections: Basic Nursing; Adult Health Nursing; and Maternal/Pediatric Nursing. White has gone to great lengths to insure that this text be well organized and careful to cover a multitude of information crucial to the day-to-day nursing practice.

In addition, the text includes analysis on holistic care; the history of the nursing profession; legal and ethical responsibilities pertinent to nursing care; a guide to infection control; a review of fundamental nursing procedures; guidelines on how to care for the patient with various physiologic disorders; and tips on meeting the needs of the childbearing patient. The highlighted boxes which frame each chapter further serve to stimulate critical thinking, providing useful professional tips (such as making sure to take a patient’s cultural background into consideration in the course oftreatment) – hints that should make the nurse’s day-to-day experience in the hospital a little bit easier.

To the experienced nurse, a lot of this might seem ‘old hat;’ however, White’s treatise is meant to give the novice nurse basic instruction on disease processes, in addition to guidance on the medical, surgical and pharmacologic management of various pathophysiologic conditions.

In essence, Foundations of Nursing teaches both experienced and novice nurses to piece together the whole picture of the patient instead of merely focusing on the nursing process and intervention. And for the present-day student of nursing, success in the field will mean mastery of these concepts.

White’s Foundations of Nursing would serve as an excellent choice for use in courses that teach the basics of nursing, noted for its comprehensive tone and the author’s unique ability to speak on myriad intellectual levels. Further, the text is full of well-placed diagrams that are both pleasing to the eye as well as vital to the information being presented. Basically, Lois White has created a user-friendly textbook that provides the novice nurse with an excellent review of disease processes and medical, surgical and pharmacologic treatment options necessary to maximize patient care, covering all the important aspects of nursing assessment, planning and intervention.

Order from Thomson/Delmar Learning


© Karen C. Bagatelos. 2006. All rights reserved. Karen C. Bagatelos andThe Electric Review.

Karen C. Bagatelos holds a Masters of Science degree in Nursing, serving as both a Nurse Practitioner in Gastroenterology and Assistant Clinical Professor of Community Health Systems at the nationally ranked University of California, San Francisco Medical Center. Reach her through The Electric Review.


THE CONTINUUM OF LONG-TERM CARE (Third Edition). Connie J. Evashwick. Thomson/Delmar Learning.

Reviewed By Frank Aiello

Thomson/Delmar Learning’s "Series in Health Services" is intended to provide high quality educational materials to the health administration and to myriad public education fields. As part of that series, this excellent text by Connie J. Evashwick focuses on the ever-increasing problems that plague individuals with functional disabilities who require some form of assistance for an extended period (usually 90 days or longer and known as "Long-Term Care").

Functional disabilities are determined by an individual’s ability (or inability) to perform the Activities of Daily Living (ADLs) and Instrumental Activities of Daily Living (IADLs). Examples of ADLs include bathing; dressing; eating; and continence control [as] "The abilities to carry out these activities are typically acquired during the first years of life in a definite hierarchical order [with] independence of these skills...often lost in the reverse order; that is, bathing tends to be the first loss of independent functioning, and eating the last." [p. 18.]

Examples of IADLs include the ability to manage money; to shop for groceries; to keep the house; and manage medications. As Evashwick states:

"While ADLs involve use of large motor skills, IADLs are more likely to involve the use of fine motor skills. IADLs tend to require greater cognitive ability. . . Each person’s condition will have a unique progression, so patterns of service may be similar, but not identical. This complex progression and potential variation in service use makes designing payment systems for long-term care challenging to structure and costly to insure." [pp. 19-20.]

As the Baby-Boom Generation comes upon retirement age, there will be no shortage of patients requiring long-term care. In The Continuum of Long-Term Care, Evashwick points out that the elderly population will double by the year 2030, rising to 70 million, the majority of which will likely have one or more chronic conditions (these may range from life threatening illnesses, such as heart disease, to conditions which produce functional disabilities).

Moreover, as these seniors age into their seventies and eighties, the need for all types of health services will increase dramatically, with the need for long-term care for those who can no longer perform the basic activities of daily living increasing as well. However, despite their physical shortcomings, the majority of these individuals will continue to reside in their communities, often under the care of informal caregivers with little or no training in attending elderly patients beset by a multitude of chronic afflictions (and without adequate financial resources to care for their disabled family members).

The following statistics foretell the severity of the situation:

"Informal caregivers are the major providers of long-term care to the millions of people with functional disabilities and chronic conditions who live outside of institutions. About one-quarter of all U.S. families report being engaged in caregiving activities and the estimated numbers of caregivers to disabled persons of all ages is 52 million. Caregivers are typically immediate family members, with nearly two-thirds being spouses or adult children. Between 59% and 75% of all caregivers are women, who often have to manage multiple roles as spouse, parent, and employee in addition to their caregiving responsibilities." [pp.42-43.] (Emphasis added in bold italics).

These figures are truly astounding, and it is not surprising that a health care crisis looms on the horizon as one comes to absorb the fact that one out of four families are presently engaged in the daily care of a loved one, with such caregivers spending thousands of hours of unpaid work time carrying out their responsibilities. In addition, as a by-product of the enormous stress that accompanies these circumstances, many caregivers suffer from depression, loss of leisure time, and conflicts within families.

Although non-profit hospitals outnumber for-profit hospitals by a 3 to 1 margin, it is nonetheless readily evident that the ability of the patient to pay is the over-riding factor impacting just who these hospitals will choose to help and what programs will be made available to the needy consumer. Furthermore, the quality of such hospital treatment cannot be guaranteed; as Evashwick points out, medical errors in hospitals reportedly account for as many as 98,000 deaths annually in the United States:

"Each day of hospitalization is estimated to increase a patient’s chances of experiencing an adverse event by 6 percent (Kohn, Corrigan & Donaldson, 1999). Adverse patient events also include approximately 2 million nosocomial (hospital-acquired) infections annually, according to the Centers for Disease Control. (CDC, 1992)." [p. 63.]

It is clear, after reviewing Evashwick’s chapter on the costs of long-term care, that citizens requiring dedicated assistance will continue to be tended by their immediate family (and, to a limited extent, by social networks), ultimately depleting the resources of both. As Evashwick asserts, there is simply a dearth of social-service programs equipped to faciliate long-term care for the chronically ill:

"Medicaid is not a single program, but a collection of 50 state programs that fall within a range of options determined by the federal government . . .As a result of state variations, people with identical circumstances may be eligible to receive Medicaid benefits in one state but not in another. Even individuals in the same state with similar incomes may not be equally eligible for benefits because of welfare rules." [pp.244-245.]

Thus, despite the morass of state and federal legislation enacted subsequent to the creation of Medicare in 1966, basic health insurance and a rational managed care program for all citizens remains a distant dream.

Accordingly, Connie Evashwick’s treatise on the subject makes it clear to both practicing health care professionals and to students entering the field that this question is still the most pressing social concern America faces.Unfortunately, after more than 40 years, we still have no real answer to the question of how to best meet the needs of our elderly after they become disabled.

Order from Thomson/Delmar Learning

OF RELATED INTEREST

A GUIDE TO HEALTH INSURANCE BILLING (Second Edition). Marie A. Moisio. Thomson Delmar Learning.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

This text from Thomson/Delmar, together with other Thomson publications [1], are reviewed with a future eye fixed on exploring both the ever-worsening health care crisis and scandals involving non-profit hospitals [2] (institutions which presently provide the majority of health care services that are available in the United States).

However, some basic background is first necessary in order to educate the reader on these topics.

The Federal Medicare program was established in 1966 to provide basic form of supplementary health insurance to individuals 65 years or older (and to other qualifying individuals). (See 42 U.S.C. Sections 1395c, 1395j). Basically, Medicare gives retirement age individuals the ability to seek medical services under a program that is universally accepted among the nation’s health care providers. Although convenient and easy for the consumer to use, the program itself has become a breeding ground for abuse, as doctors and their billing agents have gained control over a patient-base that has little ability to understand or monitor how services are being billed.

Yet, as Moisio’s book reminds its readers, there are grave consequences to unscrupulous conduct on the part of health care providers. Specifically, it is a felony for a health care provider to intentionally make false statements of a material fact in order to obtain any payment. 42 U.S.C. Sections1320a-7b(a); 42 C.F.R. Section 455.2.

Moreover, a health care provider found to have engaged in fraudulent billing is subject to a revocation of its right to treat Medicare beneficiaries. The scope of improper billing can be seen in statistics complied by the Department of Justice which in 1996 estimated improper payments made by the Government amounted to 23.5 billion dollars: See: http://www.usdoj.gov/dag/pubdoc/hipaa99ar21.htm.

Given the magnitude of the problem and its impact on the quality of health care for every citizen, portions of Marie A. Moisio’s text, specifically her chapter on the legal aspects of insurance billing, are especially relevant to life in 2006. Refreshingly, Moisio has not ignored the overriding issue of insurance fraud/abuse, noting in her chapter on the legal aspects of insurance billing that: "[i]nsurance billing fraud and abuse cost the federal government between 11 and 23 billion dollars per year. In 2002, about 7 % of Medicare’s total expenditures was paid inappropriately. The reasons for this error rate include fraud, abuse and lack of medical documentation related to insurance claims processing." [p. 33.]

Health care fraud is defined differently depending on the federal or state statute involved, but the term often means that "someone is illegally attempting to collect insurance payments from government health insurance programs...Most health insurance billing fraud is targeted at the Medicare program...Health insurance fraud activities fall under three main categories: fraudulent diagnoses, billing for services not rendered, and medical coding errors." [ p. 34.]

In illustration, Moisio provides well-defined examples relating to each category:

Fraudulent diagnoses consist of either intentionally falsifying a diagnosis, misrepresenting the diagnosis, or selecting a diagnosis based on the amount of reimbursement. Billing for services not rendered can consist of scenarios where equipment is never provided to the patient; hospital visits which never occur; or laboratory/diagnostic tests which are never administered. Medical billing errors can include "upcoding" or selecting a diagnostic code based on a greater reimbursement; "leveling" or using the same billing/diagnostic code for all office visits; and "unbundling," or assigning individual medical or office-visit codes to services or diagnoses covered by a single code (note Moisio’s excellent snapshots of such activity).

Unfortunately, identifying fraudulent activity in an ultra-complicated environment is not simple. For example, Medicare reimburses hospitals on a Progressive Payment System (PPS) that was adopted by Congress in 1986 (a system intended to reimburse hospitals for their "reasonable costs" according to PPS methodology which uses both a fee schedule and a cost-base method or a combination of both).

The primary components of this payment system are Medicare Part A, which covers institutional services, and Part B, which covers outpatient services provided by physicians and other professionals (with each segment or "part’ financed differently and offering specific and distinct coverage). Part A provider claims for reimbursement are processed by "fiscal intermediaries," which are generally insurance companies operating under contract with the Secretary of Health and Human Services. Part B provider claims are processed by "carriers" who are also commercial insurance companies.

In actuality, the PPS payment method is a labyrinth of rules and regulations virtually incomprehensible to all but the most determined student, and deep understanding of this material requires access to a two-volume "Provider Reimbursement Manual" which is basically the "bible" of the industry.

Medical reimbursements have created acomplicated system with layered rules that benefit hospitals in myriad ways. Some examples of instances which mandate special attention: payment adjustments may be made to providers who are sole community hospitals or Medicare-dependent small rural hospitals; adjustments may be made if a provider serves a disproportionate share of low-income patients; teaching hospitals can receive additional payments through a variety of indirect medical education adjustments. In addition, there are also different cost-reporting requirements for proprietary facilities, teaching hospitals, doctors providing inpatient medical services, skilled nursing facilities, and home health care facilities (among others).

As a means to illuminate her readers on how health care billing is done, Moisio provides crisp descriptions of the coding systems and the terms commonly used in those systems:

"CPT "Evaluation and Management" section (E/M) (99201-99499) codes are divided into three broad categories of provider services: office visits, hospital visits, and consultations. E/M codes capture information about medical services, as opposed to surgical services. As the name implies, evaluation and management codes are used to report physician or provider activities associated with evaluating an individual’s health status and managing or implementing a plan of care related to that status." [ p184.]

And taking the subject still further:

"Selecting the appropriate evaluation and management CPT code that is the responsibility of the physician or provider. Many providers document the E/M code by circling or checking one of the E/M codes that are preprinted on the encounter form or route slip. Figure 6-7 is a sample encounter form with the E/M and diagnosis codes printed . . . It is important to emphasize that the billing specialist and medical coder do not challenge the clinical judgment of the physician. Rather, the record review is a method to ensure that the documentation in the patient record supports the physician-or provider-selected code. . .Insurance carriers and regulatory agencies monitor E/M codes for upcoding or downcoding . . .Some providers downcode under the mistaken assumption that this prevents insurance carrier or regulatory agency audits. In fact, both upcoding and downcoding can be categorized as insurance fraud or abuse." [pp. 196-197.]

Even though the system itself seems to create paths of abuse, fraudulent manipulation of a patient’s Medicare benefits are not tolerated, with severe administrative, civil and criminal penalties in place should a health care provider be proven to have engaged in insurance fraud. To evince how serious it takes the issue, the Government encourages citizens to come forward to report suspicious patterns of activity. And Moisio writes:

"The Federal False Claims Act provides financial incentives when suspected fraudulent activities are proven true. Any individual who reports the fraud may receive 15%-25% of any judgment." [p.36.]

Although written as a learning aid, A Guide To Health Insurance Billing is one of the few readily obtainable resources which provides a clear understanding of this subject area, including a guide to key terms and abbreviations, descriptions of medical coding, and sample copies of the appropriate forms. Accordingly, it not only serves the goals of the student, but also can assist administrative agencies, auditors and attorneys involved in the examination and prosecution of insurance fraud. We found the short but informative chapter on the intricacies of Medicare billing worth the price of the book alone.

Recommended as a primary classroom text in courses focused on the technical aspects of billing procedures for the health care industry. Further recommended as a research tool for individuals charged with overseeing this industry and enforcing procedural compliance. Finally, recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

[1] Future columns in The Electric Review’s Reference section will review several of Thomson/RIA’s manuals on tax requirements for not-for-profit entities.

[2] Mississippi attorney Richard Scruggs, noted for litigating cases against the tobacco industry, recently filed several lawsuits against non-profit hospitals alleging that they were illegally acting as non-profit entities andnot meeting the IRS’ strict standards to maintain thisstatus. Consequently, the evidence Scruggs is presenting in his cases has opened up the entire concept of the not-for-profit hospital to closer scrutiny -- by both the Internal Revenue Service and the American public. ~The Editor

Order from Thomson/Delmar Learning

© Frank Aiello. 2006. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.


Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via The Electric Review.

MIRRIAM-WEBSTER’S MEDICAL DESK DICTIONARY. Revised. Thomson/Delmar Learning.

This reference manual (recently released in its revised edition) is the best - and most affordable - general medical dictionary presently on the market. The volume offers over 60,000 entries of terms specifically related to health care; definitions of terms that apply to health-care treatments, medical conditions and commonly used medications are also included. In addition, the reader will find mini-biographies of prominent medical pioneers whose work has influenced the practice of medicine in terms of research and patient care. Webster’s Medical also compiles definitions of oft-used abbreviations, as well as a truncated writing style guide for the practicing health care professional. Quite simply, this title is the definition of reference work, as Webster’s is a name known throughout the world for the creation of timeless dictionaries that have helped students work thorough their fundamental years of education. Here, we have the sure-handed vision of a Webster’s that has been dedicated to illuminating the language specific to the practice of medicine. Although the ‘target’ audience for Webster’s Medical is the health care professional and the medical student, there is also a place for this text in the hands of the patient/‘consumer’ as well. Developed by expert reference writers, the definitions compiled here are presented in a clear and compact style, and they can be readily understood by most detail-driven readers. In light of how many individuals are taking a ‘hands-on’ approach to their own medical care, this dictionary allows us to quickly become familiar with the terms and phrases our doctors are using. In turn, this knowledge will allow patients to develop well-reasoned questions for their health care providers in order to build a better understanding of the medical therapy they are receiving.

Recommended to Health Science libraries for its long-term reference value: as a medical dictionary, this selection sets the standard. In addition, it should be on the desk of all medical professionals as an in-office reference tool that will be referred to on a constant basis. Finally, this book also has value to the consumer for its clear and straight-forward style that never ‘talks down’ to its reader.

Order From Thomson/Delmar Learning

CLINICAL DECISION MAKING: CASE STUDIES IN MATERNITY AND WOMEN’S HEALTH. Diann S. Gregory. Thomson/Delmar Learning.

Newly released from Thomson Delmar, this text (written by Professor of Nursing Diann Gregory; Miami Dade College) is presented with unique focus and delicate precision: A text meant to "bridge the gap" between knowledge and the student’s ability to apply that knowledge.

Nurses, more than any other health care personnel except Emergency Room specialists and trauma surgeons, are on the "front lines": With multiple demands flying at them at once, they must be able to make split second decisions that immediately impact the patient. A very demanding job indeed.

Here, Gregory has structured a text meant to assist nurses in the making of clinical decisions that relate directly to women’s health and to maternity-based cases. In this unique and practical series from Delmar Learning, nurses are summoned to the "front lines" of the classroom and confronted with real life scenarios; the idea is to present a "case" study and then step back while the nurse assembles the myriad information and offers the proper care. The author writes:

"Clinical Decision Making has been developed to provide the student with an opportunity to experience a wide range of clinical encounters in women’s health. The case format provides the opportunity to move from theory to application. It provides instructors with a transitional tool to guide students into practice...[and] gives students the opportunity to utilize the nursing process in order to make decisions based on multiple variables..."

As noted, the text is comprised of real life case studies in various areas of concentration, including Prenatal, Intrapartum, Newborns, Postpartum and Well-Woman health maintenance. In each case study (there are 44 in all), the reader is given a "blueprint" of variables (such as age, gender, pertinent health issues) to assess as they proceed toward appropriate patient care.

By ordering the material in this way, readers (students, nurses) are encouraged to use the knowledge they have learned in the classroom and apply it to a very real clinical situation. Gregory’s ultimate lesson here is to show that the typical classroom is a sterile and completely controlled environment, while the hospital itself is a kinetic and unpredictable stage where anything can happen at any time.

Accordingly, the best nurses think quick on their feet and are attentive to every fact and every last detail. The catch is that the only way for a student to learn these skills and how to adequately manage the needs of the patient is to dive into the fire and offer primary care. Clinical Decision Making by Diann Gregory gives them just that opportunity -- marrying the walls of the classroom to the hospital maternity ward and then demanding the reader initiate an appropriate plan of action.

Recommended to instructors of nursing courses that test the student nurse’s retention of material and the ability to transfer that knowledge to the care of the patient. The text by Gregory also comes in a more compact and streamlined version, one that offers 20 complete case studies rather than the aforementioned 44. The smaller version of the text is appropriate for use as a secondary class text in support of a more generalized manual on all aspects of nursing.

Order From Thomson/Delmar Learning

ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY FOR THE SURGICAL TECHNOLOGIST. Kevin B. Frey. Paul Price. Thomson/Delmar Learning.

Anatomy and Physiology courses form the foundation of the general study of medicine. In addition, these aspects of the curriculum are vital to the emergence of the surgical specialist -- without a thorough understanding of how the body is built and how the organ systems inter-relate, there can be no competent surgical intervention.

In Surgical Anatomy, Price and Frey have constructed a perfectly readable text that surveys the human body in complete terms. The goal of this text is simple: To familiarize the surgical technologist with the human anatomy and its physiology so that medical personnel are able to mitigate the inherent risks that surgery poses to the patient. The authors write:

"In fact, patient outcomes for intraoperative care can be negatively affected by the surgical technologist who does not understand anatomy. It is especially important that the practitioner of intraoperative care understand the distinction between general and surgical anatomy. For the surgical technologist to function effectively in the operating room, an accurate view of the human body is necessary, with emphasis placed on the application of this science to practical surgery."

Moving through the layers of this text, readers are met with well-ordered chapters that build on each other to form a coherent narrative. The book begins with a snapshot of the organization of the human body, and then segues into study of its chemistry and cell structure. From here, we are ready to examine tissues and membranes as they build into this highly sophisticated labyrinth of organ systems (heart, circulatory, nervous, muscular, skeletal, vascular) that governs human life.

In addition, each chapter includes two case studies focused on surgical intervention -- the authors expertly sewing the material together so as to make it meaningful to the practicing health care provider and advanced student. In a crisp, deft and economical style, Frey and Price not only outline the anatomical and physiological aspects of the body, but also show just how the information pertains to the very specific practice of surgery.

For doctors and students alike, the goal is to understand that intervening on an organ via an operation is a delicate and precise event - -an event which requires a certain appreciation for the way the human body is constructed. This text, while detailing the scientific data, also ushers the reader to the threshold of a greater lesson -- a lesson that leaves the surgeon and his staff appreciating the "person" and not just the "patient."

Recommended to instructors of any course centered around preparing medical personnel for work in the operating room -- from anesthesiologists to specialized nurses to surgery-based technicians. To this end, the text is premised on clear and sharp writing that serves a large demographic. Further recommended to Health Science libraries as a general reference text with long-term value.

Order From Thomson/Delmar Learning

RESPIRATORY CARE SCIENCES. An Intergrated Approach. Fourth Edition. William V. Wojciechowski. Thomson-Delmar Learning.

This widely used text by Wojciechowski (Department of Cardiorespiratory Care University of South Alabama) offers a full over-view of an area of burgeoning interest in medical center teaching programs across the country. Respiratory Care, now in its 4th edition, greets its readers with a comprehensive summary of the discipline, beginning with the mathematical foundations of the process. This mathematical overview includes analysis of scientific notation and exponents, ratios, proportions, units of measurement, algebraic expressions and numbers comparison. From here, the reader steps into deep examination of The Kinetic Theory of Matter, Gas Laws, Chemical Laws and Fluid Dynamics (along with other principles of Chemistry, Physics and Statistics), thus extending the circle of information for both student and practitioner. As the title of this text implies, the study of Respiratory Science mandates an integrated approach, since so many independent areas of study are married together with perfect precision in the creation of this unique specialty that focuses on assisting patients through episodes of respiratory distress. In addition to the ‘core science’ data, readers also will examine details of Physiologic Chemistry and Microbiology, with students specifically investigating the biochemical mechanisms of Bronchospasm and Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome - two common conditions that patients present with requiring the expertise of the respiratory specialist in order to restore balanced lung function. There are many notable aspects to this text, but a review cannot pass without mention of its organization: each chapter begins with an "objectives" section that serves to outline the material that an individual section will cover. At this juncture, the student is escorted through the author’s outline step-by-step. Finally, the lesson culminates with practice problems and a summarization of salient chapter discussions (in addition to review questions). These concluding features immediately come to test the reader’s retention and inspire the practice of self-testing (traits that are paramount to respiratory therapists being able to effectively and safely treat patients).

Recommended as a class text for all courses focused on teaching the fundamental sciences as they relate to the practice of Respiratory Therapy. Would further prove useful to working therapists as an in-office reference providing an eloquent overview of core data. Further recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

Order from Thomson Delmar Learning


Of Related Interest

CLINICAL APPLICATION OF MECHANICAL VENTILATION. Third Edition. David W. Chang. Thomson-Delmar Learning.

The Terri Schiavocase widely reported on earlier this year jettisoned this subject into the consciousness of the general public, as many Americans were forced to put in writing their views on life-support through mechanical means. While the Schiavo case looked at the idea from a social/personal/religious perspective, this text by David Chang (Athens Technical College) examines the application of Mechanical Ventilation from a clinical /medical/scientific point-of-view. To this end, Chang takes a truly comprehensive approach in examining his subject, looking at the principles of MV (including the clinical conditions that would warrant such intervention); the effects of positive pressure ventilation (including cardiovascular and hepatic considerations); Home Mechanical Ventilation (including discussion of the impact on the patient and family); special airways for ventilation; and neonatal Mechanical Ventilation (to cite but a few of the topics covered in these pages). Each chapter includes a topical outline and a key terms box , in addition to the self-assessment questions that close each individual section (similar to the teaching concept employed in Respiratory Care Sciences, the student reader is tested immediately as he moves through the layers of data in order to promote maximum retention).

Obviously, this material makes a logical companion to the Wojciechowski text featured in the preceding column, and Mr. Chang’s text comes highly recommended to instructors: it would serve well as a teaching text in any course examining the role of Mechanical Ventilation in 21st century medicine.

Order from Thomson Delmar Learning

PEDIATRICS. From Thomson-Learning’s Case Study Series. Bonita Broyles. Thomson-Delmar Learning.

As noted in the preface to this volume, the Thomson-Learning Case Study Series was created in an effort to help nurses "bridge the gap" between knowledge and clinical application. Simply, it’s not enough fornurses to be able to pass a test -- more importantly, they need to be able to apply that knowledge directly to the care of patients in pressure-packed environments. Accordingly, Bonita Broyles’ Pediatrics paints real life pictures ("case studies") and places the nurse smack-dab in the middle of the treatment room with a call to evaluate varied situations and provide appropriate remedies. The core-idea of this series is to re-enforce principles of critical thinking so that the nurse is able to use proper judgment in assessing a case and initiating treatment. Easy to say. But much more difficult to accomplish. However, Broyles’ text comes with the specific purpose of teaching student-nurses to implement their scholastic training so as to build confidence and refine technique -- the long-term goal here is to insure that nurses are entering the workplace with complete skills that meet the unique challenges of today’s hospital. Divided into 20 case studies that focus on the pediatric patient, Broyles puts the nurse in the midst of real-life dilemmas that require the nurse to take action. Each case study begins by setting the scene, and the nurse/reader is presented with various data (such as patient age, gender, ethnicity, applicable cultural considerations, pharmacological data, spiritual considerations), before presenting a factual summary of why the patient requires care. At this point, the reader is confronted with several questions of consideration which, when answered correctly, offer a "blue-print" to a suitable course of therapy. Each case study then closes with answers to the questions of consideration, thus allowing readers to immediately test their depth of knowledge. Aside from its pin-point writing and sharp organization, the best part of this text is that it forgoes the predilection to "lecture" (something so many medical texts fall prey to), instead dedicating its full focus to the practical world where patients are not names on paper but actual living breathing people whose lives lie in your hands. Consequently, if a nurse’s judgment is in any way compromised, then the patient’s chance of recovery will be significantly reduced.

Recommended as a teaching text in advanced nursing courses that test a student’s ability to apply academic training to the hospital setting.

Order from Thomson Delmar Learning

ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY FOR SPEECH, LANGUAGE AND HEARING. Third Edition. J. Anthony Seikel. Douglas W. King. David G. Drumright. Thomson/Delmar Learning.

This text is unique in the market for its specialized exploration into the speech, language and auditory systems of the human framework. Now in its third edition, Seikel (Idaho State University) and his co-authors have developed a textbook focused on topics of speech pathology and audiology - an in depth survey into the anatomy of this region that demonstrates how each of these independent systems is intricately inter-related.

The text begins with a nice overview of anatomy and physiology, including a review of the parts of the body and pertinent terminology. From here, we move into the "building blocks" of life, with discussion of organs, tissues and the systems that govern the body. Once these basics are covered, the authors then begin their focus on the systems that drive our ability to speak and hear.

Many texts devoted to the study of anatomy and physiology tend to leap quickly over this material, and instead will focus on the more popular areas of study (like neurology or the circulatory system). And that is exactly why Seikel’s book stands out: it gives the student a chance to engage in a detailed study of these regions.

As the text moves forward, we are led through the many interlocking systems of the body responsible for speech and hearing. For example, a standout chapter on the anatomy of respiration allows the student to begin to understand that vocalization is a by-product of breath; it simply cannot occur unless a multitude of other interactions are happening simultaneously within the body.

And the same is true for the material that covers the ear. In Anatomy/Physiology, careful consideration is given to the fact that the organ systems of the human body are intricate and inter-related, with many neurological reactions occurring that allow us to process sound and then store it within our minds and memories.

One of the best aspects of this text (in addition to its organization and clearly written passages) is in its ability to make the student aware that the study of one particular organ system must begin with a thorough understanding of the body as a whole. Seikel, King and Drumright have accomplished this in glowing terms.

Recommended as a primary course text in advanced anatomy/physiology and biology courses designed to train Audiologists and Speech-Language Pathologists. Also recommended to Health Science libraries as a general reference text. A truly unique text impeccably designed.

Order from Thomson Delmar Learning

ALSO FROM DELMAR HEALTH

DELMAR’S FUNDAMENTAL AND ADVANCED NURSING SKILLS. Gaylene Altman. Delmar Thomson Learning.

As the title implies, this text examines basic nursing skills and how they build into the ability to complete advanced procedures. Delmar’s Fundamental is note-worthy because it is centered around the day-to-day nursing process: rather than just serving as a classroom tool, the book can be used by nurses in the throes of caring for sick patients - giving the reader immediate and practical value.

In today’s world of medical care, the nurse’s role has expanded greatly. Today, nurses are expected to be able to know and do more, while taking care of many more patients. Accordingly, the stresses which affect their working environments have multiplied. Given these changes in working conditions, nurses must be better prepared to perform their duties and care for the sick.

And that’s where Delmar’s Fundamental comes into play.

In its second edition, the text offers step-by-step instruction for nurses in physical assessment/examination, safety and infection control, patient care, basic care, medication administration, nutrition, elimination, oxygenation, circulation, wound care, immobilization/ support and special procedures as related to nursing care. Within these topics area, Altman (who is an RN and Ph.D. from the University of Washington) expertly augments the basic material by discussing issues such as when a nurse should and shouldn’t delegate tasks to an unlicensed aide. This is very important information because of the legal ramifications which could result from the wrong decision (see: Library Advisory on Industry News Page for a review of the Nurse Practitioner’s Legal Reference). In addition, there is also a nice section on the typical errors nurses make and how these gaffes can be avoided.

Recommended to all nurses as a day-to-day reference. Appropriate as a teaching text for its clarity and exhaustive coverage of the topic areas. Further recommended to all college and university libraries with nursing programs as a general reference text.

Order from Thomson Delmar Learning

COMPREHENSIVE MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY: A COMPETENCY BASED APPROACH. Betty Davis Jones. Delmar/Thomson.

This souped-up medical dictionary provides an in depth introduction to medical terminology, designed to familiarize the novice with the systems of the human body, thus preparing him to move into more advanced medical science courses.

However, readers shouldn’t be misled, for this is much more than just a glossary of medical terminology. Instead, Jones has done a remarkable job in creating a dictionary that also can be utilized as an tool in the classroom, as one special segment of the text shows specifically how combining word elements creates medical terms. Accordingly, each time a new word is introduced to the reader its components are broken down to show its root.

The design of the text - by body system and specialty area of practice - is beneficial to the young student in that it allows them to learn one system at a time without skipping around from organ to organ. This stylistic trait promotes a more complete understanding of the systems of the human body, encouraging students to note how each of these systems fit together and work in complete balance. Moreover, Jones has developed a special "Do This/Say It" chapter which forces the student to apply what’s been learned before moving to new material. This second edition also includes a section on gerontology meant to familiarize the young student with the unique problems that confront the elderly patient.

Recommended as a teaching text in all nursing courses and in any under-graduate course that begins the foundation for medical school. Further recommended to all college-level and public sector libraries as a general reference text.

Order from Thomson Delmar Learning

PEDIATRIC NURSING. Skills and Procedures. Barbara L. Mandleco. Thomson/Delmar Learning. This specialty text focuses on nursing care for the child patient. Pediatric is an important book in that it clearly lays out for discussion the fact that child-patients much be approached differently than adults. Here, Mandleco (College of Nursing Brigham Young University) does a comprehensive job in fully addressing what nurses need to know about caring for young patients. Starting from the beginning, Mandleco instructs readers how the nurse is to assess the child-patient’s health (including health history, physical examination, vital signs and assessment of nutritional and developmental deficiencies). From here, the reader is escorted through the proper procedures relating to specimen collection (the blood draw chapter is important since this is very difficult to perform on a child), medication administration, peripheral IV-line insertion (another extremely important segment) and wound care (among a host of other information). As you can see from this summary of major topics, Pediatric covers the whole of the nurse’s duties as they relate to the pre-teen patient. But more than being detailed, well-written and expertly formatted for easy review, the true value is in the book’s ability to teach the student nurse to slow down and realize that all patients are not alike -- especially where children are concerned. This fact cannot be over-emphasized, and accordingly, this selection should be required reading in all nursing programs.

Also recommended to Health Science libraries for its long-term reference value.

Order from Thomson Delmar Learning

HEALTH UNIT COORDINATOR: 21st CENTURY PROFESSIONAL. Donna J. Kuhns. Patricia N. Rice. Linda L. Winslow. Thomson/Delmar Learning. Specifically designed for the community college or nursing administration student, Health Unit reviews the role of the Health Unit Coordinator in the hospital setting. The Health Unit Coordinator position dates back to World War II and basically serves as support for the hospital nursing staff, assisting in the completion of non-clinical duties. However, over the last 60 years (due to technology and research), this position has changed drastically. Accordingly, Kuhns and her co-authors have written a text for the 21st century student meant to help them prepare for the Health Care Unit Coordinator Certificate Exam. Topics covered here include the history of medicine, proper patient care, an overview of the Health Unit Coordinator’s primary functions, an overview of the hospital setting including administration and support services, patient privacy, patient rights, advanced directives, hospital communication systems, and medical transcription. One of the best features to be included is the addition of a study question segment which concludes each chapter -- forcing the reader to immediately test themselves on what they’ve learned/retained.

Recommended to all instructors who teach courses focused on hospital administration. Would also prove to be a useful reference tool for the coordinator of the private physician’s office because of the wealth of information it provides on the behind-the-scenes world of the medical office. Finally, recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

Order from Thomson Delmar Learning

DOSAGE CALCULATIONS. 7th Edition. Gloria D. Pickar. Thomson/Delmar Learning. The ability of the health care worker to competently calculate medication dosages is paramount to both patient safety and effective treatment. It is also one of the most difficult and tension-filled of all duties the clinician must master -- for an error on this level often courts lethal consequences. Thus, Gloria Pickar’s Dosage Calculations (now in its 7th edition) is regarded in the profession as one of the most useful reference tools available. In Dosage, Pickar has written a book that attempts to allay some of the anxiety that goes along with calculating medicine dosage, and is specifically written for those individuals who feel uncomfortable with mathematical equations. Pickar helps the reader get over their math anxiety by writing in a clear and effortless way (showing that with practice and focus this skill can be mastered and performed with ease). Topics covered here are varied and vast, and include review of ratios, percents and simple equations; measurement systems and medication orders; and a very detailed examination on deciphering drug labels and bar code symbols. There is also a rich chapter on adult intravenous calculations (including heparin administration). Readers with an understanding of basic arithmetic will gain much from this text.

Recommended to instructors in RN preparatory programs as a supporting text. Also would be a useful daily reference tool for Emergency Room and Intensive Care personnel.

Order from Thomson Delmar Learning

WITH AN EYE ON THE CHILD

THE AMERICAN ACADEMY OF PEDIATRICS

By John Aiello

Any new mother or father is likely to be on information over-load, bombarded with various how-to manuals, in addition to so much motherly advice on the do’s and don’t of raising a child. After awhile, it all must seem daunting -- it’s only a matter of time before these new parents have to scream "Enough!"

That’s where the American Academy of Pediatrics (AAP) comes in. The Academy (comprised of top Pediatricians and pediatric researchers throughout the country) publishes an extensive line of books meant to educate first-time parents on how best to care for their kids.

The AAP’s titles are notable for their long-term reference value and for their deep consumer focus -- these books, written with the parent in mind, are easy to navigate and easy to understand: the key here is that the information is immediately accessible to the lay reader (and thus conducive to retention).

New parents are obviously under a great deal of stress, and few (if any) have extra time to search through a text to find answers to questions about how to best address their infant’s needs. In light of this fact, the AAP list comes together to build an impeccable reference foundation on myriad subjects. Yet, even though their subject matter is vast, the over-all purpose of these books remains singular: to make your child’s early years as healthful as possible.

Standout titles in the AAP catalog include:

YOUR BABY’S FIRST YEAR. Steven P. Shelov, Editor-in-Chief. Bantam Books and the American Academy of Pediatrics. This pocket reference, priced at only $6.99, should be in every new parent’s baby-bag -- a rich and well-detailed resource that escorts the reader through the typical first year of a child’s life. Your Baby’s First includes a comprehensive month-by month guide that tells the parent what to expect, with specifics on growth patterns, behavior scenarios and development cycles. In addition, note the erudite instructions how to confront (and successfully navigate your way through) a pediatric medical emergency. Also, information on vaccination schedules, breast vs bottle-feeding and prevention of accidental poisoning is included. Finally, the segment on basic first-aid care is notable for data on children and choking - with guidance on how to guard against this danger. An absolutely impeccable consumer reference. Version also available in Spanish.

GUIDE TO YOUR CHILD’S SLEEP. George J. Cohen. Editor-in-Chief. Villard Books and the American Academy of Pediatrics. Like the Shelov title noted above, this book is a necessity for the fledgling parent, detailing the things child caretakers need to be aware of as the infant develops its sleeping pattern. Probably the most stressful thing a new parent has to cope with is getting the baby to sleep at regular times, and Cohen provides insightful direction on how a mother/father can help the infant get the rest it requires. In addition to myriad tips on how to survive the ordeal of getting your infant to sleep, this book’s provides pertinent data on Sudden Infant Death Syndrome (SIDS) -- a well-publicized affliction that causes much consternation for new parents. Accordingly, Cohen’s analysis is quick and to the point and should alert a new parent on what to look for and what issues to examine (in dialogues with their pediatrician) so that they don’t fall victim to SIDS.

NEW MOTHER’S GUIDE TO BREASTFEEDING. Joan Younger Meek, Editor- in- Chief. Bantam Books and the American Academy of Pediatrics. There was recently some debate in pediatric wellness circles on whether breastfeeding was as important (and beneficial) to a baby as "old time" pediatricians had thought. But as Dr. Meek’s text so nicely illustrates, breastfeeding is indeed beneficial to the new-born, allowing maximum nutrition for the baby (as well as giving the first-time mother the chance to bond with her child and to get to know its personality and feeding patterns). Beyond this, information provided in this guide shows that breastmilk actually bolsters the infant’s immune system and helps the child fight off opportunistic illness. Among other topics, readers will find examples on how to hold/position the child during feedings, as well as advisement on how to wean a baby from breastfeeding. Version also available in Spanish.

GUIDE TO YOUR CHILD’S ALLERGIES AND ASTHMA. Michael J. Welch, Editor-in-Chief. Villard Books and the American Academy of Pediatrics. According to the most recent statistics, Asthma afflicts 5 million children in the United States, with allergies plaguing a whopping 50 million kids nation-wide. And as staggering as these numbers are, they grow every day, with new variations of mold, mildew and fungal allergies discovered annually. Thus, Dr. Welch’s guide to allergy and asthma as related to the child-patient is particularly relevant. Within this volume, readers will find comprehensive coverage of the triggers which spawn asthmatic and allergic reaction within the adolescent body. In addition to helping parents identify symptoms, triggers, treatment options and potential allergens, there is also valuable direction on how to explain these oft complicated conditions to the young patient. It is important to remember that these afflictions can often deprive children of the enjoyment of engaging in strenuous exercise, separating them from them classmates. With this in mind, Dr. Welch offers pertinent advice on how a parent can discuss these conditions with a child so that the youngster can then play an active role in helping to manage symptoms.

GUIDE TO TOILET TRAINING. Mark L. Wolraich, Editor-in-Chief. Bantam Books and the American Academy of Pediatrics. Dr. Wolraich and his contributors have done a handsome job is detailing this big event in the life of a child. Some psychologists believe that the way a youngster is toilet trained has the potential to impact their mental well-being as an adult. Consequently, it is imperative that parents realize this and take steps to make bathroom training as trauma-free as possible. Guide To Toilet Training is chock full of practical advice on how to help the child through the process. Topics covered include finding the best age to begin toilet training, how to manage accidents, how to approach bedwetting episodes, and ways to initiate toilet training when dealing with a resistant child. Well-written and presented with a delicate hand, this book belongs at every new parent’s (and grandparent’s) fingertips.

Even though we have reviewed these selections with the consumer in mind, we would recommend them to all public sector and community college librarians as well: these books create a true "community resource" and deserve to be readily available to low-income readers via the public library system.

Order from booksmd.com;or go to aap.org/bookstore

ELSEVIER HEALTH SCIENCE

In the wake ofthepublishing season's graduationinto the secondquarter of 2006, Elsevier continues its assault on the medical science market with a bevy of outstanding titles. These books are examples of someof itsvaried-best:

New and Notable

PHYSIOLOGY. 3rd Edition; with Student Consult Access. Linda S. Costanzo. Saunders.

By John Aiello

This text by Linda Costanzo (Professor of Physiology, Virginia Commonwealth University) is an important addition to the canon of medical literature as it investigates human Physiology at both the organ and cellular level. More than anything, what this manual does is offer the primary aspects of Physiology in a clearly defined manner that stresses long-term retention for the student.

Costanzo takes a basic approach to the construction of Physiology, presenting the reader with a firm overview of the body’s cellular labyrinth before moving into the Physiology of particular organ systems (neurological; cardiovascular; respiratory; renal, gastrointestinal; endocrine; reproductive).

In addition. Costanzo devotes an entire chapter to analysis of the dynamics of acid-base Physiology, which often can be a trouble-point for students. Accordingly, inclusion of this information rounds out the face of this text in complete terms, cutting to the core of a topic area that tends to lose many student-readers in its multiple complexities.

Obviously, Costanzo’s background as a veteran instructor has instinctively allowed her to create a book that will satisfy the needs of a broad-based audience:

"Part of the impetus in doing this book was the desire to deepen my own understanding – in writing about physiology, I came to learn it better," notes the author. "The other impetus was in that basic human drive to be useful and to do something new. As a writer, I wanted to build a teaching resource that would be immediately accessible to the student. I based the format on my own learning and teaching experiences – taking care to appreciate what worked for me in the past and what didn’t work so well. The goal was to show students the hierarchy of the subject and then to demonstrate the links between concepts in a logical way. I’ve found that once students see the structure of a subject, they truly begin to own it."

And that just what makes Physiology noteworthy - its accessibility: The tone clear-eyed and straight-forward gives students the information they need in a well-defined and ordered format (as the author combines illustrations with point-by-point explanation in order to draw a complete picture of each topic for the reader). Chapters conclude with succinct summaries which bring students back to key areas of reference (review questions augment these chapter summaries and test the reader’s comprehension of the most relevant data).

Finally, the Clinical Physiology Case Studies presented serve to confront students with patient capsules, confronting young doctors with the myriad forms of "classic disorders" as a means to teach them how to take information from the lecture hall and apply it directly to the examination table.

"I think the key to any textbook is for the author to be courageous – the courage to leave out extraneous details; the courage to show one’s own enthusiasm for the material; and even the courage to point out where the thread of logic may break down," remarks Costanzo. "Textbook authors have an obligation to insure that students do not feel intimidated. The challenge is to break down and organize the material in a way that brings the student to this ordered way of thinking."

Indeed, Costanzo’s real gift is to be able to write medicine in a way that allows it to transfer to the classroom with seamless efficiency. Insofar as foundational Physiology texts go, this one sets the standard in scope and style.

Recommended as either a primary or supporting class text in courses which survey basic human Physiology. In addition, it would prove to be a useful study tool for student-doctors preparing for the USMLE. Finally, recommended to Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

THE OSLER MEDICAL HANDBOOK - 2nd Edition. Handbook with BONUS PocketConsult Handheld Software. By Johns Hopkins Hospital: Jonathan Paul Piccini, MD; Fellow. Kent R. Nilsson, MD; Fellow. Saunders.

This handbook comes to us having been written by experts at Johns Hopkins Hospital, and it focuses on meeting the challenges posed by the daily practice of medicine. Accordingly, Osler’s covers the full spectrum of diseases that afflict the design of the human body, discussing in detail how the medical specialist should approach diagnosis (a carefully orchestrated step-by-step process of testing, observation and evaluation culminating in treatment).

In creating this comprehensive manual, the authors cover myriad organ systems, with acute analysis of Cardiac disorders; Dermatologic issues; diseases of the Gastrointestinal tract; Hematology; and Oncologic emergencies requiring immediate intervention by the hand of the physician. This edition is further noted for the new information it shares, as the authors have included chapters on end-stage liver disease, hematologic malignancies, biotterrorism, tuberculosis, Glomerular Disease and bone marrow failure (the delineation of each providing keys to the most recent thinking on patient care as it relates to these subject areas).

In addition, the completely revamped section on Critical Care Medicine gives both Emergency Room and ICU personnel a refresher course in new approaches to managing the sickest patients (to this end, readers will find new perspective on ventilation therapies -- an extremely important topic given the public’s increased awareness of quality of life issues in the wake of the Terri Schiavo controversy).

Basically, a medical text is deemed worthy of widespread use when it is able to convey cutting-edge data in a clear and cogent manner. And that’s just what the authors and editors of Osler’s have done with this manual -- building an in-office reference that outlines the most common diseases and disorders the clinician is likely to encounter in daily practice.

As Osler’s infers with its carefully ordered analysis of human health, the best doctors know that no case is routine and that no diagnosis is easy. To the contrary, sound patient care takes dedication and a mastering of the fundamentals of the scientific process, this never-ending process of testing and assessment that allows the clinician to alleviate patient suffering. In accordance with this sacred mission, The Osler Medical Handbook is an artful resource with long-lasting value.

Recommended as an in-office reference for all Emergency Room Personnel (as well as Internists and Primary Care Physicians). Also, medical students would be well-served to refer to this manual while on rotation through hospital training programs -- Osler’s is meant to serve as a life-long reference that can provide direction to any doctor on the ‘front-lines.’

A MANUAL OF SYSTEMATIC EYELID SURGERY. Third Edition. J.R.O. Collin. Butterworth-Heinemann.

Collin (Moorfields Eye Hospital and Institute of Ophthalmology) is noted throughout the medical world for his in depth research into the human eye. In this manual, Collin (a talented writer and an expert Ophthalmologist ) weaves an expert narrative detailing the most common surgical eye procedures being performed today.

Accordingly, this text proves to be required reading for all practitioners in the field -- noted for its crisp analysis and ordered format. Systematic begins with an overview of general eye anatomy and a survey of general medical principles (with an ocular focus). After a review of basic techniques of treatment, the reader embarks on a journey into the layered construction of the eye and ways that medicine has discovered to reduce patient suffering as it relates to Oculofacial afflictions. Moving forward, Systematic dissects the latest thinking on ectropion; entropion; trichiasis; ptosis; reconstructive surgery of the eyelid; lacrimal surgery; thyroid eye disease; and cosmetic surgery of the ocular region.

Moreover, Collin brings much new information to the third edition of his treatise, including a fine segment on eyelid tumor management (an aspect of the discipline that is quite delicate and requires the utmost care on the part of the physician). In addition to chronicling myriad advances in this area, Collin provides up-to-date discussion of orbital implants and socket surgery.

Readers will find Systematic sharply written and easy to navigate, with logical use of illustrations meant to illuminate key procedural points of the text. If Ophthalmologists were to chose a single office reference to help escort them through surgically based procedures, they wouldn’t go wrong by investing in this selection.

Recommended to practicing Ophthalmologists as in-office resource, a ‘go-to’ guide for eye surgeons designed for use in the midst of patient treatment. Systematic will also be of value to Plastic Surgeons, Oral/Maxillofacial Surgeons and Otolaryngologists as an in-office reference companion. Finally, this text would be a worthy study-aid for physicians seeking certification in the field -- its clear-cut ‘step-at-a-time’ construction facilitates in depth understanding of a burgeoning field.

FUNDAMENTALS OF BODY CT, 3rd Edition. W. Richard Webb. William E. Brant. Nancy Major. Saunders.

Refinement of Computed Tomography (CT) has revolutionized approaches to diagnostic medicine during the past 30 years, as Radiologists working in concert with physicians can literally see through the myriad layers of the body to assess flaws in function.

CT scans use thin beams of light which rotate around the patient to create an image of the body. Once that image is complete, it is then interpreted -- and enhanced -- by computer, thus allowing for multi-dimensional (and cross-sectioned) investigation of various regions of the human anatomy. Accordingly, CT scans are vital for in depth assessment as they give the physician a more complete view of the body as a whole.

Fundamentals of Body by Richard Webb (University of California, San Francisco), William Brant (University of Virginia) and Nancy Major (Duke University Medical Center) is noted throughout the annals of medicine for its clean "no-frills" delineation of how to implement CT scans and then interpret the nuances of the results.

Now in its third edition, the text is noteworthy for its organization and formatting, as the authors have gone to great lengths to strip away extraneous and convoluted analysis, building their study from a foundational perspective. As if teaching a class on paper, Webb and his co-writers speak in a crisp and concrete manner that is delivered in a lecture-like style. Topics covered are vast, including discussion of recent development of CT technique, exploration of "multislice" CT scans to assist in diagnosis of chest and abdominal problems, as well as a detailed breakdown of ways 3D CT agiography can be used to peer into a blood vessel in order to examine its delicate intricacies.

The x-ray department’s role in the practice of medicine cannot be understated, for the Radiologist remains at the center of the diagnostic process, allowing the physician to see the full perimeters of an abnormality and then move toward the best treatment for an individual patient. Fundamentals of Body is an important text that provides a record of the latest developments in the field, examining the topic from a multitude of perspectives (when information on how to properly perform a CT procedure merges into how physicians should approach interpretation of test results a complete picture of the discipline is ultimately created for the reader).

In the end, Webb and his co-witers present their readers with a book that says, quite clearly, that the long-term health of the patient is just as dependent on the skill of the Radiologist as it is on the Pharmacist’s dispensary.

Although the first recommendation for this title would naturally be as a front-line class text in any course analyzing the nuances of Computed Tomography, it nonetheless would also prove useful to practicing Radiologists as an in-office manual, offering comment on the latest developments in this ever-evolving field.

SMITH’S RECOGNIZABLE PATTERNS OF HUMAN MALFORMATION. Sixth Edition. Kenneth Lyons Jones. Saunders.

This text offers a definitive analysis of the patterns of human malformation that originate during the genesis of the fetus. Now in its sixth edition and richly layered in detail, Smith’s Recognizable Patterns is applauded throughout the medical community for its ability to cover its topic in relevant and broad-reaching terms.

Dr. Jones (University of California, San Diego) is a leading expert in the field, and his work with this text will serve generations of physicians to come as they look to unlock the mysteries of genetics and the causes of malformation.

Here, Dr. Jones tackles the topic of birth defects from a classic academic perspective, creating a definitive resource along the way. Accordingly, Dr. Jones offers a complete summary of various Chromosomal Abnormality Syndromes, moving seamlessly from one aspect of the topic to the next, expanding on the data with clear clinical precision.

Among the wealth of information presented, Dr. Jones writes on several common disorders (Short Syndrome; C Syndrome; Lenz Microphthalmia Syndrome; Torriello-Carey Syndrome; Mowat-Wilson Syndrome) as a means to connect thepracticing physician with the latest thinking on the reasons why the normal stages of development come to be altered. The idea here is to educate the clinician so that he absorbs the data in a way that will allow him to help parents cope with the disturbing reality of having to raise a child with birth defects.

Dr. Jones’ vast experience as a physician and professor has enabled him to align the book in a way that will be immediately relevant to other doctors -- with chapters designed to thoroughly describe a given abnormality in terms of its history and etiology in quick and efficient detail. From here, expert use of photographs and illustrations allow the reader to see the abnormality in multiple dimensions so that complete understanding can be attained.

As with other areas of medical research, a scientist must be able to see into the molecular basis of a given disease before precise diagnosis and treatment can ever take place. To this end, Dr. Jones has written a manual that inspires its reader to see beyond the skin to the platform of the cell, writing through the subject of human malformation so as to peel the mystery away from this oft-misunderstood area of study.

Recommended to instructors teaching courses on Genetics, Dysmorphology and Teratology. In addition, the manual would prove useful to physicians who treat patients with birth defects and/or provide counsel to parents. Finally, the text is indispensable to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

WALL & MELZACK’S TEXTBOOK OF PAIN. 5th Edition. Stephen McMahon. Martin Koltzenburg. Churchill Livingstone.

Pain Management Centers are now common place at many urban Centers, as health care providers attempt to alleviate suffering through a variety of medications and dedicated treatments.

In this text, McMahon (Center for Neuroscience Research, King's College, London) and Koltzenburg (Institute of Child Health/Institute of Neurology, University College, London) offer the definitive resource on all aspects of the pain process -- including analysis of both neurophysiological and psychological perspectives as related to the "pain syndrome."

In addition to dissecting the neurological basis of pain, the authors carefully summarize treatment options through examination of various pharmacological, surgical, electrostimulative, physiotherapeutic, and psychological alternatives.

In this treatise, McMahon and Koltzenburg have done a masterful job in editing contributions from the leading researchers in the field in order to construct a one-stop manual that is pertinent to instructors, practicing physicians and advanced students on the threshold of exploration into the palliative side of patient care.

Readers of Wall & Melzack will take part in a comprehensive course focused on the phenomenon of pain. High-lights of the revised edition must include mention of the material on medications, as recent research has given rise to the use of a mixed variety of drugs (cannabinoids, antidepressants, muscle relaxants, opioids) in order to lessen the severity of chronic pain patterns. Furthermore, the authors are careful not to side-step the possibility of patient addiction to such narcotics (a problem that is seen all too frequently now in the athletic and entertainment worlds). Also notable is the chapter on headaches (which, along with back/spinal pain complaints, account for millions of doctor visits every year).

Obviously, the subject of pain is paramount to the practice of medicine, since it often the primary reason the patient seeks medical attention in the first place. Here, the authors examine the subject from both physiological and psychological perspectives in an effort to lead physicians to the understanding that this is a complicated matter that requires the medical provider to search for individualized treatments.

Flawlessly written and impeccably researched, with smart use of illustrations to evidence key areas of focus. The best book on the topic we’ve seen, hands down.

Recommended to all pain management specialists for its exhaustive coverage of the subject. Also useful to Anesthesiologists, Neurologists and Sports Medicine specialists (physicians and therapists). Further recommended as a teaching text in any course that delves into ways that the physician should address both acute and chronic pain complaints. Finally, recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

GREEN’S OPERATIVE HAND SURGERY. 5th edition. David P. Green. Robert N. Hotchkiss. William C. Pederson. Scott W. Wolfe. Churchill Livingstone.

Green’s is noted as the absolute authority in terms of detailing the intricacies of hand surgery. Now in its 5th edition, Green’s comes to us completely revised from earlier versions, with updated information that’s been framed in a somewhat different face -- the print text bolstered by multimedia capabilities that allow the reader to access a continuously updated website for information on the most recent developments in the discipline.

Green’s is the preferred reference in the field because of the depth of reportage by a long list of expert contributors. The text begins with an overview of the general principles of surgery before moving into specific analysis of this region of the body. Discussion includes the hand (infections, Dupuytren’s Contracture, tendon injury, nails, arthritis); the wrist (carpal instability, Distal Radioulnar Joint, wrist Arthroscopy); elbow and forearm; the nerve system (Comprehensive Neuropathies, Radial Nerve Palsy, repairs and grafting, Cerebral Palsy); congenital disorders; bone and tissue reconstruction; and an overview of disorders related to the upper extremity.

Obviously, this text completely exhausts its subject by presenting the latest perspectives on surgical technique and research as related to the human hand. What sets Green’s apart is its ability to provide a definitive record of all disorders which strike this region. In addition to the routine cases that physicians are likely to see, Green (University of Texas Health Science Center at San Antonio) and his co-authors also address more complicated reconstruction, deformity and neurological issues that tend to be seen somewhat less frequently.

Further to the comprehensive discussion of the hand and its sub-systems, Green has added a series of new chapters on the elbow and forearm (including analysis of Arthroscopy and Arthoplasty procedures as related to the elbow). Additionally, there is a highly refined section on the wrist (which has become an area of increasing concern among Orthopedic specialists who are now seeing an influx of patients with carpal instability issues caused by repetitive stress and computer over-use).

In the end, Green’s real value is cloaked in its authors’ ability to clearly define each hand-related disorder as it escorts the reader into deeper exploration of these subjects. Unlike those typical "how to" references of yesteryear, this book addresses the core of each affliction along with all appropriate surgical-repair options, bringing the physician to a better overall understanding of the upper extremities.

Recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text: What makes this a vital selection to libraries is its multi-dimensional format: Inclusion of the CD-ROM means that reference data and abstracts can be accessed on the reader’s personal computer, greatly enhancing the ways this material can be used. Finally, the E-Edition (which requires at least a Windows 95 operating system or higher) is aimed at the practicing surgeon’s specific needs, as the continuously updated website allows the physician to augment the text with advances in research as they occur. Green’s is further recommended to all orthopedic surgeons whose practice area includes treatment of the hand, elbow or upper extremities. Finally, would prove to be a useful class text in courses focused on training surgeons for certification in the field.

TEXTBOOK OF MEDICAL PHYSIOLOGY. 11TH EDITION. Arthur C. Guyton, MD. John E. Hall, Ph.D. Saunders.

Now in its 11th edition, this world-respected textbook (often referred to by instructors as "Guyton and Hall") has set the standard in physiology classrooms for decades. The 11th edition of Medical Physiology extends the standard of quality that began with the first installment of the text, and should immediately remind instructors, students and academic writers in all disciplines what a textbook should aspire to be.

Beginning with a full overview of physiology as it relates to each human organ system (and the practice of medicine), Guyton and Hall move into deep discussion of how organ systems are inter-related and entwined (creating the amazing labyrinth that is the human body).

The magnificent thing about Homo Sapiens is in their construction -- each organ system functioning with independent precision as it merges seamlessly into the next system in the chain in order to create this multi-dimensional "body." Accordingly, this text does an admirable job at bringing this symbiosis to life, utilizing a full-color format to help students more easily understand the subject matter. In addition to the analysis of medical physiology, the authors have taken the material one step further, actually applying these situations to a clinical stage so that the student-doctor can better link the principles of physiology to the practice of medicine.

Aside from the breadth of coverage afforded the reader by this text, the true "beauty" of this title is in its presentation: Clear and concise writing make the material instantly accessible to the young reader and allow for a more precise understanding of the human body.

It should not forgotten that medical students are often inundated by a never-ending parade of new vocabulary and foreign concepts -- a confusing 'mishmash' of material that sometimes gets lost in the translation. To combat this trend, Guyton and Hall offer their readers an introduction to the study of physiology that is at once insightful and artful and inviting -- inviting a deeper interest in the body as a whole.

Recommended to instructors of medical physiology for its crispness and easy accessibility. After 11 editions, this one sets the standard in the field. Also recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

ALSO OF NOTE

PREOPERATIVE DRUG MANUAL. Paul F. White. Saunders.

Recent events centered around adverse reactions by patients to various prescription drugs have spawned a renewed interest in the administration of medication -- on the part of both consumer and medical professional.

This manual (formerly titled "Anesthesia Drug Manual") outlines the way preoperative drugs (anesthetics) are likely to interact with other medications that a patient might be taking upon admission to the hospital.

Preoperative is a handy pocket-sized book meant to be carried/used by the Anesthesiologist in the course of patient care. The book marks a thorough examination of both the "pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic properties of nearly all drugs listed in the PDR and USP" -- a well-developed compilation of both standard and recently approved medications that sets off an in depth discussion of how these drugs work and how they impact the body.(Also notable for its inclusion of dietary supplements and herbal medicines which are now seeing more wide-spread use).

The key for the Anesthesiologist is to be able to anticipate the likely interactions between pre-operative medications and other drugs (such as Beta-Blockers or Immunomodulators) that many patients are taking in the days and hours before surgery: The idea is for the Anesthesiologist to be able to understand the likely adverse reactions that might occur so that he can take appropriate steps to mitigate a life-threatening event. This well-desinged manual (the format allows for easy access of information as the clearly organized topic headings attest) provides a natural starting point.

Recommended to Anesthesiologists, Emergency Room personnel and nurses as an in-hospital reference that will help save lives each time it is used.

ACCIDENT AND EMERGENCY RADIOLOGY. Nigel Raby. Laurence Berman. Gerald de Lacey. Saunders.

Like the subject of the previous review, this selection is written for the practicing health care professional to be used in the direct course of patient treatment. Accident and Emergency is focused on guiding emergency room personnel towards accurately accessing x-rays (and catching hidden conditions that often might be over-looked at first glance).

Now in its second edition (first released in 1995), this handy carry-size manual’s importance cannot be over-stated. Organized according to the radiological anatomy, Accident and Emergency covers all primary points of the body, including the skull, face, shoulder, spine, pelvis, leg and foot.

After moving through the basic principles of radiology (with well-presented data on how to detect a fracture), the reader is taken to each primary region of the body and given a step-by-step tour of ways to detect injury and then assess its severity (with direction on how to avoid common mistakes caused by misreading nuances in radiological studies).

In addition to the clear delineation of the subject matter and precise organization, readers will be further assisted by the "Key Points" and "Subtle Signs Not To Miss" boxes which summarize the most relevant information chapter-by-chapter -- features that provide ER doctors with an extra point of reference as they attempt to accurately identify problems in kinetic environments.

Recommended to Radiologists and Emergency Room personnel as an in-hospital reference. The sample x-rays included within the chapters provide physicians with an added advantage as they serve to recreate real-life clinical situations.

Of Related Interest

INTERVENTIONAL RADIOLOGY (A Survival Guide). Second Edition. David Kessel. Lain Robertson. Churchill Livingstone. Radiologists might want to consider this text as a companion to the selection reviewed in the previous summary. While the Raby text is dedicated to assessing emergency-type radiological images, this manual is focused on how to proceed with invasive tests so that results can be obtained safely and accurately. Interventional Radiology provides important and detailed analysis of Angiography and Vascular Intervention - procedures that comprise some of the most common studies done in this realm.

Recommended as both an in-hospital reference and as a teaching text in courses which focus on this specialty-area of radiology.

PATHOLOGY OF THE SKIN. 3rd Edition 2-Volume Set with CD-ROMS .
By Phillip H. McKee. J. Eduardo Calonje. Scott R. Granter. Mosby.

Now in its in its 3rd edition, this title is a major contribution to the study of skin pathology. Here, McKee and his co-authors present the reader with full and comprehensive analysis of the diseases which attack the skin.

Expert analysis begins at the onset as the authors first explore the structure and functions of skin (the largest organ within the human body). From this point, we are taken on a complete journey through the many different afflictions which are found at the body’s surface, including full discussion of Acantholytic disorders, inflammatory diseases of the subcutaneous fat, diseases of the oral mucosa, diseases of the genital skin, disorders of pigmentation, and Melanoma (only the short list of the topics covered). The text surveys each of these subjects in complete terms, moving slow and with certainty, with over 5,000 well-developed illustrations augmenting the most critical points of understanding.

These physician-authors done an exemplary job at capturing this material for both the academic and professional reader. Many texts in this field of study tend to be ‘either’ ‘or’ efforts: Either they are written for specialists in the field, or they are written for student-doctors and presented with too much classroom preponderance (and thus unsuitable for a doctor who needs to refer to the material in the quick course of patient treatment).

However, these writers have managed to avert this minefield, deftly creating a resource that is not only a perfect fit for physicians treating diseases of the skin (but is also a valuable teaching tool that can guide fellows seeking certification in the field ). The idea here is to foster a true understanding of a sometimes complicated area of medicine where early diagnosis is so vital to effective treatment.

Moreover, the cutting edge tone of this volume -- comprised of the latest data on the subject -- renders it invaluable to all medical science libraries. Among the many fine attributes of Pathology are the chapters on Melanoma and other cancerous conditions: with a large segment of the populous now reaching retirement age, the incidence of skin cancer is only likely to increase. Thus, is it is imperative for physicians practicing in this sub-specialty to be able to recognize the early signs of disease and pro-actively move toward treatment. Accordingly, this text creates a wonderful resource that will serve Dermatologists and Internists for years to come.

As noted, this is a benchmark reference in the field and should be housed in all Health Science libraries; simply, it sets the standard in publishing as related to the study of skin disease.

Of Related Interest

SURGERY OF THE SKIN. June K. Robinson. C. William Hanke. Roberta D. Sengelmann. Daniel Mark Siegel. Mosby. A perfect companion to McKee’s Pathology of The Skin, Surgery of the Skin sews together the latest data on the subject of invasive treatment of skin disease into one practical and all-inclusive text. In addition to the up-to-date data presented here, this selection features a bonus DVD-ROM that allows the surgeon to examine different surgical procedures through video clips and various illustrations (a vital tool in that it allows for practical application of the text itself). 95 contributing writers comprise the leading voices on the subject, and the full spectrum of surgical approaches to both common and complicated problems are explored within these pages. Included in this discussion are chapters on skin structure and surgical anatomy, aseptic technique, anesthesia and analgesia, Electrosurgery, Electrocoagulation, Cryosurgery, biopsy techniques, skin grafting, use of botulinum toxin type A in facial rejuvenation, and liposuction (to name but a few of the topics covered). Similar to the previous text, this is an important resource for Dermatologists and skin surgeons who are likely to see many more cases of skin cancer as the elderly population continues to increase over the next decade. Also recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text for its long-term reference value.

Also of Note From Elsevier(Spring Quarter 2005)

DIAGNOSTIC ULTRASOUND. 3rd Edition. 2-Volume Set. Carol M. Rumack. Stephanie R. Wilson. J. William Charboneau. Jo-Ann Johnson. Mosby. This title is the authority in the field of ultrasound diagnosis as it relates to both the adult and child patient (which is exactly why it is used in so many radiology departments at centers throughout the world). This selection covers the subject in broad and definite terms, and boasts many features which has caused it to be first choice among health care providers who use ultrasound to detect disease and instigate treatment. Diagnostic Ultrasound provides a nice over-view of the process of ultrasound itself, and then moves quickly into the core material, which includes in depth analysis of abdominal, pelvic and thoracic sonography; small parts, cartoid artery and peripheral vessel sonography; obstetric and fetal sonography; and a full analysis of pediatric sonography. In addition to discussion of the different disorders inherent to each particular region of the body (as noted), the authors have designed a unique feature that incorporates a series of image collages into the text that depict different ultrasound findings of the same disorder. As medicine continues to evolve and become more high-tech, this feature allows the radiologist to teach himself to look beyond the surface and explore test results with an eye to locating abnormalities which at first might not be obvious. Recommended to hospital radiology departments both big and small as the definitive reference in the field. Also recommended to all Health Science libraries a general reference text.

Of Related Interest

VASCULAR DIAGNOSIS. M. Ashraf Mansour. Nicos Labropoulos. Saunders. In line with the previous entry, Vascular Diagnosis collects the work of over 50 experts in the field who address the current thinking on non-invasive vascular diagnosis (for cerebrovascular disease, peripheral atherosclerotic occlusive disease, intra-abdominal occlusive disease, venous disorders, and aneurysms). Vascular is formatted for practical application and meant for use by the physician in the course of diagnosis and treatment. Accordingly, the authors have organized the material into three sections (the vascular laboratory and principles of vascular diagnosis; collecting useful images of the different regions of the vascular system; and a well-thought-out series of chapters on miscellaneous topics relating to administrative organization). This text boasts many standout features, including discussion of cerebrovascular color-flow scanning, MR and CT angiography, and vein-graft evaluation. In addition to the up-dated analysis of the most recent thinking in the field, Vascular benefits from the fact that it is written with the practicing physician in mind - the format conducive to quick referral by the practitioner. In short, this text has a singular and well-focused mission: to help escort the radiologist and surgeon and clinical cardiologist through the great labyrinth of the human vascular system. Similar to Rumack’s treatise, this book is recommended to vascular surgeons and radiologists specializing in vascular disease as the definitive reference in the field. Also recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF SLEEP MEDICINE. E-edition/4th Edition. Meir H. Kryger. Thomas Roth. William C. Dement. Saunders. The inability to sleep -- along with backache and headache -- is the most common complaint for which patients consult their doctors. This magnificent tome (which comes with an option to engage a continually updated on-line reference data bank) examines all relevant topics related to disorders which both create and exacerbate our inability to sleep properly. After a tidy over-view of the physiology/mechanisms of sleep and the underlying principles of sleep medicine, we are taken on a tour of the etiology of sleep disorders and the many different reasons that can cause a person not to be able to gain the rest they need. In addition to a very interesting and in depth breakdown of circadian rhythms and how genetics impact these internal cycles, the reader gains deep insight into various new paths of thinking as related to the subject of treating/evaluating the sleep deprived patient. Specifically, there is research ongoing that looks to a link between sleep-breathing disorders and Cardiovascular abnormalities -- information that is vital in helping doctors treat patients who might present with sleep apnea and cardiac problems concurrently. Readers will also find invaluable discussion on the effectiveness of sleep medications for treating some insomnias, as well as a full dissection of neurological disorders and sleep (with a nice section on dementia). This selection, published under the Saunders imprint, is a one-stop source for the physician and contains research on the primary causes and treatments for sleep disorders. Accordingly, this would serve as an equally useful in-office reference for the internist, primary care physician and sleep disorders specialist. Also recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

CRITICAL CARE TOXICOLOGY. Diagnosis and Management of the Critically Poisoned Patient. Jeffrey Brent. Kevin L. Wallace. Keith K Burkhart. Scott D. Phillips.J. Ward Donovan. Mosby. This specialty reference is dedicated to surveying how the physician should approach assessment and treatment of the patient who presents with symptoms of poisoning. A one-of-its-kind publication, this volume is the first text that we have seen to focus specifically on critical-care toxicology. Given the changing landscape of our world, with so many different chemical compounds being used in myriad ways, the potential for accidental poisoning is greater than it has ever been. Here, Brent and his co-writers have written a thorough exploration of the subject (with the analysis evolving from the point of hospital admission through core-treatment and stabilization/management, up to discharge). As noted, coverage is comprehensive and captures the whole of the topic, including chapters on toxic syndromes, poisoning by medication, drug abuse, poisoning by chemical agents, biological toxins, agents of chemical and biological terrorism (increasingly important given the war-torn fabric of this world), and antidotes used to neutralize toxicity. In addition, discussion includes perspective from various medical toxicologists within their individual areas of expertise. Analysis is also included on individual considerations as related to pediatric, pregnant, and geriatric patients (another reminder that medical professionals must evaluate patients on an individual basis and not based on ‘model’or formulaic treatments). Recommended to Emergency Room physicians as an in-office reference (offering immediate access to a printed Poison Control Center). Further recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text for its obvious long-term value to the student community.

THE REQUISITES IN ANESTHESIOLOGY. Editor: Roberta L. Hines. Mosby. One of the most ignored aspects of surgery by the patient community is the process of administering anesthesia -- the surgeons tend to get all the glory and headlines, but the anesthesiologist is just as vital to the procedure: without his expert administration of the drugs that keep the patient sedated, without his ability to know the patient and anticipate problems, surgeries would be a gamble and constant crap-shoot, with many ending in disaster. In terms of specialty texts that deal with anesthesia topics, Elsevier/Mosby’s The Requisites series is a benchmark, offering vital analysis on how the anesthesiologist should approach his craft.

In The Series

CARDIAC AND VASCULAR ANESTHESIA. Jacqueline M. Leung. Mosby. Leung (University of California, San Francisco) has drafted this text specifically for the anesthesiologist working with patients who have cardiac or vascular disease, and it specifically guides the anesthesiologist on ways to manage care for a cardiac-compromised individual. Topics covered include anesthesia for patients with aortic disease; anesthesia for the patient with valvular heart disease; and anesthesia for the patient with congenital heart disease. Leung is a master at the organization of medical data, and she approaches her subject in truly comprehensive terms, designing her chapters for quick and easy reference. The underlying idea here is for the surgeon and anesthesiologist to come together, striving to increase patient safety/survival while reducing post-operative complications.

REGIONAL ANESTHESIA. James P. Rathmell. Joseph M. Neal. Christopher M. Viscomi. Mosby. Like Leung’s text, this selection offers insightful investigation into specialized anesthesiology, with an examination of the different techniques the anesthesiologist can use for different regions of the body. After an overview of neurophysiology and nueroanatomy, we move into analysis of the effects of anesthesia on different parts of the body (including the head/neck block; spine; and upper extremities).

In addition to their value to the practicing anesthesiologist, these texts are marked by clear and logical organization and have strong classroom value; thus, they should strongly be considered as instructional resources.

Order each from booksmd.com;or go to http://www.us.elsevierhealth.com

Previously Featured Reviews

SAUNDERS MANUAL OF CRITICAL CARE. PDA SOFTWARE. James A. Kruse. Mitchell P. Fink. Richard W. Carlson. W.B. Saunders. This converts the Saunders Manual Of Critical Care to software, thus allowing physicians and nurses in the ICU to consult vital information in the course of treating critically ill patients. The Saunders Manual is renown as a comprehensive catalog of the most common conditions found in patients who present to the Intensive Care Unit. The software version of the manual omits nothing from the printed pages, and even adds some features. Readers will find over 200 chapters of analysis, formatted by organ system, a quick and easy one-stop electronic reference that saves doctors critical time in addressing questions. Topics covered include surgery, trauma, and post-op care, to name but a few. A wonderfully rich pharmacology chapter documents many of the drugs used in ICU wings, with full analysis on side effects, dosing and key action. The software also comes with a built-in calculator that is able to perform 39 different computations -- yet another unique feature to this product that has been designed to save doctors research time, in turn, giving them a better opportunity to save lives.

Recommended to hospitals big and small for use as an ICU supplement. Priced at only $85, this is truly a bargain and will likely pay for itself many times each day.

THE SABISTON TEXTBOOK OF SURGERY: THE BIOLOGICAL BASIS OF MODERN SURGICAL PRACTICE. Courtney M. Townsend. R. Daniel Beauchamp. B. Mark Evers. Kenneth L. Mattox. W.B. Saunders. 17th edition of a text first published in 1936. Known throughout the medical world as the definitive source on surgery, Sabiston covers the principles of surgical technique in a well-written and clear style, guiding surgeons with panache and expertise. The new edition has many new and interesting additions, including analysis of the latest techniques used in the operating room and a CD-ROM comprised of over 2,000 illustrations (and supplements) designed to provide continuing education to the experienced surgeon. There is A LOT of new information here: material on robotics; comment on surgery of the elderly, obese, pregnant and immunosuppressed; and remarks on the use of ultrasound in the operating room give new relevance to this grandfatherly textbook. Medical instructors will note that the data on the CD ROM is easily downloadable to PowerPoint, allowing the information to be used as a classroom tool.

Recommended to surgeons in all sub-specialty areas. Further recommended for use as a classroom text for courses that review the role of surgery in medical care. Would be a welcome addition to any Health Science library as a general reference text.

Of Related Interest

Sabiston Textbook of Surgery -- 17th edition Pocket Companion. Courtney M. Townsend. R. Daniel Beauchamp. Mark Evers. Kenneth Mattox. Elsevier/Saunders. This pocket companion to the Textbook of Surgery (see above) condenses the most vital information from the ‘mother’ volume, building a truly "portable reference" for use by the surgeon in the operating room. This volume is meant for "on-the-fly" reading, employing a bullet-format design which brings pertinent data directly to the hands of the surgeon so that he can quickly access it and then apply it to the patient. Even though this volume condenses the material from the Textbook of Surgery, the pocket edition corresponds directly to the original text, making it easy for the physician to explore topics in deeper detail should the need arise.

MASSACHUSETTS EYE AND EAR INFIRMARY ILLUSTRATED MANUAL OF OPHTHALMOLOGY. Peter K. Kaiser. Neil Friedman. Roberto Pineda II. W.B. Saunders. Written in an atlas format that allows for quick reference, Massachusetts Eye provides direction for the ophthalmologist on diagnosis and treatment of a variety of the most prevalent eye disorders. For each malady discussed, the authors provide the physician with comprehensive analysis, including definition, etiology, common symptoms, methods of diagnosis, course of treatment, prognosis and patient management. The new edition is noteworthy because it provides dissertation on advancements in treatment (along with better illustrations/graphics to better guide the doctor and his staff). A chapter on medication is also featured in this second edition, presenting recommendations for drug treatment by condition (with important guidance on dosing). The simple atlas design encourages this book to be used in the office by the physician in the course of patient care - a reference text for daily use that won’t rot away in obscurity on the shelf.

Recommended to all eye care specialists for the reasons cited. Further recommended to Health Science libraries at institutions with Optometry programs.

Order from booksmd.com;or go to http://www.us.elsevierhealth.com


MCGRAW-HILL MEDICAL SCIENCE


HURST’S THE HEART. Manual of Cardiology. 11th edition. Robert A. O’Rourke. McGraw Hill.

This pocket-sized manual provides comprehensive analysis of the many conditions that afflict the heart, offering the most recent data on diagnosis and treatment of coronary disease. The fact that Hurst’s has been around for so many years has made it a "standard" in the field, and many cardiologists have now made it an integral part of their in-office libraries. As soon as you see and survey this material, the reasons for Hurst’s place in medical publishing will become obvious.

As noted, Hurst’s offers full reportage on heart disease, with material on physical examination of the cardiac patient, interpreting electrocardiograms, non-invasive testing for myocardial ischemia, treatment of the elderly cardiovascular patient, management of arrhythmias, pacemakers, valve disease, dilated cardiomyopathy, myocardial infarction, treatment for heart failure and implantation of defibrillators (among many other topics).

What makes this title standout from other similar texts is the way it has been organized, with the authors going to great lengths to address everything the clinician is likely to encounter in the course of patient treatment. I presuppose that the reason behind presenting the material this way is to counsel the doctor to look for and anticipate complications that might not always be readily apparent on initial examination.

To this end, O’Rourke and his co-writers make a point of linking and building chapters in a logical chain (data on physical examination moves into electrocardiograms; data on the elderly patient moves into an examination on how to evaluate and manage heart failure) -- a well-rounded and cogent presentation that paints a clear and illuminating picture of the human heart. Well-placed charts and graphs further serve to illustrate key points and clarify sometimes complicated material (such as evaluating ST-Segment-Elevation in myocardial infarction).

In short, Hurst’s serves as a sharply-developed manual that completely addresses all facets of heart disease in clear and vibrant terms, never losing sight of its absolute focus: to assist doctors in the day-to-day treatment of patients with coronary disease.

In addition to being a vital selection for Cardiologists, Internists, Primary Care Physicians and Emergency Room personnel, it is highly recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

STEP-BY-STEP WOUND HEALING. Sylvie Meaume. Luc Teot. McGraw-Hill.

This slim manual released by McGraw-Hill provides a sharp reference pertaining to the care of wounds. As the title implies, Meaume’s (and Teot’s) text offers an illustrated view of wound care, providing detailed analysis on managing wounds in order to prevent serious infection and promote quick healing. Included in the discussion are the most common kinds of wounds encountered by the healthcare professional (burns, pressure sores, ulcers, diabetic wounds, surgical incisions, amputations), in addition to ways to debride wounds and dress them (wet versus dry dressings), among other information (on wound shape and evaluation). This text, with its specific and clear focus, wastes no time in jumping to the core of its subject matter. Expertly formatted with full color graphics, the material here is meant for use in the hospital by both physician and nurse as they treat patients. Moreover, Step-By-Step is chock full of information that is not readily available in more general texts on wound care. For example, the images and data on debridement via the introduction of maggots (Biological Debridement) provides cogent discussion of cutting -edge and revolutionary treatment, further illuminating the many avenues medicine has taken in its attempt to alleviate suffering and preserve life. Meaume and Teot have simply covered most every question that is likely to rise in the course of wound care, and their reliance on images juxtaposed with abbreviated analysis allows the physician/reader to use this material in designing an effective treatment plan.

Recommended to all Emergency Room physicians and trauma nurses as an on-the-job reference. Would also prove useful to military hospitals that treat a variety of wounds caused by projectiles and explosives. Also recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text with lasting value.

NURSE’S POCKET DRUG GUIDE 2005. Judith Pollachek. McGraw-Hill. This annual reference guide collects dosing data and mechanisms of action for over 1,000 generic medicines and is meant to provide nurses with a quick and easy tool to use in the course of patient treatment. In addition to basic drug profiles, pertinent information on side effects and special precautions is included. This information is absolutely imperative as nurses are the last line of defense to protect hospitalized patients from medicines that could cause sudden and life-threatening adverse reaction.

THE PRETEST SERIES. McGraw-Hill. The pretest series by M.H. marks the consummate tool facilitating preparation for the United States Medical Licensing Examination (USMLE). This series is written to provide the doctor with counsel on how to approach the examination, including guidance on what types of questions to expect and analysis on why an answer is correct or incorrect. Such detail is enormously important -- since the underlying motivation here is not only to pass an exam, but to prove competency toward the practice of medicine (and the treatment of patients). Thus, preparation for the USMLE must delve deeper than mere "what should I expect to see?" knowledge. Instead,this processshouldhelp the young doctor begin to utilize everything he’s learned in order to help patients. Highlights here are many, including practice exams/questions and review of all the basic sciences. Each text is student tested and reviewed, which demonstrates that the material is presented in a way which is conducive to how medical students absorb and retain material. Many topics are covered in the series, including Pathophysiology, Clinical Vignettes for USMLE Step 1, Biochemistry and Genetics, and Pathology. Priced at $25, these volumes are quite affordable and seem to be a necessity for any doctor preparing for formal licensing. Also see: usmleasy.com.

THE ESSENTIAL REPRODUCTIVE MEDICINE. Bruce R. Carr. Richard Blackwell. Ricardo Azziz. McGraw-Hill. This text is formatted specifically for use by the Obstetrician/Gynecologist, examining in comprehensive terms the practice of reproductive medicine. Essential has been written for use by the practicing clinician in the course of patient treatment and consultation. To this end, it covers myriad topics, including: infertility issues, disorders of the endocrine system that impact reproduction, hormonal and non-hormonal contraception, the pros and cons of hormonal replacement, discussion of recurrent pregnancy loss, and menopause.

THE DIABETES MELLITUS MANUAL. Silvio E. Inzucchi. McGraw-Hill. Manual written for the primary care physician or general practitioner, providing basic analysis of Diabetes, including diagnostic and treatment guidelines for both type one and type two Diabetes. In addition to these guidelines, information is provided on various drug therapies. Moreover, Inzucchi is careful to note that proper control of this disease cannot be accomplished completely with drug therapy, but instead is achieved in conjunction with drug therapy and in depth patient education which stresses proper nutrition and exercise. Finally, the reader will be engaged in discussion on complications from Diabetes involving other organ systems, including cardiac, renal and ophthalmologic problems.


To order all medical science titles, go tobooksmd.com. If you don't find a product there, searchamazon.com.


ANTHROPOLOGY

ANTHROPOLOGY IN THEORY. Issues in Epistemology. Henrietta L. Moore. Todd Sanders. Blackwell.

By John Aiello

The study of Anthropology is ever-changing, this record of the society and its culture, this defining record of the times in which we endure.

In Anthropology and Theory, Moore (London School of Economics) and Sanders (University of Toronto) bind together over 50 articles detailing how the foundations of the study of Anthropology were formed, turning a incisive and microscopic eye on theory and theorizing; Moore writes:

"...[T]he pieces collected here are intended to reflect the practice of engaging with theory, particular ways of thinking, analysing and reflecting that have emerged in the context of writings in the twentieth century..."

(From author’s Introduction)

And Ms. Moore continues:

"It has often been said that there is no single anthropology, but only a series of anthopologies. The perspective developed in this collection would see that statement as a question of scale, a matter of position, of what one chooses to foreground on the one hand and consign to background on the other. The variety, diversity and richness of contemporary anthropological theorizing is indisputable, as is the existence of the vigorous debates which are its origin..."

(From author’s Introduction)

This book breaks fascinating ground in its breadth of coverage and depth of analysis. The editors have done an exemplary job of engaging the study of Anthropology from myriad angles in an attempt to show the student that mastery of this discipline takes a keen eye and a mind willing to go beyond surface debate into the core of each ‘theory.’ Accordingly, the topic areas covered are vast, with exploration into Culture and Behavior; Society and its Social Patterns; Environment; the Structure of Systems and Society; Biology and Ontogeny; Language; and Thought-development and Knowledge (among a multitude of other pertinent material).

Throughout these essays, the underlying mission of the writers is to cause students to come to be immersed in the mission of the Anthropologist; specifically: To think through the segments of society and its peoples in order to deconstruct paths and premises, striving to gain a deeper understanding of the human condition.

In addition to creating a hallmark teaching text for students of Anthropology, Moore and Sanders have developed a manual relevant to Sociologists searching to place their observations of man into the larger context of the universe.

Recommended as either a primary or secondary teaching text in courses premised on leading students to deconstruct the study of Anthropology into individual segments. Further recommended to all college-level libraries as a general reference text.

Of Related Interest

THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF ART. A Reader. Edited By Howard Morphy. Morgan Perkins. Blackwell Publishers.

This reader collects various essays on the role of art in the growth and expression of man. Important because it provides the student with a single volume devoted entirely to examining how art enlivens the culture and spirits its collective mission towards a greater awareness of the self. The words ‘art’ and ‘artist’ are used quite freely in our 21st-century lexicon, as the specter of the Madison Avenue advertising world has made art synonymous with television commercials and highway billboards. Consequently, the authors joined together in this textbook have gone to great lengths to dissect the place of art in both the society and the life of the individual. Topics of concentration include definitions of art and aesthetics; primitivism and artifacts; form, style and meaning; the marketing culture (in addition to a lively section on contemporary artists with whom today’s student will likely identify).

This text serves as an on-point companion reference to Moore and Sander’s treatise -- a unique and timely manual that serves to connect the student with the creative impulse of man. Also recommended to college-level libraries as a general reference text. Finally, this text might also prove useful to Art History students in the course of studying the impact of the world’s great artists on their contemporaries and their times.

Order from Amazon.com

INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICAL ANTHROPOLOGY, Tenth Edition. Edited by Robert Jurmain, Lynn Kilgore and Wenda Trevathan. Thomson-Wadsworth.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

Now in its Tenth Edition (the Media Edition includes a CD on basic genetics for anthropology), Introduction To Physical Anthropology continues to be a thoughtfully formatted, clearly written and easily understood introduction to the study of Physical Anthropology.

After beginning with chapters on the biological basis of life, the genetic principles discovered by Gregor Mendel as well as non-Mendelian patterns of inheritance, the authors move forward to review the intricate relationship between evolutionary factors and genetics, primate behavior and the origins and development of humanoids.

In addition to the study aids at the end of each chapter, students are also encouraged by the editors to use on-line resources provided by the Anthropology Resource Center (which provides self-quizzes for each chapter as well as practice exams) in order to build a more in depth exploration into the material.

Finally, Introduction To Physical contains detailed appendices, including a concise summary of early hominoid fossil finds from Africa (as well as a color Atlas of primate skeletal anatomy): this text, over-flowing with visual aids, graphs and color photographs, provides a clear and effective study tool for all beginning students of anthropology.

In addition to being a strong choice as a class text, we also recommend it to libraries as a general reference text.

THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF LANGUAGE, An Introduction to Linguistic Anthropology. Harriet O. Ottenheimer. Thomson-Wadsworth.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

Language, as the author points out, is capable of both transmitting unlimited kinds of information and also evoking and an unlimited range of responses. Thus, Ottenheimer’s text comes to examine how language evolves across the culture, in turn creating a true record of its uses and misuses.

One of the most poignant examples of such misuse is provided in the Ebonics controversy which erupted after an Oakland, California School District attempted to recognize Ebonics as the primary language of the District’s urban Afro-American students (and historically different from English).

As Ottenheimer points out, depending on one’s social perspective and or personal prejudices, Ebonics can be viewed in many different ways: as a particular patois of African -American English adopted by poorly educated inner city toughs, as a distinct "Creole" vernacular which evolved from African grammatical structures common to the Niger-Congo family of languages, or as just "bad English."

Languages and language varieties, asserts the author, get their reputation as "good", "bad" "standard" or "slangy" through the social status of the speaker ("If the speaker of the language is looked down on in some way, then the variety of language that the person speaks will also be looked down upon").

In retrospect, Ottenheimer’s conclusions would not have come as a surprise to my Italian grandmother and generations of other immigrants who struggled not only with a foreign tongue in a strange country, but the tacit disapproval of their neighbors fortunate enough to have been taught "good" English.

Highly recommended as a class text for instructors who teach anthropology or sociology courses which examine the linguistics of the culture.

Order from Amazon.com

© Frank Aiello. 2006. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.


Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via The Electric Review.

CULTURAL ANTHROPOLOGY. 11th Edition. Carol R. Ember. Melvin Ember. Pearson/Prentice Hall.

Now in its 11th edition, this text has earned its respect over a 25 year run -- a full and comprehensive examination of the study of anthropology that addresses the subject in a well-organized and well researched manner.

Carol Ember (formerly of Hunter College) and Melvin Ember (a researcher and professor) have done an exemplary job in creating a text that will be of value to the student long after the classroom instruction has ended, for this text is premised on showing that the subject matter is not at all abstract, but instead, tied to the breaths of our lives; simply, this book is a teaching tool about men as individuals coming together into perfect community.

Cultural is written in classic academic style, laying a foundation of basic concepts before moving into more advanced theories. The Embers begin with a dissertation on the definitions of culture and anthropology before moving into the sub-strata of each realm. It is at this point that the real "meat" of the text is to be found, as the authors do a splendid job of discussing the way cultures meld together - impacted by geography and ethnohistory, developing slowly over centuries.

From here, the student is led on a journey that examines the way that we live: gathering food, developing systems of communication and commerce, refining ourselves as we refine our societies. Insightful study material is included on marriage and family and psychology and culture -- demonstrating to the student reader that the other courses in his undergraduate curriculum have been specifically aligned to help him form a deep understanding of his place within the infinite fabric of society.

Recommended as a teaching text in all cultural anthropology courses at the undergraduate level -- noted for its clear writing and its well-organized format that will help the novice slowly become acquainted with the subject matter. Further recommended to all libraries at the college level for its long-term reference value. The new edition comes with an interactive CD-ROM functional in both Windows and Macintosh systems.

Order at amazon.com, or go prenhall.com

ACCOUNTING/ECONOMICS


NONPROFIT HOSPITALS

AS TAX-EXEMPT

HOLDING COMPANIES


AUDITS OF NONPROFIT ORGANIZATIONS. From Thomson-RIA's Electronic Library.

GUIDE TO NONPROFIT CONTROLLER’S MANUAL. Edited by Craig R. Stevens, CPA; and Horton L. Sorkin, Ph.D. Warren, Gorham & Lamont of RIA.

PRACTICAL GUIDE TO CORPORATE GOVERNANCE AND ACCOUNTING: IMPLEMENTING THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT (2005 Edition). David E. Hardesty. Warren, Gorham & Lamont.

Reviewed by Frank V. Aiello

On May 26, 2005, Mark Everson, Commissioner of the Internal Revenue Service, provided a written statement before the House Committee on Ways and Means addressing tax-exempt hospitals and health care organizations and the IRS's administration of those organizations. [1]

In his introductory remarks, Commissioner Everson pointed out that, in 2001, approximately 7,000 non-profit hospitals, clinics, cooperative health service organizations and medical research facilities controlled approximately $490 billion in assets while receiving over $500 billion in gross receipts. Yet, as Commissioner Everson stated: "...there are increasing indications that the twin cancers of technical manipulation and outright abuse that we saw develop in the profit-making segments of the economy are now spreading to pockets of the non-profit sector."

In an earlier statement made on April 5, 2005 before the Senate Committee on Finance, Commissioner Everson made several shocking representations, including these remarks:

"Some tax-exempt health care providers may not differ markedly from for-profit providers in their operations, their attention to the benefit of the community, or their levels of charity care. Further, some exempt providers have entered into joint ventures with for-profit organizations, sometimes placing their entire health care operation in the venture and transforming themselves into what is effectively a tax exempt holding company with a charitable grant-making function." (Emphasis in bold italics added). [2]

Thomson- RIA's manual, Audits of NonProfit Organizations("Audits Manual"), is part of its electronic library and serves as a superb resource for anyone wishing to make their way through what Commissioner Everson called, a morass of "multiple interrelated entities and a complex web of service and other contractual relationships...[in order to determine] whether those in control of a particular non-profit health care provider are acting more as investors for their own account or as stewards of charitable assets."

One cannot doubt, after reading Commissioner Everson's statements before both the House Committee on Ways and Means and the Senate Finance Committee, that the conduct of nonprofit hospitals is now squarely within the cross-hairs of the Internal Revenue Service - and for very good reason.

As stated in Section 900.23 of the Audits Manual, supra:

"The IRS has expressed concern over what it sees as internal abuses due to failures in governance similar to those addressed in the for-profit sector by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act . . .It appears that the IRS plans to administratively apply the basic principles of Sarbanes-Oxley to tax-exempt organizations. . . . The IRS plans to spend a significant portion of its budget increase requested from Congress to restore and reinvigorate enforcement activities, particularly with respect to tax exempt organizations."

Should any question exist as to the amount of money involved in abusive practices by tax-exempt organizations, consider the following data:

"Recent indictments of partners of a major CPA firm allegedly involved in abusive tax shelters, which in part, included the use of tax-exempt organizations, indicates a major area of IRS concern. The firm itself paid $456 million to the IRS to avoid further action against it. The IRS announced that it expected to collect $3.5 billion in taxes and penalties related to a specific tax shelter scheme. Form 8886 has been modified to require the names and addresses of parties involved in such transactions." (Audits Manual, supra, at Section 900.24).

The Audits Manual also identifies common investment fraud schemes that relate to both misappropriation of assets and fraudulent financial reporting procedures used by unscrupulous non-profit entities (in addition to identifying the symptoms of such schemes and the appropriate audit response). See Audits Manual, supra, 302.47. Likewise, the Audits Manual identifies common red flags related to cash fraud schemes. See Section 301.15.

Like the Audits Manual, the NonProfit Controller's Manual is a nuts and bolts publication designed for accountants and financial officers of non-profit organizations serving to address the impact of regulatory changes, as well as the pitfalls that can occur from a loss of nonprofit status.

"The primary privilege attributable to being any sort of nonprofit organization is freedom from the burden of federal income taxation for revenues earned related to the entities exempt purposes. The states will generally also grant freedom from state income taxes to an organization if it qualifies as exempt from federal taxes. Many states or local jurisdictions will also grant exemption from real property, personal property, sales and use, or other taxes for certain nonprofits, usually Code Sec. 501(c)(3) entities or a subset of Code Sec. 501(c)(3) entities. [fn.] Some nonprofit organizations also receive a postal-rate discount privilege and Code Sec. 501(c)(3) entities are exempt from paying federal employment taxes." NonProfit Controller's Manual, supra, at Section A1.03.

In other words, a nonprofit entity has the freedom to exist and operate without any of the tax burdens which are routinely placed on every citizen who earns an income, owns property, or buys a postage stamp.

As an example, California Revenue and Taxation Code section 23701 exempts nonprofits from state franchise and income tax. Likewise, nonprofit entities in California are exempt from the payment of real and personal property tax under Revenue and Taxation Code section 214 as long as their operating revenues do not exceed operating expenses by ten percent during a given year. This exemption in effect allows nonprofit hospitals operating in California to purchase and develop realty without any property tax consequences as long as that property is held, at least in theory, for the "community's benefit."

THE "COMMUNITY BENEFIT" STANDARD

The term, "community benefit" forms the legal underpinning which allows a nonprofit hospital to exist free from tax. However, nonprofit hospitals which fail to conform to this strict standard are little more than illusory charities and legal frauds.

The "community benefit" standard was succinctly defined by Commissioner Everson in his statement before the House Committee on Ways and Means and specifically requires that hospital meet five factors:

The governing body of the hospital must be composed of members of the community who have no financial interest in the hospital. Commissioner Everson testified: "More and more, the IRS looks to the independent board exercising its fiduciary duty to operate for the benefit of the community to differentiate the tax-exempt hospital from a for-profit operation;"
The hospital must provide an open medical staff. This requires that medical staff privileges in the hospital are available to all qualified physicians in the area, consistent with the size and nature of the hospital's facilities;
The hospital must operate a full-time emergency room and must treat all emergency patients regardless of ability to pay. In fact, all hospitals that participate in Medicare and have an emergency room must treat any patient without regard to that person's ability to pay;
The hospital must admit as patients those able to pay for their care either through private health insurance or through government insurance programs such as Medicare and Medicaid;
The hospital's excess funds must be applied to expansion and replacement of existing facilities and equipment, amortization of debt, improvement in patient care and medical training and medical research.

Summarizing the "community benefit" standard, a nonprofit hospital must operate without any profit motive whatsoever and provide free services to the poor and needy, in turn offering a substantial benefit to the community. Failure to meet this criteria could result in a loss of tax-exempt status.

As stated by the United States Supreme Court in Better Business Bureau of Washington, D.C. v. United States, (1945) 326 U.S. 279, 283: "the presence of a single...[non-exempt] purpose, if substantial in nature, will destroy the exemption regardless of the number or importance of truly...[exempt] purposes."

MONEYCHANGERS IN THE TEMPLE: EXPLOITING THE POOR AND HELPLESS

So how do such hospitals further their charitable purposes? In some cases, apparently by ignoring their charitable mission and charging the poor and/or uninsured full non-discounted rates which are typically many times over what they charge insured patients, often engaging in price-gouging and aggressive collection tactics worthy of Genghis Khan.

Many of these draconian tactics came to light with the settlement agreed to by Tenet Healthcare as a result of class action litigation which proceeded through the Superior Court of Los Angeles and finally approved by the Court on August 5, 2005.

Although Tenet Healthcare is a for-profit hospital, the settlement documents expose practices which are also used by non-profit hospitals whereby uninsured patients are charged a non-discounted rates (identified in the Tenet litigation as the hospital's "Gross Charges") and then allegedly subjecting those patients to aggressive collection tactics. Moreover, in such instances the potential cost of the treatment was allegedly never disclosed to these uninsured patients. Tenet Healthcare agreed, as part of the settlement, to provide its uninsured patients with discounted prices at rates comparable to the hospital's current managed-care rates for like services. [3]

Similar litigation against non-profit hospitals is proceeding throughout the United States. For instance, in Illinois, the Legal Assistance Foundation of Metropolitan Chicago filed suit against Our Lady of Resurrection Medical Center, claiming that the hospital violated the Illinois Consumer Fraud Act by charging uninsured patients two to four times as much as it charged insured patients. [4]

As this article is being written, Catholic Healthcare West, ("CHW") a nonprofit hospital chain operating hospitals in California, Nevada and Arizona, is reported to have settled a lawsuit accusing the healthcare giant of overcharging uninsured patients. According to an article written by Dale Kasler and published in the Sacramento Bee on June 15, 2006, CHW agreed to send notices to 700,000 patients notifying them of their eligibility for refunds or rate adjustments related to such overcharging.

Coincidentally, the CHW settlement occurred days after the Consejo de Latinos Unidos, a national advocacy group for uninsured patients, alerted Congressional investigators that CHW had filed a proposed discount program for uninsured patients that would exclude anyone who had or could have qualified for health insurance 24 months prior to when emergency services were rendered which, according to Consejo de Latinos Unidos' Executive Director, K. B. Forbes, would have excluded a whopping 99% of the uninsured population. As Forbes noted, almost all uninsured patients could technically qualify for expensive insurance plans -- assuming, of course, they could afford them! [5]

Contrast CHW's alleged cutthroat philosophy with the Daughters of Charity Health System which - without the prod of litigation- voluntarily adopted a universal discount policy for uninsured patients whereby the uninsured would be charged no more than what managed care companies pay for the same services. [6]

Readers should note that this is not the first time CHW has been linked to controversy over its billing practices. According to a press release from the Department of Justice dated August 9, 2001, CHW agreed to pay the United States $10,750,000 to settle claims that four of its hospitals in California and Arizona had violated the Federal False Claims Act by seeking federal reimbursement for Medicare and TRICARE (the military health program) procedures which were not actually reimbursable. [7]

Notwithstanding CHW's legal troubles, an article in the Chronicle of Philanthropy by Harvey Lipman and Grant Williams dated February 5, 2004, disclosed that not only did CHW's chief executive officer, Lloyd H. Dean, have one of the highest annual salaries of an officer of a charitable entity (reputed to be $1.2 million in 2001), he also was the recipient of additional generosity from CHW in the form of a $2 million interest-free housing loan (which had allowed CEO Dean to acquire a penthouse condominium overlooking the San Francisco Bay). Lipman and Williams also reported that although California law requires nonprofit entities to obtain the approval from the State Attorney General's office before making loans, the state apparently makes an exception for charities providing mortgages to newly hired officials. [8]

Even more troubling is the fact that, although California enacted the Nonprofit Integrity Act of 2004 (which was intended to transfer many of the financial and accounting requirements of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 to nonprofit entities operating in California), hospitals are not subject to the perimeters of this Act.

Apparently the California legislature is not alone in its generosity toward non-profit hospitals and health care operators. According to an excellent article in Mother Jones by reporters Julia Reynolds and David Montero entitled "Doctored Books", Richard Scuggs (an attorney who has filed a class action against thirteen of the country's largest non-profit hospital organizations alleging abuses against the poor and uninsured) "contends that the liquid assets of the nation’s non-profit hospital chains could actually exceed the liquid assets of all 50 states." [9]

PROPOSED REMEDIES: THE USE OF PRIVATE WATCHDOGS, WHISTLEBLOWERS AND THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT

One of the mechanisms used by nonprofit hospitals to obtain such levels of wealth addressed by Attorney Scruggs is through the manipulation of joint ventures between nonprofit and for-profit entities to create what Commissioner Everson pointed out to the House Committee on Ways and Means is "effectively a tax-exempt holding company with a charitable grant-making function." [10]

As a result, Commissioner Everson makes no secret of the fact that the IRS intends to promote "transparency" by exposing required filings by nonprofit entities to public scrutiny. As Commissioner Everson stated before the House Committee on Ways and Means:

" Beginning this year, we are imaging all Forms 990. We put this information on CDs, and provide it to members of the public, including a number of watchdog groups that monitor charitable organizations. These groups post the information on their websites, where it is available to the press and to the public. This process has resulted in increased press and public scrutiny of the tax-exempt sector, which we believe is highly desirable."

Specifically, in the Audits Manual, supra, the authors identify when a nonprofit's controlling financial interest in a for-profit entity must be disclosed:

"The basic criterion in determining if a for-profit entity should be consolidated into a nonprofit reporting organization is whether the organization has a controlling financial interest in the for-profit entity. A controlling financial interest is evidenced by ownership of a majority voting interest except when the majority voting interest does not provide control . . . Thus, if the nonprofit organization controls a majority of the voting interest in the for-profit entity (either directly or indirectly), the for-profit entity's activities should be consolidated into the nonprofit organization's financial statements." Audits Manual, supra, Section 703.3.

Therefore, a nonprofit organization must consolidate a related for-profit entity in which it has a controlling financial interest. However, a nonprofit organization may only form partnerships, joint ventures, or enter into contracts with private parties to further its charitable interest "so long as the nonprofit organization does not thereby impermissibly serve private interests." See Redlands Surgical Services 113 T.C. 47, 92-93 (1999), aff'd 242 F.3d 904; see also; Rev.Rul. 98-15, 1998-1 C.B. 718.

In Redlands, supra, the Tax Court held the nonprofit partner lacked either formal or informal control of the partnership sufficient to ensure the furtherance of charitable purposes. The Ninth Circuit affirmed the Tax Court, holding that relinquishing "effective control" of partnership activities to the for-profit partner impermissibly serves private interests. 242 F.3d at 904.

In a subsequent case, the Fifth Circuit Court of Appeal in St. David's Health Care System v. United States, 349 F.3d 232, 236-237 (5th Cir. 2003), held that a "non-profit should lose its tax-exempt status if it cedes control to the for-profit entity." Id. at p. 239. Moreover, the Court held that a determination of whether a nonprofit entity that enters into a partnership with a for-profit entity operates exclusively for charitable purposes is not limited to "whether the partnership provides some (or even an extensive amount of) charitable services." Rather, the nonprofit partner must also have the "capacity to ensure that the partnership's operations further charitable purposes." Id. at p. 243.

The Audits Manual, supra, notes that "nonprofit organizations are becoming increasingly involved in real estate transactions, either independently or as part of joint ventures with for-profit organizations." Section 903.22. Indeed, many nonprofit hospitals are involved in the acquisition and development of real property that, for all intents, allows these entities to act as tax-exempt redevelopment vehicles, transforming vast tracts of real estate into their public image. However, in reality, such activities often produce income from activities that are actually "unrelated" to the supposed charitable mission of the nonprofit organization which gave rise to its tax-exempt status in the first place (in turn producing "unrelated business income)."

The Audits Manual also notes at Section 903.3 that "[t]he organization's tax-exempt status may be jeopardized if too large a portion of an organization's revenue comes from unrelated business income" (although at present, neither the Tax Code nor the IRS defines what constitutes too large a portion of total revenue). Nevertheless: "[t]he key to successful retention of tax exempt status is clear control of [such ventures with for-profit entities] by the nonprofit organization. The IRS has indicated that such evidence of clear control would ideally include documentation (e.g. a written acknowledgment or "agreement") that the charitable purposes of the tax-exempt organization are protected within the joint venture and that the organization continues to operate in accordance with its mission." (Section 903.22.)

What is also becoming increasingly clear is that the IRS intends to engage in stringent enforcement actions -- including the use of private "watchdogs " -- to monitor the activities of nonprofit entities including nonprofit hospital chains. In this regard, Senator Charles Grassley, Chairman of the U.S. Senate Committee on Finance, recently acknowledged that the IRS's Informants' Rewards Program is due for an overhaul and that the IRS can no longer afford to treat whistleblowers, according to Senator Grassley, "like skunks at the picnic." California's Franchise Tax Board recently proposed a plan similar to the Informants' Reward Program, offering confidential informants as much as ten percent of unpaid collected taxes. Such programs, if government agencies are willing to actively use them, provide powerful financial incentives for whistleblowers and watchdogs to monitor the activities of nonprofit entities.

The Sarbanes-Oxley Act ("Sarbanes-Oxley") was enacted into law in 2002 as a result of the collapse of Enron and WorldCom, which disclosed the worst accounting and financial reporting scandals in decades. As David E. Hardesty makes clear in his Practical Guide ("Guide") to corporate governance in the wake of this legislation, management is intimately involved in the implementation of Sarbanes-Oxley:

"The Act and the SEC regulations require management to report on the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting. This means that management must document internal controls that ensure the proper recording of financial information and the safeguarding of corporate assets, test these controls, and issue a report to investors regarding the effectiveness of controls. Independent auditors are then required to examine management's documentation, testing and evaluation, and give an opinion as to whether they agree with management's assessment. In addition, auditors must independently assess and express an opinion on the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting." (Guide. Section 10).

Even though Sarbanes-Oxley presently only applies to publicly traded corporations, Commissioner Everson and the IRS clearly intend to request independent audits of the accounting systems of nonprofit hospital chains in the future. As the Guide makes clear:

"Several of the criminal provisions either created or stiffened by Sarbanes-Oxley apply directly to non-profits. In addition, the GAO has issued new standards for government audits that incorporate Sarbanes-Oxley concepts . . .The provisions of the Act that apply specifically to nonprofits are those relating to obstruction of justice, fraud, and whistleblowers. Nonprofits can be subject to federal prosecution under these sections when they receive federal funding." (Guide. Section 1302).

Moreover, the IRS is also moving aggressively to enforce sanctions against the private inurement of nonprofit assets by insiders: "Thus far, the IRS has announced the levying of tens of millions of dollars in fines related to inurement, primarily related to excess compensation, and the loss of exempt status for some nonprofit organizations" Audits Manual, Section 901.4. Analysis of excess benefits transactions are also well covered in the Nonprofit Controller's Manual at Sections B9.10[11][b].

It is also becoming apparent that the IRS intends to provide a portion of its resources to private individuals and potential whistleblowers and is engaged in cooperative efforts with organizations such as the National Association of State Charitable Officials (NASCO) in order to reduce abuses of the non-profit tax exemption by health care providers. For instance, as the result of a federal grant, NASCO has completed a national database, NASCONet, providing in depth information on myriad tax-exempt organizations. See Audits Manual, Section 900.2.

ADDITIONAL REMEDIES

Apparently, many nonprofit hospitals have forgotten that the benefits of their tax-exempt status come with a heavy price. Over fifty years ago, the California Supreme Court held that all the assets of a corporation organized exclusively for charitable purposes must be deemed to be impressed with a charitable trust by virtue of the express declaration of the corporation's purposes...." See Pacific Home v. County of Los Angeles (1953) 41 Cal.2d 844, 852.

Basically, the assets of a non-profit hospital do not belong to the board members administering that hospital, nor to any of its employees; rather, those assets belong to the people serviced by that organization and may be used solely to further the charitable purposes of the non-profit entity.

Thus, in Queen of Angels Hospital v. Younger, 66 Cal.App. 3d 359 (1977), the California Court of Appeal held that a nonprofit hospital must abide by the strict letter of its charitable purpose and refused to allow the hospital corporation to use the proceeds it earned from a lease with a for-profit entity. The court held that the hospital must remain true to its charitable mission which, in that instance, was solely to operate a hospital.

Therefore, in those worst-case scenarios which are now slowly coming to light, courts and the public have a range of remedies available to them to combat such abuses, remedies which include the imposition of a constructive trust, the appointment of a receiver, and the removal of the nonprofit's board (in addition to specific statutory remedies which may be available in different states).

What all this tells us is that the IRS and the United States Courts are sending a series of clear messages to nonprofit abusers of the tax system, and specfically nonprofit hospitals. And their message? Entities profiting by manipulation and exploitation of the American taxpayer will be exposed to both litigation and possible criminal prosecution in the years to come.

These manuals by Thomson-RIA and Warren, Gorham & Lamont are impeccable resources which detail the taxation requirements as related to nonprofit filers, the information imparted in clear and comprehensive terms. For decades, Thomson-RIA has been synonymous with the U.S. Tax Code, as professionals have turned to the publisher for the most up-to-date analysis of these ultra-complicated topics. Accordingly, each of these manuals is multi-dimensional in scope, serving a multitude of audiences with equal precision (including tax attorneys, corporate auditors, CPAs and graduate-level Accounting instructors charged with preparing student readers for careers in American business whereby they will be responsible for insuring tax compliance on the part of a corporate entity). ~The Editor.


FOOTNOTES


[1] The full text of Commissioner Everson’s written statement before the House Committee on Ways and Means can be found on the internet at nacua.org/documents/Hearing_TaxExemptHospitals.asp.

[2] The full text of Commissioner Everson’s written statement before the Senate Committee on Finance can be found at irs.gov/pub/irs-tege/metest040505.pdf.

[3] The complete settlement documents pursuant to this litigation can be found on the world-wide web at this link-location: hagens-berman.com/tenet_healthcare_settlement;jsessionid=aI3EZIt5rVG_.

[4] The Care Gap: Unequal Treatment of the Uninsured at Resurrection Hospitals (AFSCME Council 31, May 2005) isreferenced to a June 12, 2006 article from the PR Newswire Association.

[5] See insurancenewsnet.com/print.asp?n=1&lnid=395385633.

[6] hispanicbusiness.com/news/news_print.asp?id+25848.

[7] View the full text of thisat usdoj.gov/opa/pr/2001/August/391civ.htm.

[8] Find the Lipman and Williams article on the web here: philanthropy.com/free/articles/v16/i08/08000601.htm.

[9] Interested readers can access the entire text of this article by going to motherjones.com/news/update/2004/06/06_300.html.

[10] A highly informative website, wherethemoneygoes.com, examined the Federal Tax Form 990 for one nonprofit entity, Stanford Hospitals and Clinics ("SHC"), discovering that SHC has a 100% interest in Menlo Health Alliance, Inc. ("MHA"), a wholly owned California taxable corporation, further documenting that both the President and CFO of SHC are also officers in MHA. Moreover, their salaries as officers of MHA are paid by the nonprofit entity. According to this website, Stanford Hospitals and Clinics accumulated over one-half billion dollars in cash and marketable assets from year end 8/3/03.

Order each of these titles from amazon.com, or go to riathomson


This article is intended as a general discussion of relevant principles of law and is provided for informational purposes only. If the reader has questions about specific situations, he/she should consult a duly licensed and active member of the bar in their area of residence. All cases and/or statutes cited in this article should be read directly by the reader as to holding or content. The description, analysis and interpretation of the cases and legal principles discussed are the author's own and the reader may not rely upon them in place of reading and evaluating the material directly.
© Frank Aiello. 2006. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.
Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work (witha particular expertise in matters of insurance law). He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco. Reach him via
The Electric Review.

divider


THOMSON SOUTH-WESTERN

&

WEST'S FEDERAL TAXATION

By John Aiello

WEST’S INTERNAL REVENUE CODE OF 1986 AND TREASURY REGULATIONS: ANNOTATED AND SELECTED. 2006 edition. (From West’s Federal Taxation Series). James E. Smith. Thomson/South-Western.

Even accountants find the Internal Revenue Code cumbersome to navigate and difficult to decipher -- an avalanche of data that requires keen attention to every last detail. Moreover, for students new to the discipline, the prospect of researching elements of the I.R. Code can be absolutely overwhelming, with clusters of information coming at them in rapid-fire succession.

In West’s Internal Revenue, James Smith (an esteemed Professor of Accounting at the College of William and Mary) has compiled an alternative text to the massive Code and Regulations volume, with Smith’s treatise specifically designed to provide an overview of the Code in a direct and clear-cut format. Here, Smith uses a variety of features, including sharply written editorial summaries, as a means to cut to the core of the code selections which have been stitched together to build this text.

The goal of West’s Internal Revenue is to serve the student reader by teaching them to analyze the tax code and interpret its myriad intricacies. To this end, Smith has taken the I.R.Code of 1986 and used it as a basis to demonstrate how to extract relevant information and then apply to an individual tax problem. Major topic areas covered in the text include income taxes, estate and gift taxes, employment taxes, excise taxes, procedure and administration, and an overview of the Joint Committee on Taxation. There is also a well-developed glossary specifically designed to broaden the reader’s general understanding of tax terms.

In addition to this compilation of raw data, Smith teaches us here that it’s not enough to be able to reference a particular code section; instead, an accountant must know how to process the information and be able to link it to the application of other economic and legal principles. Accordingly, Smith has constructed his "Editorial Summaries" to teach the student reader how to interpret select sections of the I.R.Code, in turn helping young minds gain firm insight into the tax code’s often complex and convoluted language.

All in all, West’s Internal Revenue makes for a cost-efficient and easy-to-use manual on the I.R.Code of 1986, with inclusion of the most up-to-date information on the Jobs Creation Act of 2004, the Working Families Tax Relief Act of 2004 and the Jobs and Growth Tax relief Reonciliation Act of 2003 - all major areas of importance for accountants and tax attorneys as we proceed toward the year 2005 filing deadline.

Recommended to instructors of Federal Taxation courses as a in-class text that strives to bring students a clearer understanding of the Internal Revenue Code. Further recommended to law libraries as a general reference text.

WEST FEDERAL TAXATION. INDIVIDUAL INCOME TAXES. 2006 edition. William H. Hoffman, Jr. James E. Smith. Eugene Willis. Thomson. South-Western.

This title is representative of the other West entries in the Federal Taxation series -- a heavy hitting and comprehensive tome that explores the whole of its topic in solid and complete terms.

The fact of the matter is that the complex nature of the U.S. tax system puts the onus on the tax-payer to stay current with the material. In addition, the Tax Code is in constant flux, with code sections changing sometimes on a yearly basis. The long and the short of it is that it takes great focus to move through the regulations of our taxation system, and no one can do it without a dependable resource to lean on.

The 2006 edition of Individual Income Taxes is just the text to accomplish this, for it dissects the core of the tax code in a manner that is conducive to relatively easy access by the reader. As noted by the title, this volume specifically focuses on taxation matters as related to the individual, including information on the American Jobs Creation Act of 2004 which will be of major interest to most readers.

However, just as important as the broad-based topic coverage, are the extra features included here. The newest edition of TurboTax Premier is now a part of this West release, and it is simply the best tax software currently available on the market (as TurboTax contains all applicable IRS forms and salient direction on how to accurately prepare your return and maximize your savings). In addition, readers receive on-line access to both TaxBrain tax preparation software and RIA’s Checkpoint student edition on-line Tax Research Database -- two invaluable tools that are aimed at preparing student-learners to hone their research skills while building a relationship with the American system of taxation.

This selection comes highly recommended to instructors of Federal Taxation courses as a primary class text -- truly notable for its depth, clarity and organization. Additionally, this volume has relevance to the general reader who does his own tax return: Given the hourly rate charged by tax preparation professionals, this text will pay for itself immediately.

Of Related Interest

WEST FEDERAL TAXATION 2006 - COMPREHENSIVE. With RIA and Turbo Tax features. In the 29th Edition. Eugene Willis. William H. Hoffman, Jr.. David M. Maloney. William A. Raabe. Thomson. South-Western.

In addition to Tax Code regulations that impact the individual, this pace-setting volume includes the specific code sections that apply to the corporation -- with the same extra features noted in the preceding review coming together to transform it into a multi-dimensional resource with varied aspects and levels.

Appropriate for instructors of Federal Taxation courses as a primary class text. Further recommended to the practicing CPA in both the private and corporate sector for its comprehensive coverage of the most recent changes to the Tax Code.

WEST FEDERAL TAXATION Of BUSINESS ENTITIES. With RIA and Turbo Tax features. 2006 Edition. Eugene Willis. James E. Smith. David M. Maloney. William A. Raabe. Thomson. South-Western.

Here, the authors switch gears somewhat, looking at taxation from the point-of-view of the business entity itself, with a strict emphasis on tax concepts rather than the individual requirements of the Tax Code. Thus, this text is directed at ways the taxpayer/business owner can make long-range decisions that incorporate relevant tax issues into their thinking: the idea being to plan in advance for tax consequences so that there are no unmanageable surprises come the yearly filing deadline.

Appropriate for CPAs in both the private and corporate sector because of its crisp and sharp style and because of the authors’ priestly knowledge of their subject. Would also prove useful to the general reader/business owner who might benefit handsomely by a reading volume that stresses the necessity of developing long-term tax-planning strategies.


In addition to the recommendations previously noted at the conclusion of each review, the West Federal Taxation Series is imperative to both law schools and University-level libraries which support advanced accounting programs: this is a wide-sweeping reference collection and its long-term research value is beyond question.

Order each of these titles from amazon.com


ATTORNEY ALERTS

Focusing on RIA-Thomson

By Frank V. Aiello

This column is comprised of reviews of legal and accountancy texts published by Warren, Gorham and Lamont (from the Thomson-RIA series), and examines these books in relation to important topics which will likely challenge legal practitioners over the next several decades. ~The Editor


SIDESTEPPING MINEFIELDS:

ATTORNEY FEES AFTER COMMISSIONER v. BANKS

On January 24, 2005, the United States Supreme Court issued its decision in the companion cases, Commissioner v. Banks and Commissioner v. Banaitis ("Banks"), holding that any portion of a recovery paid to the attorney as a contingent fee on the basis of a private contingent-fee contract is includable in the client’s gross income.

As a result of the ruling in Banks, any portion of attorneys fees determined to constitute a contingency fee or in which the client is determined to have an ownership interest is taxable to the client.

Moreover, if the alternative minimum tax applies, legal fees cannot be deducted at all. The Court noted that although the American Jobs Creation Act of 2004, enacted in October, 2004, contains a section ending the double taxation of contingent fees, the new provision appears to be prospective only and also only covers specific laws, principally employee discrimination and civil rights act violations listed in the legislation.

Obviously, this case will have a huge impact on awards which include punitive damages since the entire damage award is potentially includable in the taxpayer’s gross income. In cases where attorneys fees often exceed the damage award, a client may be exposed to a tax liability which exceeds the amount of the award. Attorneys who pursue cases involving the potential for punitive damage awards should clearly identify the potential for taxpayer exposure in their fee agreement.

Caveat: The fee paid to the taxpayer’s attorney in Banks was calculated solely on the basis of a private contingent fee contract absent a court-ordered fee award. Since there was no indication that the fee paid to the attorney was in lieu of statutory fees, the Court clearly left open the question of whether court awarded fees under a "fee shifting" statute such as California’s Private Attorney General Act, would be includable in the taxpayer’s gross income. Unfortunately, these issues will be left undecided until which time a future case arises to test them.

Those who have no clear idea what constitutes the "alternative minimum tax" should consider purchasing the WG&L TAX DICTIONARY by Richard A. Westin (2004 Edition, Thomson-RIA), another of RIA’s comprehensive texts for the working professional providing an understandable summary of terms relating to taxation issues. This book is standard-setting in both scope and breadth of coverage, with in depth analysis of myriad tax topics which are of deep relevance to both legal and accountancy professionals.

INSURANCE "TRUSTS"

I.

This is becoming a common marketing scheme: An insurance company acting as a trustor creates a trust instrument naming a bank as the trustee. The bank’s only duty under the trust agreement is to hold a health or disability insurance policy as the "master" policyholder. However, the insurer continues to retain all duties under the policy and continues to set and collect premiums. Policyholders who purchase the health insurance policy are automatically enrolled in the trust, but never actually see the policy. Instead, these policyholders receive certificates which expressly state that the document is not a policy of insurance. This appears to be a scheme introduced by the insurance industry to avoid having to present state mandated offerings to their policyholders. For more in depth information, read former Georgia Insurance Commissioner Tim Ryles’ informative article, Illusory Insurance Trusts and the Deceptive Marketing of Health Insurance.

II.

Clearly, these types of insurance trusts may simply be frauds on the consumer which state insurance regulators unfortunately continue to ignore.Perhaps such regulators should quickly consider purchasing a copy of Federal Income Taxation of Corporations and Shareholders by Bittaker and Eustice (Seventh Edition, Warren, Gorham & Lamont). This nationally recognized treatise provides a wealth of information to guide us through the complicated world of insurance products, and attorneys would be well-served to study this information carefully. For example, the authors point out that a business trust will only be recognized by Federal taxing authorities if " the required business purpose may be discerned from the trustee’s powers to develop or diversify the trust’s assets, even if those powers are not exercised." (§2.03 (2), p. 2-18). However, Dr. Ryles points out in his article that courts are now beginning to recognize that such insurance "trusts" are merely clever artifices which allow the insurer to maintain total control of the trust fund and without actually ever having to deliver its customers an insurance policy. In fact, the Maryland Court of Appeals recognized this fact in Guardian Life Insurance Company of America v. Insurance Commissioner of the State of Maryland, et al. (cited in Dr. Ryles' article), stating: "In actuality, because Guardian is in total control of the trust fund, the trustee is at best, an entity without substance, and therefore cannot protect its ‘policyholders’." Bittaker’s and Eustice’s text covers Federal Corporate Taxation regulations in great detail, and builds a vital resource for both attorney and accountant.

DEATH SPIRALS

Another scam becoming increasingly common is the practice by which health (and especially long-term care) insurers sell a finite number of policies at an affordable or "teaser" price. By closing the sale of such policies, the insurer also immediately closes that particular pool of risk. Once this has occurred, premiums are then raised - often resulting in the healthier members leaving the pool in search of a cheaper product. Those who cannot afford to pay these significantly higher rates also leave the pool and just allow their policies to "lapse" (and leaving the remaining cluster of policy holders to pay the higher premiums). Upon close review, once comes to see that this is an insidious and coldly calculated practice that looks to maximize the premium dollar before the potential for risk/liability has materialized.

Any consumer who might be considering purchasing a policy of long-term care insurance should first review Professor Allen Kanner’s testimony which was rendered before Congress, as Mr. Kanter spoke directly to the massive premium increases inflicted on his clients in North Dakota by long-term care insurers.( See U.S. Senate, Special Committee on Aging. 2000. Long-Term Care Insurance: Protecting Consumers from Hidden Rate Hikes, testimony by Allen Kanner, Hearing before the 106th Congress, September 13, 2000.) This issue is of paramount importance to retirees on fixed incomes, as some individual long term care products have had premiums increased by 45% or more in less than ten yearsand with the approval of state regulators. One must assume these same regulators were out for coffee when the rates were originally proposed and approved....

ASSET PROTECTION

AND THE LOOMING HEALTH CARE CRISIS

America’s aging citizenry has virtually no practical comprehension of the programs available to assist them in paying medical expenses or of the limitations of those programs. (These primary programs being Medicare and each state’s version of "Medicaid").

Medicare is a federal health insurance program primarily intended for all persons who are 65 and over and eligible for Social Security benefits or who are federal employees. Medicare requires the payment of monthly premiums, deductibles and coinsurance and will only pay for "skilled nursing care" ordered by a physician at a skilled nursing facility. Medicare will not pay for any benefits for individuals who require only "custodial care", i.e., assistance with daily activities. Although most people are under the impression that Medicare supplements cover anything not covered by Medicare, most supplements will only pay for skilled nursing care and do not cover custodial care.

Each state version of Medicaid (California’s version is called Medi-Cal) are joint federal and state programs originally intended for individuals with low incomes and limited assets, i.e., the state’s impoverished. In order to meet these impoverishment levels, applicants must intentionally impoverish themselves by spending down their assets to meet the state’s eligibility criteria. This cannot be legally accomplished by making gifts unless those transfers are made years before the applicant actually needs to apply, as the state can "look back" to determine when any gifts or transfers were made which would affect eligibility.

Given the sorry state of California’s finances, it should come as no surprise that the Department of Health Services has a an estate recovery program which includes the power to file liens on any real and/or personal property of elderly Medi-Cal patients (including their homes), in order to recover medical bills (including hospital and nursing home costs).

As a result of the burden on each state’s limited Medicaid resources, not to mention the bad press incurred in filing Medicaid liens which force the sale of Grandmother’s house, several states have enacted "partnership" programs with selected insurers attempting to provide incentives to individuals to provide for their own future medical and health care needs.

In such a scenario, an individual purchases a "partnership policy" (the partnership is between the state and the insurer) of long term care insurance which provides that if the policyholder requires long term care and uses up the total coverage amount of the plan benefits, the policyholder will be allowed to shelter, for purposes of Medicaid, an amount equal to the amount of benefits paid out under the plan. This dollar for dollar feature allows individuals needing long term care to qualify for Medicaid coverage without having to spend down their assets to poverty level. In effect, the policyholder can qualify for Medicaid and still shelter assets equal in value to the policy proceeds.

However, consumers should proceed with a word of caution: None of the slick brochures I have reviewed advertising the features of the partnership policy specifically state that the insurer will always review the applicant’s medical records at the time the application is made. For instance, the CalPers Partnership Plan 2002 booklet for all California public employees, schoolteachers and retirees states: "We will underwrite your application by reviewing one or more of the following: the information submitted or your application, an attending physician’s report, or medical records, a telephone interview, or an in-person assessment." Despite the fact that the applicant is required to sign an authorization for release of his or her medical records, the insurer has the option of choosing not to rely on an applicant’s medical history, but merely on the information provided on the application - -which could set the stage for big problems down the road (such as the practice of post-claims underwriting).

POST-CLAIMS UNDERWRITING

This term should be in the lexicon of every consumer who has purchased (or is thinking about purchasing) life, health, disability or long-term care insurance. Post-claims underwriting is the practice of accepting an applicant for coverage without the insurer first performing appropriate underwriting. Basically, the insurance company accepts the applicant based on the information provided on the application, takes the premium dollars, then decides on whether or not the insured is actually covered for benefits only after a claim has been made.

Post-claims underwriting has been cogently described by the California Supreme Court as the insurer’s "postponing its investigation of insurability until after the assertion of a ‘significant’ claim." Barrera v. State Farm Mut. Automobile Ins. Co. (1969) 71 Cal.2d. 659, 663. In other words, although the insurance company may request underwriting information at the time an application is made, the insurer intentionally does not assess the applicant’s eligibility for insurance until after the insurance has been purchased and the policy issued. Instead, the insurance company will rely on its post-loss investigation and begin " ‘look[ing] for all the things in the application that (it) might be able to dig up ... to rescind the policy.’ [cite] .... [R]ather than processing the claim pursuant to the appropriate coverage provisions of the policy, [the insurer] endeavors to avoid payment by engaging in an eligibility determination that should have been completed before the policy was issued." Thomas C. Cady and Georgia Lee Gates, "Post Claim Underwriting" 102 W. Va. L. Rev. (Summer, 2000) ("Cady & Gates"), pp. 809, 830.

The practice of post-claims underwriting is universally condemned and, at last count, was specifically prohibited by statute in 42 states (including California). California’s statutes deserve special mention since they contain not only a prohibition against post-claims underwriting, but also define the practice. California Insurance Code §10384 states: "No insurer issuing or providing any policy of disability insurance covering hospital, medical, or surgical expenses shall engage in the practice of post-claims underwriting. For purposes of this section, 'post-claims underwriting' means the rescinding, canceling, or limiting of a policy or certificate due to the insurer' s failure to complete medical underwriting and resolve all reasonable questions arising from written information submitted on or with an application before issuing the policy or certificate." (Emphasis added). See also: California Heath & Safety Code §1389.3 which contains similar language relating to health care service plans and Insurance Code section 10232.3 (d) relating to long-term care insurance.

As a result of the enactment of Insurance Code § 10384, insurers selling disability policies in California are prohibited from rescinding or canceling a policy if the insurer failed to complete medical underwriting and resolve all reasonable questions arising from written information submitted on or with an application. Simply, it is legally insufficient for an insurer to argue that it did not complete its medical underwriting (or failed to perform any medical underwriting whatsoever) because the insured’s application for insurance was a "clean application", i.e., an application which fails to disclose any significant medical history. The "clean application" argument is commonly used by the insurer to avoid the prohibitions against post-claim underwriting. In effect, the insurer argues that it was not obligated to review an applicant’s medical history since the application itself did not disclose any reason to do so.

However, given a literal reading of Insurance Code section 10384, an insurer selling disability or long-term care insurance in California must perform more than a cursory investigation by the insurer’s underwriters prior to issuing the policy. By specifically requiring that an insurance company "complete medical underwriting" as part of its underwriting process,California has apparently imposed a duty on insurers selling long-term care and other disability policies to conduct an independent investigation of insurability, including medical underwriting, before issuing a policy and that insurers have a statutory obligation to determine insurability through its underwriting process at the time the policy application is made, not after the claim is filed. Thus, an insurer selling any form of disability insurance who fails to complete medical underwriting at the time the application is submitted and resolve all reasonable questions arising from either the contents of the application or the circumstances surrounding the submission of the application is estopped from evaluating the risk after a claim has been filed.

If an insurer were allowed to limit its investigation solely to a review of the application to determine if the applicant possessed any significant medical history, the insurer could collect premiums for years while postponing its investigation of insurability and retain its right to rescind until after a claim is made. "Given sufficient impetus —such as chronic illness — it is likely that any health insurer will be able to find some detail within an insurer’s medical history that, post-hoc, amounts to misrepresentation." Cady & Gates, supra, p. 858.

As the Mississippi Supreme Court recognized some years ago, post-claim underwriting also harms policyholders by leading them to falsely believe that they are insured when in fact they are not and thus, depriving them of the opportunity to look elsewhere for an insurer willing to write coverage. As that Court stated:

"If an insured is not an acceptable risk, the application should be denied up front, not after a policy is issued. This allows the proposed insured to seek other coverage with another company since no company will insure an individual who has suffered serious illness or injury." Lewis v. Equity National Life Insurance Company (Miss. 1994) 637 So 2d 183, 188-189.

Likewise, the California Supreme Court stated: "An insurer may not accept premiums for two years and investigate a possible defense only after the beneficiaries file a claim. " Amex Life Assurance Company v. Superior Court (1997) 14 C. 4th 1231, 1243.

Now, let’s review again the language in that slick CalPers brochure advertising the sale of its long-term care insurance product in the context of the California prohibitions against post-claims underwriting. Despite those prohibitions and the fact that this offering is made to one of the most protected classes — the California bureaucrat —, the insurer underwriting the CalPers offering allows itself the option of limiting the scope of its review to the "information submitted on your application . . ." Further, despite the fact that the CalPers application requires a medical release from the applicant, inferring to any reasonable person that the company intends to medically underwrite the policy, applicants applying for that policy, like so many others, may be underwriting their own applications if the company chooses not to review their medical records.

These types of practices are potentially deceptive and should be treated as such by state regulators. However, until a sustained public outcry reaches their regulatory ears, consumers must realize that they are on their own to navigate these waters and should insist that their medical records be reviewed at the time the application is submitted. At the very least, an applicant should obtain a complete copy of his or her medical records and voluntarily submit those records together with the application for insurance by registered mail to either the company or the agent soliciting the business. This will provide a tangible trail of evidence in the event a claim is subsequently made and the company attempts to allege that the applicant made a material misrepresentation on his or her application concerning past medical history.

Legislatures and courts are beginning to recognize that the applicant for insurance may be in a markedly disadvantaged position. As part of the consumer protections in the sale of long term care insurance, California has imposed an independent and non-delegable duty of good faith and fair dealing and a duty of honesty on both the insurance company and the insurance agent. Interestingly, at least one appellate court has also held that the duty of care in the preparation of an application for insurance also extends from the agent to the insurer. Century Surety Co. v. Crosby Insurance, Inc. (2004) 124 Cal. App.4th 116.

Insurers engaged in post-claims underwriting might also want to consider their exposure for violation of the Health Insurance and Portability Act of 1996 which makes any fraud perpetuated upon a public or private payer a federal criminal offense. Courts are slowly beginning to recognize that corporate practices such as post-claims underwriting inevitably will transfer a portion of its business obligations to both Federal and state Medicaid programs and slowly bankrupt these public safety nets. See United States v. Lucien (2d Cir. 2003) 347 F.3d 45.

ESTATE PLANNING & WEALTH PRESERVATION

I recently reviewed the student’s edition of the text, Estate Planning and Wealth Preservation by Kathryn G. Henkel, a partner in the firm of Hughes & Luce, Dallas Texas. This is another of the comprehensive texts for both students and professionals published by Thomson-RIA and is particularly noteworthy since the author provides refreshingly straight talk rarely seen in such professional texts.

For example, many practitioners are aware that family limited partnerships have been used as a mechanism to limit the tax exposure on real property assets other than the family residence, especially when liquidity is a problem. According to Henkel, the Internal Revenue Service is quite unhappy with the discounts which can result on transfer of partnership interests - even when normal rules of valuation are applied. In a section entitled "Thoughts on the IRS Anti-Family Partnership Mission", Henkel writes:

"When you get right down to the nitty gritty, the reason that some folks at the IRS are unhappy with the documents that can result on transfers of partnerships is that they, in essence, do not like the rules of valuation which assign a value to each gift, as an individual interest without regard to any other interest, and which assign a value to both gifts and transfers at death without regard to family relationships or other holdings of the transferee . . . The IRS is approaching the family partnership issues by applying the normal rules to selected extreme fact situations and making moral outrage arguments, as well as by applying somewhat strained interpretations of Sections 2703 and 2704."

Henkel’s chapter entitled Advanced Maturity, Disability, and Serious Illness also deserves mention and should be required reading for any practitioner dealing with elder issues. Although approaching these issues from a tax standpoint, Henkel offers a wealth of practical information concerning relevant Medicare and Medicaid issues, as well as health care and disability documents such as medical powers of attorney. In addition, the author is careful to touch upon the emotional aspects of planning for the elderly, offering pertinent direction on steps attorneys should take in preparing older clients for these difficult life decisions.

THE PERFECT STORM:

APPLYINGTHE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

The Sarbanes-Oxley Act (known in American business and legal circles by the sobriquets, "Sox" and/or "Sarbox") was enacted in response to the Enron implosion as a mechanism to curb abuses and outright fraud in American business.

Sarbanes-Oxley contains both civil and criminal penalties and applies to all United States publicly traded corporations, all non-public companies whose debt instruments are publicly traded and all foreign companies registered to do business in the United States. The potential impact of Sarbanes-Oxley on companies, both foreign and domestic, is immense -especially since various provisions of the law were intended to place their directors and officers in personal peril for specific illegal conduct.

In the massive tome, Handbook of Accounting and Auditing By Barry J. Epstein (Thomson-RIA, 2005), the author reviews the impact of Sarbanes-Oxley on auditors pursuant to Section 404 of the Act. The author states that "[s]ection 404 also requires that every registered public accounting firm . . That prepares or issues an audit report on a company’s annual financial statements to attest to, and report on, the assessment made by management.". From here, Epstein goes on to identify the precise type of audit reporting required under the Act, including the identification of material weaknesses in the company. Epstein points out that although an expansive view of the audit function has been in effect since the enactment of the Federal Corrupt Practices Act in 1977; however, according to the rules adopted under the Act:

"Management is precluded from determining that a company’s internal control over financial reporting is effective if it identifies one or more material weaknesses in the company’s internal control over financing reporting, For purposes of the final rules, the term, ‘material weakness’ has the same definition under GAAS [Generally Accepted Accounting Standards] and attestation standards. The final rules also specify that management’s report must include disclosure of any ‘material weakness’ in the company’s internal control over financial reporting identified by management in the course of its evaluation."

Make no mistake - this is dense stuff. However, the effect of Section 404 and the rules adopted for its enforcement mean that a company and its primary officers can no longer rely on canned audits which supply false information to regulators and shareholders (all with the obvious effect of falsely inflating the values of those companies, i.e, "cooking the books").

In the treatise, Internal Auditing Manual by Stephen W. Head (Warham Gorham and Lamont, 2004), the author — who is responsible for publishing professional guidance standards followed by over 30,000 practitioners worldwide — identifies a laundry list of fraudulent activity over the last twenty years from the savings and loan scandals (Remember Charles Keating?), to the junk bond securities frauds which earned a $650 million dollar fine for Drexel, Burnham, Lambert (as well as an equivalent fine and jail sentence for Michael Milkin), to the financial reporting frauds by publicly held companies such as Miniscribe Corporation and Phar-Mor, Inc., the latter resulting in losses in excess of $1 billion to investors.

As Head notes, "[s]uch financial frauds and irregularities as these draw much publicity and attention. But they are far from representing the entire extent of fraudulent activity. In the health care filed alone, fraud and abuse are estimated to exceed $50 billion each year . . ."

A nuclear devise buried within the Sarbanes-Oxley Act — and interestingly, a provision which has received comparatively little press — is Section 304 of the Act. Section 304 provides exposure for potential civil penalties designed to weaken the bowels of every CEO and/or CFO of a publicly traded company who is aware of or has allowed material information regarding that company to be hidden from its shareholders, regulatory authority, and/or traders of its stock. Section 304, which is limited solely to the CEO or CFO of such companies, requires those officers to disgorge any personal profit received which resulted from such nondisclosure in connection with financial reporting requirements.

Let’s take a hypothetical situation where Section 304 might be used to disgorge profits acquired by the primary corporate officers. Let’s pretend that a CEO of a publicly traded insurance company purchases a losing and closed book of business from another insurer. The due diligence report discloses no information regarding the unprofitablity of the product, and the CEO does not disclose on the company’s annual statement any information regarding the potential for massive losses from claims which can be anticipated in the future. The purchase of this book of business provides the company with an increased market share for the short term, and both the CEO and CFO of the company acquire substantial stock options as part of their compensation package. Stock values of the company increase and both the CEO and CFO exercise their options and sell their stock for a massive profit, all before the losses resulting from the acquisition begin to materialize.

Corporate patriarchs— and the lawyers they hire — are well aware of the potential for disgorgement (as well as the defenses available to them due to Congress’s failure to define terms in the act such as "misconduct" or "profits," further neglecting to identify whether this type of corporate misconduct is limited to simple negligence or requires some level of gross misconduct). Moreover, there is some question whether Section 304 penalties could violate the "Excessive Fines Clause" which require that any penalty levied must be proportional to the gravity of the defendant’s offense. See United States v. Bajakajian (1998) 524 U.S. 321, 337.

At this juncture, Sarbanes-Oxley remains potent, but untested. As Stephen Head bluntly points out in his excellent overview of the Act:

"A skeptic could observe that almost nothing can stop dishonest management from circumventing the best-intended system of internal controls. Publicly held companies wishing to avoid the rules could go private. Greed will still be present at some companies. Pressure to maximize profit could still cause people to cut corners. At a minimum, however, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act has gotten the attention of the business community. At best, a new era of transparency has begun."

LIFE AFTER CAMPBELL

In State Farm v. Campbell (2003) 538 U.S. 408, the United States Supreme Court held that the amount of any punitive damage award must be reasonable and proportional to the amount of harm suffered by the plaintiff, and State courts were quick to seize upon the strictures mandated in Campbell.

For instance, in Diamond Woodworks v. Argonaut Insurance (2003) 109 Cal.App. 4th 1020, a California Appellate Court held that "anything exceeding [a] four-to-one [ratio] would not comport with due process and Campbell." (109 Cal. App. 4th at 1055.) Despite a wealth of articles outlining mechanisms to avoid the caps on punitive damages addressed in Campbell, attorneys should consider coming to grips with the plain fact that giant punitive damage awards enriching one individual Plaintiff leaves a bad taste in the mouths of both appellate courts - and the public.

As a result of the United Supreme Court’s decisions in Campbell and Commissioner v. Banks (reviewed above), Plaintiffs’ attorneys will have to closely evaluate both the facts of a potential case as well as the contents of their fee agreements before expending huge amounts of time, money and resources.

However, potent resources for recovery still remain available, primarily in the form of treble damage provisions in many state anti-trust, civil rights, and racketeering statutes. As an example, the elderly whose claims are targeted for post-claims underwriting by insurance companies may be able to sue under the provisions of California Civil Code section 51 (Unruh Civil Rights Act).

In addition, attorneys could also initiate separate qui tam actions against insurers. In California, insurance fraud qui tam actions are authorized by Insurance Code section 1871.7 (e) (1). Insurance Code section 1871.7 (b) creates civil liability for violations of Penal Code section 550. Penal Code section 550 provides that it is a crime to conceal or knowingly fail to disclose the occurrence of any event that affects a person’’s initial or continued right to entitlement to any insurance benefit or payment. In addition to civil penalties, this section also provides for an assessment of three times the amount of each claim for compensation. Although qui tam actions have been used as a mechanism by insurers against its insureds as well as the attorneys, doctors and others engaged in illegal schemes to procure insurance proceeds, there is no reason why this statute cannot be invoked and turned against the companies themselves.

RECAPPING THESE RIA RESOURCES

Notable topics of coverage in Federal Income Taxation of Corporations and Shareholders include a detailed and comprehensive analysis of corporate taxation, the corporation income tax, and penalty taxes. The very effective supplement to this text also identifies proposals by the Bush Administration in 2003, including a proposal to fully exclude dividends paid out of previously taxed corporate earnings. As the authors point out: " Needless to say, enactment of that proposal would have a major impact on much of the material contained in this work (however, enactment was certainly not a foregone conclusion). "

Notable topics of coverage in Epstein’s Handbook of Accounting and Auditing include detailed analysis of financial disclosure requirements, the auditor’s role in financial reporting especially in light of the expanded requirements for independent auditing under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, as well as a comprehensive overview of SEC reporting.

Notable topics of coverage in Head’s Internal Auditing Manual include a superb chapter on business fraud and business ethics, preventive measures which can be used to curb such fraud, red flags identifying possible fraudulent activity, and a sample ethical-decision making model.

Other notable texts by Warren, Gorham and Lamont include (1) Handbook of Modern Finance, David E. Logue and James K. Seward, Editors, (2005-I Edition) - which provides an overview of financial systems, the international monetary system, national and international money markets and the instruments used in those markets, as well as analysis of the growing use of credit financing and the business environments and the forces driving the need for such financing; and (2) Tax Planning for Family Wealth Transfers by Howard M. Zaritsky (Fourth Edition), which includes discussion of both strategies and forms for various types of inter-family transfers, such as trusts, family partnerships, family corporations, and limited liability companies, in addition to analysis of the potential tax risks inherent in such transfers.

These texts are each highly recommended to college-level instructors who teach courses focused on the advanced practices of accounting. Each are further recommended to Certified Public Accountantsand attorneys in private practice because of their in depth analysis of the most up-to-date tax law in myriad subject areas. Further, any attorney engaged in civil work, or with a corporate-related practice, should make a point of consulting this material on a regular basis for reasons which have been explored in this column. Finally, these titles are appropriate for inclusion in all University-level libraries and, specifically, for inclusion in law libraries in both the academic and civic sectors because of their long-term reference value. ~Editor, The Electric Review

Order each of these titles fromamazon.com, or go to riathomson


This article is intended as a general discussion of relevant principles of law and is provided for informational purposes only. If the reader has questions about specific situations, he/she should consult a duly licensed and active member of the bar in their area of residence. All cases and/or statutes cited in this article should be read directly by the reader as to holding or content. The description, analysis and interpretation of the cases and legal principles discussed are the author's own and the reader may not rely upon them in place of reading and evaluating the material directly.
© Frank Aiello. 2005. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.
Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work (witha particular expertise in matters of insurance law). He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco. Reach him via The Electric Review.

POLITICAL SCIENCE

EDUCATING ISRAEL: Educational Entrepreneurship in Israel’s Multicultural Society. Yehuda Ben Shalom. Palgrave/Macmillan.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

As this review is being written, Israel is again locked in a battle with its Arab foes, exchanging bombs across the border Lebanon, writing the tale of a tragedy which carries with it the seeds to begin World War III.

Educating Israel is identified as a comparative ethnography of five Israeli schools. In turn, an examination of these schools offers a glimpse of not only how Israeli society has viewed its neighboring Arab and Muslim cultures, but also sheds light on how alternative educational systems in Israel ("community schools") offer an opportunity for change.

As the author notes in his preface (describing one such school):

"The Democratic School in Hadera offers a radical educational alternative to regular Israeli schools. Of all the schools discussed in this book, the distinguishing feature of this school is that the problem it addresses is of a universal rather than uniquely Israeli character. Nevertheless, the school adds an important voice to the discourse on education and on democracy and civics in Israel’s discourse that is negligible or nonexistent within Israeli society."

Throughout the text, Ben Shalom refers to the "Ideology of Repair," a phrase taken from the traditional Jewish term, “Tikkun,” meaning the repairing or mending of a society. Ben Shalom notes that this mending of Israeli society necessarily will require an encounter with the "other," which in the past has unfortunately meant a rejection of any person, idea or culture which interfered with a monolithic Israeli identity:

"[T]his ideology contains remnants of the Jewish Socialist ethos that has undergone many changes over the years, (but has not completely disappeared) alongside a conscious rapproachment of some of the Jewish texts that discuss one’s responsibility toward those who are different, weak, or alien. [fn.]" [p. 144.]

According to Ben Shalom, Israeli society has rejected Zionism; instead, it has started to adopt the values of Western capitalism, a trend which has come at a huge social cost:

"Many people have been injured due to the rising level of alienation in Western consumer societies. This alienation leads many to seek alternatives to the social interaction that is gradually vanishing form the human landscape. [fn.] There has also been a decline in the level of public discourse relating to the search for common goals and values. [fn.] A growing tendency to nihilism accentuates the emergence of materialism and extensive consumerism as ostensibly desirable models for human behavior. Radical and extreme individualism, manifested widely in the media, politics, and economics cannot meet the needs of the human spirit. [fn.] In my opinion, the atomization of Israeli society into communities of difference reflects a protest against this radical and materialistic individualism, among other causes." [p. 133.]

Such community schools are viewed as "subversive" in that they "constitute a voice of protest within Israeli society against the uncritical addiction to the values of materialism and excessive consumerism as a means of achieving happiness." [p. 135.]

Likewise, the attitudes of both the teachers and managers of such schools can also be considered contrary to the values of Western corporate materialism. For instance, Ben Shalom noted that each of the principals of the five schools covered "do not accept the general political direction adopted by society. On the whole, they can be identified with a nonbougeois, left-wing approach…” [p. 139.]

As Ben Shalom notes in his concluding remarks, although Israeli society is now at a serious crossroads, the principals and educators discussed in his text appear committed to a complete overhaul of Israeli society and its myriad social structures. Accordingly, this text is a clearly written and informative analysis of how that change may be taking place before the eyes of the world.

Recommended as either a primary or supporting class text inPolitical Science courses focused on analysis of the Israeli society. Further recommended to all college-level libraries as a general reference text.

Of Related Interest From Palgrave:

HUGO CHÃVEZ: Oil, Politics, and the Challenge to the U.S. Nikolas Kozloff. Palgrave-Macmillan.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

Refreshingly, Nikolas Kozloff does not pretend to be an "objective journalist" in this text. Instead, Kozloff often speaks in the first person narrative in describing the rise of Hugo Chavez as both a national leader and international player in the world of geopolitical oil.

Kozloff makes no secret of the fact that he views "free trade" agreements such as the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) and the Free Trade Area of the Americas (FTAA) as instruments of economic repression supported by the United States, the International Monetary Fund and the World Bank, these trade policies that stress "deregulation, privatization of state industries, implementation of austerity plans and trade liberalization." [Page 37].

Kozloff defines "neoliberalism" as follows:

"In essence, neoliberalism advocates maximum and efficient exploitation of the world’s resources, including labor, raw materials, and markets. Under structural adjustment, countries were obliged to remove obstacles to foreign investment and force governments to orient their economies to produce exports typically produced by or sold to multinationals. Neoliberalism then is similar to the idea of globalization, which has stressed a trade-liberalized planet…" [Pages 37-38.]

If all this sounds like dialogue from Hyman Roth’s birthday party in The Godfather, Part II, readers should remember that the United States has a well-documented history of meddling in the affairs of its South and Central American neighbors. That history includes some sordid tidbits generally ignored by scholars and historians-- such as the assassination of Charlemagne Peralte by an American Marine (Peralte was a Haitian guerilla leader who led peasant farmers in the so-called Caco War against an occupation by U.S. Marines who were in place to protect American business interests), and the Dan Mitrione affair.

Mitrione, a former Indiana policeman working for the United States government who reputedly trained Brazilian and Uruguayan police as well as SAVAK (the Shah of Iran’s secret police) in effective torture techniques, was subsequently kidnapped by Tupamaro guerillas and executed. Mitrione’s funeral was quite the high-profile affair attended by top officials of the Nixon administration.

Readers watching the nightly news and the invasion of America’s southern borders by desperate illegals might do well to read Kozloff’s passage in the text regarding Mexico’s forced devaluation of the peso in order to attract foreign investments:

"The devaluation proved devastating, with 8 million families being pushed from the middle class into poverty. The agreement, they charged, would intensify NAFTA’s ‘race to the bottom’ by imposing deregulation and business-friendly privatization throughout the hemisphere. [fn.] Critics charged that the business community enjoyed unprecedented power over the FTAA negotiating process and no mechanisms were set in place to address labor, human rights, consumer safety and environmental concerns. [page 40].

In his opening chapter, Kozloff hurls an impressive array of statistics, such as the fact that Venezuela has the western hemisphere’s largest conventional oil reserves (reserves equal to Saudi Arabia’s reserves in addition to trillions of cubic feet of natural gas). Furthermore, Venezuela’s state-owned oil company, Pdvsa, accounts for 11.8% of U.S. imports, a statistic not lost on Chavez.

Following a coup attempt in April, 2002,Chavez began to at least outwardly radicalize Venezuela’s social institutions. And Kozloff writes:

"At his Ministry of Popular Economy, officials have already created 6,840 cooperatives employing 210,000 people nationwide. [fn.] The new cooperatives produce everything from cheese, vegetables and fruits to baked goods, textiles and even shoes. [fn.] Crucial to Chavez’s efforts has been the banking system. Currently, regulators demand that private banks set aside 31.5 percent of all loans to agricultural projects, housing construction, tourism, and micro credits (loans to small start-up businesses)." [Page 70].

In addition, Chavez instituted “Plan Bolivar,” whereby he expanded the role of the military into realms of social and economic development. Kozloff notes that "[t]he armed forces became involved in infrastructure projects and public transportation. Additionally, troops distributed consumer goods to the poor and even provided medical services." [Page 83].

Although Plan Bolivar was not without its problems (including charges of corruption by some military officers), the practice achieved tangible results, including the vaccination of 2 million children, widespread medical assistance for the citizenry, and the repair of thousands of schools, hospitals, parks and churches. Still, none of these developments has done anything to quell the Bush Administration’s fears of Chavez’s "real intentions."

As a result of his actions, Hugo Chavez is clearly not on President Bush’s list of favorite people. Indeed, the Bush Administration may actually have played a key role in the attempted coup against Chavez which took place on April 12, 2002:

"Although Reich and senior government officials have denied there was any U.S. role in the coup or foreknowledge of a plot, the veteran Cuban-American diplomat met regularly at the White House with alleged coup plotters like Pedro Carmona. [fn.] Furthermore, Eva Golinger, a pro-Chavez lawyer based in the United States, reportedly uncovered a top-secret document showing that the Central intelligence Agency had prior knowledge of a coup plot. The document, a Senior Executive Security Brief distributed to the top 200 or so U.S. government officials, was dated April 6, 2002, six days prior to the coup. The brief showed relatively detailed knowledge of the plot." [Page 88].

Recently, the American televangelist, Pat Robertson, openly called for Chavez’s assassination. As Kozloff treatise shows, Robertson’s call for Chavez’s removal from the public stage has ominous historical roots in the use of U.S. missionaries for purposes unrelated to the Kingdom of Heaven:

"John Perkins, the author of the recently released book Confessions Of An Economic Hit Man, writes about an evangelical group called the Summer Institute of Linguistics that worked with the Huaorani Indians of the Amazon Basin during the early years of oil exploration. [fn.] Perkins, who says he was originally recruited by the super secretive U.S. National Security Agency, later worked for private corporations. His job, as he described it in a radio interview, was to get poor countries like Ecuador into debt. [fn.] According to Perkins, whenever seismologists reported to corporate headquarters that a particular region might contain oil, the summer Institute of Linguistics went in and encouraged the indigenous people to move off their land and relocate to missionary reservations." [page 154].

It is interesting to note that, throughout the regular episodes of upheaval and strife he has had to contain, Chavez has been able to artfully side-step the pervasive influence of the World Bank and International Monetary Fund over South American economies by engaging in nonmonetary barter deals with other countries, in turn avoiding the need to use the dollar as principal currency.

For example, in 2004, Venezuela supplied Argentina with emergency fuel oil in exchange for cattle, agricultural products and medical equipment. Chavez is reported to have made similar oil-for-food trades with other countries in an attempt to diversify the Venezuelan oil market into Asia (all this pointing to his emergence as a future source of concern for free trade proponents and the international corporations they serve).

In the end, Kozloff’s text is a superb and extensively documented primer on manipulation of power, oil and money in South and Central America, a study well-worth being read by anyone wishing to understand the continuing instability in the region created by centuries of colonialism and exploitation. Simply, much of the information Kozloff has stocked these pages with won’t be found anywhere on the evening news.

This text is suggested as a either a primary or supporting class text in courses analyzing the evolution of South & Central America, notable for the new information it presents and for the author’s impeccable research which compels as it teaches. In addition, recommended to libraries in both the academic and public sectors as a general reference text.

Order from amazon.com. Or direct from Palgrave.

© Frank Aiello. 2006. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.


Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via The Electric Review.

GEOLOGY/BIOLOGY

THE PNEUMOCOCCUS. Edited by Elaine I. Tuomanen. Timothy J. Mitchell. Donald A. Morrison. Brian G. Spratt. ASM Press.

This selection summarizes the latest data on the Pneumococcus, or Steptocococcus Pneumoniae -- one of the most troublesome pathogens to plague the world.

This opportunistic and elusive organism found in the upper respiratory tract of human beings has been under study by scientists for over a hundred years, yet they still have not been able to fully unlock the key to its life cycle. Thus, the potential for deadly infection remains a central concern of healthcare providers world-wide.

"In a way, our study of Pneumococcus has proved to be quite ironic," says Doctor Elaine I. Tuomanen, Chair of the Department of Infectious Diseases at St. Jude’s Children’s Hospital in Memphis, Tennessee and lead editor for this textbook. "It [Pneumococcus] has contributed more to general scientific knowledge in ways that people don’t realize; for instance, DNA was discovered in the course of research of Pneumococcus. We have had huge advances in medicine because of our study of this bacteria, yet ironically, we can’t conquer it."

The textbook Pneumococcus serves as a comprehensive study of the Streptococcus, and provides keen insight into its many layers. After a chapter which defines the foundation of the subject, multiple experts analyze the genetics, surface anatomy and microbial physiology of the pathogen. From here, the reader is taken through the host-microbe interaction by-way of a full and comprehensive study of epidemiology, including the pathogen’s primary mechanisms of carriage (the way it transmits and adheres to a host). This segment remains vital to the reader for it chronicles the point where the threat to human life begins. Finally, a discussion of the pathogen’s infiltration of the body leads into analysis of current trends in treatment and prevention.

Presently, the existence of the Pneumococcus is one of the most perplexing and challenging considerations confronting the world’s healthcare community. With the emergence of SARS (and also the Avian Flu) a few years ago, we saw just how quickly disease can spread and kill large numbers of people. In addition, the constant threat of bioterrorism we live under makes Pneumococcus an even bigger concern: if terrorists were to somehow figure a way to replicate a super-strain of the bacterium and then unleash it on the world, vast segments of the population could be wiped out. Thus, deep study into how this pathogen is able to spread, thrive and resist antibiotics is necessary.

In Pneumococcus, an esteemed group of researchers and physicians comprising the leading voices on the subject have created a text which is dedicated to fostering deeper investigative study into the Pneumococcus: the goal is for more enhanced vaccines and treatments to be developed in order to disarm - or at least better neutralize - this hearty germ.

"In terms of this pathogen," says Dr. Tuomanen, "science will need to eliminate all the diseases that it causes in order to stop its progression. Presently, we know of over 90 different types [of the Pneumococcus], and you would have to go through a whole lifetime in order to see them all. Basically, we now have to work towards creating a vaccine that will block its colonization. That is the only way to control it; I just don’t think we will ever win the antibiotic battle because of the bacteria ’s ability to develop resistance to the drugs we use [against it]."

As Dr. Tuomanen so eloquently points out, even after more than a century, this remains one of the greatest challenges confronting infectious disease specialists around the globe.

Recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text for its long-term reference value. Further recommended to all epidemiologists and researchers in both the private and public sector who study how disease spreads. Finally, would be a useful teaching text in courses which explore the spread of infectious disease.

Of Related Importance

MICROBE. Are We ready For The Next Plague? Alan P. Zelicoff. Michael Bellomo. AMACOM.

By John Aiello

Following along the same theme, Microbe (Dr. Alan Zelicoff is former Senior Scientist at Sandia National Laboratories and Michael Bellomo has worked on projects related to NASA’s Orbital Space Plane), is as important as it is gutsy -- discussing the fallibility of our health-defense structure in both enlightened and human terms.

To be sure, Microbe is no easy read. But it is an undeniably vital one, focused on many of the themes that Dr. Elaine Tuomanen (Chair/Infectious Diseases at St. Jude Children's Research Hospital in Tennessee) pinpoints in the above referenced article.

Further, a recent piece published by Reuters speaks to ways that different strains of flu are able to replicate and mutate, wreaking havoc with World health along the way. Obviously, this book is timely, and readers should be forewarned that Microbe is not some science fiction fantasy story, but instead, a study that speaks to a real concern confronting the present state of our planet:

"Eleven miles to the north across the Long Island Sound, dead crows began showing up in the Bronx. As the summer dragged on, the increased numbers of dead birds began to spread to other parts of the city. The die-off began to attract media attention, as if New York was slowly awakening to find that something strange and deadly was stalking the parks and water ways of the city."

(at page 2)

One of the most distressing aspects of the story is that it seems the media (and perhaps the medical community itself) are a bit behind the curve in facing down this problem. Rather than move in a proactive mode, it appears that health care providers are in a reactive mode -- reacting to the movement of the virus instead of devoting primary energies to eradicate the threat through more effective vaccines:

"Given how involved the process is, it can take up to six months - sometimes even longer - to go from the identification of this year’s predominant flu strains to the production of the vaccination material and delivery to the doctor’s shelf. And every now and then, the experts guess wrong, leading to an unfortunate loss of life among those most vulnerable to the flu virus."

(at page 207)

In essence, Microbe details the primary threats facing the world as they relate to contagious infection, and we are greeted with not so friendly details about the horror that diseases such as SARS, West Nile virus and Hantavirus are likely to cause unless we get a firm grip on the ways in which they spread.

Simply, the answer to this problem seems to be in the development of a more effective and timely wall of vaccine defense rather than in more agressive antibiotic therapies (since anibiotics only attempt to treat the problem after the fact, once an individual has been infected and fallen into illness). In addition to the scientific data presented, the authors use an effective technique -- employing hypothetical stories -- to create realistic scenes that demonstrate how fast these organisms can move from a single host into the general populous.

However, Zelicoff and Bellomo don’t paint a picture of disaster without also offering an answer. Accordingly, they carefully outline areas the World health community should focus on, including impactful segments on the potential for creation of DNA-based vaccines that might also provide insight into better understanding how pathogens in general mutate beyond the reach of antibiotics.

In the end, Microbe is not so much a book about instilling fear in the mind of the reader as it is a book about enlightening the general public to this burgeoning concern: In short, each of us need to be aware of our bodies and the agents that threaten them so we might collectively move toward a viable solution.

See amacombooks.org to purchase

THE INNATE IMMUNE RESPONSE TO INFECTION. Edited by Stefan H.E. Kaufmann. Ruslan Medzhitov. Siamon Gordon. ASM Press.

ASM Press, a world leader in the dissemination of scientific data detailing the way the human body reacts to threats of infection, offers a detailed study of this phenomenon with The Innate Immune Response To Infection.

As inferred by its title, this selection analyzes the way we naturally respond to infectious agents in order to defend our organ systems against disease-predators. This volume combines the fundamental concepts of molecular and cellular biology and then aligns these disciplines to create a text that is dedicated to exploration of how the body’s natural immune response is activated to fight off various infectious agents.

The Innate Immune is notable because it combines the many different aspects inherent to this area of study, looking into various aspects of immunology, parasitology and virology to fully examine the evolution of the human immune response. From a scientific researcher’s point of view, this data is of increasing importance, not only because it will assist in the development of better ways to prevent the transmission of infectious disease through vaccine, but also because it should shed light on better ways to utilize immunosuppressant-type drug therapies with regard to transplant patients.

Recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text. Suitable as a teaching text in molecular and cellular biology courses which explore the way the immune system functions. Finally, should be read by professional researchers and immunologists since it serves as a collection of the finest expert analysis on the subject.

Order from booksmd.com

IN THE BLINK OF AN EYE. Andrew Parker. Basic Books. This new text marks a crossover in educational publishing. Although billed as a science text, this material also touches on theories of anthropology, biology and geology in its discussions of the Cambrian Explosion - this point in time when the number of life forms ballooned from three to thirty-eight, literally changing the face of the world.

Andrew Parker, a Zoologist from Oxford University, has written a fascinating account of this phenomenon - releasing a book that is at once spellbinding and engaging - the true essence of a "teaching text" in the best sense of the phrase:

"Some of the more spectacular dinosaurs lived seventy million years ago and were probably the victims of mosquitoes. The idea that dinosaurs could be brought back to life based on dinosaur blood preserved within ancient mosquitoes is now a distant one. What rained on this particular parade was contamination - the apparently ancient DNA from dinosaurs was in fact recent DNA, from a contaminant within the molecular lab..."

--Page 55

Much of Parker’s analysis is simply riveting, and it opens up doors to our thinking that have heretofore been locked. According to Parker, this burst in the birth of new life shapes came from vision: when the simplistic animals of the period found their eyes and focused on the light, they were left with an immediate challenge: it all came down to adaptation or death. And from that adaptation to their environment flowed forth a catalyst for the Cambrian Explosion.

Whether you agree or disagree with Parker’s "Light Switch Theory" is irrelevant; scientific theories notwithstanding, you will be consumed by this book and the way it ties together different disciplines (biology, physics, geology), taking us on a journey into our far-flung pasts. In The Blink is a brilliant accomplishment -- well written and evocative, timely and bold, escaping into the vacant rooms of idea and thought and wonder, suddenly bringing us a step closer to the sacred and the divine.

Simply, this is what academic writing should be about - informative books, piercing in their depth, forcing the student to explore the idea of himself within the context of the classroom. This is one "textbook" that should make a run at the best seller list. ~John Aiello

Order at amazon.com; or go to perseusbooks.com

VERTEBRATE PALAEONTOLOGY. Michael J. Benton. Second Edition. Blackwell Science. This fine textbook by Michael Benton (Department of Geology University of Bristol) sets the standard in the field - a well-developed and wonderfully researched book that will serve the student community in the study of Palaeontology for years to come.

Benton’s text is written in classic textbook style, juxtaposing illustrations with declarative analysis to create a teaching guide with the capability to take a student completely unfamiliar with the subject matter through its every layer. By constructing Vertebrate in this manner, Benton promotes a deeper ‘step-by-step’understanding of the data, allowing students to see the role the Vertebrate has played in our evolutionary cycle:

"The pterosaurs, relatives of the dinosaurs, filled the skies, and the birds, descendants of the carnivorous dinosaurs, also came on the scene. Other land animals included the more familiar lizards, snakes, turtles, crocodilians and mammals..."

(Page-188)

Benton’s study offers the complete history of the Vertebrate, with documented study from all points of world (including North and South America, Russia, Europe and China). This second edition presents updates from studies conducted during the 1990s, thus giving students the most recent data available.

In addition to the in depth analysis of the Vertebrate, Benton also explores the research techniques which Paleontologists use. This is quite useful to students because it begins to foster an appreciation for the discipline and encourages the investigation of the subject matter not only as a "class" but as a possible career path (see: the illuminating outline on how to dig up a dinosaur’s bones and then sift the fragments into a scientific story).

Authoritatively written and broad in scope, Vertebrate will not only teach the novice student the basics about Vertebrate Paleontology, it will surely inspire a few curious individuals to delve deeper into this fascinating material.

Recommended as a text for Biology and Geology courses with Vertebrate courses. Further recommended to both private sector and college-level libraries as a general reference text.

Order at amazon.com

THEOLOGY, PSYCHOLOGY, HISTORY, MUSIC, SOCIOLOGY, GOVERNMENT& ART

DIASPORA, POLITICS, AND GLOBALIZATION. Michel S. Laguerre. Palgrave-Macmillan.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

In this text, Professor Michael Laguerre (Director of the Center for Globalization and Information Technology at the University of California, Berkeley) has chosen to focus on the effects of the Haitian migration (with special emphasis on thetechnologicalconsequenceswhich contributed to the downfall of both the first and second Aristide governments).

To this end, one particular passage is telling:

"The use of IT by the Diaspora has evolved over time, going through different phases. For example, during the crisis of the overthrow of the first Aristide government in 1991, the main means of communication of the Diaspora were the Haitian American radio and television programs, traditional telephone calls to each other and loved ones in the homeland, Haitian American newspapers, and before the embargo, audiocassettes in which information and strategies of resistance were exchanged. . .By 2004, Haitian American television and newspapers had become truly transitional, with offices or subsidiaries in Port-au-Prince and a strong readership in both hostland and homeland. In addition, two new modes of communication have been added to the mix: the Internet and the cell phone…The use of the Internet has become pervasive as a means for the sustenance of the diasporic public sphere." [pp.122-124.]

Indeed, Laguerre shares with his readers an interview with a Haitian American "cyberactivist" who stated that the Internet is now accessible in every Haitian neighborhood (in turn contributing to the radicalization and sophistication of the very people responsible for Aristide’s downfall and personal Diaspora):

"Likewise, the cell phone, in the aftermath of the coup, has been the primary mode of international communication for people who live in remote villages in Haiti or who are in hiding. Some use it to report about the postcoup violence in their areas, as happened in the case of the mayor of Milo, a village in Northern Haiti, who called a California radio station from his hiding post to detail the atrocities committed by the rebels." [p.126.]

While the cell phone and the Internet have contributed to the globalization of the Haitian Diaspora,Laguerre also notes that the Internet, "with its diverse forums and audiences, has led to a fragmentation or Balkanization if the Haitian American diasporic public sphere …" [Id.]

Thus, although the Internet has provided dispossessed Haitians with both access to media and a podium through which refugees can be heard, it has also contributed to the widespread fragmentation of the Haitian community in its adopted homeland.

Recommended as a supporting text in Sociology courses which examine the myriad affects of technology on world culture. Further recommended to all college-level libraries as a general reference text.

Order from Palgrave

© Frank Aiello. 2006. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.


Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via The Electric Review.

ART, TIME AND TECHNOLOGY. Charlie Gere. Berg.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

Charlie Gere notes that in August, 1952, at the perceived beginning of the Cold War, pianist David Tudor performed John Cage’s famous "silent piece" (4’33”) in Woodstock, New York’s Maverick Concert Hall, playing to a confused and (perhaps angry) audience (while just five years earlier, Captain Chuck Yeager flew his X-1 jet faster than the speed of sound).

In a sense, both Yeager and Cage were exploring the same frontier: Yeager, by symbolically rupturing the wall of sound; and Cage, by remapping the boundaries of what humans perceive as sound.

In particular, Cage showed the "need to pay attention to the immediate environment and to be able to produce the noise it produced as signal." In a way, Cage seems to have anticipated the digital world - a noiseless universe where something is always happening [this] “point where technology overhauls culture and brings the very existence of history and the human into question."

Some twenty years after Cage’s breakthrough, Rock-and-Roll pioneer Lou Reed released Metal Machine Music, "consist[ing] of four sides of feedback, constituting an act of extreme aural violence." Reed’s response to Cage was to fill silence with electronic feedback "so as to demonstrate, perhaps, that in the twenty years that separate the two pieces, the environment had become entirely mediated by electronic information communications technologies." [p. 110.]

Such inroads into the heart of technology, according to Gere, were the product of the nuclear hysteria of the Cold War. For example, during World War II, Norbert Wiener worked at Bell Laboratories on an electronic gun-sight system used to predict the path of an enemy plane: "The development of complex, real-time systems…was a reaction to the capacity to wage war and wreck destruction at distance and at great speed." [p. 109.]

And Gere goes on:

"These Cold War technologies began to find civilian applications in relation to the economic and social crises of the late 1960s and early 1970s. The deregulation of finance following the collapse of the Bretton Woods agreement in the early 1970s was accompanied by the increasing application of real-time computer technology to financial trading. This in turn enabled the globalization of finance. The expansion which has accompanied this globalization is on a scale which now dwarfs the financial activities of most nation states…." [p. 109.]

This book is part of Berg’s “Cultural Machine” series, and it is advertised as an examination of the role of art in the age of "real time" information. However, in actuality, "real time" information systems have been with us for a long time now (at least since Charles Babbage’s nineteenth century calculating engine which contained the rough outlines of the modern computer).

In fact, more than fifty years ago, Alan Turing published "Computing Machines and Intelligence," an essay now readily accessible on the Internet. In his piece, Turing asked the public to consider whether machines can be taught to "think."

Now (as Gere points out in his superb final chapter, Short Films About Flying), the last fifty years of "real-time" information systems may have dehumanized us to a point where we have, in the words of Gene Younglood, "left the natural world and all of its values…[as] technologies such as television displace the individual from participant to observer of the human pageant, and thus we live effectively ‘outside’of time . . ." [p. 169.]

In essence, as Gere’s treatise shows us that technology has us by the throats. Think about it: We have been doomed to perpetually relive events such as the sight of those planes flying into the World Trade Center on September 11, 2001 -- right there with the victims, moments before impact, living the horrors of their final moments.

As Jacques Derrida has pointed out, because of television and those digital video cameras that operate from the eyeball of your cell phone, such events will now never be over.

Recommended as a supporting text in Sociology or Popular Culture courses that analyze the impact of technology on the evolving culture. Further recommended to all libraries in the college sector as a general reference text.

Order from Palgrave

© Frank Aiello. 2006. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.


Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via The Electric Review.

A HISTORY OF PSYCHOLOGY IN LETTERS. Ludy Benjamin. Blackwell Publishing.

By John Aiello

This text serves as a successful attempt to remove Psychology textbooks from the stoic face they have worn for decades. Here, Benjamin (Texas A&M University) has taken a unique approach to teaching psychology, presenting a compilation of letters written by key players within the discipline.

Basically, A History Of Psychology takes the study of psychology out of its ‘box’ and broadens its landscapes -- suddenly student-readers are allowed to look at the inner-workings of the mind in a less structured setting, peering into the heads of these great thinkers as they expand on topics of interest and relevance to their generations.

To this end, one of the most engaging segments of the text is found in Kenneth B. Clark’s analysis of the landmark Brown v. Board decision. In Clark’s paper, we see the magnitude that this case had on world-wide thought and on the structure of education. And what actually makes this new for the student is that they are not so much reading a structured academic presentation, but instead, digesting a summary of Brown v Board from an almost journalistic point of view (as Clark dissects layers of the decision in relation to his contemporaries and his community).

In addition, the material on John Locke is deeply illuminating, showing the growth of this man through the layered tongues of his work and thought process. Also notable is the material on Darwinism -- re-enforcing in the mind of the student just how acrimonious past battles over what could be taught in the classroom were.

At its best moments, A History Of Psychology is able to personalize the study of psychology by revealing private segments of the minds of its brightest beacons, demonstrating how these men and women struggled to find their paths (in turn helping to humanize the ancient lines of the educational process along the way). The ultimate lesson for the student is to show that the quest to learn does not begin and end in the classroom; to the contrary, this journey extends to all facets of life and to all dimensions of our professional and personal relationships.

Recommended as class text in second-level undergraduate courses that marry study of the primary voices in psychology with the history of the discipline.

Of Related Interest

PSYCHOLOGY AND YOU. Third Edition. Julia Berryman. Elizabeth . Kevin Howells. David Hargreaves. Diane Wilbur. Blackwell Publishing.

Now in its 3rd edition, Psychology and You is recognized by instructors across the country who use it as a primary teaching tool in their classrooms. The text provides a well-rounded introduction to the principles of psychological study, with wide-ranging coverage of topics that include discussion of body language, personality traits, the differences between the sexes, emotional make-up, the human brain, life stages, psychological disorders, and careers in the field. The text is notable for its sharply written passages that build a bridge from psychological concepts to everyday patterns of behavior. Immediately, students are placed in context with the material that they are analyzing, and this approach can’t help but consume the attention of these young readers who are often on quests for deeper self awareness.

Highly recommended as a front-line choice in Introduction to Psychology courses at the undergraduate level.

Order at amazon.com


POLITICAL SCIENCE AND HISTORY TEXTS FROM THOMSON


INVENTORS OF IDEAS: An Introduction to Western Political Philosophy (Second Edition). Donald Tannenbaum and David Schultz. Thomson-Wadsworth.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

The authors of this note-worthy text present a summary of the wide-ranging ideas and philosophies which shaped Western political thought (beginning with the playwrights of Athens, Sophocles and Aristophanes, and concluding with profiles of Sigmund Freud and Fredrich Nietzsche).

A closer look reveals that many of these ideas are especially timely to today’s world. Given the almost unquestioned approval of Western civilization in monster federal governments and ever expanding bureaucracies, the ideas of John Stuart Mill bear revisiting. By age 15, Mill was a total devotee to the philosophy of utilitarianism developed by Jeremy Bentham and assisted by Mill’s father, James Mill. However, by the age of 20, the younger Mill’s initial questioning and subsequent loss of faith in utilitarianism led him to a nervous breakdown, and then to a reshaping of his own version of this philosophy.

At the heart of Bentham’s ideas was the central tenet which said that was best which created the greatest good for the greatest number of individuals. However, as Mill came to realize, the strict utilitarianism advocated by Bentham and James Mill ultimately views a society as the sum of its parts. Unfortunately, this idea is especially vulnerable to another form of tyranny feared by Mill and especially apparent today — the tyranny of public opinion:

" In On Liberty, Mill stakes out ‘the nature and limits of the power which can be legitimately exercised by society over the individual.’ This work is his considered defense of the lone dissident against forced conformity to a majority view in any aspect of life, religious scientific or personal. Reflecting his training in early utilitarianism and his revision of it, he defends freedom as an individual right without relying on ‘the fiction’ of any original contract, natural right or natural law." [Id.]

In addition, Mary Wollstoncraft’s views on human nature are quite revealing. Wollstoncraft’s desire to advance the rights of women did not blind her to the realization that women, too, had been corrupted by the rise of social orders based upon class and privilege:

" In short [said Wollstoncraft], women in general, as well as the rich of both sexes, have acquired all the vices and follies of civilization . . .Civilized women are, therefore, so weakened by false refinement, that, respecting morals, their condition is much below what it would be were they left in their natural state." [p.216.]

Even Machiavelli, who feared political anarchy above all else, recognized that power alone was inadequate to maintain political liberty: "The chief foundations of all states, whether new, old, or mixed, are good laws and good arms." [p. 123.]

Finally, Freud (in the final chapter on post modern political thought), recognized that civilization was both a necessity and a state which does not come without both personal and social cost.

Specifically, Freud recognized, as did Hobbes, that "[m]en are not gentle creatures who want to be loved, and who, at the most can defend themselves if attacked; they are, on the contrary, creatures whose instinctual endowments is to be reckoned a powerful share of aggressiveness. As a result, their neighbor is for them not only a potential helper or sexual object, but also someone who tempts them to satisfy their aggressiveness on him, to exploit his capacity for work without compensation, to use him sexually without his consent, to seize his possessions, to humiliate him, to cause him pain, to torture and kill him." [p. 279.]

However, Freud was also aware that even though men are in constant conflict with the civilized state, the basic drives for life, love and survival require us to accept " ... a renunciation of instinct, a recognition of mutual obligations, the introduction of definitions, pronounced inviolable (holy) — that is to say, the beginnings of morality and justice. Each individual renounced his ideal of acquiring his father’s position for himself and of possessing his mother and sisters" [p. 280.].

Contradictions. Fool-hearty hypocrisies. Incomprehensible needs for control and power and some communal form of acceptance. As Freud had noted, these are roads each mind ultimately must traverse on its mysterious and solitary human journey.

This is an important text which illuminates the basic foundations of the American landscape. Accordingly, it is recommend for all history or political science courses that explore the origins of our most profound political philosophies. Noted for its accessibility to the undergraduate/student reader.

UNDERSTANDING POLITICS: Ideas, Institutions & Issues (Seventh Edition).Thomas M. Magstadt. Thomson Wadsworth.

The Seventh Edition of this text provides, at the very least, a rudimentary understanding of how political systems work and how they affect people’s lives.

To this end, readers will want to immediately give attention to Magstadt’s commentary on how political socialization is both affected by - and in some instances controlled by - the media. In identifying how "opposition research" is often used by political opportunists to dirty the opposition on the eve of voting day, Magstadt states:

"With the emergence of ‘opposition research’ as an important dimension of political campaigns, this type of tactic is becoming more and more common. Candidates and party committees now often hire private investigators to probe an opponent’s past. These ‘political sappers’ use hidden camera, sift through trash, pose as journalists, and even volunteer to work for the candidate they are being paid to work against — a form of spying that ought to be a crime. Unfortunately, the politicians choose to look the other way. No surprise there." [ p.304.]

In addition, Magstadt also provides an excellent summary of various theories as to how government works, including analysis of the works of C. Wright Mills and Robert Michels:

"Elitist theories of democracy hold that government is governed neither by the voters nor public opinion nor a variety of competing interests, but by a small number of wealthy individuals. It was propounded most influentially in the 1950's by sociologist C. Wright Mills. Mills studied the ruling class in the United States, which enshrines the principle of political equality. By putting the ‘power elite’ in the spotlight, Mills challenged the idea of ‘government by the people’ and called into serious question whether it exists (or has ever existed) in America." [p. 336.]

Analyzing Michels’ "Iron Law of Oligarchy", Magstadt writes:

"According to this view, the people, for whose benefit democratic institutions were originally conceived, are inevitably shut out of the political or organizational process as corporate officers or bureaucratic officials govern in the name of the rank-and-file shareholder or citizen." [Id.]

Given the power of the mass media, the level of apathy and ignorance in the citizenry is not only shocking, but points to political decay and the failure of basic institutions. Accordingly, this book is meant to spark an interest in the student reader’s role in government -- the idea is to teach/show students that an active voice in government begins through a complete understanding of history and the many forces which create political science:

"Many adult Americans cannot identify the names of government leaders, are unfamiliar with election issues, and are ignorant of politics. Dead candidates are elected to state offices; accused felons, running for public office on a lark, get thousands of votes . . .A recent study discovered that four out of ten Americans could not correctly name the vice president while two-thirds could not correctly identify the person who served in the House of Representatives from their legislative district . . .Give such a lack of knowledge, how can Americans make thoughtful or wise decisions?" [p. 334.].

THE WORLD SINCE WORLD WAR II. William J. Duiker. Thomson Wadsworth.

Few will be able to dispute the fact that Western society suffers from a superiority complex. Still, Westerners in general, and Americans in particular, continue to be amazed that they are despised by so much of the "Third World."

William J. Duiker opens his chapter on "Emerging Africa" with a poem written in 1946 by the Ghandian, Michael Francis- Dei Anang, excerpts of which bear repeating now:

"Forward! To what?

The Slums, where man is dumped upon man,

where penury

And misery

Have made their hapless homes,

And all that is dark and drear?

Forward! To what?

The factory

To grind hard hours

In an inhuman mill,

In one long ceaseless spell." [p.124.]

To this day, Africa and Asia continue to be burdened by both the residue of colonialism and continued exploitation by the West; Duiker writes:

"The legacy of colonialism in the form of political inexperience and continued European economic domination has combined with overpopulation and climatic disasters to frustrate the new states’ ability to achieve political stability and economic prosperity. At the same time, arbitrary boundaries imposed by the colonial powers and ethnic and religious divisions within the African countries have led to bitter conflicts . . ." [p.125.]

Such conflicts have easily allowed thugs such as Robert Mugabe of Zimbabwe to exploit their own people. Yet, even in the wake of such atrocities, black leaders of note continue to emerge (including Margaret Dongo, sometimes called the "ant in the elephant’s trunk").

In trying to inspire some pride of purpose among his people, Dongo has stated that "...we didn’t fight to remove white skins...We fought discrimination against blacks in land distribution, education, employment.If we are being exploited again, what did we fight for?" [p.137.]

And as these remarks by Duiker will attest, the roots of terrorism are far-reaching indeed:

"The first conclusion will involve the responsibility of the Western world, which throughout history, has allowed religious fundamentalism to thrive when it served Western interests. Thus, the West unconditionally backed the monarchies of the Gulf, a breeding ground of fundamentalism, because of their oil resources while at the same time lending blinkered support to Israel’s expansionist policies. Against the will of their people, Arab and Muslim leaders have been coddled by the West, spurring popular anger to fever pitch during the Gulf War." [p.144.]

However, popular American media appears to have adopted the hypothesis of the American scholar, Francis Fukuyama, who argued in his book, The End of History and the Last Man, that the industrial capitalist democracies in the West triumphed over the Soviet Union precisely because their ideology is more effective than rival doctrines and that this ideology would come to be applied universally over the globe.

Although Duiker notes that Fukiyama’s ideas have provoked a firestorm of debate, Fukuyama’s hypothesis appears to be nothing more than a reworking of old beliefs in the superiority of Western colonialism which dominated the world prior to the advent of the Twentieth century, in turn building the ideological foundation for much of the bloodshed in the world today.

EUROPE IN THE TWENTIETH CENTURY. Fourth Edition. Robert O. Paxton. Thomson Wadsworth.

Appropriately, Robert O. Paxton’s 2005 Update Edition opens with a 1908 photograph of the upper class at leisure snapped by the French photographer, Lartigue - -a scene directly in contrast to what closes this story of Twentieth Century Europe: Sarajevo grave diggers burying their dead in a soccer field hastily being converted to a cemetery.

In between these startling images, Paxton chronicles the history and heartbreak of a Europe bathed in bloodshed, war, revolution and turmoil. And for those who choose to read between the lines, there are ominous warnings.

Consider the following passage from a superb chapter outlining depression politics in authoritarian states prior to World War II:

"After Adolf Hitler assumed power in Germany in January, 1933, the new Nazi regime adopted economic policies totally different from the deflation of Bruning. The results seemed nothing less than a miracle. Germany was transformed from the country hardest hit by the depression in 1932 to the frightening giant of 1938. Unemployment dropped from 6 million in 1932 to 164,000 by 1936. . ." [p. 312.].

Paxton specifically points out how this "miracle" was accomplished. First, vast deficit spending on public works created employment. Second, the inflation which followed required state control of prices and wages. And finally, Germany insulated its currency from international speculation by rearmament, the dissolution of unions, and economic self-sufficiency.

Moreover, Mussolini’s solution to the depression should be required reading for current American policy makers who tout the benefits of government partnerships with "Corporate America"; writes Paxton:

"[C]orportists proposed to regroup each branch of industry, agriculture, and commerce into its own syndicate, or corporation. Each of these could then regulate its own affairs: allocating resources, dividing up the market, rationalizing production, and replacing the liberal free market with planned, managed economic activity. The main questions of course, were who would run the corporations and whom their decisions would favor." [ p. 314.]

And further illuminating the issue:

"The most lasting monument to what corporatism meant in practice in fascist Italy was the IRI Institute for Industrial Reconstruction). When some important Italian business leaders approached bankruptcy as the depression worsened, the IRI was established in January, 1933 to lend them money. By the time the IRI was made permanent in 1937, the government’s loans had evolved into a controlling interest in Italian steel, heavy machinery, shipping, electricity, and telephones. In this way, the Fascist regime rescued unprofitable sectors of the Italian economy by what amounted to partial nationalization. Even then, however, civil servants had little role in so-called corporatism. Organized business continued to manage the cartelized economy very much on its own terms." [p. 315.]

As he moves through the history of a volatile continent, Paxton notes that in the later 1950s and early 1960s, "[f]actory workers leveled off to about a third of the population, instead of becoming the predicted absolute majority; by contrast, the number of clerical workers and service workers began to grow rapidly. In the 1950's, it seemed that white-collar workers might actually outnumber blue-collar workers in advanced industrial countries. The ‘proletariat’ was being replaced by a ‘salariat.’ " [p. 565.]

As America moves closer to the European model, with its reliance on government controls of the economy, corporate oligarchies and the broadening of distinctions based upon class and status, both its leaders and its populace would do well to consider the frightening lessons suffered by Europe in the last century.

Look close and you will see that America is heading down a similar path.

Each of these mark brilliantly conceived texts with long-lasting reference value. Accordingly, they are recommended as either primary or supporting texts in political science or political- history courses examining how current governmental structures both at home and abroad were formed. Also recommended for libraries at the college-level for their long-term reference value.

Order from amazon.com

© Frank Aiello. 2005. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.


Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via The Electric Review.

OTHER CURRENT GOVERNMENT TEXTS FROM THOMSON

AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY AND PROCESS. James M. McCormick. Thomson/Wadsworth.

AMERICAN GOVERNMENT: Political Change and Institutional Development (Third Edition). Cal Jillson. Thomson/Wadsworth.

AMERICAN GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS TODAY: The Essentials (2004-2005 Edition). Barbara A. Bardes. Mack C. Shelley. Steffan W. Schmidt. Thomson/Wadsworth.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

Kicking off this focus on Thomson/Wadsworth Government textbooks is James M. McCormick’s excellent text -- particularly appropriate given recent events at home and abroad. The book serves as an analysis of how United States foreign policies have been shaped, completely examining America’s role over-seas.

In chapter eight of the text, McCormick outlines attempts by Congress to rein in the power of the executive branch and to limit the perceived growth of the President through the enactment of the Case-Zablocki Act and by repealing the Gulf of Tonkin Resolution. However, as the author notes, the results of presidential compliance are, at best, mixed:

"Any hopes that the War Powers Resolution had gained any new standing with the executive branch, however, were quickly dashed with American military involvement in Somalia, Haiti, and Bosnia. In each instance, Presidents Bush and Clinton reverted to a more familiar pattern since the resolution’s passage in 1973." [p. 308.]

Moreover, subsequent to the attack on the World Trade Center on September 11, 2001, Congress enacted Public Laws 107-40 and 107-243 granting sweeping powers to the President which go far beyond the Gulf of Tonkin Resolution (authorizing the President to use force against "nations, organizations or persons he determined planned, authorized, committed or aided the terrorist attacks . . .").

In effect, the President has been authorized the sole power to determine who is a "terrorist" and to unleash the power of the American military on both nations and individuals alike. Therefore, it is appropriate to consider McCormick's analysis of one interpretation of the media as an accomplice of government in light of the continuing war with Iraq:

" A second role for the media might be stated most strongly as one wholly at variance with the first: The media, knowingly or not, acts as accomplice of the government. Put differently, they become the "handmaidens" of the government in the portrayal of news and information. At least three kinds of evidence support this view. First, the media are ultimately dependent upon the government for information and for providing sources of information on many foreign policy questions that arise. Second, the media elite and the political elite often share similar values and beliefs about foreign policy. Third, government officials often seek to utilize the media for promotion of particular policies, and increasingly, they are trained to do so." [p.508.]

Readers will note that Cal Jillson’s text, now in its third edition, also has a chapter entitled "The Mass Media and the Political Agenda," and the author pointedly comments that the country in general maintains a romanticized view of reporters doggedly searching for large scandals and researching the background of each story. The reality is much different; writes Jillson:

" [R]eporters depend heavily on routine and official channels of information, including press conferences, formal briefings, press releases, background and for-the record interviews and leaks. Most of the time politicians are happy to give their view of public issues or programs that they support or administer, and journalist report their comments as authoritative." [p. 113.]

Yet, Jillson notes that, despite the institutional canning of news, tensions can still rise (as evidenced by the first reporting of the disaster in New Orleans caused by Hurricane Katrina). As this is written, less than a week has passed since that storm hit landfall. Clearly, despite the spin which the Bush Administration has placed on its handling of both the storm and its aftermath, the obvious truth is that the Bush Administration was initially brought to its knees by the images and reporting of the storm by major news services like Fox and CNN.

No politician can remain complacent when reporters working for conservative news entities liken the urban poor of New Orleans who bore the brunt of the hurricane to an "American Somalia". In this one instance, the institutional media did what the Founders intended it to do: To focus both moral outrage, responsibility, and accountability on all branches of government.

Although offered as a primer, AMERICAN GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS TODAY: The Essentials, poses a fundamental question to students: Who governs America, and is this country is really run by a super-elite?

The authors note:

"Elite theory describes an American mass population that is uninterested in politics and that is willing to let leaders make decisions. Some versions of elite theory posit a small, cohesive elite class that makes almost all the important decisions regarding the nation, whereas others suggest that the voters choose among competing elites." [p.15.] That government is often indifferent to the people is illustrated by an aside in the text chapter on public policy. The Greenville, South Carolina Department of Social Services wrote a food stamp recipient who had died that his food stamps would no longer be sent " because we received notice that you passed away. May God bless you. You may reapply if there is a change in circumstances."[p. 462.]

WHY NATIONS GO TO WAR, Ninth Edition. John G. Stoessinger. Thomson/Wadsworth.

The Ninth Edition of John G. Stoessinger’s text is particularly relevant today, as we continue to fight a war in Iraq -- our resources stretched paper thin, our national debt swelling.

Accordingly, Mr. Stoessinger prefaces his superb chapter on the American involvement in Indochina, ( aptly titled "A Greek Tragedy in Five Acts: Vietnam"), with a quotation from Nietzsche: if one looks too deeply in the abyss, the abyss will look into you.

The Bush Administration might seriously think about these words, and should further consider the lessons we learned from Vietnam (beginning with President Truman who saw himself as the leader of an embattled ‘free world’ resisting the expansion of a ruthless totalitarian foe):

"Thus President Kennedy — essentially a man of reason with a profoundly skeptical bent — became the victim of that particularly American form of hubris that blithely assumed that technology, computer-like efficiency, production, air power, and above all, competent American management could overcome any adversity. This mindset ignored the reality of an army of guerrillas who were quite prepared to die for their cause, would match the American escalation man for man, if not weapon for weapon, and were prepared to fight for a generation or more." [p. 101.]

It is now an inescapable fact that the decision to invade and occupy Iraq was made on false assumptions:

"In this connection, it should be noted that the alleged terror links between bin Laden and Saddam were never definitely proved. Indeed, there is strong circumstantial evidence that there was no love lost between these two men. Bin Laden was a religious fanatic while Saddam was a secular, womanizing despot living in opulent imperial palaces reminiscent of Emperor Caligula in ancient Rome. Moreover, numerous interrogations of Al Quaeda detainees in Guantanamo, Cuba, have revealed bin Laden categorically refused even to consider any collaboration with Saddam . . . The irony is that Iraq became a magnet for Al Quaeda fighters after the war, when they swelled the ranks of anti-American resistance in ever increasing numbers during the occupation." [p. 292.]

Finally, Mr. Bush might wish to consider the painful lessons learned by President Johnson, who chose to adopt the mindset of trench warfare in Vietnam:

" Because he believed he could not lose, Johnson dropped still more bombs and sent still more men to their death. He shielded himself with the belief that America was fighting in Vietnam for selfless and idealistic reasons. A credibility gap had become a reality gap: The myth of false innocence enabled the United States to wreck destruction on a grand scale in Indochina, all in the name of kindliness and helpfulness. Gradually, the means became so horrible that it became increasingly difficult to justify the ends. The war in Vietnam finally became a lost crusade." [ pp. 106-107.]

Stoessinger’s text is a warning to both the present administration and the American populace that the lessons of history fall without pity. The equation remains simple: if we choose not to respect the past, then we will be condemned to repeat it.

Each of these texts is recommended as either a primary or supporting textbook in all college-level Political Science or History courses that examine topics of foreign policy, the institution of governmental structure or the concept of war among nations. Each is also recommended to college-level libraries for their long-term reference value and direct relevance to current events. ~The Editor

Order from amazon.com

© Frank Aiello. 2005. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.


Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via The Electric Review.

NEW FROMTHOMSON INSOCIOLOGY & ANTHROPOLOGY

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

CLASSICAL SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY: Rediscovering the Promise of Sociology. Glenn A. Goodwin and Joseph A. Scimecca. Thomson.

CULTURAL ANTHROPOLOGY in the 4th Edition. Richard H. Robbins. Thomson.

RACE AND ETHNICITY IN SOCIETY: The Changing Landscape. Elizabeth Higginbottom, Margaret L. Anderson. Thomson.

In his landmark text, Cultural Anthropology, Richard Robbins describes the ritual of the Kwakiutl Cannibal Dance, wherein an initiate, or hamasta, takes leave of the human world to enter the realm of the Man Eater (one of the most powerful places in the Kawkiutl spirit-society).

According to Kwakiutl beliefs, the hamasta lives in the woods surrounding the village, craving human flesh and sometimes devouring mummified remains. During the four day period of the Cannibal Dance, members of the Cannibal Society gather in the ceremonial house to entice the hamasta back into human society.

In essence, this ritual is meant to act out the forces which threaten the Kwakiutl society and the need of that and every human culture to teach its inhabitants to conform to the norms of that social order. As Robbins states: " [I]n the Kwakiutl view of things, all humans are cannibals who must be socialized and tamed.".

As Robert Herz noted in 1909, "every social hierarchy claims to be formed on the value of things." Accordingly, Robbins points out that cultural anthropology is about understanding how societies are continually creating and evolving rituals to justify and legitimize social discrimination between races, countries and genders. The author writes:

"Menopause is described in some texts as a breakdown between the brain and the reproductive parts of the female body. In menopause, says one college textbook, the ovaries become unresponsive to hormonal stimulation and, as a result, regress . . . . Menopause is described as a breakdown of authority: functions fail and falter; organs wither and become senile. Our language still depicts the female body as a machine that in menopause is no longer able to fulfill its proper goal: it can no longer produce babies. In this view, at menopause, the female body becomes a broken-down factory."

(pp. 253-254)

In their text, Classical Sociological Theory, Glenn Goodwin and Joseph Scimecca present the works of those individuals who advanced sociological theory and methodology. Their text is augmented by the "four fundamental questions" which close each chapter -- a segment that encapsulates the theories of the sociologist, investigating those theories through the sacred prism of history.

For example, in reviewing the ideas of Karl Marx, the authors note that certain Marxist theories have been proven faulty, pointing to Marx’s failure to assess the proletariat commitment/loyalty to the State which transcended their daily misery:

"What happened, of course (and what has happened in every war since - from World War I through the latest War in the Middle East) is that the proletarians, the workers, have been the first to head into the trenches...."

(pp. 83-84.)

However, as Robbins writes, some of Marx and Engels’ views cannot be easily discarded and still remain relevant even today: "[T]he position that class structure is very resistant to change seems to be corroborated by income distribution figures in the United States over the past few decades ..." (p. 244). According to Robbins, the bottom fifth of the American populace has a 3.5 % share of the national income while the top fifth has a 50.1% share of that income (as of 2001).

In similar fashion, Jane Addams’ "critical emancipatory theory" of sociology, as Goodwin and Scimecca note, recognized that "[t]he individual had choice, but his or her choice was located in parameters institutionalized by the social structure." (at page 232).

Addams’ views of "choice" are clearly identified in the chapter, "Notes of a White Black Woman", by Judy Scales-Trent, presented in Race And Ethnicity in Society, authored by Elizabeth Higginbottom and Margaret L. Anderson. Here, Scales-Trent identifies herself as a black woman "often mistaken for white, a "skinwalker" on the American color line, a person deeply knowledgeable in the drawing of lines:

"The line-makers are marking boundaries, borders, creating Insiders and Outsiders. They are creating an ‘us’ and a ‘them’. They are creating the Other. Also, in both instances, those who are drawing those lines are drawing pictures of the world.. They are showing what the world looks like, how the world should look, what looks right to them. So if you study their picture, you will know who you are - black or white, French or German, ‘us’ or ‘them.’ " [p. 148.]

Each of these texts provides insight into how a society governs itself both consciously and subconsciously through institutionalized rituals and metaphor. Unfortunately, all too often, these rituals continue to legitimize discrimination between races, genders and countries and deepen the division between "us and the’.

Recommended to Sociology instructors as a either primary teaching or supporting texts in any course that marries the lines of Anthroplogy and Scociology. Each are also recommended to college-level libraries for their long-term reference value.

Order from amazon.com

© Frank Aiello. 2005. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.


Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via The Electric Review.


ALSO OF NOTE AMONG SOCIOLOGY TEXTS

THE ILLUSTRATED SOULS OF BLACK FOLK. E. B. DuBois. Edited and annotated by Eugene F. Provenzo, Jr. Paradigm Publishers.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

Perhaps no book, other than possibly, Uncle Tom’s Cabin, has been so instrumental in memorializing the boundaries that exist between the races in America -- we have simply not seen another book with the raw sociological impact of Souls of Black Folk.

At the Pan-African Association Conference held in London in July, 1900, DuBois himself asserted that "the problem of the Twentieth Century is the problem of the color line."

And nowhere is this understanding more evident than in that remarkable Chapter," Of the Passing of the First Born," a segment which chronicles the death of DuBois’ infant son from dysentery in 1899. On the morning of his son’s burial, Dubois recalled:

" The trees whispered to the grass, but the children sat with hushed faces. And yet it seemed a ghostly unreal day, — the wraith of Life. We seemed to rumble down an unknown street behind a little white bundle of posies, with the shadow of a song in our ears. The busy city dinned about us; they did not say much, those pale-faced hurrying men and women; they did not say much, — they only glanced and said, ‘Niggers!’ We could not lay him in the ground there in Georgia, for the earth there is strangely red; so we bore him away to the northward, with his flowers and his little folded hands. In vain, in vain! —for where, O God! Beneath thy broad blue sky shall my dark baby rest in peace, — where Reverence dwells, and Goodness and a Freedom that is free ?"

Highly recommended as a primary teaching text in all Sociology courses which explore themes of race, class distinction and equality. Also would prove useful to all libraries at the college-level for its long-term reference value.

Order from amazon.com

© Frank Aiello. 2005. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.


Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via The Electric Review.

AMERICAN GOVERNMENT, Tenth Edition. Susan Welch, John Gruhl, John Comer, and Susan M. Rigdon. Thomson-Wadsworth.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

This tenth edition of American Government is not only in depth in its coverage of United States government -- it is also current. An example of its timeliness can be found in the authors’ comment on the Bush Administration’s attempts to encourage an "ownership society" (partly through the use of structuring low interest rates during a period of massive borrowing):

"Home ownership has been encouraged even in the face of record debt held by consumers. The Fed has helped this policy along by keeping interest rates low during a period of massive and consumer borrowing. Home purchases have been increasing, especially of larger homes with bigger mortgages. About 40 percent of the mortgages have variable, rather than fixed, rates of interest . . . Much of this buying has been made possible by the government-backed mortgage giants, whose debt load of $4 trillion was sufficiently large in 2004 to cause Fed Chairman Alan Greenspan to warn Congress to restrict the level of debt that Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac can carry."

(pages 603-604)

This excerpt mirrors the recent reporting by Robert Samuelson of the Washington Post and others who warn that the government has created an artificial and over-inflated housing market by allowing Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac to buy home loans from lenders (now estimated at more than three-fourths of single-family mortgages in the country ), and then "bundling" those loans as securities for eventual sale on Wall Street. The securities are then offered for sale by the same guys who told us Enron stock was such a great deal.

It is this type of insightful analysis of current events that makes American Government so valuable to students, forcing them to analyze the things that are happening in the country in relation to classroom theory.

Recommended as a class text for all beginning United States Government classes for its timely analysis of the history of government in relation to issues of today.

Order from amazon.com

© Frank Aiello. 2005. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.


Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via The Electric Review.

SOCIAL PROBLEMS (Second Edition). John J. Macionis. Pearson/Prentice Hall.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

This highly readable text designed for undergraduate students openly advocates a social-constructionist approach to the study of sociology.

Here, Macionis (Kenyon College) attempts to avoid using one explicit or implicit point of view by presenting both a sequence of "problems" and "solutions" from the point of view of various groups (which unfortunately continue to be identified by cliché terms such as "radical," "liberal," "conservative," etc.). Nevertheless, a wealth of material on issues from terrorism, white collar crime, corporate welfare and substance abuse still comes through in clear and vital terms toprovide the undergraduate student a road map in which to begin the study of Sociology.

Further, each chapter contains an informative and lucid essay in a box entitled "Critical Thinking" - addressing the subject matter of each division in a manner specifically designed to hold the student’s interest. As an example, the Critical Thinking on Violence segment focuses on "Ruby Ridge and Waco, The View from the Far Right". Likewise, Chapter I’s Critical Thinking focuses on the arguments of C. Wright Mills:

" C. Wright Mills believed that the roots of such ‘personal’ problems lie in society itself, often involving the ways our economy and political system work. After all, it is society that favors some categories of people over other; the rich over the poor; white people over people of color; middle-aged people over the young and very old. But when people grapple with their troubles individually, and don’t see the bigger picture of how society operates, they end up feeling that ‘their lives are a series of traps.’ "

In Macionis’ chapter entitled "Urban Life", the author provides a riveting first-hand observation of life in Manila’s "Smokey Mountain," a section of Manila housing the poorest of the poor:

"Fed by methane from the decomposing garbage, the fires never go out on Smokey Mountain, Manila’s vast garbage dump. The smoke envelops the hills of refuse like a thick fog . . . Amidst the smoke and squalor, men and women do what they can to survive, picking plastic bags from the city’s garbage and washing them in the river, salvaging cardboard boxes that pile up alongside a family’s plywood shack. All over Smokey Mountain are children - kids who must already sense the enormous odds against them . . . With Smokey Mountain behind us, our taxi driver threads his way through heavy traffic as we head for the other side of Manila . . .[o]n the bay, a cluster of yachts is visible in the distance . . . Every block or so stands an entrance to an exclusive residential enclave set off by gates and protected by armed guards. Here, in large air conditioned homes, the rich of Manila live - and many of the poor work."

Macionis also addresses the urban poor in America by highlighting David Harvey’s study of growth and decline in Baltimore where government programs served as a tool for economic investors and "urban renewal turned out to be ‘slum clearance’ programs that forced out the poor who often ended up living in ‘projects’ that were worse than the housing they had lived in before."

In his concluding chapter on war and terrorism, Macionis ominously notes that "[h]istorically, poor nations have been no match for the military might of the colonial powers. For that reason groups opposing colonial rule must act outside the established political system. As noted earlier, terrorism can be an effective way for less powerful people to focus the world’s attention on what they consider to be injustice. In short, war is the means by which powerful nations dominate the globe; terrorism is the means by which the powerless fight back."

Although this material may prove both heady and disconcerting to a generation of college undergraduates raised on mass jingoism and MTV, Macionis’ text may actuallyassist these young peopleto avoid Malcolm X’s long-unheeded warning that, sooner or later, the chickens come home to roost.

Order from amazon.com

© Frank Aiello. 2005. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.


Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via The Electric Review.

PSYCHOLOGY. Robert J. Sternberg. Thomson/Wadsworth.

Now in its 4th edition, this sparkling text by Professor Sternberg (Yale University) is a true benchmark in the field: notable not only for its comprehensive coverage of one the most popular disciplines in the college curriculum, but also because of its uniqueness. Even though the book is written for entry level psychology students, Sternberg is inventive in his approach, moving though the material in a way that forces students to interact and analyze as they are reading. Moreover, each chapter contains a summary that allows readers to test themselves on the concepts that have been covered, and then apply the findings. In this regard, students are being taught the fundamental practices that all psychologists use in the field -- this constant ‘learn-relearn-verify-analyze’ step-ladder is constantly being used in the discipline as deeper exploration into the depth of the human mind is achieved. Sternberg’s treatise is broad in scope, with coverage of biological, cognitive, developmental, social and psychophysic aspects of psychology stitched together expertly to allow the novice student to move into the real ‘meat’ of the course material: the idea here is to build and sharpen and hone the student’s interest to a point where deeper knowledge is sought. At this point, the student will naturally start to consider a career in Psychology. Aside from the substantive analysis, the other thing that stands out about this up-dated edition is its organization, as shaper editing has made for a more logical presentation of material, rendering it easier to both read and understand.

Recommended for all entry level or Psychology 1A courses for its unique ability to teach the fundamental principles of the subject while promoting a thirst for deeper exploration into the field. Further recommended to all college-level libraries as a general reference text.

Of Related Interest

KAGAN AND SEGAL’S PSYCHOLOGY. AN INTRODUCTION. Don Baucum. Carolyn D. Smith. Thomson/Wadsworth. Another top-flight introductory-level Psychology text comes in the form of Kagan and Segal’s Psychology. Now in its ninth edition, this book covers the core topics of the discipline in a manner that is inviting to the novice student. The authors have done a significant job in their formatting and writing, arriving at a style that is truly "user-friendly’ - with the major concepts and theories in the field explored in less formal prose, the material is much easier to navigate. This is important since many freshman students are ill-prepared for the amount of reading that they must do in college and are many times scared away from psych courses because of the rigorous study demands. However, this text eradicates some of that anxiety, while still maintaining a high standard in conveying the information necessary to move on to the next level in the field.

Recommended for all entry level or Psychology 1A courses -- covering the material in a comprehensive manner. In addition, the text costs $40 - a true price value for the student. Instructors may want to consider this text for Psychology 1A courses and move to the Sternberg title for the 1B class. Further recommended to all college-level libraries as a general reference text.

Order from Amazon.com or go to www.wadsworth.com

NEUROPSYCHOLOGICAL ASSESSMENT. Muriel D. Lezak. Diane B. Howieson. David W. Loring. Oxford University Press.

Major reference text published by Oxford University Press detailing advances in the assessment of neuropsychological afflictions in both clinical and research realms. Here, Lezak (Oregon Health Sciences University), Howieson (Oregon Health Science University) and Loring (Georgetown University) have completely revised their material for this fourth edition, adding nearly 4,000 new references that comprise the most recent thinking on the subject.

Accordingly, the book is a veritable graduate course in the field of psychological assessment, and readers will find information chronicling the most effective ways psychologists have to evaluate and examine the inner workings of the brain. In addition to discussion of the psychological aspects of the human mind, there is also information on brain injury and vascular disorders and their impact on human health. Testing data includes a well-developed chapter on memory and ways for the physician to investigate memory loss and pin-pint cause (invaluable information given recent projections for increases in Alzheimer’s Disease in the next 20 years). In addition to the testing data, information on rating results is included, along with a detailed appendix noting test publishers and distributors.

In recent months, Health Science publishers have been accused of chasing editions in order to force students to needlessly repurchase books at top dollar. However, in this case, nothing could be further from the truth. Instead, the authors have provided their readers with the most pertinent information available - a text written in classic academic style that addresses each subject and sub-subject in deep detail, escorting the student from point-to-point in a well-organized fashion.

It is because of this fact that this book will not only prove useful as a library research tool, but also as an in-office guide for the practicing psychiatrist. Moreover, because of the expert dissertations and the careful editing, Neuro is serviceable as a teaching text for the classroom in all graduate programs in the fields of Psychology and Neuropsychology.

As previously noted, recommended to all Health Science libraries at the University level. Would also serve the graduate psychology student well as a class text. Is a must-have for all clinicians in the field for use as a reference companion regarding patient diagnosis and treatment.

Order at amazon.comor atbooksmd.com

ISLAM AND THE RELIGIOUS ARTS. Patricia L. Baker. Continuum. The Middle East is probably the most misunderstood region in the world. And the recent events that have transpired (9-11; the war in Iraq) have only widened the gap between it and other countries. However, this text (Continuum) is a major stepping-stone towards bridging that gulf. Religious Arts, written by independent lecturer/researcher Patricia Baker, is a wonderful study which illuminates many of the styles and motivations that fuel the art and people of Islam. Baker begins her study with a succinct but thorough overview of the history of the Islamic World, detailing its many fascinating aspects. From there, a thorough exploration of the interplay between this religious movement and its art takes place - demonstrating that the starkly brilliant visions of these people come steeped in a deep relationship with God. There is so much rich information here, and it is presented in an accessible way that will not intimidate the student unfamiliar with these subjects. Outstanding chapters include The Maker, The Law and Creativity (examining the complex structures of the Muslim belief system) and Visions of Paradise (analyzing the journey into death). In short, this is an outstanding text that sheds light on a most misunderstood and volatile area of our world.

Appropriate teaching text for any course that looks at the Middle East outside the concepts of war. Also would be a worthy choice for a supporting text for University-level Religions of The World courses. Recommended to libraries in the college and public sector as a general reference text.

Order at amazon.com

THE ESSENTIALS OF CONDITIONING AND LEARNING. Michael Domjan. Wadsworth. The essence of this slim handbook is in its hard-driving style -- unadorned and free of needless weight, Domjan’s text explores the ways the human mind has been conditioned to learn. As the author notes, humans confront the challenge of learning from many different angles and in relation to the environment in which they live. Essentials sets out to teach its readers to promptly recognize aspects of the learning process. Domjan begins his discourse with a summary of basic concepts and topic definitions, then expands on each subject area in well-delineated chapters. Thus, the student is taught to reach into the self and then move toward a complete understanding of the structure of behavior -- analyzing others through this deeper relationship with the self. Domjan (University of Texas) has done many smart things here in constructing this text -- but what we liked the most is the carefully drafted chapter summaries which allow the student to retest his knowledge of the information that’s just been presented.

Highly recommended for any course dealing with cognitive topics. Recommended as a general reference to all college-level libraries.

Order at amazon.com

THE CONTINUUM ENCYCLOPEDIA OF ANIMAL SYMBOLISM AND ART. Hope B. Werness. Continuum. Highly refined reference text that provides a detailed analysis of the connection between man and animal. Man -- the highest form of the mammal world -- has a tight connection to many distinct universes (the animal kingdom being one of them). Encyclopedia presents commentary on the ways aspects of the animal have meshed with the fabric of our lives. The text is laid out in "term" and "definition" form, with Werness presenting a term and then defining it through conceptual analysis and illustration. Aside from its broad coverage of the subject matter and its expert use of graphics, what’s best about this text is its writing - crisp and clear sentences build on each other to completely explain data without confusing the reader with extraneous ramblings. This is hugely important in a book of this nature because the material in and of itself is often complex (interlinking many different disciplines: history, literature, theology etc.). Students and instructors who pick up this text will find a book that has been designed for quick and repeated use - a book that readers should continue to refer to outside of the classroom in the life-long learning process. One of the most enjoyable reads in the area of textbooks we have seen this year.

Recommended as a teaching text in Anthropology and Art History courses. Recommended as a general reference text for all college-level and public sector libraries.

Order at amazon.com

COGNITIVE PSYCHOLOGY. In and Out Of the Laboratory. Kathleen M. Galotti. Thomson/Wadsworth. Galotti, a Professor of Psychology from Carleton College, has authored the authoritative text in the field of Cognitive Psychology -- a textbook that looks at the way the human mind moves and absorbs and learns in its journey through life. Many unique ideas come to the student here, but there is especially meaningful material on memory and perception, visual images as a learning tool, and the interconnection between thought/reasoning/and problem solving. The underlying idea here is not to just teach the student factual data to pass a course, but instead, to teach them about how they learn so that they can come to better know themselves. Written in an accessible and clearly perceived style, this is a hallmark text that provides one-stop shopping for psych students in the area of cognitive study. With this text in hand, the student pretty much has the whole subject covered; thus, they will begin to more clearly understand how individual personalities and traits are acquired. The third edition comes with free access to InfoTrac College Edition.

Recommended as a teaching text in any course presenting fundamental cognitive topics. A must-have for all college-level libraries as a general reference text (noted for its exhaustive coverage of a terribly complex subject).

Order at amazon.com

LITERATURE & PHILOSOPHY & ENGLISH COMPOSITION

PHILOSOPHY. Bryan Greetham. Palgrave-MacMillan.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

This selection marks a lucid and well-written textbook of the general concepts of Philosophy, further incorporating mini-biographies of selected philosophers into each chapter (“Brief Lives”) which serve to expose students to the fathers of the discipline.

These pages are inhabited with many gems of thought which give shape to the major philosophical movements that have impacted the world. For instance, in Greetham’s chapter on "Responsibility and Punishment", the author examines external compulsion and conformity via the following passage:

"Barry Humphries is reported to have said that he always knows when he is getting close to Australia on his flight home, because of the sound of millions of his fellow countryman patting themselves on the back. Some of the worst forms of this [social conformity] could be found in the 1950s during the Cold War. In the United States, the perceived threat of communism was so great that anyone or any organization that was even mildly egalitarian in its attitudes was vilified and condemned as unpatriotic, un-American, or even un-Godly." [p. 266.]

Greetham goes on to note that the "norm" in the American South of the 1950s and 1960s required racial segregation as a condition of social conformity:

"Indeed for some philosophers it raises the serious question of what we regard as ‘normality.’ Not to think in conformity with prevailing social beliefs and values may be thought to be not normal; in some societies, even insane or mad. R. D. Laing has suggested that, as a result, the terms, ‘sanity’ and ‘madness’ have become ambiguous and psychiatry has been used as a means of social control by removing from society those who are ‘different’ from the majority…" [pp. 266-267.]

In another chapter, Greetham notes that Foucault argued that the modern subject emerges out of the "social forces" at work around him:

"This interplay gives rise to forms of control and regulation, bound up with forms of classification and knowledge. In his account developed in Discipline and Punish (1977) and The History of Sexuality volume 1 (1979), forms of social control and regulation have emerged which make use of classifications such as sane and insane, healthy and sick, law-abiding and delinquent, sexually normal and perverted, and most broadly, normal and abnormal. What we call the subject is for Foucault, the product or effect of this regulation and classification. They work precisely by turning human beings into certain kinds of subjects: that is to say, by bringing them to act in accordance with certain standards of normal behavior, a certain identity." [p. 235.]

In his analysis of the works of Herbert Marcuse, Greetham points out that Marcuse believed that individuals in societies of advanced capitalism surrendered their intellectual freedom in return for the goods produced by that economic system:

"Marcuse argues that despite the development of the productive forces, despite the increasing ability of society to satisfy all human needs, the capitalist system persists, and real human wants and needs continue to be denied satisfaction. This is because in the contemporary context our instinctual energies are no longer simply repressed, but manipulated and distorted in the service of the prevailing system. Capitalism continues to produce goods for profitable exchange rather than human needs. Workers remain subordinated to the system, rather than controlling it and turning it to their real needs. And increasingly, their needs themselves are harassed to the system . . . For Marcuse, the very notions of what counts as desire, pleasure, satisfaction, fulfillment and happiness have thus been manipulated so that individuals are entirely content with the existing system. . . People thus reproduce, through their own aspirations and satisfactions, the very system that exploits them and denies their real needs." [p. 233.]

Yet, as Foucault observed, although modern identity reflects the forms of social control and regulation in which it is formed, those social forms are often changed over time due to the resistance of the individual to those roles which have been created for him:

"So Foucault rejects the idea, found for example in Marxism that resistance is a matter of discovering our true selves and asserting who we are, in the face of a society that prevents us from being ourselves…." [p. 236.]

In sum, this text serves as an excellent introduction/overview of Philosophy which includes a superb - although too brief - glossary. In addition, the note-structure augmenting each chapter can be downloaded directly from the publisher’s website affording the student another useful study tool that promotes long-term retention of this material.

Recommended to instructors of first-tier Philosophy courses as a primary class text. Further recommended to all college-level libraries as a general reference text.

Order at amazon.com. Or direct from Palgrave.


Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via
The Electric Review.

THE AMERICAN TRADITION IN LITERATURE. George Perkins. Barbara Perkins. McGraw-Hill.

Reviewed in the shorter 11th Edition

By John Aiello

In this volume, George Perkins (Eastern Michigan University) and Barbara Perkins (University of Toledo) present an anthology known throughout academic circles for its innovative flair in creating a record of the major movements and artists of the American landscape.

As most college-level English lit instructors will attest, it’s near impossible to bring a fresh and vibrant slant to a discipline that is literally as old as the inception of the country. Further, it has become ever-more difficult to conjure excitement among student-learners who often view so much of our literature as out-of-step with their times.

Enter Perkins and Perkins: in this new "short" edition to their classic anthology, the authors compile a "documentary" in book form that encompasses examples of the very best writers to ever find their voices in the Americas. Beginning with an overview of the explorers (Columbus) and the Colonies (John Smith, William Bradford), we leap into a plethora of topics and writers and styles that define our evolution as a People and a Nation.

Perkins and Perkins are exhaustive in their coverage of the writers responsible for capturing the flavor of the United States (from Anne Bradstreet and Puritanism to Ben Franklin’s erudite dissection of his place in the greater scheme of the world). In turn, students are enlightened on multiple levels -- encouraged to read and read some more, to learn and delve deeper in a personal quest for spiritual illumination.

However, this book truly comes to separate itself from other anthologies by-way of the poetry it collects: With pieces by Bob Dylan, Allen Ginsberg, William Carlos Williams and Marianne Moore, readers are led from the "classicists" into the modern movements, tracing a timeline that leads directly from Whitman’s nascent "Song Of Myself" to the rock-and-roll stage of the modern-day song-poet-sorcerer.

The simple idea here is to make literature meaningful to 18-year-olds in the 21st-century, and the authors have done this with a deep and cutting-edge energy that can’t help but hold the attention of even the most indifferent Business major.

Recommended as a primary reader in all entry-level English Literature survey courses. This edition includes a multimedia CD ROM which features profiles of a vast array of writers, providing an interactive platform through which students can explore great moments in literature from the comfort of their PC.

Order at amazon.com


John Aiello, who founded The Electric Review in 2001, has been a journalist for the better part of the last 25 years, and has reviewed books professionally in myriad subject areas since 1987. In addition, Aiello has taught the fundamentals of composition in both college-level writing labs and in private settings since 1983.

TWENTIETH-CENTURY FRENCH PHILOSOPHY. Alan Schrift. Blackwell Publishing.

By John Aiello

Here, Schrift (Grinnell College) has designed a detailed and vital textbook that cuts to the core of French Philosophy by setting the major movements against the eyes of the philosophers who inspired them.

The study of Philosophy is basically the study of thought -- as scholars come to grapple with deep questions of existence, weaving their journey into discernible and digestible summaries which, in turn, come to guide our own patterns of thinking.

In the end, the study of the world culminates in a great life and death war against the mind, as we fight through random concepts and holy ideas (religion, sexuality, conformity, revolution, war, madness, society, history) -- looking for some semblance of logic where none actually exists.

Accordingly, in each culture, there is a group of thinkers -- philosophers -- who are the ones who ask the tough questions, investing the blood of their lives in a grand struggle to discover answers for themselves and for future generations. And the answers: they are not at all based in scientific or mechanical exploration, but instead steeped in the need to know, to search, to reason beyond reason -- spitting forth a desire to find God in the invisible naked blue nuances of the human condition:

"The notion of structure, whose present good fortune in all domains responds to an intellectual need, establishes a whole system of thought. For the philosopher, the presence of structure outside us in natural and social systems and within us as symbolic function points to a way beyond the subject-object correlation..."

Maurice Merleau-Ponty, at page 46

French Philosophers marks a splendid examination of the philosophical movements that grew from this specific period, including discussion of Positivism, Idealism, Spiritualism, Existentialism, Structuralism, Ethics and Religion. And even though Schrift is careful to expand on the thinkers behind these topics (Focault, Derrida, Merleau-Ponty, Sartre), what’s best about the text is that it never fails to lead the reader back to the self -- challenging the student to find his own answers within his own personal context.

In Philosophy, as with so many other disciplines that flow forth through the mind (poetry, painting, music, theology), it is left up to the individual to corral the light within himself and pursue the silhouette of the muse that dances at the depth of the secret distance (this interplay between thought and person as distinct and original as the skin you wear).

In a flawless style, Alan Schrift’s French Philosophers documents the lines of French thought during the crucial 20th-century, the lucid and eloquent prose calling the student to take this material into himself and make it his own. As we learn here, the true study of Philosophy demands the thinker to dissect bloody questions of life and death for himself and on his own terms.

Recommended as a teaching text in Philosophy courses dedicated to exploration of the French masters. It would also serve well as a supporting text in World History courses looking to spotlight a specific culture.

Order at amazon.com

Of Related Interest

A COMPANION TO RATIONALISM. From Blackwell’s Companions to Philosophy. Edited by Alan Nelson. Blackwell Publishing.

Reviewed By Frank Aiello

"[W]e can only imagine what is absent." — Marcel Proust

In his fascinating chapter " Proust and the Rationalist Concept of the Self," Alan Nelson uses Proust’s masterpiece, A la recherche du temps perdu (Remembrance of Things Past) to approach the concept of the self (a topic that was also considered by Descartes, Hume and Leibniz).

This struggle to find purpose in the apparent randomness of existence has driven philosophers since the dawn of time. Descartes, whose work inspired so many thinkers in so many realms, dissected the dilemma in this oft-quoted thought: " The time of life can be divided into innumerable parts, each of which in no way depends upon the other."

Proust, too, would struggle against the dark pathos of the human experience. And like Descartes, he found solace in the sweetness of the infinite:

"For what we suppose to be our love or our jealousy is never a single, continuous and indivisible passion. It is composed of an infinity of successive loves, of different jealousies, each of which is ephemeral, although by their uninterrupted multiplicity they give us the impression of continuity, the illusion of unity." [p. 404.]

A Companion To Rationalism comes to us a layered text that stitches together the most profound thoughts on Rationalism (the study of finding truth through factual analysis rather than in religion or dogma). As Proust so eloquently infers, emotion, hunger and need are transitory and ephemeral. Still, the shard of consciousness that rises to capture them can be recovered through a phenomenon known as involuntary memory. As Nelson puts it:

"This familiar though infrequent experience, perhaps most famously typified in Marcel’s tasting of the tea-soaked madeleine, involves a present impression (only rarely a visual impression) evoking strongly a past impression . . .One cannot successfully attempt to produce them. Their appearance is entirely and fortuitous and literally ‘against one’s will. ’ " [p. 404]

And Neslon continues:

"Proust extends these points into a bold thesis of theoretical philosophy. He proposes that the involuntary memory is identical with the past experience, or more precisely that there is something in the two experiences that is identical... Part of the power and joy we feel in involuntary memories (the power and joy so well described by Proust) comes from their revelation of the identity of the self through time — or better, the self’s identity outside time." [p. 405.]

Still, such memories in the human experience are, at best, bittersweet, somehow always tinged with an unknowable sadness. As Proust wrote:

"A moment of the past, did I say ? Was it not perhaps very much more: something that, common to both the past and to the present, is much more essential than either of them ? So often in the course of my life, reality has disappointed me because the instant when my senses perceived it my imagination, which was the only organ that I possessed for the enjoyment of beauty, could not apply itself to it, in virtue of that incalculable law which ordains that we can only imagine what is absent. " [p. 405.]

This text provides a wonderful choice as a supporting text for courses dedicated to analyzing the history of philosophy through specific intellectual movements. Further recommended as a general reference text in all college-level libraries.

Order at amazon.com

© Frank Aiello. 2006. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.


John Aiello, who founded The Electric Review in 2001, has been a journalist for the better part of the last 25 years, and has reviewed books professionally in myriad subject areas since 1987. In addition, Aiello has taught the fundamentals of composition in both college-level writing labs and in private settings since 1983.

Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via The Electric Review.


DUBLINERS. Edited by Andrew Thacker. Palgrave.

Reviewed By Frank Aiello

Hugh Kenner, perhaps the definitive Joycean scholar, recounts in his Dublin’s Joyce that one of the great novelist’s pupils recalls him dreamily gazing at a glass paperweight which contained floating crystals, at once remarking that "Yes, snow is general all over Ireland."

It must remembered that Joyce was, after all, a voluntary exile whose native land was a series of shadows which he could not exorcize from his psyche. Certainly, the last paragraph of Joyce’s immortal short story, "The Dead", written in 1906, evokes a reverie for his homeland in addition to a dark and unspeakable sadness:

"Yes, the newspapers were right: snow was general all over Ireland. It was falling on every part of the dark central plain, on the treeless hills, on the Bog of Allen, and further westward, softly falling into the dark, mutinous Shannon waves. It was falling, too, upon every part of the lonely churchyard on the hill where Michael Furey lay buried ..."

In his analysis of "The Dead", Robert Spoo concentrates on the uncanny aspects of the story. According to Freud's theory, the uncanny included "the resurfacing of primitive religious beliefs that have been ‘surmounted’ by modern civilization (such as the belief in the omnipotence of thoughts, secret injurious powers, the return of the dead) ..." (Emphasis added).

And Spoo goes still further:

"The intertextual ‘haunting’ in the final paragraphs of "The Dead" hint at the presence of a dialogism — to be fully realised in Ulysses and Finnegans Wake — in which the vast hosts of discourses that make up the ‘realistic’ mode are permitted to have their ghostly say."

[p. 141.]

Like his creations, Gabriel and Greta Conway, Joyce was haunted by the past, by a deep sense of loss and return. For example, Greta Conway is resurrected on the lips of Leopold Bloom in the "Calypso" episode of Ulysses at the point when he recalls the dance where his wife first met her lover, Blazes Boylan. Further, in the "Aeolus" episode, Joyce informs his readers that Gabriel Conway wrote fiction reviews in the Daily Express as Joyce himself had done.

And Spoo himself notes in his analysis of Joyce’s notes for his play, Exiles (written some seven years after "The Dead") that the character, Bertha, is based in part on the experiences of Joyce’s wife, Nora:

"Joyce records snippets of Nora’s early life in Galway, including images of her young admirer, Sonny Bodkin, the original of Michael Furey: ‘Graveyard at Rahoon by moonlight where Bodkin’s grave is. He lies in the grave. She sees his tomb (family vault) and weeps. The name is homely . . . He is dark, unrisen, killed by love and life young The earth holds him.’ . . . A few lines later, relating Bodkin’s grave to the poet, Shelley’s in Rome, Joyce writes, ‘Shelley whom she has held in her womb or grave rises’..." (emphasis added in bold).

[pp. 147-148.]

An acquaintance of mine who spent a decade reading and re-reading Finnegans Wake once remarked that the novel embodies more of the Neolithic and lessofthe Nineteenth century. Indeed, Joyce was both primordial storyteller and literary Lazarus who, in the incarnation of the resurrected Irish hodcarrier, Tim Finnegan, becomes our guide in the telling and re-telling of the fall and resurrection of his Adam and Eve (disguised as Humprey Chipden Earwicker, his wife, Anna Livia Plurabelle, and their children). In the Wake, the host of mankind, including the vilified and the forgotten, are always permitted by Joyce to have their "ghostly say."

Recommended as a supporting text in literture courses dedicated to exploration of the work of the great novelist.

Order at amazon.com

© Frank Aiello. 2005. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.


Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via The Electric Review.

SONTAG AND KAEL: Opposites Attract Me. Craig Seligman. Counterpoint Press.

Reviewed by Jacob Aiello

Craig Seligman, in his new book Sontag & Kael: Opposites Attract Me, compares and contrasts two of the foremost influential American critics of the twentieth century: Susan Sontag and Pauline Kael.

In deconstructing their works by-way of its innovative scope and the controversy it provoked, Seligman illuminates Sontag and Kael as mirrors of the embattled artist, the conscientious writer, and, most importantly, the moral human being.

It’s true, critics are the lawyers of the artistic community. Witness Exhibit A, Samuel Beckett’s Waiting For Godot, in which Vladimir and Estragon hurl insults at one another. "Vermin!" they call each other, "Sewer-rat!" "Abortion!" Not until Estragon cries out (with finality), "Critic!" that they are shocked silent.

And yet, for every hundred ambulance chasers, there is a Tony Serra. Andfor every hundred hacks with a copy of Foucault, there is a Susan Sontag or a Pauline Kael. As a critic analyzing the lives and works of two such luminary critics, one would think Seligman’s book would have limited accessibility to anyone outside the field. However, in his deconstruction of their approach to their subjects, Seligman reveals in them the fundamental challenge every artist (and every engaged human being) must face.

By paying homage to her unblinking, almost masochistic devotion to the truth, Seligman paints Sontag as the ultimate modern representation of the tortured artist (one can almost see her lying hobbled on l’avenue du misere as she grapples with la vérité). He further reveals her continued struggle between honesty and deception, between revelation and oppression, and how her writing ultimately became a tool, the tool for her own self-discovery.

Likewise, through the deft application of quotations, the author illuminates Kael’s own struggle between avant-garde and kitsch, art and entertainment, and that most perplexing of paradoxes - political correctness and the truth.

Seligman’s criticism is always fair and well-balanced, well-researched and contemplative. Accordingly, we can’t help but respect his analysis: Seligman is a critic who knows his subjects, and this fact is reflected in the overall gravity of his criticism.

At its most academic, Sontag & Kael is a brilliant analysis of the oeuvres of two innovative, creative and remarkable critics (nay, artists). However, the book becomes even more intriguing when Seligman reveals his own personal relationship with these two women by documenting the history of their work’s influence on his own life.

This is a remarkable book to be sure, and finishing it can’t help but invoke a sense of melancholy and nostalgia. Where have all the critics gone, those whose loyalty to the truth and their subjects often matched the achievements of the people they were writing about?

It could be said that criticism is a dying art, one that’s given way to crass marketing and self-promotion. Personally, I hope this is not actually the case. However, this debate notwithstanding, Craig Seligman’s Sontag & Kael proves a wonderful documentation of what it once was like to be a real critic.

Order from amazon.com


Jacob Aiello is an advanced student of literature at Portland State University. See the Fiction Corner for one of his original short stories.

BETTER WRITING. Mary T. Carbone. Thomson/South-Western.

This new text by Mary Carbone should be required reading in all English Composition courses at the college level. Yes, it is simply that well-thought-out and purposeful - a true vital resource for the freshman struggling over how to construct a college paper.

In today’s academia, the ability to write a compact declarative sentence (let alone a passionate argumentative essay) is sorely lacking. It seems as if students are reaching college without any mastery over the English language at all. In turn, this is posing huge problems with regard to their ability to learn (and with the instructor’s ability to teach).

Accordingly, Better Writing attempts to address these problems in a manner conducive to the student’s individual level of competency; Carbone writes in the preface:

"Before students can learn to write well, they need to learn to write correctly, and learning to write correctly - and effectively - can be made easy."

Quite a bold statement, yes, but the author makes good on it.

Instead of covering the same old tired ground in the same old tired way, Carbone instead sets out a simple Five-Step Method that builds the perfect road map for the student to follow; this method includes:

1. The Sentence. To begin, the student is taught the components and techniques of sentence structure;

2. Grammar. Fundamental rules of grammar are taught so that the student is allowed to avoid common problems; in turn, confidence is developed;

3. Punctuation. The student is taught how and why to punctuate sentences through repeat exercises;

4. Spelling. Students are presented with easy-to-remember clues to help develop basic spelling skills;

5. Style. Once a grasp of the fundamentals is achieved, the student is taught to think about how they are writing by carefully considering the words being used.

By taking the novice student through these step-by-step instructions, Carbone is teaching the idea that before one can write well they must first understand what their goal is: to convey thought and information in the clearest and most powerful manner possible.

And before anyone can do this, they must see what they need to say and then apply the rules of language to the art/practice of writing. Simply, many things must coalesce and come together in the mind of the writer before words are able to stain blank paper with true and deep meaning.

Unfortunately, these are often times intimidating concepts for a young college student to grasp. However, Carbone does a beautiful job here in showing instructors how to teach students not to be scared off by having to write a paper. As Better Writing demonstrates, confidence is directly related to a complete and fundamental understanding of the basic principles of composition.

But again, how do you reach the plateau? In five easy steps. In five easy steps.

As previously noted, this text is recommended to all entry-level English comp classes as a classroom text. Further should be considered at the high-school level in any course dedicated to "college preparatory" content.


John Aiello, who founded The Electric Review in 2001, has been a journalist for the better part of the last 25 years, and has reviewed books professionally in myriad subject areas since 1987. In addition, Aiello has taught the fundamentals of composition in both college-level writing labs and in private settings since 1983.

Order at amazon.com

A COMPANION TO AMERICAN FICTION. 1780-1865. Edited byShirley Samuels. Blackwell.

This new text issued by Blackwell (well respected in academic circles for its high-level Humanities list), provides critical analysis of American fiction from the unification of the nation through the time of the civil war. In this volume, over 30 of the leading academic voices in the field analyze various selections of the American catalog, discussing each selection in deep historical context so as to teach students to view the things they’re reading in relation to the world at large. Includes both political and literary pieces, with individuals such as Whitman, Melville, Poe and Washington Irving explored through their words, ideals and thought patterns.

The basis of this book is vital to teaching young students that pieces of fiction are not merely products of the imagination, but also products of the world from which the mind draws its breath.

For a writer, the world is composed of everything we see and everything we can’t see; moreover, these infinite realms of transparency and dimension are born connected to the times in which we live.

Thus, to truly understand a book like "Moby Dick" one must see beyond the words and personally connect to that timeline within the writer’s head: What was he seeing? What was he hearing? Where was he living? What was he smelling? We follow each of these circles in his eyes by reading the webs of words on the printed page now taking their full shape. And now absorbed in the perfection of his mood and inspiration. And now absorbed in the newness of the world, a light, heavenward, rises.

In the end, this is what writing is really about. And Companion is a stepping stone that allows the student to begin the journey.

Recommended to libraries on the college level and in the public sector as a general reference text. Also recommended as an under-graduate teaching text in all critical literature courses. Well-edited with top contributions from an eclectic selection of critics. Note the fine plates which give the reader a true sense of the writers and pieces.

Order at amazon.com

PHYSICAL SCIENCE & CHEMISTRY

DEVLIN'S TEXTBOOK OF BIOCHEMISTRY WITH CLINICAL CORRELATIONS. 6th Edition. Thomas Devlin. John Wiley & Sons.

Released in December of 2005 and under revision from its 2001 edition, Devlin’s is the recognized authority in the discipline, melding analysis of the biochemical construction of mammalian cells together with their clinical correlation in order to create a textbook as unique and layered as its subject. Devlin’s is premised on the idea that what occurs on the cellular level (due to biochemical processes) causes a physiological response within the structure of the "whole animal." Accordingly, the mission of this text is to show the reader that human disease is the result of aspects of the biochemical process gone awry. Topics of coverage are vast and build into well-detailed chapters of amazing depth. Highlights from this edition include discussion of Amino Acids and Metabolism; Lipid Metabolism; DNA Replication; digestion and absorption; and the principles of nutrition. Devlin’s is notable for its ability to synthesize a staggering amount of data and reduce it to understandable "chunks" that serve to escort the reader through the study of Biochemistry. Simply, the intent here is to allow the student to test himself as he works through the next concept, a style that promotes thorough and precise understanding of the subject as whole. In this era when the world lives under the threat of several different biohazards, the importance of this material cannot be over-emphasized. In addition to lingering threats of bioterrorism and nuclear war, the discovery of the Avian Flu has made renewed study into the correlation between cell structure, antigen and disease imperative. Here, Devlin’s has made relevant the study of Biochemistry to the current state of the world. And by doing this, the author has artfully drawn a link between mechanical (classroom) concepts of Science and the practical walls that house the Clinician. In the end, this text will be as useful to the student as it is to the laboratory researcher who might require a refresher course on the interplay between the biochemical process and human disease.

Recommended as a primary teaching text in Biochemistry courses: noted for its depth and organization, well-written and grand in scope, the chapters moving at a perfect pace to give the student a lasting lesson in the biochemical process. Further recommended to Health Science libraries as a general reference text. Finally, would be useful to infectious disease researchers for its ability to link flaws in the biochemical process together with the onset of human disease.

Notable From The Wiley Applied Science Shelf

INTRODUCTION TO SOIL CHEMISTRY. Analysis and Instrumentation. Alfred R. Conklin. Wiley-Interscience.

The destruction from flooding during Hurricane Katrina last August proved how susceptible this country is to natural disaster. In addition, debate is on-going as to whether steps could -or should- have been taken place to mitigate the damage from these storms.

For starters, I think that city planners and engineers could have better designed the New Orleans drainage system so that water run-off would have been more efficient. Moreover, the Orleans’ levees obviously weren’t enough to withstand the rising tides in the wake of this level-5 Hurricane. What all this proves to me is that everyone needs to go back to the starting point and re-evaluate myriad systems from ground-zero.

In this text, Conklin (professor of Agriculture and Chemistry at Wilmington College in Ohio) writes on a topic that is central to all flood control -- soil analysis: without complete understanding of how soil absorbs/filters water and then drains, it becomes increasingly more difficult to forestall potential catastrophe.

Here, Conklin engages us in a thorough discussion of soil analysis, beginning with the basics and moving at a steady pace through more advanced concepts. As Conklin notes, the key for any scientist studying soil is to be able to understand exactly what characteristics influence its analytical exploration.

Readers must remember, however, that soil is not a one-dimensional entity; instead, it is a complex mix of both inorganic and organic solids, liquids and gases that flow together to create one of the building blocks of life itself. Consequently, because of its complexity, science must approach its investigation carefully and systematically, attentive to every nuance of detail.

To this end, Conklin has drafted a dependable guide that covers the central points of soil study, including data on horizonation, peds, color, naming, landscape, bonding, the components of soil in combination, the biological and organic components of soil, soil air, and titration (among many other topics ). At all times, the author’s writing is clear and defined, cognizant of holding his reader, attentive to hidden detail. The text is further enhanced by Conklin’s adept use of examples to stress key points of understanding.

All in all, Conklin has come up with a one-of-a-kind manual that is suitable to many facets of scientific study, and this book will prove invaluable to settings which include both the classroom and the Chemist’s laboratory. In the broad world of science writing, there’s not another textbook like this one anywhere.

Recommended as a teaching text in all Chemistry courses that cover soil analysis. Would also prove useful to city planners and environmental scientists focused on analyzing soil for construction purposes. Recommended to all college-level libraries as a general reference with long-term value.

CHEMOGENOMICS. Volume 22. Edited by Hugo Kubinyi and Gerhard Muller. Wiley-VCH. This hallmark text marks a breakthrough in the field in that it aligns the primary concepts of chemistry and biology, then takes the process one step further, applying chemistry to genomics and proteomics. This interlinking process ends up being vital to the researcher, allowing for the full and complete investigation of the interactions between proteins and their environments (in order to determine a organism’s state of wellness). Here, Muller (a scientific researcher from Munich) and Kubinyi (a medicinal chemist from the University of Heidelberg) have drafted a study that allows these fundamental platforms of scientific study to be applied to medicinal chemistry: the goal is for the health researcher to be able to understand exactly how drugs impact the body (and why these reactions are occurring). Once this is done, the possibility for the development of more efficient drugs with less troublesome side effects is possible.

TRANSITION METALS FOR ORGANIC SYNTHESIS. Edited by Matthias Beller and Carsten Bolm. Wiley-VCH. This wonderful text in two volumes is suitable for both the classroom (as a course text) and the reference library. Impeccably researched and flawlessly presented, Transition provides authoritative analysis from 70 top researchers in the field. Here, the authors have come up with a major reference meant to serve both the academic community and the industrial professional. Myriad subjects are analyzed, including catalytic and stoichiometric reactions with regard to transition metals (including a well-defined section on hydroformylation). Volume two features deep analysis of modern concepts/methods of synthesis, including important information on ionic liquids. Given the state of the planet right now (and our dwindling natural resources), this area of study is of increasing importance.Transition marks an imperative reference tool for anyone touching on the discipline.

PREVENTION OF TYPE TWO DIABETES. Editor: Manfred Ganz. Wiley. Diabetes is a huge medical problem in the United States and abroad, costing tens of millions of dollars annually and evoking huge plagues of suffering (as 180 million people worldwide are known to have the disease). Ganz (University of Rome) has done a sound job in presenting a wealth of information on Type Two Diabetes (adult-onset non-insulin dependent). As denoted by the title, Prevention is focused on developing patient awareness of the disease through physician awareness of the disease. According to the experts here, the key to defeating this disease is in preventing its onset. This has to be done through 1) appropriate screening of high-risk patients and 2) teaching behavior modification (better control of weight, blood pressure, and lipids through diet and exercise) to forestall the actual development of Diabetes. Highly recommended because it presents the latest global perspective on the affliction. Appropriate as an in-office reference for internists, endocrinologists and metabolic researchers, and also is recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

BIOMINERALIZATION. Second Edition. Edited by Edmund Baeuerlein. Wiley-VCH. Like the Chemogenomics title referenced above, this text marries aspects of biology and molecular biology in its investigation of Biomineralization (the natural process by way living organisms form minerals from bioorganic molecules and inorganic solids). Baeuerlein’s text is a comprehensive study of this phenomenon, and takes the reader through the topic in a well-organized and well-paced fashion, these processes of Biomineralization documented with step-by-step lucidity. Aside from the uniqueness of this text, we recommend it because of its varied value: not only will students find it useful as a learning resource, but active researchers and biologists will find it vital because of its inclusion of modern advancements in the field that have occurred over the last decade. Further, because of the way it melds differing areas of the sciences, it is recommended to both biologists and physical scienctists who are interested in exploring the link between the living and the inorganic worlds. Also recommended to all college-level libraies as a general reference text.

ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY. Second Edition. Edited by R. Kellner, J.-M. Mermet, M. Otto, M. Valcarcel, H.M. Widmer. Wiley-VCH. This outstanding text should be considered by all college-level analytical chemistry instructors because of its breadth of coverage and command of the subject matter. Here, the authors have developed a massive tome which contains comprehensive data on analytical chemistry and instrumental analysis. In the course of the in depth discussions of these areas, study questions have been included to allow the student to test their retention as they are moving through the chapters. The editors have also included references toother supportive readings as they relate to each independent section of the book, thus attempting to foster a deeper awareness of the material on the part of theinquisitive student. Finally, the new edition includes information on advancements that have taken place in the laboratory during the last decade, making it particularly relevant to the advanced student who is in a professional program and about to enter the community as a researcher, healthcare worker or chemist. Well-thought out and impeccably detailed, the first-class editing job that was done here has resulted in an easy-to-follow text that will lend itself well to classroom instruction. Further recommended to all college-level libraries (and especially Health Science libraries) as a general reference text.

Order from Amazon.com


RFID. Radio Frequency Identification. Steven Shepard. McGraw-Hill.

This manuscript by Steven Shepard (a Vermont writer with deep expertise in international telecommunications) marks the first technology text to explore radio frequency identification from both the consumer’s and supplier’s perspectives.

Basically, RFID is the foundation of the wireless communications industry and it stands at the forefront of a market that is expected to boom in the next decade. Shepard’s text covers the topic in broad terms and he escorts the reader through the subject with amazing deftness - giving us an over-view of the business side of RFID and then segueing into its pertinent technical aspects: explaining each of the components of radio frequency identification and then noting how these labyrinths interlock to create a multi-layered system.

Throughout the course of his treatise, Shepard is careful to thoughtfully address security issues that could develop as a result of using high-grade radio frequency systems - especially important at a time when threats of terrorism dominate. Mr. Shepard should be commended for his work here: the writing is crisp and clear, bringing the ability to dissect an ultra-complex topic and speak to it in practical terms.

For the majority of the populous, the way theirelectronic gadgetswork is secondary to the fact that they actually work. However, RFID is written in a way that illuminates howadvances in technology have revolutionized our lives and will continue to instigate change as we move deeper into the 21st century. Since the industry is predicted to generate over 10 billion in earnings over the next decade, the information contained here is vital to beginning to understand the changing aspects of our world. Interesting not only for the wealth of technical information presented, but also for the social issues that are revealed as a result of the way we now communicate.

Recommended to all college-level libraries as a general reference text. Also should be considered by technical science instructors whose courses over-lap with this subject matter. A burgeoning area of study that is addressed in concrete and thorough terms.

Order from Amazon.com; or go to mcgraw-hill.com

CARPENTER’S CALCULATIONS MANUAL. Roger Tarbox. R. Dodge Woodson. McGraw-Hill.

Here, Tarbox and Woodson have createda guide that speaks to the way that carpenters and contractors learn: instead of hammering out explanations in long-winded passages, Carpenter’s uses illustrations, photos and charted tables to convey its information - truly a change of pace in this era of over-explained "how-to" books.

The authors - both master carpenters - offer a manual that everyone who picks up a hammer (both professional and amateur) should own, for it provides in depth guidance on how to approach, plan and complete a building project.

The majority of the errors that carpenters make are a product of miscalculations being made and guess-work gone awry. Carpenter’s offers an answer to this, for it takes the builder step-by-step through the process of putting up an edifice. From data on how to formulate the foundation to direction on joist calculations to instruction on figuring stair rise, Tarbox and Woodson strip away the confusion and present tables and charts augmented by artful illustrations - follow the directions as they are laid our here and carpenters will circumvent potential problems before they ever occur.

The result of this will be cleaner jobs that waste less resources and come in on budget. The result will be less waste in the building trade and more efficient workmanship. Given the boom in the housing market across the country in addition tothe record number of folks applying for contractor’s licenses these days, and this text couldn’t be more timely.

Recommended as a general reference text in all libraries - both at the college level and in the public sector. Further recommended to high school instructors as a teaching text for wood shop classes at both the beginner and advanced phase.

Order from Amazon.com; or go to mcgraw-hill.com

ILLUSTRATED POCKET DICTIONARY OF CHROMATOGRAPHY. Paul C. Sadek. Wiley. This marks a well-developed pocket dictionary of Chromatography, combining conceptual definitions with illustrations/graphics to create a multidimensional reference tool. Dictionary has been designed for use by the practicing scientist in the laboratory setting, and it covers myriad subject areas, including analysis of both liquid and gas Chromatography (in addition to capillary electrophoresis and solid phase extraction - the primary scientific techniques used to separate components for chemical analysis/investigation). Readers will also find a broad assortment of photographs depicting the instruments/equipment used in the field; also note the compilation of references to encourage further study for both student and professional.

Pocket Dictionary does a fine job in laying a "foundation of facts" so that students of the discipline can begin to explore this very complex subject. Mr. Sadek (Chemistry Group Leader at Access Business Group in Michigan) has done a note-worthy job in constructing the book, for even though it appears in dictionary form, it does not stop there: instead, scientists will also find that the author has gone to great lengths to examine vital concepts of Chromatography - intent on promoting a complete and fundamental understanding of the subject area. Notwithstanding the fact that Dictionary is a remarkable teaching text, it will serve the professional scientist equally well - similar to the way generations of lawyers have come to trust in (and rely on) Blacks Law Dictionary for direction.

Recommended to all college-level libraries as a general reference text. Would further serve as a useful study text in advanced analytical Chemistry courses.

Order from Amazon.com

LAW AND RELATED LEGAL TOPICS


THE FBI CAREER GUIDE. Joseph W. Koletar. American Management Association.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

Do you have a degree in law, accounting, a physical science, computer science or engineering? Or perhaps a few years of experience in military intelligence?

If the answer to this question is yes, then you might want to read The FBI Career Guide by former FBI Section Chief Joseph W. Koletar.

In his text, Koletar tells in a style similar to an inter-office staff memo just why you might want to become a G-Man. After identifying the structure and staffing of the Bureau in his first two chapters, Koletar goes into the real nuts-and-bolts-reasons for joining – pay and benefits.

As Koletar notes in his opening paragraph to Chapter three, the FBI is an “excepted service within the executive branch.” This means that it is not bound by the same personnel regulations governing other branches of government.

At this point, Koletar runs through a laundry list of benefits made available to agents and their families, including generous retirement benefits; investment vehicles; relocation benefits; health care; child care; Federal life insurance benefits; medical benefits under the Federal Employees Compensation act; and last but not least, specific tax benefits (which “have the effect of reducing not only their federal, Social Security and Medicare taxes, but may also reduce state, city or county taxes” ).

Insofar as the retirement perks, newly-hired agents can retire when they reach age 50, with 20 years of federal civilian law enforcement experience, or they can step down when they amass 25 years of federal civilian law-enforcement experience regardless of age; it is mandatory that all agents retire at age 57.

Obviously, these kinds of benefits are rarely - if ever - available to individuals outside of government. In the Bureau, salary at GS-10, step 1, begins at $48,818 for a new agent.Koletar notes that agents who do not move into management ranks usually end their careers in the tenth step of GS-13, earning $101, 413.00. Agents usually reach this GS-13 level after only seven years of service.

In sum, Koletar gives college graduates who might be considering a career in the FBI with a tightly written road-map that reviews the qualifications necessary for the job, providing this well-polished snapshot of a line of work that many often wonder about.

Koletar’s text is recommended to all college-level counselors, serving as a career-planning guide for students about to graduate from Administration of Justice other law enforcement programs. Further recommended to libraries in both the private sector and at the college-level as a general reference text.

Order from Amazon.com

© Frank Aiello. 2006. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.


Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via The Electric Review.

INTRODUCTION TO BANKRUPTCY LAW. Fifth Edition. Martin A. Frey. Phyllis Hurley Frey. Sidney K. Swinson. Thomson/Delmar Learning.

By John Aiello

Now its 5th edition, this text is meant to provide the practicing Paralegal with salient information on current Bankruptcy procedures. In terms of changes to traditional law, the recent overhaul of the Bankruptcy Code redefining the stepsconsumers must go through before they will be allowed towrite off a debt has literally changed our perceptions of personal finance.

No longer does the safety valve of Bankruptcy Court automatically exist for those caught between the proverbial ‘rock and a hard place.’ Now, consumers have to be more responsible with their plastic cards and other forms of impulse or luxury-based spending. In turn, those operating within the legal arena need to update their education and reconnect themselves with aspects of the Bankruptcy Code.

Introduction To Bankruptcy by Martin Frey (University of Tulsa College of Law) and two co-writers is the first text we have seen to address material changes in the Bankruptcy Code (following ratification of the Bankruptcy Abuse Prevention and Consumer Protection Act of 2005). Here, the authors do an exemplary job of discussing applicable changes in the law and modifications to court rules while simultaneously up-dating procedural forms and paths of strategy -- painting this full picture of what it takes to set a Bankruptcy case in motion through the judicial system.

Frey and co-writers have done a fine job with the organization of this textbook, outlining the history of Bankruptcy law before moving directly into myriad legal elements, giving special consideration to how an individual’s specific circumstances dictatehis ability to dischargea debt. The authors have also included a series of sample Bankruptcy scenarios that analyze cases from inception through the point of resolution. To this end, myriad types of Bankruptcy filings are discussed with inclusion of ‘flow charts’ which provide a ‘visual aid’ so that the student can actually see the different paths a Bankruptcy filing will often take.

In addition to these charts (and the updated forms), Frey and co-authors offer an interactive approach to the learning experience, posing problems that students are meant to jump into and analyze. The lesson here?: To show that assisting clients with legal issues requires precise attention to detail and the ability to dissect a ‘theory’ and then quickly apply it to the practical world.

Chapters routinely build on each other to create a seamless read ("The Cast Of Characters" chapter moving into an exploration of the "Bankruptcy Judge And Staff" serves to show that one issue is always married to next in the study of the law). Further to its breadth, Introduction To Bankruptcy stands out for its writing: Clear-cut and sharp with focus, this book is meant to impart complicated legal theories to a student audience so that the information can be retained for future application.

The authors have designed this text for the classroom, and more specifically, for the Paralegal student. Accordingly, it is recommended to college-level instructors who teach Paralegal courses which focus on Bankruptcy Law. Additionally, it would prove useful to the practicing Paralegal in an office setting: the up-to-date forms and review of changes in the code render this a title that has lasting and long-term value.

Order from Amazon.com

CALCRIM JUDICIAL COUNCIL OF CALIFORNIA CRIMINAL JURY INSTRUCTIONS.January2006 Edition. Thomson-West.

Reviewed by Hon. Paul J. Aiello (Retired)

The tradition that first began with the CALJIC Standard Jury Instructions has blossomed into this innovative approach we now find in the CALCRIM Criminal Jury Instructions. Designed by a special task force of the California Judicial Council, the authors' driving focus was to "write instructions that are both legally accurate and understandable to the average juror."

In drafting this manual, the committee premised its work on the belief that "sound communication takes into account the audience to which it is addressed," in turn recognizing the vital task that a jury performs and the substantial reliance placed upon their service by courts, lawyers, and litigants. Simply, in order for a jury to apply the law fairly, understandability of the appropriate legal principles becomes absolutely critical.

The CALCRIM Instructions are now approved by the Judicial Council as the official instructions for use in the State of California. California Rule of Court No. 855 (a) "strongly encourages their use." However, since this is merely a recommendation and not mandatory, many trial courts remain hesitant to abandon the security of CALJIC. Yet, by all accounts, the Judicial Council has successfully accomplished its goal of creating a set of user-friendly, easy-to-understand jury instructions.

After many years of offering ADR services, I recently returned to an active criminal law practice, and I have found CALCRIM helpful in combining the preciseness of the CALJIC black letter law statements in a paraphrased form that sheds the heaviness of the more specialized statutory and case law language.

Here, the writers have provided users withmore complete explanations of myriad legal principles in a checklist form, this approach meant to easily guide the jury through its task of analyzing the components of the individual instruction before fitting them into the particular factual setting.

For example, the CALCRIM instruction for misdemeanor Driving Under The Influence begins where CALJIC does, listing the two elements that create the statutory offense (defendant drove a vehicle and when he/she drove, the defendant was under the influence), but then significantly departs from CALJIC’s style in two major ways.

First, unlike CALJIC, which offers a separate instruction regarding evaluating the manner in which the vehicle was driven, CALCRIM includes this as part of the primary instruction, something which immediately assists the jury in coming to understand that the way a car was driven is not enough in itself to find a person to be under the influence (but only one factor to be considered in light of all of the other circumstances). As a result, CALCRIM immediately links the term "under the influence" to a concrete piece of evidence, thereby offering the jury a specific way to understand what might otherwise remain just a vague legal term.

Second, the CALCRIM Instruction offers yet another evidentiary method by which to give substance and reality to the term "under the influence." It informs the jury that if the prosecution has proved beyond a reasonable doubt that the defendant’s blood alcohol was .08 % or more at the time of the chemical analysis, it may (but is not required to) conclude that defendant was under the influence at the time of the alleged offense. Finally, the instruction cautions the jury that, in evaluating the test results, it can take into account whether or not the person administering the test followed certain specific state regulations.

Consequently, the jury is given understandable evidentiary bases to help them reach a meaningful conclusion as to whether a defendant should be adjudged guilty or innocent on the facts before them. Moreover, the format of the instruction gives counsel a valuable tool in being able to identify and then link key pieces of evidence to a legal principle (which is then reinforced by the actual instruction from the court).

As with CALJIC, the CALCRIM Instructions are in two volumes and follow a similar organization of subject matter. The text of each instruction is followed by Bench Notes, setting forth the instructional duty of the court (as well as relevant lesser-included offenses). The "Authority" Section also lists all pertinent sources for the instruction, including case precedent. Italicized notes in the language of the instruction further serve to alert the reader to necessary modifications for specialized issues.

Criminal law practitioners will find the Bench Notes a particularly valuable resource. Returning to the Driving Under The Influence Instruction as an example, counsel may be facing a situation wherein the statutory blood alcohol presumption may be applied -i.e.- if defendant had a blood alcohol content of .08 % at the time of the chemical analysis, the jury may conclude that defendant was under the influence at the time of driving. The Bench Note alerts counsel that if any evidence exists that defendant was below .08 % (or if the test results fall within the range in which no presumption applies), then the prosecution loses the benefit of the presumption and the Court must remove the language from the instruction.

Accordingly, criminal lawyers now have an officially-endorsed and viable alternative to the more technical and basic language of CALJIC. In addition to presenting lawyers with a vital tool by which to prepare for trial, this manual serves to insure that the jury will be more-easily guided to a clearer understanding of myriad complex legal principles (and thus better able to apply these instructions evenly and effectively).

Recommended for criminal law offices, law libraries, general reference libraries, and as a supplement to general criminal law texts.

Order from Amazon.com

Of Related Interest

CALJIC CALIFORNIA JURY INSTRUCTIONS -CRIMINAL.APRIL 2006 Edition. Thomson-West.

Reviewed by Hon. Paul J. Aiello (Retired)

For criminal law practitioners, ready access to a set of Thomson-West CALJIC California Criminal Jury Instructions becomes indispensable, both for research purposes and for trial preparation.

Experienced attorneys often begin their case strategy by reviewing the elements that make up criminal offenses as a practical guide through the sometimes thorny issues presented by unique factual settings (knowing that these key statements of the law will become the standards by which juries will reach their decisions as to guilt and innocence).

Moreover, trial lawyers frequently attempt to fashion special jury instructions to highlight key issues in their cases. Their obstacle is a formidable one, however, since trial courts almost uniformly rely upon the time-tested and appellate-affirmed standard jury instructions set forth in CALJIC.

One criticism of these standard instructions, observes Justice Carol Corrigan, is that, being "based on the language of case law and statutes written by and for a specialized legal audience," they have, on occasion, become " impenetrable" to the average juror. This criticism is not only a valid one, but one frequently one shared by both the Bench and the Bar.

The resulting challenge of making this material more understandable to the "average juror" has recently been addressed by the California Judicial Council in its revisions to these standard instructions [see companion review of new CALCRIM Jury Instructions above].

Communication problems notwithstanding, the CALJIC Instructions have been in use for well over 60 years. Moreover, local court rules in many jurisdictions throughout the state mandate their use in all criminal jury trials. As a result, although revised official jury instructions are now available, counsel must continue to be well-versed with not only the content of CALJIC, but also the style, organization, and philosophy underlying their development.

The CALJIC Instructions essentially provide a straightforward, no-frills, basic definition of the applicable law. For example, while each one of us probably has his or her own idea of what precisely created a "reasonable doubt" in our minds in a particular case, CALJIC 2.90 compels that this precise wording be given to every jury:

"It is that state of the case which, after the entire comparison and consideration of all the evidence, leaves the minds of the jurors in that condition that they cannot say they feel an abiding conviction of the truth of the charge."

The Use Note to CALJIC 2.90 provides insight into why reliance upon such exact language is so highly valued. Noting prior attempts to clarify or improve upon the definition of reasonable doubt, the drafters caution: "It is safer to follow the language of the code section than to struggle for originality where precedent alone should govern."

And therein lies both the beauty and the burden of using CALJIC. While unadorned in their basic, plain, and technical language, the instructions are, nonetheless, crafted with a precise accuracy, calculated to give a jury maximum assistance in discharging its often difficult duty of applying the law to a given set of facts. Next to its longevity, perhaps the best testament to CALJIC is that juries have consistently demonstrated an ability to navigate through the difficulties of language to do their job.

Prepared and designed by the Committee on Standard Jury Instructions of the Los Angeles Superior Court, the CALJIC instructions begin with introductory admonitions and definitions, followed by rules as to evaluating different forms of evidence. At this point, the elements of each crime and defense are thoroughly set out. The two volume manual concludes with instructions to cover such specialized matters as multiple counts or defendants (as well as prior convictions and punishment enhancement issues).

In addition to its actual statement of law, each CALJIC instruction contains a Use Note (prompted by recent appellate decisions) and commentary, including case law supporting use and application of the particular instruction. As a bonus, practitioners should review the wealth of information contained in the Appendix, which includes helpful guides to the giving of sua sponte instructions and lesser included offenses.

The reality is that CALJIC will likely continue as the preferred form of jury instruction for most courts. Other than exchanging originality and creativity for the security of precedent, the legal profession risks little in turning to them for accurate, up-to-date black letter statements of the law.

Accordingly, CALJIC remains the most widely-respected, complete, definitive, and reliable resource available to lawyers -- this compendium presenting the essential elements of the substantive crimes that make up the discipline of criminal law.

Recommended for criminal law offices, law libraries, general reference libraries, and as a supplement to general criminal law texts.

Order from Amazon.com


© Paul J. Aiello. 2006. All rights reserved Paul J. Aiello and The Electric Review.
PAUL J. AIELLO is a retired Judge from Northern California who serves as Legal Editor for The Electric Review. Educated at The University of California, Berkeley and at U.C. Berkeley’s Boalt Hall School of Law, Aiello has conducted hundreds of mediations and arbitrations since 1992. Aiello is also on the adjunct faculty at College of The Siskiyous in Weed, California, where he has taught courses in the Social Sciences andHumanities, as well asin Police-Community Relations. He can be reached through The Electric Review.


NEW FROM NOLO


DEDUCT IT! LOWER YOUR SMALL BUSINESS TAXES. Stephen Fishman. Nolo Press.

By John Aiello

With tax season once upon us again, everyone’s thoughts have turned to the Federal Government and paying off Uncle Sam. However, in this tenuous economy, the specter of taxation has become ever-more-worrisome to the small business owner whose profit margin is hovering at slim-cut margins.

This text by veteran tax-law expert Stephen Fishman attempts to provide some relief for owners of small businesses who may not be taking full advantage of allowable deductions. Fishman has set off on his mission by simplifying aspects of the tax code so that it becomes understandable to a lay audience. As the author points out, the quickest way to make more money is to keep more of your gross income (read: pay less tax). The key to this equation, however, is that this must be accomplished legally, with all deductions substantiated in the event that your return is chosen for audit by the IRS.

Accordingly, Fishman provides insight into key areas that impact the garden-variety small-business owner. Topics of coverage include meaningful commentary on start up expenses; operation expenses; health-related deductions; vehicle-related deductions/mileage; calculating and accounting for inventory; and valuation of equipment. Moreover, Fishman covers known trouble points on many a tax return, with exploration of travel, entertainment and meals deductions that are often misunderstood by taxpayers (in turn triggering increased scrutiny by IRS audit staff). Fishman’s analysis of these areas is especially pertinent since these topics comprise common ‘red flag’ areas on the majority of small business and Schedule C returns.

In addition to its readability and expert discussion, Deduct It! attempts to strip away some of the mystery of small business tax requirements by promoting a general understanding of the United States taxation system. Ultimately, Mr. Fishman’s premise is to impress upon the small business owner that they should take all deductions that they have coming to them in order to increase the profitability of their work. However, as Mr. Fishman notes, the flip side to this is that in order to avoid trouble down the road, it is necessary to be able to corroborate all deductions with receipts, logs and records. If you can do this, then you will be able to move forward through preparation of your return with much less anxiety and much more confidence.

Order from Amazon.com

Of Related Interest

HOME BUSINESS TAX DEDUCTIONS: KEEP WHAT YOU EARN. Stephen Fishman. Nolo Press.

This volume, also written by Mr. Fishman, continues the outline of Deduct It! by synthesizing its focus: In Home Business the author delineates how the proprietor of a home-based business should approach taking tax deductions. Home-based businesses are carefully scrutinized by the IRS because the individual is charged with drawing a line from the point where his personal life ends and his work life begins. The question for the government becomes: "How much of this is work and how much of this is recreation?" When you are working from home and you have no conventional office, certain formulas must be followed in order to paint the Internal Revenue Service an accurate picture of what you are doing. Fishman covers myriad subject areas here, including the creation of the home office; how to account for start-up and operation expenses, vehicles/travel costs; entertainment/meals; health costs; equipment; and inventory. Like in the previous selection, the key is to take all legitimate deductions in order to lower the tax you owe. However, to accomplish this without falling victim to an audit and penalty-assessed tax down the road, one must follow the strict guidelines of the U.S. Tax Code. To this end, Home Business provides an indispensable road map. ~John Aiello

Order from Amazon.com

NOLO’S SIMPLE WILL BOOK, 6th Edition, Denis Clifford. Nolo Press.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

This text from Nolo Press (now in its sixth edition) serves as an excellent general primer providing the lay reader with an overview (and instructions) on how to prepare a will. Bound together with a CD-Rom and augmented by a superb glossary, the text gives readers the ability to understand the reasons for preparing a will and, if they wish, to personally create either a basic or customized will document.

Simple Will presents vital and new information. As the author explains, residents of California, Idaho, Washington and Wisconsin should be aware that these states each have some form of spousal protection law allowing a surviving spouse to inherit a portion of the deceased spouse’s community or separate property. For example, under California Probate Code section 21610, "if the deceased spouse made an estate plan before marriage and didn’t include the surviving spouse in a will or trust, the surviving spouse can claim all of the community and quasi-community property, as well as a share of the deceased spouse’s separate property." [chapter 3, page 8.]

But what happens if you move to a state that does not have community property laws? (These so called "common law states" are conveniently listed in chapter 3 at page 8). To this end, Clifford provides a special note of caution:

"When couples move from a community property state to a common law state, each spouse generally retains a one-half interest in the property acquired while they were married in the community property state. However, the courts that have dealt with the problem haven’t been totally consistent. Accordingly, if you have moved from a community property state to a common law state and you and your spouse have any disagreement or confusion as to who owns what, check with a lawyer." [chapter 3, page 11.]

It should be noted that some types of property cannot be left by will. These include joint tenancy and tenancy by the entirety property, property transferred to a living trust (unless the living trust has been terminated), insurance, pension and retirement accounts (such as 401k plans), as long as a beneficiary has been identified, and "pay-on-death" bank accounts. Another form of property which cannot be transferred by will is property held as "community property with right of survivorship." In certain states —— Arizona, Alaska, California and Nevada and Wisconsin ——a spouse is permitted to hold property in this form of title. As Clifford states: "...in these states, spouses can obtain the benefit of joint tenancy while owning community property. With this form of ownership, a surviving spouse automatically receives a deceased spouse’s share of community property outside of probate." [ chapter 4, page 7.]

Clifford is quick to point out that property left by a will is exposed to probate proceedings, and he immediately identifies the drawbacks of probate (namely attorney’s fees and costs). However, as the author asserts, wills are necessary, and the will instrument offers an expedient way to create a quick estate plan which can be refined at a later date. Clifford goes on to cite various probate avoidance methods including living trusts, the holding of assets in joint tenancy, and pay-on-death accounts (note: Clifford explains about living trusts in depth in the Nolo text, Make Your Own Living Trust.)

For example, pay-on-death accounts are a very simple way to avoid probate, especially for those individuals with estates consisting primarily of cash assets; Clifford writes:

"You open a bank account ——for example, savings, certificate of deposit, or money market—— in your name and add a designation naming a pay-on-death (P.O.D.) beneficiary. You keep complete and exclusive control over the money in the account until your death, at which point any money left in the account belongs to the named beneficiary without any necessity for probate.. If all the money has been withdrawn, the beneficiary gets nothing. If you want to establish this type of account, simply visit your bank and complete the appropriate forms. They’’re simple." [chapter 14, page 5.]

Clifford further explains the estate tax and the current exemption in a few easily understood pages, with a comprehensive chart of the both the estate tax and gift tax exemption amounts. However, the information also comes with a word of caution:

" . . . the uncertainty over whether the 2010 repeal will be made permanent, means that tax planning for wealthy couples may not be easy over the next few years. Indeed, currently, expert estate planners are not certain about how to engage in long-term estate planning. The consensus is —— for now—— do nothing new or different." [chapter 14, page 9.]

Simple Will marks a great way for the ‘‘man-off-the-street’’ to acquaint himself with the basics on will instruments. However, if after reading this material an individual is still uncomfortable with preparing their own document, the text at least allows them to speak knowledgeably with their lawyer (and Clifford augments his treatise with several tips on how to find the right attorney for you).

Order from Amazon.com

Each of these texts from Nolo are strong selections that provide insightful commentary for the lay reader on complex legal subjects. They have earned our highest recommendations.


© Frank Aiello. 2005. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.
Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via
The Electric Review.

Focusing On West

FEDERAL CRIMINAL LAW AND ITS ENFORCEMENT, Third Edition. Norman Abrams and Sara Sun Beale. American Casebook Series. West Group.

Reviewed by Hon. Paul J. Aiello (Retired)

Recent significant developments in the Federal sphere of criminal law formed the genesis of this new edition of Federal Criminal Law and Its Enforcement. Accordingly, co-authors Abrams and Beale have crafted a worthy vehicle through which law students can evaluate and assess such timely topics as federal drug prosecutions and the use of the RICO and forfeiture laws, in addition to analysis of controversial sentencing guidelines.

Other noteworthy features of this selection include more extensive use of text and note material and an Appendix from which the reader can survey the actual civil rights and forfeiture statutes or review the pertinent guidelines used by the Federal bench in sentencing.

The authors have wisely decided to reserve the book’s case law entries only for the most important appellate decisions in each of the areas covered, shedding the more extraneous precedent in favor of in-depth analysis of the primary cases. In all instances, the writing is erudite, lean, and persuasive - a style which might be described as "basic" in the way it moves from introductory federalism issues and then proceeds into various detailed studies of specific federal criminal law topics.

Obviously, Abrams and Beale cover a lot of important ground here. For example, United States vs. Lopez 514 US 549 (1995), the "first decision in 60 years to strike down a federal statute on the grounds that it violated the Commerce Clause" is thoroughly dissected, as are the 1996 legislative revisions that essentially rewrote the body of law on False Statement prosecutions. The new Hate Crime legislation is another fresh topic which receives scholarly and thoughtful analysis by the Abrams-Beale tandem.

This book, now in its third edition and guided by the combined credentials of its authors, succeeds on a high level, making significant academic contributions to the discipline at every point along the way. Beyond that, the impact that federal criminal law has had on the life of ordinary people in recent years makes the subject matter not only extremely relevant, but truly compelling to an integrated study of how laws help shape both our society and our culture.

Recommended as a teaching text in courses on criminal law or evidence; also useful as a general reference text for college and law school libraries.

Order from Amazon.com


© Paul J. Aiello. 2004. All rights reserved Paul J. Aiello and The Electric Review.

PAUL J. AIELLO is a retired Judge from Northern California who serves as Legal Editor for The Electric Review. Educated at The University of California, Berkeley and at U.C. Berkeley’s Boalt Hall School of Law, Aiello has conducted hundreds of mediations and arbitrations since 1992. Aiello is also on the adjunct faculty at College of The Siskiyous in Weed, California, where he has taught courses in the Social Sciences, Humanities and in Police-Community Relations. He can be reached through The Electric Review (see home page email link).


HEALTH LAW HANDBOOK. 2005 Edition. Alice G. Gosfield, Editor. Thomson-West.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

The timeliness of Thomson West’s Health Law Handbook ("Handbook") is immediately obvious as one starts to understand the magnitude of the looming health care crisis in America and the government’s apparent unwillingness to confront the problem at its source: here where the staggering cost of basic health care is juxtaposed with the consumer’s inability to afford it.

Readers should consider the following data:

According to the National Coalition on Healthcare ("NCHC"), health care expenditures increased by 7.7% in 2003, or four times the rate of inflation for that year. According to the NCHC, health care spending in this country increased to 1.7 trillion dollars in 2003. And it is further projected that by 2013, 18.7% of this country’s Gross National Product will be spent on health care costs.

The U.S. Department of Justice has publicly stated that every type of health care provider commits health care fraud -- including publicly traded companies. This conduct includes billing for services not rendered or not medically necessary, billing for more highly reimbursable services than the ones actually provided, or billing repeatedly for groups of services performed together in order to obtain a higher reimbursement rate. A GAO report in May, 1996 estimated that annual losses range from 3% to 10% of all health care expenditures. Based on 1995 expenditures of one trillion dollars, health care providers were defrauding this country and its citizens of between 30 billion dollars to 100 billion dollars annually .

Looking back, Medicare was established by the 1966 adoption of title XVIII of the Social Security Act to provide both basic and supplementary health insurance to individuals 65 years of age and older (and to other qualified individuals such as the prematurely disabled). The Medicare program itself has different components which are financed separately and which provide separate and distinct coverage to beneficiaries.

The primary components to the Medicare program are Part A (which covers institutional services) and Part B (which covers outpatient services rendered by physicians and other identified professionals). Neither Part A nor Part B claims are processed by Medicare; instead, the Medicare program contracts with "intermediaries" (under Part A claims) or "carriers" (under Part B claims) which are almost always private insurers under contract with the Health Care and Financing Administration. These intermediaries and carriers not only are supposed to process claims, but also have a responsibility for making coverage and payment decisions. In effect, intermediaries and carriers as an intermediary against the prospect of fraudulent claims.

Medicare payments are issued according to an unimaginably complex methodology adopted by Congress in 1983 entitled the "Progressive Payment System" which was intended to reimburse providers for only their "reasonable costs" under a cost-based approach, a fee schedule, or a combination of both methods. For all purposes, a provider’s "reasonable costs" are defined as "the cost actually incurred, excluding therefrom any part of incurred cost found to be unnecessary for the efficient delivery of needed health services [as] determined in accordance with regulations establishing the method or methods to be used, and the items to be included, in determining such costs . . ." 42 U.S.C. § 1395x (v)(1)(A). (Emphasis added.)

Given this background, one of the cases reported in the Handbook’s chapter entitled "Update on Fraud and Abuse" by Sanford V. Teplitzky and S. Craig Holden is especially troubling.

The Federal False Claims Act ("FCA") was enacted during the Civil War at the urging of President Abraham Lincoln in response to the profiteering of unscrupulous Union supply contractors (See: "Bad Mules: A Primer on the Federal False Claims Act", by Larry D. Lahman, The Oklahoma Bar Journal, (Vol. 76, No. 12, April 9, 2005.)

The FCA not only makes it illegal for a claimant to make a false statement in writing to obtain money from the United States Government, but also allows private "relators" to act as bounty hunters on behalf of the Government. The 1986 Amendments to the FCA provides for treble damages, increased the relator’s share and lowered the level of proof for fraud. As Lahman states: "Because wrongdoers now face the threat of having to repay more than the amount stolen under its treble damage provisions, the FCA deters untold fraud against the government by its mere presence." Id. at p. 902.

In U.S. ex rel. Atkins v. McInteer (N.D. Ala. 2004) 345 F. Supp. 2d 13202, a Federal District Court adopted a strict interpretation of the FCA provision that liability occurs when any person "knowingly presents, or causes to be presented to an officer or employee of the United States Government . . . a false or fraudulent claim for payment or approval."

The Court held that state Medicaid officials who received the allegedly false or fraudulent claims for payment did not have an employment relationship with the United States Government; thus, the prohibitions and penalties of the False Claims Act were inapplicable. The authors write:

"Those familiar with entities such as carriers, fiscal intermediaries and DMERCs will immediately see the implication of these two cases. Those entities are not officials or employees of the United States Government either; they are contractors. Claims made by health care providers are necessarily submitted to those entities that are under contract to the government to conduct claims processing. If the courts continue to apply Totten as Judge Acker did to Alabama Medicaid, then the FCA becomes wholly inapplicable to the vast, vast numbers of claims submitted to carriers, fiscal intermediaries, and DMERCs." [§ 7.4, pp. 373-374.]

The authors also note that D.C. Circuit had denied rehearing en banc on December 8, 2004, and a petition for certiorari had not been made as of the date of the writing. Clearly, unless Atkins, supra, and the case on which it relies as authority, U.S. ex rel. Totten v. Bombardier Corp. (D.C. Cir. 2004) 380 F.3d 488, are either limited or overturned by the U.S. Supreme Court, unscrupulous health care providers will have little to fear from the treble damages deterrent of the FCA (nor will whistle blowers have any financial incentive to disclose such fraudulent conduct).

Readers will find the Handbook’s chapter on "Consumer Directed Health Care" by Gary Scott Davis and Susan M. Nash especially informative, since the authors identify what is driving this movement in the marketplace along with the models on which it relies:

"How has the marketplace come to its flirtation with consumer-directed health plans" Plain simple economics. Over the past decade, employers have increasingly revolted against the rising, and some argue staggering cost, of employee health benefits. With increasing willingness and resolve, employers have asserted that employees must pay more of the share of increasing health care costs or alternatively, the employer will simply provide fewer benefits. A Hobbesian dilemma at best." [§ 2.1, p. 148.]

In addition, the authors note that the "new paradigm" for Consumer Directed Health Care premises that "consumers will personally pay more of the cost of care and benefits, but in exchange be provided with the tools to make more informed decisions regarding care and treatment and a tax advantaged account to finance a portion of these costs. Under this paradigm, once the patient is transformed into an educated consumer with a financial stake in their cost of care, the purchase of medically unnecessary or marginally beneficial services and items will be curtailed leading to containment of the escalating health care premiums over the past decade." [Id., § 2.1, p. 148.]

Unfortunately, the creators of such health care "models" fail to account for the fact that up to ten percent of every health care dollar —if we are to believe ten year old Department of Justice statistics— are lost to fraud or mismanagement. Nor do such models apparently take into consideration the hourly media barrage of advertising by pharmaceutical manufacturers which drive the marketing of often unnecessary -- and sometimes downright dangerous -- drugs to the American consumer, turning many of them into prescription junkies.

Finally, how is the American consumer going to pay for those services which may become medically necessary ? As a personal example, one family member underwent two surgeries for uterine cancer in 1972 and spent ten days in the hospital. The total cost of the medical procedures at that time —surgeries, doctors, medicine, hospitalization and follow up consultations— was less than $2500. Today, such a medical procedure would cost hundreds of thousands of dollars and economically destroy any family without health insurance (and perhaps even substantially harm families with such insurance). Obviously, the paradigm-makers fail to recognize that individual health care policies are now simply unaffordable and that health care costs are beyond the control of the individual consumer.

When one reviews the authors’ well-developed and expertly summarized analysis of "tax favored" accounts, it becomes apparent that such accounts will do little or nothing to lower the unconscionable cost of medical services at the source, i.e., preventing a broken leg from accelerating into a personal bankruptcy. For example, a "Health Savings Account" authorized by IRC § 223 allows a maximum contribution which cannot be greater than $2,650 for an individual or $5,250 for a family, assuming other qualifications are met including the fact that an individual must be covered by a "high deductible health plan" and not covered by any other health insurance.

As another example of the looming health care crisis, the authors of the chapter entitled "Long Term Care Future Trends" note that within the next eight years, 77 million baby boomers will turn age 65, further citing that "LTC costs are expected to be $135 billion in 2004, rising to $260 billion by 2025, at which time the government’s share through Medicaid through Medicaid is expected to be 83 billion dollars. Medicaid spending accounts for about 21% of state budgets, with growth at 11% per year." [§ 12.20, p.642.]

The authors also point to a growing advocacy of home and community-based services as part of future long term care. Unfortunately, what such advocates often fail to realize is one especially haunting government statistic routinely taught to agents selling long term care insurance as part of their mandatory education, namely, that 1 individual in 10 over the age of 65 will suffer from Alzheimers disease or other dementia-related illness. Many of these individuals will almost certainly require care in an institutionalized setting, in turn creating even more of a burden on already stressed state Medicaid budgets. Sadly, if such people end up dying in their home, it will likely not be because of choice.

Review of this text makes it readily apparent that unless this country and its "policy makers" begin to deal with reality and begin to lower the barbaric health care costs faced by working men and women in America, it may wake up one morning —as the leaders of East Germany did a decade and a half ago— to find that the only people still going to work are its bureaucrats and policemen.

Recommended to all general practitioners for its timely direction on Health-Law regulations. Should further be considered as a supporting class text in courses designed to instruct the advanced student on the law as it relates to modern health care systems. Finally, recommended to law libraries at both the government level and in the University setting for its long-range reference value.

Order from Amazon.com

© Frank Aiello. 2005. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.


Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via
The Electric Review.

CASES AND MATERIALS ON THE RULES OF EVIDENCE. Third Edition. Olin G. Wellborn III. From the "American Casebook Series." Thomson-West.

Reviewed by Hon. Paul J. Aiello (Retired)

Courtroom skill is not a product of chance or circumstance. As with any other profession, occupation, or calling, the practice of the law requires the student to master a carefully crafted set of tools -- tools that trial lawyers routinely must depend on in order to competently represent their client’s interests.

Olin G. Wellborn III's third edition of Cases and Materials on The Rules of Evidence, from the American Casebook Series by Thomson-West, presents students of the law and related disciplines with a text that lays out these "tools of the trade" in a scholarly yet pragmatic way, capturing both the technical nature of the material and the theoretical underpinnings of the rationales supporting the application of the rules.

Basically, the main purpose of the rules of evidence is to help the court system operate in a balanced and fair manner, by protecting a jury from seeing or hearing evidence that is unreliable or prejudicial. Following rules of evidence ensures that a set of strict standards will be followed by the parties to prove or disprove the factual issues in a case. Wellborn's book provides a basic knowledge of the role each federal rule plays in such a trial setting.

As the author notes in the Preface to the work, the materials in the book are meant to be entirely self-sufficient, thus allowing for maximum benefit to the student, when studied with a current copy of the Federal Rules of Evidence. Each chapter examines an article of the rules. Wellborn has compiled carefully selected cases demonstrating not only the substantive parameters of each rule, but its application to a specific factual context. Enhancing the student's understanding of the rule's operation are detailed notes following each case which further expand upon the discussion.

A feature worthy of note is the text's organization, uniquely evidencing the author's familiarity with his subject as well as his classroom experience. The simplicity of the linear approach creates a logical sequence of building blocks for the reader. The book begins with the most fundamental evidence concepts, relevancy and the hearsay rule. It then proceeds with a review of the procedural criteria for admitting and excluding evidence, including documentary and other tangible evidence. It concludes with the peculiarities of the rules on privilege as well as substitutes for evidence, including presumptions and judicial notice.

Wellborn wisely chooses not to intrude into the learning process by interjecting either personal judgment or viewpoint. Instead he simply presents the rules of evidence in a variety of contexts (primary cases, secondary cases, statutory analysis), showing how each tool is to be used and trusting the reader to then use the rule correctly in a professional setting. This is teaching at its most basic level and the core of learning, showing great respect between author and reader, instructor and student.

As a result the style of the book has a "let's get down to business" feel to it - simple, direct, unadorned with superfluous commentary and extraneous material. Most satisfying is that Wellborn has selected interesting cases to demonstrate each rule, the factual settings of which bring a true human dimension to the material.

But more importantly, in a subject that can be deadly technical and dry, the author has succeeded in showing the relevance of evidence - not as an abstract concept - but as organic, vital, critical, operating in real life settings to protect rights, level the playing field, give expression to societal expectations, and ensure that results will be based not on chance, but on objective standards that seek to preserve fundamental notions of fairness.

Recommended as a teaching text in law or law enforcement courses on evidence. Imperative as a general reference text for college-level law libraries.

Order from Amazon.com


© Paul J. Aiello. 2004. All rights reserved Paul J. Aiello and The Electric Review.

PAUL J. AIELLO is a retired Judge from Northern California who serves as Legal Editor for The Electric Review. Educated at The University of California, Berkeley and at U.C. Berkeley’s Boalt Hall School of Law, Aiello has conducted hundreds of mediations and arbitrations since 1992. Aiello is also on the adjunct faculty at College of The Siskiyous in Weed, California, where he has taught courses in the Social Sciences, Humanities and in Police-Community Relations. He can be reached through The Electric Review (see home page email link).


Law, Unions and the State of the American Worker

LABOR LAW STORIES. Edited by Laura J. Cooper and Catherine L. Fisk. Foundation Press.

By John Aiello

So where did the real unions go and what is the state of labor law in the post-millennium decade? Anyone interested in answering this question should open Labor Law Stories (edited by Laura J. Cooper and Catherine L. Fisk) and give it a long and comprehensive review.

This book, just released from the legal publisher, Foundation Press, provides a very interesting record of the leading cases that have shaped the landscape of labor law. Here, Cooper and Fisk have compiled analysis of the major cases responsible for the statutes that are used to regulate labor in the United States.

However, the book serves as much more than a stodgy memorialization of labor law. To the contrary, the editors have taken great pains to make the legal subject matter relevant to both the practicing attorney and the instructor charged with teaching the student about the state of labor in today’s America. What’s best about this text is that it makes relevant these cases by exploring them in relation to society and the perspectives driving its people.

For example, in chapter two (written by Deborah C. Malamud), the story of Steele v. Louisville & Nashville Railroad is told, telling the story of the struggle of the black worker to gain equal footing in the workplace. Early in the 20th century, the railroad industry was the bastion of the white worker, with black workers relegated to the most dangerous jobs in the field. In this essay, Malamud does a beautiful job in detailing the broad reaching implications of this case and how instrumental it was in forging the road for "racial justice on the rails." Also notable in these case discussions is the story of Hoffman Plastic Compounds, Inc. v. NLRB -- a case of massive importance for undocumented immigrants entering the United States work force.

In the end, Cooper and Fisk do a splendid job in editing a book that is chock full of historical and legal data while still being easy to navigate. Students in the field will find the chapters well organized and formatted in a way that is conducive to long-range comprehension. Legal texts often tend to be dry reads and over-burdened with facts. In contrast,, Labor Law Stories directly benefits from the efforts the authors have taken to streamline this material and make it meaningful to a new generation of worker.

Recommended as a supporting class text in all courses examining the historical face of labor/employment law. Also recommended a general reference text for Law libraries at the University/graduate level.

For a column on the deteriorating state ofour labor unions, see this edition of Rat's Notebook.

MORE FROM THOMSON

REAL ESTATE & RELATED LEGAL ISSUES

MOLD & REAL ESTATE. A Handbook for Buyers and Sellers. Carmel Streater. Thomson South-Western.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

As any civil trial lawyer worth his salt will tell you, mold contamination in residential and commercial properties has become the toxic tort du jour -- a problem of growing proportions that has become all too common place throughout the country during the last decade.

Accordingly, this new text by Carmel Streater (Thomson South-Western) serves as an easy-to-understand primer in large print identifying the substance (mold as living creature/organism), in addition to noting the health hazards toxic mold can pose and the legal ramifications its existence in a structure often creates.

This potential for legal consequences is best illustrated in a case which originated in Dripping Springs (no pun intended ) Texas, where homeowners Melinda Ballard and Ronald Allison filed a series of insurance claims against their insurer, Farmers Insurance Group. These claims resulted from "troubled areas" in the structure, including the presence of mold contamination.

After drawn out litigation, the case went to trial on May 7, 2001 (five years after the original claim was filed), and the jury returned a verdict which included $2,547,350 to replace the home and $1,154,175 to remediate the mold contamination. As Streater states: "The district court rendered a final opinion on October 30, 2001, for over $33,000,000 [in]which the actual damages were reduced by $2,045,204.28 (the amount already paid by FIE on claims). The Farmer’s Insurance Group no longer writes homeowners’ policies in Texas." (Emphasis added).

Cases like Ballard v. Farmers Insurance Group clearly reached the attention of corporate boardrooms, and in 2002, letters were sent to millions of policyholders across the nation modifying their policies. Specifically, these modifications provided that mold contamination which results from deferred maintenance would not be covered. As a consequence, many homeowners, whether they know it or not, now have limited or no coverage in the event mold contamination occurs in their dwelling.

Streater’s text is recommended to both buyers and sellers of residential and commercial structures as an invaluable resource that provides insight into a problem of universal concern. It also should be recommended reading for any individual seeking a Realtor’s license.

Order from Amazon.com

© Frank Aiello. 2005. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.


Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via The Electric Review.


POLICE STUDIES


INTERVIEWING AND INTERROGATION: THE DISCOVERY OF TRUTH. Steven V. Gilbert. Wadsworth/Thomson Learning.

Reviewed by Hon. Paul J. Aiello (Retired)

In this text, Steven V. Gilbert has created a primer on the essentials of interviewing and interrogation techniques for law enforcement. Its basic premise is one so fundamentally necessary to effective police investigation that it is often overlooked by newer officers just entering the profession. One reason for this is that the subject matter is usually assigned to a general textbook where it is merely one of many other criminology skills being presented to the student.

Here, Professor Gilbert has eliminated those other distractions and developed a practical reference manual and field guide so that undivided attention can be focused solely on the subject of proper interviewing.

Stressing a police officer's critical need for information in every investigation, the author notes that the collection of physical evidence at a crime scene provides only partial bits of information that help to show what happened. But the real answers - the "whys" and "intents" - come from those persons involved in the events. When such information gathering is not obtained early, or when the right questions are not asked or an interviewer alienates a witness, investigations suffer and resolutions of the crime are often delayed.

In reading this text, it's obvious that Professor Gilbert has both a mastery of and passion for his subject. A former special agent with the U.S. Army Criminal Investigation Command, he currently is director and professor of the Bachelor of Technology Program in criminal investigations at the State University of New York. He also completed a fellowship in forensic medicine at the Armed Forces Institute of Pathology, Washington, DC He writes with an accumulation of over 20 years of criminal investigative experience.

Serious students will not only appreciate the scholarly value of his work, but will readily want to apply and transfer its wisdom to their practical police work. This is a man who has been there, seen it, and knows what does and does not work in the gathering of information. Accordingly, his insights can be deceptively simple but invaluable. For example, at page 52 of the book, Gilbert offers this advice in the context of interviewing the suspect of a crime:

"Perhaps the best interrogation technique to discuss first is the explanation of how investigations work. If a suspect can be convinced of the invariable success of the investigation itself, then the probability of obtaining a confession increases significantly."

Style can be critical to the success and value of any book, and this is especially true of textbooks used in an academic setting. Students will find Gilbert's book surprisingly readable: the analysis presented in a user-friendly format, the writing refreshing in its deliberate exclusion of extraneous commentary. Each chapter benefits from this simple, straight-forward design. The chapters address a single topic whereby the basic point is stated succinctly, followed by examples of techniques pertinent to the type of interview or interrogation being discussed. Also included are practice tips and applications for the officer.

A particular aspect of the book's format which should prove helpful to the student are the Real Life Scenarios which punctuate each chapter:

"A woman reported being raped while walking along a dark path at night. If not for the physical injuries she sustained during the incident, her statement would have been suspect. Her reaction to the incident, as well as her behavior during her interview, did not support her being violently rape. Her general demeanor was that of calm reflection of her actions that may have contributed."

-From "Interviewing the Victim"-

Professor Gilbert uses the scenario to instruct students in the behavioral clues common to victims of crime, and notes that their absence can indicate that the victim may be untruthful in their report of a crime. At the same time, he cautions that not all crime victims react to the trauma in the same way. Some victims may not recall the details at all. The author concludes that, when judging the victim, the police officer must take the totality of the circumstances surrounding the complaint into account.

Since this material is based on actual experiences, instructors should find the scenarios useful for interactive classroom discussion. Through them students can learn to recognize common mistakes, and appreciate the nuances and attention to detail necessary to completing an effective interview.

The substantive content of the book covers myriad topics, including ethical considerations (making deals and breaking the law in order to get a statement), preparation steps, and interrogation techniques for different types of offenders. The author expands the subject matter to include chapters on how and why false confessions happen and concludes with an interesting chapter on forensic hypnosis. An appendix offers helpful forms, including a sample interview worksheet as well as a sample rights warning and waiver certificate. On a separate level, Gilbert also discusses human motivations and influences, critical elements to knowing not only what to ask but how to ask it.

Ultimately, the discovery of truth is the primary goal of law enforcement work, and Professor Gilbert's book will assist the student in competently performing this essential police function.

Recommended for criminology students and their instructors, it would best serve as a supplemental text accompanying more general criminal justice works, or as a specific instructional module in reserve officer training.

COMMUNITY POLICING: Partnerships for Problem Solving. 4th Edition. Linda S. Miller and Karen M. Hess. Thomson-Wadsworth.

Reviewed by Hon. Paul J. Aiello (Retired)

The new edition of Community Policing is completely revised from previous editions both in terms of structure and focus. Co-authors Miller and Hess, frequent contributors to the growing body of work on police relations, have organized the text into three primary sections. Section I discusses the evolution of community policing in terms of the necessity for the police mission to include the involvement of the community. Section II addresses the communication and interpersonal skills required by police officers to gain trust and cooperation from community members. Finally, Section III concludes with a discussion of the collaborative efforts needed to manage various community problems, ranging from traffic control to workplace and domestic violence as well as hate crimes and terrorism.

Miller and Hess's study functions effectively as a textbook for serious students interested in a career in law enforcement. The material has been completely updated, with new terms, tables, figures, and photographs included. Each chapter begins with a highlight of key concepts to be covered which also doubles as a statement of objectives for the subject matter. The authors then allow further exposure to a chapter's key information by providing a detailed chapter summary. Discussion questions, references, and a suggested community project round out the instructional features of the work.

The book's scholarship blends nicely with its practical "nuts and bolts" approach to the subject matter. Its value to the reader is enhanced by clear, understandable writing. The substantive content has been designed to promote attitudes of professionalism and competency commonly expected of police officers operating in such a highly visible environment. For example, the section on developing interpersonal skills addresses the challenges inherent in interacting and communicating with individuals who are culturally, racially, or socioeconomically different. The chapter on proactive policing includes a timely discussion of how law enforcement must come to understand and be prepared to use the fundamentals of mediation as a problem-solving tool. A thought-provoking section looks at how law enforcement benefits from adopting concepts borrowed from business: networking and being service oriented, treating community members as customers.

The authors have added a new chapter which highlights the central theme of this edition, the importance of building partnerships between the police and community. Emphasizing its critical nature in the field, Miller and Hess begin this chapter by quoting the police chief of the Charlotte-Mecklenburg Police Department :

"Problem-solving without partnerships risks overlooking the most pressing community concerns. Thus, the partnership between police and the communities they service is essential for implementing a successful program in community policing."

page 173

A thoughtful concluding chapter, looking to the future of community policing, analyzes what has and has not worked in the field, forcing the student to look at the question in terms of whether community policing is a philosophy or an actual reality.

A minor weakness in the book is the absence of critical-thinking problems which would enhance its pedagogical value enormously, providing the student practical hypothetical situations against which to apply the principles learned. The book remains, however, a thorough exploration of the subject and is a recommended text for criminology students and instructors. Miller and Hess succeed at showing how, working together, the police and the community can accomplish what neither can accomplish alone.

POLICE INTEGRITY AND ETHICS. Matthew Hickman, Alex R. Piquero, and Jack R. Greene. Thomson-Wadsworth.

Reviewed by Hon. Paul J. Aiello (Retired)

Part of the Wadsworth Professionalism In Policing Series, the authors have gathered a collection of essays addressing the timely topics of police misconduct and integrity. The contributors are all noted experts and are uniformly regarded as qualified commentators in the field. As a result, the book is immensely informative and offers the prevailing theories, philosophies, and concepts on the subject.

Beginning with an examination of how to define and measure integrity, the essays then explore the theme of intervention strategies to identify "at risk" situations and conclude with a consideration of the public perception of police misconduct. In another section of the volume, discussing situational contexts and their impact on integrity, the reader will find a fascinating study of the types of situations in which police officers are most likely to find themselves corrupted. For example, in one essay, the issue of the amount of force directed against racial minorities (as compared to the force used against whites) is weighed, with the piece then identifying how such behavior can be the product of patterns of thought that seek to disregard legal standards of conduct.

Positing the book's central theme, author Jack Greene writes in the Introduction, "Police integrity is thus best conceived of as the product of both police behavior and the public perception of that behavior." Collectively, then, the insights afforded through the in-depth essays will help to illumine the complexities surrounding these competing interests. For the serious student, the volume will be a compelling read, focusing on an aspect of law enforcement for which the police have increasingly come to be judged, individually and as an organization.

As noted by the publisher, anthologies such as Police Integrity and Ethics, in exploring contemporary problems and reframing debates, perform a valuable educational function by filling in the gaps left by more general and traditional texts.

The present volume makes an effective companion reader to general criminology, sociology, or law texts. It is also recommended as a general reference text for both college and public libraries.

© Paul J. Aiello. 2004. All rights reserved Paul J. Aiello and The Electric Review.

PAUL J. AIELLO is a retired Judge from Northern California who serves as Legal Editor for The Electric Review. Educated at The University of California, Berkeley and at U.C. Berkeley’s Boalt Hall School of Law, Aiello has conducted hundreds of mediations and arbitrations since 1992. Aiello is also on the adjunct faculty at College of The Siskiyous in Weed, California, where he has taught courses in the Social Sciences,Humanities and in Police-Community Relations. He can be reached through The Electric Review (see home page email link).

Order from Amazon.com


CONSTITUTIONAL LAW AND THE CRIMINAL JUSTICE SYSTEM. 3rd Edition. J. Scott Harr and Karen M. Hess. Thomson-Wadsworth.

Reviewed by Hon. Paul J. Aiello (Retired)

Most constitutional law texts default to the long-established case book approach to the subject matter. Constitutional Law pleasantly surprises the reader by adopting instead a more traditional college textbook format, suitable for law enforcement students in either introductory level courses on criminal law and procedure or more specialized classes on constitutional law or search and seizure.

Co-authors J. Scott Harr and Karen M. Hess have successfully integrated several unique features which distinguish this book from similar texts in the field:

(1) First, they devote their entire treatise to the impact which constitutional imperatives have had upon the criminal justice system. Specifically limiting the book's focus in this way enables students to concentrate on a defined area of study relevant to their future police work;

(2) The book then combines a broad overview of the foundational principles of each constitutional amendment with specific legal guidelines pertinent to each;

(3) Finally, the discussion of each amendment includes the seminal case law which has interpreted it.

The authors have designed the book to make learning as enjoyable as possible. Each chapter and section serves as a building block for the next so that, at the end, the reader can stand back to survey the completed structure of constitutional limitations upon the government's power to define, prosecute, and punish crime. The writing style is basic, unadorned, shorn of legalese and easily understandable. In addition, the page layout contains wide margins for notes and references.

Discussion questions, internet assignments, and a detailed list of references and cases cited make up the instructional features of each chapter of the text. The Appendix contains a reproduction of the Constitution and each of the Amendments, the landmark cases of Marbury vs. Madison and Miranda vs. Arizona, and a detailed glossary of terms, but lacking are critical thinking exercises (practical application questions) which would assist the student-reader in testing themselves on retention. The authors do provide, however, helpful Book Companion Web Sites which include further case content tied to the chapters, as well as numerous study aids.

Given the authors' expertise and qualifications to write about the subject (Harr is a licensed attorney, police officer, private investigator, instructor in various areas of the law and licensed to practice before the U.S. Supreme Court; Hess holds degrees in English and criminal justice and has co-authored eight other books in the criminal justice field), the book's substantive content is well-selected and timely in its relevance to current events.

Moving forward, Constitutional Law naturally progresses through its subject matter. The first section begins with basic civil liberties guarantees (Equal Protection, First amendment, Second Amendment), modernizing the material to include the current gun control controversy. Section II goes into each of the amendments influencing criminal justice law and procedure (Fourth Amendment search and seizure issues, Fifth Amendment Due Process, Sixth Amendment Right to Counsel, Eighth Amendment bails, fines, and punishments). The text culminates in Section III with a discussion of the remaining amendments, primary among them being the Ninth Amendment and concepts of "zones of privacy."

In the end, the work remains a useful and effective textbook, recommended for both student and instructor in the fields of sociology, criminology, or introductory law courses. On a broader level, Constitutional Law would constitute a valuable resource to anyone interested in learning and understanding more about their legal and civil rights. Harr and Hess are to be applauded for helping readers get their bearings in this fresh and unique approach to a complex topic.

CRIMINAL LAW. 6th Edition. Sue Titus Reid. McGraw-Hill.

Reviewed by Hon. Paul J. Aiello (Retired)

Among introductory courses offered at the undergraduate level, the subject of criminal law continues to attract and fascinate a wide student audience in the social sciences. That appeal is confirmed in this latest edition of Criminal Law, written by Sue Titus Reid, a distinguished author in the field of criminal justice. In addition to contributing articles to the Encyclopedia of Crime and Justice, Reid's other works include Crime and Criminology (first published in 1976 and now in its tenth edition) and The Correctional System: An Introduction.

Reid brings to her writing an authority which reflects her diverse background as a criminologist, lawyer, and teacher. Beyond her command of the topic, however, she writes with the clear purpose of helping her students to learn, and to do so in an enjoyable way. The organization of the substantive material is not unlike other criminal law texts. The author begins with a basic introduction, discussing the nature and purpose of the criminal law. Following this is an examination of the elements of a crime. Then Reid defines each of the major crimes and defenses and analyzes its components in depth, modernizing the discussion to reflect the recent emphasis on terrorism, drugs, and white collar crime.

What sets the text apart is Reid's skillful use of current events and issues to demonstrate many of the legal principles. For example, the murder trial of Michael Skakel, nephew of the Kennedys, is used to discuss issues of jurisdiction. The case of Mary Lou Letourneau, convicted of the child rape of her 12 year old student, features in the chapter on criminal liability. Coverage of other high profile cases is included in the chapter on murder. Noteworthy are insights offered in the concepts of murder and manslaughter, using the case of the death of a neighbor by a dog with known vicious propensities (Marjorie Knoller and Robert Noel case) as the discussion vehicle. The student's familiarity with these contemporary events is likely to draw him/her immediately into the learning process.

Reid also treats the reader to a fascinating look at some of the recent innovative defenses being used in criminal trials, including the cultural defense, posttraumatic stress disorder, the Viagra defense, and postpartum depression on subsequent behavior.

New sections in the book explore many of the more timely and controversial aspects now emerging in criminal law - the United States Patriot Act, the Public Health Security and Bioterrorism Response Act of 2002, and how RICO is being used to prosecute defense attorneys in order to control crimes of complicity.

Also new to this edition are several instructional aids for the student, including:

"For Debate" questions, allowing students to engage in stimulating discussion of controversial topics;

A "Case Analysis" following each chapter, providing a court holding and rationale related to the material covered, followed by cogent, critical-thinking questions;

Focus Boxes enhancing each chapter, containing a wealth of information related to each chapter topic;

An appendix containing reference information onhow to read a citation.

The combination of (1) exciting content, illustrated in an innovative, relevant approach; (2) written in a friendly, understandable style; and (3) featuring a variety of instructional tools makes this textbook a cut above similar offerings.

Recommended for both student and instructor in the disciplines of criminology, sociology, or law, the book truly has the student as the focus, centerpiece, and reason for its existence, marking and defining its value as an educational resource.

Order from Amazon.com

© Paul J. Aiello. 2004. All rights reserved Paul J. Aiello and The Electric Review.

PAUL J. AIELLO is a retired Judge from Northern California who serves as Legal Editor for The Electric Review. Educated at The University of California, Berkeley and at U.C. Berkeley’s Boalt Hall School of Law, Aiello has conducted hundreds of mediations and arbitrations since 1992. Aiello is also on the adjunct faculty at College of The Siskiyous in Weed, California, where he has taught courses in the Social Sciences, Humanities and in Police-Community Relations. He can be reached through The Electric Review (see home page email link).

MEDIATE, DON’T LITIGATE. Strategies for Successful Mediation. Peter Lovenheim and Attorney Lisa Guerin. Nolo Press.

Reviewed by Hon. Paul J. Aiello (Retired)

Mediate, Don’t Litigate is a timely, welcome and worthy addition to the Nolo library, appearing at a time when mediation has gained both acceptance and respect in both the legal and business communities.

In the fast-paced world of the 21st century, mediation clauses have become commonplace in almost every real estate, employment, and health care contract. Moreover, courts are looking to mediation as just one part of a larger ADR (Alternative Dispute Resolution) tool-kit that will help to reduce its caseloads and provide disputants with an inexpensive, less formal mechanism by which to resolve or settle their cases. Many counties are now establishing mandatory mediation programs for most civil cases, finding it an effective means of conflict management. For these reasons, it is essential that everyone should develop a fundamental understanding about mediation as an ADR method. Mediate, provides a one-stop resource from which that basic knowledge can be obtained.

Co-written by a longtime professional mediator and one of Nolo’s own legal editors, each of the authors are well-credentialed to write about the subject of mediation. The contents have the imprimatur of the depth of their background, experience, and scholarship. They are knowledgeable not only about the broader process of mediation, but also its "fine-tuned" nuances and the book should help both lawyers and lay persons better prepare for and participate in this particular dispute resolution format.

Mediate is written in an understandable, readable, user-friendly style that contributes to its value. It has been prepared with the clear intention to assist both lay persons and lawyers unfamiliar with mediation understand the process through a step-by-step "guided tour" where the basic principles are broken down and explained simply and directly.

Lovenheim and Guerin proceed from the premise that mediation may provide a better answer for people than the more traditional "day in court" mind-set. In comparing mediation with other forms of dispute resolution in the book’s opening chapters, readers will quickly discover the flexibility of mediation by seeing how the same techniques have been used successfully in a myriad of contexts, including complex business disputes, employment relationships, landlord-tenant, consumer-merchant, neighbor-neighbor, or divorce and custody cases. The book also explains both the factors which favor and oppose mediation to help the reader make an informed decision as to whether mediation will make sense in a specific dispute and therefore should be considered in place of litigation.

Mediate covers a wide range of important basic information, including:

Where to find a mediator and factors to help you choose the right mediator;

How to get a mediation started;

How to prepare for a mediation, including evidence gathering and deciding who should attend;

How to write an agreement that will work for all of the interested parties.

Mediate treats the reader to an in-depth discussion of mediation in three specific contexts: (1) Divorce; (2) Business Disputes; and (3) Employment disputes, noting specific types of issues likely to emerge and considerations useful to their resolution. The book is at its best, however, when it actually takes you inside the mediation room, placing the reader in one of the chairs around the conference table and actually making you one of the disputing parties:

"The caucus is a private meeting between you and the mediator, during which the mediator can talk with you more informally and candidly than if the other side were present. Some mediators consider it the "guts" of the mediation…"

(pg. 6/27)

"To help you arrive at a solution to your dispute, your mediator has to get both parties to change their positions (or simply to see that their positions don’t really conflict.) One way to do this is to question the correctness or wisdom of the position you expressed in your opening statement. The mediator’s questions will be designed to make you wonder if you are being realistic about your case."

(pg. 6/29)

"An important part of the mediator’s job is to help you think of new ways to resolve your dispute. People caught up in a conflict often get stuck seeing only one perspective…To help you move off the dime, your mediator might ask you questions like these:

" How would you really like to see this dispute resolved, from a practical perspective?"

"What are some ways of settling this dispute that would be fair to you and the other side?"

( pg. 6/31)

In this section of Mediate, the authors outline in detail the six stages of the process: (1) Mediator’s opening statement; (2) Disputants’ opening statements; (3) Joint discussion; (4) Caucus; (5) Joint discussion; and (6) Closure The authors then explain the mediator’s role in organizing the issues, challenging your position, giving you a reality check, and helping to create settlement options. Particularly valuable are insights into how can a party can use the mediator to assist in the negotiation process. After reading the material in this section, one should be able to participate meaningfully in a mediation with a full understanding of what to expect.

Lovenheim and Guerin have done an exemplary job in educating their audience on a very complex topic. Anyone contemplating mediation should make this book a must-read in preparation for what they will encounter.

________________________________

And also from Nolo:

BECOMING A MEDIATOR. Your Guide to Career Opportunities. Peter Lovenheim and Emily Doskow. Nolo Press.

Reviewed by Hon. Paul J. Aiello (Retired)

Mediation is by far the most popular of the conflict resolution methods that comprise the burgeoning ADR field. Its appeal is based upon its many distinguishing features, including confidentiality, informality, nominal or low cost, and placing the ultimate decision-making in the hands of the parties.

The current demand for mediation - from minor neighborhood squabbles to multi-party complex business disputes - has probably never been greater. As a result, there is a demand for qualified mediators in a variety of settings, creating an abundance of career opportunities.

Attorney Mediator Peter Lovenheim and Nolo Editor Emily Doskow have written this present Nolo entry as a guide for anyone considering a possible career in mediation. The authors have prepared the book with a diverse audience in mind. Both lawyers and non-lawyers alike, contemplating a move into the mediation arena, should find the book beneficial and its informational content useful. Practicing mediators interested in learning more about building up their mediation practices are also offered valuable insights and suggestions. As Lovenheim and Doskow conclude in their introduction to the work,

"Whatever your background - law, social work, teaching, psychology, business, homemaking, or parenting - if you have the skills and desire, we believe you can become a mediator and find a satisfying career."

With no requisite background necessary to become a mediator, the field remains wide open to everyone. Yet, as the book notes, about 3/4 of the people who complete mediator training never actually practice mediation, once they discover that they are not suited to the work. So, as with all good career guides, the authors begin with a reality check, a "self-evaluation" chapter, which poses the question which all prospective mediators must ask themselves: Is mediation the right career for me? To help answer that question, Lovenheim and Doskow identify and discuss skills and traits common to successful mediators. The list becomes a measureable standard by which a person can decide if (s)he possesses these fundamental qualifications, including:

good listening skills

ability to read people

a calm demeanor

facility with language

ability to understand complex facts

trustworthiness in keeping confidences

professional detachment

self-marketing skills

Lacking one or more of these traits does not necessarily preclude one from becoming a mediator. Those who possess instead what the authors describe as "intuitive peacemaking skills" can also find rewarding job opportunities without necessarily fitting the standard mediator profile. The book provides an in depth discussion of the places where mediators can find work, outlining both the positive and negative aspects of typical mediation venues, including community mediation centers, court-annexed programs, government programs, and private dispute resolution companies. The discussion then expands to offer insights into the kind of mediation training available and touches upon where that training is offered, both general training and specialized training in such areas as heath care, securities, environmental issues, real estate and employment.

By far, however, the heart of the book lies in the comprehensive information that the authors have gathered concerning the resources available for showing mediators where employment can be found. Lovenheim and Doskow have done an impressive job in both the scope and detail of their research. These are the "nuts and bolts" sections for prospective mediators, who will find great value in its practical information.

Featured in the Chapter entitled, "Job Opportunities in Mediation," for example, are an array of sample "job descriptions" for different types of mediation positions at both the state and federal level. To these the authors have included job qualifications, salary ranges, contact telephone numbers, and website addresses. Selected programs are profiled in a detailed Case Study which adds to the value of the information being placed at the reader's fingertips. Finally, the Career Resources section presents a list of resource websites that include individual job postings.

For the independent mediator in private practice, the book offers tips on making oneself better known. If a mediator has expertise in a particular area, opportunities to expand his/her practice can be found by networking, making presentations at conventions, writing and distributing a newsletter, or posting online articles of interest in the field.

Although mediator job opportunities may not be as plentiful for non-lawyers, this book can still assist them in their job search. The authors note that the new area of online mediation is providing good opportunities for mediators who are not lawyers. In addition, Lovenheim and Doskow include two sections in the book describing mediation support jobs (case management, administration, sales and development) and mediation-related fields (ombudsman, training and teaching, consulting and coaching), all of which are providing employment opportunities without requiring a law degree.

Ensuring that readers will make a truly informed decision about the mediation profession, the book also includes a cautionary section describing the "dark side" of mediation and explores how it can often be lonely, stressful, and emotionally draining. Despite these potential negative costs, however, most practitioners find the work meaningful and enjoyable, as seen in this case study offered by the authors:

A recent case...involved a father and 27 year-old son who had been estranged for many years. The son said the father cared little for him and was too busy for him. The father said it was impossible to talk with his son because he would blow up at the most innocent remark. They met with the mediator for four hours over two late afternoon sessions. They worked hard, each owned up to his own part in the dispute, and together they reached deeply to find solutions. At the end of the second session, they worked together to come up with the terms of an agreement: regular family dinners, weekly meetings for coffee, use of civil language, respect for each other's work, and so on...As they put on their coats to leave, the son turned to his father and said, "I really do love you, Dad," and the father said, "I love you too, son." They embraced, and left together. This is mediation at its best and most rewarding.

From the Case Study, "Father and Son"- p. 2/4

Readers can expect Becoming A Mediator to be as readable and comprehensible as other titles in the Nolo Library. The writing is crisp, direct, and unpretentious. Enhancing the book's value in a visually-pleasing way are the many graphics and interesting side-bar observations that augment each chapter. The appendix is as informative as the book's substantive content. It includes sample rules of mediation, a list of statewide mediation offices, and academic centers offering degree and certificate programs in conflict resolution. In short, Lovenheim and Doskow, in a satisfying read, effectively present those interested in a mediation career with all of the information necessary to make that dream a reality.

Order from Amazon.com or go to nolo.com

© Paul J. Aiello. 2004. All rights reserved Paul J. Aiello and The Electric Review.

Paul J. Aiello is a retired Judge from Northern California who serves as Legal Editor for The Electric Review. Educated at The University of California, Berkeley and at U.C. Berkeley’s Boalt Hall School of Law, Aiello has conducted hundreds of mediations and arbitrations since 1992. Aiello is also on the adjunct faculty at College of The Siskiyous in Weed, California, where he has taught courses in the Social Sciences and Humanities. He can be reached through The Electric Review (see home page email link).

THE HANDBOOK OF WOMEN, PSYCHOLOGY AND THE LAW. Edited by Andrea Barnes. Jossey-Bass.

By John Aiello

This handbook recently released by Jossey-Bass is distinct for many reasons, most notably because of the way it focuses on how American society has confronted women’s topics/issues.

During the majority of the 20th century, the legal world was most definitely a man’s place, formulated by a hard-edged male perspective. However, as cultures evolved and an influx of women joined the work force, that male perspective became much less relevant. Here, Barnes (a psychologist and attorney) has developed a text that focuses on the issues of the woman in contemporary society.

Handbook of Women compiles the essays and articles of myriad experts in the filed, analyzing a varied collection of topics, including abortion, rape, sexual harassment and employment-based discrimination -- all subjects that were at the core of the recent Presidential election.

There is a plethora of rich and cutting material here, but the discussions of where courts stand on matters concerning pregnant employees is quite thought-provoking and leaves the reader to wonder why more hasn’t been done by employers to accommodate new mothers. In point of fact, these corporations are actually discouraging parenthood by creating needless obstacles for the new or prospective mother. And this poses long-term problems for the culture and the planet: without children to replenish the world, the world will die away silently. As Barnes and her writers attempt to show, this fact needs to be realized - and now.

In addition, there is a wonderful chapter on women and depression (Jennifer Hightower) which forces to reader to confront the unique and tremendous toll the workplace takes on the female gender.

Barnes has simply done a fantastic job in creating a text that is fresh and vital and brimming with long-range teaching value. The essays (although heavily laden with facts and intellectual preponderance) are well-edited and easy to digest, provoking the reader to take a position and determine where they stand on each particular issue. And in this regard, Handbook of Women is a true teaching text: forcing the student to think as they learn.

Highly recommended as a teaching text in both sociology and women’s studies courses, or in any undergraduate law course that deals with contemporary issues in society. Also recommended to all college-level libraries as a general reference text.

Order from Amazon.com

ORGANIZED CRIME.Howard Abadinsky. Thomson/Wadsworth. Since its inception, the population at large has been intrigued by the idea of the Mafia and organized crime groups. And from "The Untouchables," to "The Godfather" to "The Sopranos," writers and film directors have sought to capture the ‘real life’ scenes of how the mob operates -- winning Emmies and Oscars along the way.

However, Organized, now in its seventh edition, does all these efforts one better -- for this is a text examining the real deal, no lead actors or script doctors, just facts and analysis on how syndicates of criminals come together to thrive and get rich. Organized, written by Howard Abadinsky, examines the concept of criminal enterprise from the idea of structure, analyzing changes within organized criminal associations and how by being willing to change with the times these groups are able to maintain power and control. Meticulously written and careful to honor every detail, Organized takes us through the concept of crime step-by-step, showing students what "organized crime" is and then breaking down its historical ‘life.’ First, Abadinsky explores organized crime in the United States (including wonderful chapters on the New York and Chicago factions, before moving into the very specialized world of African American criminal movements). From that, Abadinsky takes us through the ethnicity of crime, from major Italian movements through the Asian gangs, finally breaking down the business of crime and how money is made and stolen goods turned into cash. In the final chapters, the ways law enforcement has dealt with organized groups of criminals is examined, including a review of the United States statutes that serve as the controlling law in this area.

This comprehensive textbook has many new and interesting angles, but what’s most intriguing is the material on outlaw biker groups. Much of this information is new, and it will hold a searching student spellbound as the myths of "Angels" is dissected line by line. Moreover, Abadinsky’s style of writing is friendly and journalistic -- he’s like a newspaper columnist writing a long feature: rather than driving students away with a coarse and dry sociological "study," he instead draws us in with by cutting into the reasons of a mythical phenomenon, opening us up to the question of why so many men have chosen this as their life’s work.

Appropriate undergraduate text in criminology and sociology courses; also worthwhile text to be used in Administration of Justice courses at the undergraduate level. Recommended as a general reference in all college level libraries.

Order from Amazon.com or go to http://www.wadsworth.com

INTRODUCTION TO CRIMINOLOGY. Brendan Maguire. Polly F. Radosh. West/Wadsworth. Excellent and revolutionary text in that it is more than an over-view of the theories and types of criminology. Instead, Maguire and Radosh force the student to first develop and then employ critical thinking skills in order to understand why crime occurs (and why they have developed their own personal perceptions about it):

"Marxist criminology explains crime as a product of capitalist social relations. The powerful in society (capitalists) determine what behaviors are defined as criminal and otherwise control the workings of the criminal justice system. The Marxist theory of crime further suggests that most crimes committed by the powerless are in response to social exploitation and repression."

(Page-249)

I especially liked the way these authors didn’t shy away from issues such as police brutality: by choosing to identify the fact that dirty cops exist they immediately force each student to study the issues of crime from all angles and perspectives. And it is this fact that’s unique in the world of academic writing: rather then take the easy out and tell the student what to think, Maguire and Radosh force students to learn the issues and then think for themselves. This break away from ‘formula’ should signal other textbook writers to open up their minds and examine new approaches.

Highly recommended as a classroom text in both Criminal Justice and Administration of Justice courses. Bluntly,future police officers need to read and absorb this kind of material before being graduated from an academy. Also recommended as a general reference text in all academic libraries.

Order from Amazon.com or go to http://www.wadsworth.com

FORENSIC PSYCHOLOGY. Lawrence S. Wrightsman. Solomon Fulero. Wadsworth. This text, written by Lawrence Wrightsman and Solomon Fulero(recognized authorities in the field) examines the place of the Forensic Psychologist in American culture -- including the myriad roles the Forensic Psychologist plays in the US judicial system. Most of us are familiar with such psychologists testifying at high-profile murder trials, discussing the reasons as to why somebody might have committed a crime (also known as criminal profiling).

However, the work Forensic Psychologists do within the legal system goes far beyond this. The Forensic Psychologist will also act as a trial consultant in a variety of ways, perhaps most importantly in family court settings, making recommendations with regard to child custody/child visitation in the wake of divorce. Forensic Psychologists are also often called to testify in court in rape and battered women cases, describing to a jury the mental anguish victims endure. In short, Forensic Psychologists are asked to describe the inner-workings of the criminal mind in cogent and accessible ways.

Accordingly, Wrightsman has written a detailed and thorough text that avoids the tendency to lecture, instead clearly and concisely imparting information to students -- almost as if he was in court "testifying" to a jury. In preparing the student for professional service, Wrightsman (who teaches at the University of Kansas) takes time to describe job opportunities in the arena of forensic psychology, examining the various requirements of the field so that students can make informed decisions. Recommended as a classroom text, and as a general reference text at the college level.


UPDATES


NEW EDITION: The new edition of Forensic expands on each of these topics, taking special pains to address the fact that Forensic Psychologists are specialized scientists whose role is much bigger than advocating the positions of attorneys in courtrooms. It is very important for the student to remember this, because if the psychologist becomes too entrenched within the mechanisms of the legal system, their objective focus can blur. Readers of the second edition will also find a reduction in chapters from 18 to 16, as the authors have trimmed down their presentation to make the material more economical and reader-friendly. To this end, relevant new analysis has been added, including a chapter on "Risk Assessment," which addresses ways forensic psychology techniques can be used to predict violence and sexual recidivism. Note that Wrightsman has teamed with a new co-author, Solomon Fulero, President of American Psychology-Law Society, who is able to blendthe unique perspective of an attorney with long-standing principles of psychological investigation. ~John Aiello

Order from Amazon.com or go to http://www.wadsworth.com


INSTRUCTOR RECOMMENDATIONS


New Teaching Texts

The following texts standout in their respective disciplines - they would make sound choices for instructors teaching in these fields, notable for their clarity, presentation and accessibility to the student reader. ~The Editor

FIREFIGHTER’S HANDBOOK. Essentials of Firefighting and Emergency Response. Second Edition. Thomson/Delmar. Given the unique challenges of life in the 21st century (highlighted by the horrific events of September 11, 2001), the way that firefighters confront their duties has changed dramatically. Now, it’s not just fires and downed power lines that have to be considered. Instead, emergency workers must deal with toxic materials, bio-hazards and explosive threats - as the war on terrorism is fought on every front. In this comprehensive volume, student firefighters get a full preview of the job and the standards they must meet in order to gain certification. The real selling point to this book (aside from the expert review of every facet of Fire Science) is that this one book offers students training data for both Firefighter 1 and II and Hazardous Materials, in turn reducing the applicable information to a single volume for quick and easy reference. As previously noted, Firefighter contains a broad array of data, including chapters on the history of American Fire Science, explanation on the organization of fire departments and alarm systems, analysis of fire ‘behavior’ and what to expect with different kinds of fires, standards of safety firefighters must maintain, an overview of the various tools firefighters use, rescue procedures, knots and ropes, hazardous materials and terrorism awareness (to cite only a partial list). Further, Firefighter is set apart from other similar offerings by its formatting: photographs, graphics and highlights serve to augment chapters and bring important data to the forefront of the student’s consciousness, creating the idea that these are not isolated theories, but instead, a body of information that must be thoroughly digested in order for true competence in the field to be attained. The job of fighting fires and working on an emergency crew is chock full of life and death challenges. Accordingly, young students of the discipline must understand that this field requires a commitment to life-long learning. And The Firefighter’s Handbook is the place where the journey begins.

This book is a perfect text for both Firefighter I and Firefighter II courses at both the academy and community college levels. The data on hazardous materials is especially timely given the current state of the world, adding to this volume’s long-term value. Further recommended to all college-level libraries as a general reference text.

Order from Amazon.com

FUNDAMENTALS OF BASIC EMERGENCY CARE. 2nd edition. Richard Beebe. Deborah Funk. Thomson Delmar Learning. Now in its second edition, Fundamentals offers the Emergency Medical Technician (EMT) a detailed and comprehensive introduction to the concepts of emergency medical care. In the last decade, this field has evolved tremendously, and there are now increased demands on EMTs. This text by Beebe (a 30 year veteran of EMT medicine) and Funk (an emergency physician and emergency medicine instructor) collects the most recent data pertinent to the field, covering the full spectrum of emergency medical care in a clear and well-organized manner. Beginning with an overview of emergency medical care, Fundamentals moves into a review of basic anatomy and physiology. From here, we embark on a journey into the core of the subject -- with the authors going into the fundamentals of emergency medicine, including information on infection control, shock, respiratory support, cardiac arrest and trauma care (as well as several chapters covering childhood emergency care). In addition, case studies have been provided which allow the student to actually use the skills they have learned to address the scenarios they are likely to encounter in the field. These case studies, set against the stories from professional EMTs that augment the chapters, demonstrate to the young reader in clear and concrete terms how EMTs have reacted when confronted with specific ordeals. Instead of reading like "filler," these unique features make Fundamentals a vital and current text, giving the student a true "hands-on" sense of what this field is like (showing the student exactly what expectations they must satisfy after assuming a career that will require them to provide medical care "on the fly" in a variety of places under a variety of difficult circumstances).

Recommended for all emergency medicine courses at the college level. Should further be considered by Fire Science programs as a supporting class text. ~John Aiello

Order from www.delmarlearning.com

CENTROSOMES IN DEVELOPMENT AND DISEASE. Editor: Erich A. Nigg. Wiley-vch. Centrosomes is a specialty text in the finest sense of the Wiley applied science list. It provides extensive detail of the Centrosome -- the center of animal cells which for decades has been shrouded in misunderstanding and mystery. However, several major research projects have made significant advances on unlocking the composition of centrosomes in order to investigate their role in the human life cycle. The course of this research has revealed a direct correlation between centrosomes and various diseases, including cancer. Nigg’s study provides in depth analysis of centrosomes and takes the reader through a conventional journey of the subject, moving from centrosome construction and composition to its actual function within the shape of the cell (culminating with discussion of the role of the centrosome in disease). Accordingly, this is the most vital aspect of the book: if science is able to understand how centrosomes impact the birth of a tumor, researchers might be able to move at a more rapid pace toward finding a cure for cancer.

Recommended as a supportive teaching text in advanced cell biology courses which promote independent research and study on the part of the student. Would further be useful to practicing researchers in the fields of oncology or cell biology. Also recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text.

Order from Amazon.com

CARDIOVASCULAR DISEASE IN THE ELDERLY. Third Edition. Edited by Wilbert S. Aronow and Jerome L. Fleg. Marcel Dekker. This manual is dedicated to the subject of Cardiovascular Disease in the elderly, stressing the fact that an elderly patient presents with unique needs requiring the physician to tailor treatments accordingly. Cardiovasculardeals with myriad topics, and begins with a step-by-step discussion of the effects of age on the Cardiovascular System, including a comprehensive chapter on echocardiographic analysis in older patients without heart disease. Part two of Cardiovascular provides a deep exploration of Coronary Artery Disease. At this juncture of the text, the reader is given direction on how to assess the varied risk factors of Cardiovascular Disease and is taught how to study its epidemiology. Chapter topics include Systemic Hypertension in the elderly patient, the effect of Diabetes Mellitus on the Cardiovascular System and an enlightening discussion on when the physician should pursue drug treatment for hyperlipidemia in an aged patient. At this point, the reader is equipped with enough information to begin exploration into specific aspects of Coronary Artery Disease, and the remainder of Cardiovascular investigates these phenomena in detail (including chapters on Angina, Heart Attack, Valvular Disease, Endocarditis, Heart Failure, Ventricular Arrhythmias and Cardiomyopathy). In addition, Aronow (Chief of the Cardiology Clinic at New York Medical College) and Fleg (Scientific Project Officer National Heart, Lung and Blood Institute) are careful to include pertinent discussion of Cerebrovascular Disease and Syncope in the elderly, as well as invaluable perspective on quality of life issues that often surface in older patients with heart disease. Comprehensive in nature and impeccably researched, Cardiovascular is recommended as a teaching text because its very design and point-of-view forces the young doctor to realize that heart disease treatments need to conform to each particular patient demographic. In this regard, the elderly patient requires specific consideration and assessment as suitable courses of medical therapy are developed.

Recommended as a class text in all courses teaching assessment of Cardiovascular problems with an emphasis on the geriatric patient. Further recommended to all Health Science libraries as a general reference text. ~John Aiello

Order from Amazon.com


OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS


DEAN ACHESON: A Life in the Cold War. Robert L. Beisner. Oxford University Press.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

Journalist Larry Chin has termed National Security Council paper 68 the policy basis for the Cold War.And as Robert L. Beisner’s biography of Truman’s Secretary of State shows, Dean Acheson was not only present at the creation of NSC-68, but was its chiefarchitect - if not its author.

Overseeing the drafting of NSC-68, Paul Nitze, later Kennedy’s Secretary of the Navy, worked nonstop from January, 1950 through April 1950 to develop a strategy to justify an arms race with the Soviet Union, establishing the philosophical underpinnings for a military-industrial complex which thrives to this day.

Acheson and Nitze were ruthless in their quest to obtain permission from Truman to implement the objectives of NSC-68 (as evinced by this description of a meeting on March 22, 1950 where Acheson and Nitze seem to sandbag Defense Secretary Lewis Johnson and General James Burns):

Primed for a briefing of the principals, Nitze called a meeting for three P.M., Wednesday 22 March, in the PPS offices (Acheson lacked a decent conference room of his own). Arriving from DOD were Johnson, General Omar Bradley, Burns, Halaby and others. Admiral Sidney Souers headed the NSC and White House contingent. In a bizarre convulsion of bureaucratic discord, the meeting ended after fourteen minutes, with Johnson exiting in a huff and Burns sobbing. According to Acheson – in an account verified by Souers and State’s notetaker-the meeting started amicably with Nitze beginning to readand summarize an already circulated paper.Johnson, whom Acheson claimed to be ‘mentally ill’ suddenly ‘lunged forward with a crash of chair legs on the floor and fist on the table, scarring me out of my shoes.’ Johnson ‘shouted’ that people were holding unauthorized meetings, writing papers, and summoning him to conferences ‘contrary to his orders.’ ‘What was this paper?’ he demanded. Acheson recounted Truman’s instructions, reminded Johnson that he had named Burns to represent him, and that Nitze had senta twenty-seven page draft summary to him a week before. “But he would have none of it and gathering General Bradley and other Defense people, stalked out of the room. As others sat in shock, Burns put his head in his hands and wept in shame.’ ”[pp.239-240]

In the policy paper that so enraged Defense Secretary Johnson, Acheson and Nitze“advocated a ‘rapid build-up’ of both nuclear and conventional forces as part of a general increase in western ‘political, economic and military strength’ with the goal of attaining ‘clearly superior overall power’ for the United States.” [p.241].

Accordingly, Acheson had his way and Truman signed off on NSC-68 on April 7, 1950, notwithstanding that “NSC-68 considered it prudent to spend up to half the gross national product on national security.” Today, the goals of NSC-68 remainoperational in Iraq - and around the globe.

In his text, Beisner also shows the historical roots of imperialism in the Middle East, telling readers why countries like Iran remain unwilling to be co-opted into Western “democracies.” In describing Acheson’s intervention into Iranian politics and his attempts to mediate the conflict between Britain and Iranian Prime Minister Muhammad Mosadeq (termed “Mussy Duck” by Churchill), Beisner writes:

Before long, Muhammad Mosadeq would supercede the youthful Shah as the focal point of Acheson’s attention. As prime minister, this magnetic leader would directly challenge AIOC, the British behemoth that, unlike most regional oil enterprises, produced a raft of valuable refined petroleum products. The London government held the majority stock in AIOC, its largest foreign investment. AIOC was a vital source of hard currency and of the petroleum powering the Royal Navy.Centered in the Abadan refinery in the delta of the Shatt-al-Arab river near the Persian Gulf, AIOC had long dominated the Iranian economy.Abadan was the world’s largest, most complex and versatile refinery and writes Howard M. Sachar, ‘an economic heritage of all but measureless value.’ While Iranians did the dirty work, Britons held the top jobs and took all of the profits, paying British ratherthan Iranian taxes. AIOC charged high prices in Iran for its products and bought Iranian politicians at low prices.”[p.538]

Both British leaders and oil interests had no illusions that Mosadeq intend to “purge” the British from Iraq at any cost, and Britain proceeded to move ships into the Persian Gulf to begin the aptly named “Plan Bucaneer.” Although the British “stood down” after protests from the United States, the chairman of the AOIC warned that “the Iranians would ‘crawl on their bellies and accept what we offered them.’ ”[p. 546]

And where did the U.S. stand in all of this?Ultimately, despite Byzantine intrigues which first included attempts by Acheson to compromise toward a middle ground, he ultimately only followed those same policies that he had implemented with NSC-68:

Acheson had decided that he would not break with ‘our closest ally’ and the most important element of strength in the Western alliance outside of the United States.’ The Atlantic partners had to work together ‘just like pigeons.’ When one turned, ‘the others do it too. We have to fly wing to wing.’” [p. 563]

After surviving multiple plots, Mossadeq was finally removed from power as the result of a 1953 coup known as Operation Ajax - orchestrated by the John Foster Dulles, the CIA (headed by Allen Dulles) and the British government (yet, as Beisner surmises, had Acheson been in office, the approval of such a coup would have been highly unlikely).

Beisner’s text serves as an erudite examination of one the most tumultuous periods in the last century, recommended as a supporting class text in any history or political science course which examines the era of the Cold War. Also recommended to all libraries in the public sector and at the college-level as a general reference text. ~The Editor

FILM THEORY AND CRITICISM. Sixth Edition. Edited by Leo Braudy and Marshall Cohen. Oxford University Press.

Reviewed By Frank Aiello

Now in its Sixth Edition, this excellent text contains two essays of particular interest which place cinema in the context of mirror, mirroring the values of the culture which created it.

Specifically, Tania Modleski’s essay, "The Terror of Pleasure," examines the contemporary horror film and its post-modern theory. Modleski begins her piece with Karl Marx’s metaphor of capitalist cast as a werewolf in the Grundrisse:

"Marx tells us that the capitalist’s werewolf hunger, which drives him continually to replace living labor with dead labor (that is, human beings with machines), will lead to a mode of production in which labor time is no longer the sole measure and source of wealth...." [p.764.]

In her essay, Modleski also notes an observation by Jacques Ellul, who asserted that as urban life becomes more intolerable, it becomes necessary to make the suffering tolerable by furnishing the masses with amusements, thus giving rise to the "monstrous motion picture film industry."

If Ellul’s observation is indeed correct, then those social institutions which promote the continuity of Western urban culture and industrialization ("the individual and the family") are now literally being dismembered and dismantled before the eyes of a contemporary audience:

"Many of these films are engaged in an unprecedented assault on all that bourgeois culture [and]... A few of these films, like The Texas Chain Saw Massacre, have actually been celebrated for their adversarial relation to contemporary culture and society. In this film, a family of men, driven out of the slaughterhouse business by advanced technology, turn to cannibalism. The film deals with the slaughter of a group of young people traveling in a van and dwells at great length on the pursuit of the last survivor of the group, Sally, by the man named Leatherface, who hacks his victims to death with a chainsaw. Robin Wood has analyzed the film as embodying a critique of capitalism, since the film shows the horror both of people living off other people and of the institution of the family, since it implies that the monster is the family. [fn.]" pp. 767-768.]

In this text, Western society is depicted in cinema as being encircled in the remnants of colonialism and racism as memorialized in the Battle of Algiers forty years ago. Although images of that film now probably reside only in the memories of the most dedicated film connoisseur, Robert Stam and Louise Spence make some noteworthy comments about the movie in their essay, "Colonialism, Racism, and Representation." And they write:

"One of the crucial innovations of Battle of Algiers (directed by Gillo Pontecorvo, 1966) was to invert the imagery of encirclement and exploit the identificatory mechanisms of cinema on behalf of the colonised rather than the coloniser..." [pp.886-887.]

Stam and Spence also observe that Battle of Algiers exposes how a Western dominated media has formed many of our subconscious impressions, training us to view dissimilar people:

"Western attitudes toward non-Western peoples are also played out here. Hassiba is first seen in traditional Arab costume, her face covered by a veil. So dressed, she is a reminder of Arab women in other films who function as a sign of the exotic. But as the sequence progresses, we become increasingly close to the three women, though paradoxically, we become close to them only as they strip themselves of their safsaris, their veils and their hair. They transform themselves into Europeans, people with whom the cinema more conventionally allows the audience to identify. At the same time, we are made aware of the absurdity of a system in which people warrant respect only if they look and act like Europeans." [p. 887.]

Though an examination of the cinema, these essays explore the very underbelly of Western oppression, documenting its insanity and its failures and its stark aimlessness. In Film Theory, Braudy and Cohen have done an exemplary job in creating a multi-layered textbook that speaks to different aspects of the discipline in thought-provoking and relevant terms, in turn creating a text that will be of long-term value to both students and commentators (as well as film buffs intent on sharpening their perspective on the history of this ever-evolving art form).

WHO ARE WE? (Theories of Human Nature). Louis J. Pojman. Oxford University Press.

Reviewed By Frank Aiello

Genesis tells us that we are the ‘top of the heap’ and have dominion over every living thing that moves upon the earth. (Gen 1:27-29.) However, as Louis Pojman (Professor of Philosophy Emeritus at the United States Military Academy) warns, learned thinkers everywhere have been trying to temper the statements made in Genesis ever since they were written.

For example, one system of thought tells us that we are only material beings, that is, "that the physical system of the brain and the physical events that take place within it are the entirety of our conscious lives. There is no separate mental substance, and mental events are really physical events." [p.235.]

To illustrate his point, Pojman recounts the story of Phineas T. Gage, a young, affable Vermont railroad worker, who suffered an industrial accident. On the the afternoon of September 13, 1848, Gage was laying line on the Rutland and Burlington Railroad when an iron tamping rod three and a half feet in length was driven beneath his left eye:

"Amazingly, he lived, but he was transformed from a friendly, intelligent leader into an intemperate, unreliable, childish ox with the evil temper to match it...Cutting the corpus callosum, the thick band of nerves linking the two hemispheres of the cerebral cortex, can result in two separate centers of consciousness. Different parts of the brain are responsible for different mental operations. . .Why do we need such a complex brain with billions of cells and trillions of connections if the mind is located in its own separate substance ? If dualism is correct, this intricately constructed, complex brain is unnecessary baggage, superfluous machinery. All that the mind should require is some channel for linking the mental with the physical worlds." [p. 234.]

And Pojman goes on:

"For eons, the nature of life was held to be a mysterious elan vital (a spiritual substance that animated whatever was living.) However, in this century, such vitalism was undermined by discoveries in molecular biology. Life is made up of the same basic elements as other material, nonliving things. The difference between living and nonliving things, biology tells us, is not the kind of substance that underlies the two types of things but in the arrangement of those substances." [p.238.]

Yet, in his last, impeccably written chapter ("The Paradox of Human Nature: Are We Free?"), Pojman notes that although "naturalistic evolution tells us that wholly deterministic and physicalistic processes are responsible for whatever we are, we are also "self-conscious beings whose inner experiences are not physicalist." In other words, whoever or whatever we are continues to remain our ultimate mystery. Or in the words of Omar Khayyam: "But helpless pieces/of the game/He plays/Upon this /hequer-board/of Nights and Days." [p.251.]

Pojman is an eloquent and thought-provoking writer who seeks to leave his readers wrestling with the ultimate questions of existence and purpose. In a technological culture where kids run to their Ipods instead of to the library, this book attempts to reconnect them with the idea that every person has a moral responsibility to place themself in the context of the world in which they exist.

REPORTING FOR THE MEDIA. Eighth Edition. Fred Fedler. John R. Bender. Lucinda Davenport. Michael W. Drager. Oxford University Press.

Reviewed By Frank Aiello

Real investigative reporting is a dicey business guaranteed to win few friends while unleashing hordes of enemies. Yet, for those who care to persist, this text (now in its eighth edition), provides the journalism student with the nuts and bolts of the trade while presenting interesting perspective on many ethical questions.

As to the nuts and bolts, the authors provide the student with the tools they will need to avoid the pitfalls of bad writing (such as misplaced modifiers, dangling modifiers, personification of inanimate objects or abstractions and the distinction between "who" and "whom").

However, of more practical importance are the "Knows" at the end of each chapter. This segment of the text consists of a separate mini-lesson by a "writing coach" (one of which is Joe Hight, Managing Editor of The Oklahoman). For instance, Editor Hight’s "knows" for police and court reporters include valuable insight on purposeful reporting:

" Victims should be approached, but allowed to say no. If the answer is no, the reporter should leave a card or number so victims can call back later. Oftentimes, the best stories come this way . . Little things count. Call victims back to verify facts and quotes. Return photos. . .Don’t throw ‘allegedly,’ ‘suspect’ and other words such as this into your stories like you would throw mashed potatoes at a food fight." [pp. 417-418.]

The authors also provide in depth checklists for record sources, probably the most valuable tool for any reporter (other than the ability to ask questions). For instance, city and county sources of records can include purchase orders to determine what products or services were obtained from what vendors and at what prices; bids and bid specifications which identify which contractors are being used for government-related services (and at what prices); inspection reports; and campaign contributions statements. For example, the California Form 700 Statement of Economic Interest form is required to be filed by many public employees. This is an invaluable source of information for journalists which identifies both the assets and income of many public officials further identifying potential or actual conflicts of interest.

In their chapter on Communications Law, the authors do an excellent job of identifying the risks associated with news gathering, such as the threat of libel suits (in addition to citing the major defenses to libel including the Fair Report Privilege and the Fair Comment Doctrine and identifying the 12 steps for avoiding libel suits).

However, news gathering is risky work, and a dedicated reporter will often have to but heads with politicians, judges, and major corporations who use their power as a mechanism to cover up malfeasance. As an example, the authors point to the Food Lion case -- Food Lion Inc. v. Capital Cities/ABC, 194 F.3d 505 4th Cir. 1999 -- which illustrates both the dangers and benefits of aggressive reporting:

"Reporters have defended the use of hidden microphones and cameras as the best and, occasionally the only way to get some stories. Nevertheless, the practice is distasteful to many readers and viewers. A federal jury in North Carolina gave tangible expression to that disgust when it awarded the Food Lion supermarket chain more than $5.5 million in damages against ABC News. The network had broadcast a ‘PrimeTime Live’ report on how Food Lion handled meat and other products it sold. Two producers for the show falsified job applications and references to obtain jobs in Food Lion stores in North and South Carolina. While working at Food Lion, they wore hidden microphones and cameras, recording such things as washing spoiled hams in bleach and using barbecue sauce to disguise rancid meat. Although the supermarket chain disputed many of ABC’s charges, the truthfulness of the story was not at issue in the trial. The jury considered only the news gathering practices ABC and its producers had used and concluded they had committed fraud, breach of duty of loyalty, trespass and unfair competition. A federal appeals court, saying Food Lion had failed to prove fraud on ABC’s part, reduced the damage award to $2." [p.575.]

It is interesting for the reader to note the Court’s comment that Food Lion had acknowledged in its opening brief that it did not bring a defamation action against ABC because such an action would have required proof that ABC had acted with actual malice. See: New York Times Co. v. Sullivan, 376 U.S. 254, 279-80 (1964). Instead, the Court pointed out that what Food Lion had really sought to do was to recover defamation damages for non-reputational tort claims (thus avoiding having to satisfy the stricter First Amendment standards of a defamation claim, in effect doing an "end-run" around the gates of the First Amendment).

In addition,one of the amicus briefs in the Food Lion casenoted thisstatement by Dr. Samuel Johnson -- somethingall students of journalism are destined toone day learn): "The power of government is to silence."

INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATIONS. Fifth Edition. Sarah Trenholm. Arthur Jensen. Oxford University Press.

Reviewed By Frank Aiello

For the most part, human beings exist in a mindless state. And if we adopt the authors’ definition, in such a state the individual is unaware -- and wholly uncritical.

Interpersonal Communications is a text meant to teach college students how to communicate with society in a clear and unshackled manner free of social contrivances or preconceptions; Trenholm and Jensen write:

"The first step in reducing mindlessness, then, is to become aware of the extent to which perceptions and behaviors are socially determined. Most people fail to realize that their perceptions and behaviors are largely socially constructed. The social rules that we follow as a matter of course seldom have the "feel" of rules. We believe that our behavior is freely chosen rather than socially controlled." [p.168.]

As both politicians and cinematographers know, perception is everything. And in the chapter Perception Goes to the Movies: How Cinematographers Influence what We See, the authors illuminate us as follows:

"The ‘big screen’ is only a two-dimensional rectangle, with a dominant horizontal shape. Every scene in the film has to be conveyed within this frame. To create the appearance of depth or extreme heights, a feeling of suspense, or emotional arousal, directors and cinematographers must know quite a lot about the perceptual processes of the audience . . . To create a sense of dominance or power, important elements may be emphasized by placing them in the top third of the screen. Sometimes this is done subtly by focusing the camera clearly on a character in the center third, leaving another character slightly out of focus. The result is a ‘reminder’ of who is really in control ... The opposite effect can be achieved by placing characters in the lower portion of the frame. Characters placed this way look especially vulnerable or helpless, and even more so if the rest of the screen is empty or stark in contrast to the lonely figure at the bottom of the screen." [ pp. 150-151.]

These ‘tricks of the trade’ serve to remind the student how we come to be trained by social patterns and structures, in turn learning to react to the world around us. Accordingly, Trenholm’s and Jensen’s text provides excellent insight into the forces that drive our interactions (with the goal being to end up more accomplished communicators).

Each of these texts is recommended in their respective disciplines for their clarity of focus and readability, imparting information to the student-reader in sharp and concrete terms. Accordingly, they should be on instructors’ ‘short-lists’ as either primary or secondary course manuals.

JURISDICTION AND THE AMBIT OF THE CRIMINAL LAW. Michael Hirst. Oxford University Press.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

As every first year law student soon learns, the term, "jurisdiction" is synonymous with the legitimacy of the Court system itself and the Court’s ultimate right to enforce its power over individuals and issues.

Michael Hirst’s text is one of the Oxford monographs on criminal law and justice. Although generally written from the perspective of the English criminal law, Hirst, a Professor of Criminal Justice at DeMontfort University in Leicester, England, also provides a perspective for the expanding scope of criminal jurisdiction in all facets of international affairs, from genocide and crimes against humanity to terrorist offenses, including chemical, biological and nuclear crimes, to the newly emerging "cybercrimes" (which cross all borders).

Hirst’s examples of cybercrimes and computer misuse pointedly illustrates that the international community must first grapple with the terminology to identify the crime ("cyberobscenity", "cyberterror", "cybertheft", "cyberfraud" before it can assert any jurisdiction over the criminal behavior. Clearly, the infamous Nigerian "419" advance fee fraud illustrate that such criminal activity can be initiated from anywhere in the world from any computer terminal by readily available email and fax programs.

To combat such cross-frontier crimes, Hirst advocates the principle of "inclusionary" jurisdiction whereby it would be an offense to either initiate a crime which takes place abroad or, to initiate through conduct abroad, the commission of an offense which takes place within the borders of a country.

Unfortunately, such proposals, however well meaning, should be approached with extreme caution. An expansion of jurisdiction inherently provides the state with greater powers over its citizens as shown by the hastily adopted "Patriot Act" in response to the attack on the World Trade Center.

In the end, this text provides an illuminating capsule of the ever-changing terrain of our world because of the expansion of computer technology, and would prove a useful classroom teaching text in sociology or International Studies courses. All so recommended to the college-level library as a general reference text.

Other current Oxford Press publications:

THE OXFORD INDIA COMPANION TO SOCIOLOGY AND SOCIAL HISTORY. Edited by Veena Das. Oxford University Press.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

This two-volume text contains an excess of 1500 pages which presents a comprehensive overview of the social and cultural framework of India up to the present-day, commenting on everything from the role of the bazaar in Indian life to cultural concepts of the male and female body:

"A woman’s periods of monthly 'pollution' are a stigma, her childbearing makes her an unclean vessel, and her physical form makes her dangerous to male society. This articulation of the female body lies, for the most part, in the hands of male informants. In fact, women have an eclectic reservoir of songs, stories and activities that undermine this denigration of the female body. But this is kept in localized, internally facing networks. Women do not openly exhibit themselves in public spaces as men do, they keep covered and minimize exposure, and as a result they are all but invisible in any scene in everyday public life in South Asia."

(Volume I, page 679.)

Such passages serve to bring this sometimes mysterious and often misunderstood region to life, and depict a place that in many ways has resisted the encroachment of the Western World’s influence. Well-edited and impeccably designed, this record of India will serve the academic community as a timeless reference.

Recommended to both college-level and public sector libraries as a general reference text.

Order from Amazon.com

© Frank Aiello. 2006. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.


Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work. He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco; he has also studied Anthropology, Sociology and Political Science extensively. Reach him via The Electric Review.

GASTROINTESTINAL ONCOLOGY. James L. Abbruzzese. Douglas B. Evans. Christopher G. Willett. Cecilia Fenoglio-Preiser. Oxford. This fine study from the renown Oxford University Press assembles the most recent data on the subject of gastrointestinal malignancies. The text is divided into three primary sections. Section one of Gastro serves as a primer course for the subject, and covers various aspects of its epidemiology, primary screening methods (as related to early detection and prevention), as well as an introduction into treatment options. Section two provides detailed exploration of each of the cancers that afflict this region of the body, including data on managing the differing stages of disease. The remainder of the text is devoted to treatment and management of issues pertinent to gastrointestinal malignancies -- with an emphasis on developinga multi-tiered approach in an effort to combat the aggressive nature of a disease that can often hit multiple organ systems at the same time. What’s best about this text is the fact that the editors (led by Abbruzzese, Chairman of the Gastrointestinal Medical Oncology Department at the University of Texas) are conscious of the fact that effective cancer treatment requires the physician to fully understand the far-reaching effects of the disease. To this end, Gastro ties together expert opinion from various sub-specialties within the realm of Gastrointestinal Oncology, thus creating a truly authoritative reference that reports on the whole subject - both deeply and elegantly. Here, the reader will be able to gain an understanding of gastrointestinal cancer from a variety of angles: for instance, a surgeon is urged to investigate the medical, radiological and pathological effects of the cancer in order to better understand how invasive treatment might benefit the patient. This element is key to promoting the effective treatment of cancer, and Gastro marks a natural place for the physician to begin his journey.

Recommended as a class text in all courses teaching diagnosis and treatment of gastrointestinal cancer. Is an absolute must-have for all Health Science libraries as a general reference text. Lastly, is recommended as an in-office reference text for all Medical Oncologists and Oncology Radiologists. ~John Aiello

Order from Amazon.com


Focusing on The McGraw-Hill Humanities & Social Sciences


McGraw-Hill has been a leader in academic publishing for over a century, with its Medical Science, Social Science (sociology, history, criminal justice, psychology, poli-sci) and Humanities lists among the strongest out there, as evidenced below: books endeared by instructors for their clarity and in depth coverage, these true hallmarks in myriad fields. In the end, these texts completely analyze their subject matter while still being able to address the unique needs of the student-learner.

The Electric Review highly recommends each of them to instructors who teach in these disciplines.~The Editor

PHYSICAL ANTHROPOLOGY. With PowerWeb, 9th Edition. Philip L. Stein. Bruce M. Rowe. McGraw-Hill.

By John Aiello

The study of Physical Anthropology can be quite a dynamic exploration for the undergraduate college student -- a subject that holds the power to tie the random threads of the college experience together: the goal here is to show how one subject builds into the next, in turn demonstrating how the human species relates and interacts with its environment in this brilliant and mesmerizing ballet called life.

In Physical Anthropology, Stein and Rowe (Pierce College, Los Angeles) do a fine job in detailing their subject from the ground up, building a foundational text that does not require previous study of anthropology in order to be accessed. The text begins by examining the idea of Physical Anthropology and the "nature of science" -- a tightly woven segment that lays the platform for future course-work as the student is confronted with the bare essence of their being (looking at humankind in relation to time and environment).

How did we get here? is the universal question on every mind, and Stein and Rowe encourage their readers to delve deep into this mystery by examining the self in relation to exterior factors. DNA, the "mechanisms of heredity" and the study of genetics serve as a springboard into a grand discussion of the origins of the species and Darwinism (thus forming the core of this work).

As the student comes to absorb this material, they are then able to begin to dissect the evolution of man, investigating the reasons we behave and think and learn in the ways that we do. What better subject matter for a college course than a topic that cuts into the intricacies of why man has constructed a world that mirrors his inner self?

A cursory look at our war-torn world (beset by everything from social unrest to terrorist-driven crusades in the name of God) and one begins to realize just how complex our lives have become. Accordingly, Physical Anthropology is an important book that ushers students slowly into the discipline, providing a resource that will help foster greater awareness of the role of the individual within the community.

Highly recommended as a primary classroom text in all introductory to Physical Anthropology courses.

Of Related Interest

SOCIAL PROBLEMS AND THE QUALITY OF LIFE. 10th Edition. Robert Lauer. Jeanette C. Lauer. McGraw-Hill. Like the Stein-Rowe selection, Social Problems confronts the student with some hard questions (questions that are going to need to be answered as we move forward through the kinetic layers of the 21st-century). How does the world impact the choices we make and the enjoyment we get from our wives and kids and parents? Does the stress we are under preclude us from drawing enrichment from art and the act of learning? Are we so worried about health care and having enough cash to make it to the next month that we are ignoring the needs of our elderly and disabled? Where is this war going to take the country over the next decade and how is it going to effect generations to come? Try as you will to ignore the media’s daily deluge of bad news, there is no escape. Accordingly, Lauer and Lauer present a textbook that is on point with the major challenges of the millennium, and the authors seek to draw students out of their cocoons to look at the world with realistic eyes. There are no easy answers and no way around the problems that threaten to devour the world in which we live. The best we can hope for is to gain a better understanding of what is happening around us. Lauer and Lauer’s Social Problems is a natural starting point.

Recommended as a primary teaching text in Sociology courses that set the needs of the individual against the world in turmoil.

CRIMINAL JUSTICE: AN INTRODUCTION. 4th Edition. Freda Adler.
Gerhard O. W. Mueller. William S. Laufer. McGraw-Hill.
The Lauer-Lauer text reviewed above sets forth many problems now confronting the health of present-day America. Obviously, how to cope with criminality and appropriate penalties for offenders is no small dilemma, as billions of dollars each year are invested in creating a safe and law-abiding society. In this text, the authors present a sharply written overview of our criminal justice system, including chapters on the courts; police systems and the police culture; criminals and the theories of criminal law; lawyers, judges, and the adjudication of cases; and the sentencing of offenders. In addition to these "standard" topics, there is also coverage of material such as community corrections and ways to handle the juvenile Defendant that help to make this title current and relevant -- a textbook which looks to bring students into contact with the realization that the system is not by any means perfect. Consequently, searching minds will be needed in order to shift traditional ways of thinking as we move toward a more even-handed and efficient administration of justice.

Recommended as a primary teaching text in introductory-level Administration of Justice courses. Would further serve well as a supporting text in Sociology courses that cover topics of criminality and the penal system.

CORRECTIONS IN THE 21ST CENTURY. Frank Schmalleger. John Ortiz Smykla. McGraw-Hill. In this era of post 9-11 America (and the Patriot Act), our concepts of corrective justice have come under close scrutiny, as lawmakers try to balance the underlying purpose of the Constitution with the need to protect the country against terrorism. Corrections, by Frank Schmalleger and John Ortiz Smykla (two well-respected academicians in the field) explore these ideas of punishment and justice in 21st century America. The major reason this book stands out for classroom use is embodied in its style. Rather than just jump into the oft convoluted theories of law and punishment, the authors here provide a thorough overview of past corrective methods, setting these practices against modern-day thought as a means to show the student that the way we rehabilitate offenders has changed generation-by-generation (changing to accommodate the variances of society). By using high profile cases as actual course material, Schmalleger and Smykla are able to delve deep into the characteristics and structures of our legal system in an interesting fashion. Don’t over-look this feature: The way that these writers are able to hold the attention of the reader cannot be over emphasized, since the study of corrections has traditionally been a dry and difficult area for many students to wade through. Accordingly, Corrections serves to update this material for the eyes of the modern student. Also noteworthy is the analysis of recent vital Supreme Court decisions, in addition to various career profiles that help the young student survey possible avenues for further study.

Recommended for all Administration of Justice programs at the college level. Should further be considered by Police Academies as a supporting class text.

LITERATURE. Reading Fiction, Poetry and Drama. Robert Di Yanni. 5th edition. McGraw-Hill.

Robert Di Yanni (Pace University) is recognized in the field for his unique and expert ability to cover the rudimentary aspects of the study of literature and then tie these works to the contemporary world of the student.

As Di Yanni’s approach infers, the typical student doesn’t retain the meaning of a work of literature unless that work is somehow made meaningful to their individual world. And that is the under-lying perspective of this text: the material contained here is meant to teach the student about the core of his culture and society - in turn directing each of us to our places within this intricate framework.

This volume contains a wide sampling of material (fiction, poetry and dramatic works) meant to introduce the student to the broad study of literature. In addition to exposing students to these writers, the idea here is to begin to teach young people to think about themselves in relation to society. Once this interaction takes place, the young reader will naturally start to absorb the elements of how to engage in thoughtful analysis of the elements of literature.

A wide array of fiction and poetry is high-lighted by an expert section on Edgar Allan Poe. Also notable for the poetry of William Blake, William Carlos Williams and Lawrence Ferlinghetti (Poetry and Painting chapter). One of the most daring (because of the writers anthologized) and solid readers we have seen to date. Also includes the Ariel interactive reader’s CD-ROM, with over 50 annotated interactive texts and over 50 audio/video versions of selected works.

Also from Robert Di Yanni: Literature: Approaches to Fiction, Poetry and Drama. This volume is notable because in addition to various anthologized works, it attempts to direct the student on how to write effectively for the college level (with smart guidance on how write a research paper and document sources to avoid plagiarism).

Both are appropriate for use in the classroom in all introduction to literature courses.

HUMAN SEXUALITY: Diversity in Contemporary America. Bryan Strong, Christine DeVault, Barbara Sayad, William Yarber. McGraw-Hill.

This title is ground-breaking in scope, as it brings the student reader a treatise that stresses the fact that sexuality is neither "uniform" or stereotypical. Instead, in America, diversity is to be both applauded and accepted as we seek our individual sexual identities.

During the last year, diversity and freedom of expression in regard to sexual orientation came barreling to the forefront of the American consciousness, as the issue of gay marriage found its way to the courtroom arena. Thus, this text recognizes that people and their views of sex are unique and should be looked on in broad and liberal terms.

What’s best about Human Sexuality is that the authors have chosen to present the material without judgmental overtones, allowing students to come to terms with the topics in a free and unfettered environment - no fear of having their own perspectives prejudged or scorned.

Obviously, there is a wealth of material here, but the best -- and most important -- of it deals with contraception and abstinence education, since unwanted teen pregnancy and sexually transmitted disease remain at epidemic proportions. Also includes the SexSource CD-ROM, which uses short video segments to expand on key sections of the text.

Appropriate for all undergraduate courses introducing students to topics of sexuality. Will be respected and appreciated by students for its honest presentation of the subject.

ENTREVISTAS. An Introduction to Language and Culture. Robert L. Davis. H. Jay Siskin. Alica Ramos. Second Edition. McGraw-Hill.

This inventive first-year Spanish text book, Entrevistas ("Interviews") embarks on some new territory by way of its theme and construction.

Foreign languages are intimidating and difficult to learn -- with students suddenly thrust into an alien environment that they can’t quite grasp in practical terms. Accordingly, this text implements a unique idea: it uses video clips of interviews with native Spanish speakers in conjunction with the course book to help students hear and see how the whole process is supposed to work.

This approach (like the way that cassette tapes were used in the 1980s classroom) is meant to teach diction and pace in a meaningful and useful way -- in a way that a freshman college student can readily identify with.

The goal here is not to just memorize some Spanish vocabulary words in order to pass an exam and wade through a prerequisite (like so many of us did), but instead, to be able to communicate in multiple tongues.

Recommended to all college-level libraries as a general reference text. Also a good choice as a beginning Spanish teaching text.

GREGG SHORTHAND. Basic Principles. Centennial Edition. Charles E. Zoubek. McGraw-Hill. This book is responsible for training more secretaries and office managers than instructors can count. Gregg teaches the fundamental practices of shorthand note-taking, and it is regarded throughout the academic world as the leader in its field. Readers will be struck by the logical format and the easy to follow delineation, as Zoubek escorts his audience through the basics of this lost art. What’s best about this text is that it’s easily accessible to the student who has never practiced the skill before, introducing the novice to the material slowly so as to not lose them in a whirl-wind of strange nuance. Beginning with the concept of You Write What You Hear, Zoubek stresses that the whole practice of competently being able to perform shorthand is tied to applying symbols to sound, and this text expertly shows the young reader how to do this. Finally, Gregg leaves the student with an understanding that this skill is not only about classroom proficiency and passing tests, but instead, it extends to the professional world of business: if a student can master these principles, they will have made themselves permanently employable.

Recommended to libraries in both the public and college sector as a general reference text.

ART ACROSS TIME. Second Edition. Laurie Schneider Adams. McGraw-Hill. Art Across Time is a wonderful art history text and, with proper exposure, should come to be adopted in many courses which teach the history of the world through the eyes of its artists. Here, Adams (her stunning resume includes a Ph.D. from Columbia University; she is presently on faculty at John Jay College, CUNY) looks at the history of art in a clear and compact way, formatting her book so that the student coming straight from high school (and without previous exposure to such a course of study) will not be intimidated by this material. Examination of the major periods of art incorporates a review of the different styles that have been used, along with comment and analysis of both the work and its creator. The rich illustrations and color plates serve to teach the student in a multi-dimensional way -- analyzing the pieces in words and then providing the reader with an immediate visual example so as to foster awareness of both technique, style and environment. This edition includes the vibrant world of Mesoamerican art (including striking examples of the art of the Aztec world).

As stated, should be considered as a cost-effective primary text for introduction to art history courses. Also recommended to all academic libraries as a general reference text.

Of Related Interest:

INTERPRETING ART. Reflecting, Wondering and Responding. Terry Barrett. McGraw-Hill. This slim text uses graphics and illustrations along with erudite analysis to teach the beginner how to interpret a piece of art and critically analyze both its successes and failures. Barrett is a very good writer, and he accomplishes his goal here without a lot of pontificating; instead, he communicates in a simple and effective way, teaching the young reader a variety of methods that should enable them to begin to think critically rather than passively.

Should be strongly considered as a supporting text in art history courses and would serve as seamless companion to the Adam’s text (see above). Also recommended as a general reference text in all college-level libraries.

RULES OF THUMB. A Guide For Writers. Jay Silverman. Elaine Hughes. Diana Roberts Wienbroer. McGraw Hill.

For decades, college-level English instructors have required their students to buy a copy of Strunk and White’s The Elements of Style and use it in the daily course of their college life. In its time, Stunk and White was the benchmark, but changing times and changing course-work has rendered it somewhat stifling.

Accordingly, this McGraw-Hill guide is a refreshing and up-to-date alternative to such traditional manuals. Readers will note that there are many fine attributes to this book: the relatively inexpensive price; the information on how to grow in to an effective writer (by keeping a journal and avoiding excess use of words); the refresher course on syntax and grammar.

But as a former college-level instructor in a writing lab, the most impressive thing to me about Rules Of Thumb was its coverage of the research paper. It has been my experience that many entry-level college students are simply lost when asked to put a term paper together, constantly needing their hands held as they wind their way through the process.

However, Silverman and his co-writers do a nice job in putting together a step-by-step overview of the research paper, including an effective analysis of how and why to document sources (with APA, MLA, and Chicago Style discussed). It was the authors’ coverage on source documentation which sold me on this title -- too many students today are plagiarizing out of ignorance, as they simply don’t understand that they have to document source-material. But Rules brings sound and easy-to-understand advice on this subject (and many others), offering students a "pocket" guide/primer course to the principles of college-level writing.

Recommended to all college-level students and advanced high school students as a valuable guide to assist in effectively completing their writing assignments.

A RHETORIC OF ARGUMENT. Jeanne Fahnestock. Marie Secor. McGraw-Hill. Major text focused on the elements of how to construct an effective argument. Now in its third edition, Rhetoric teaches this difficult skill to the student in an effective and logical manner. The ability to construct a proper argumentative paper is probably the most misunderstood of all English 1A assignments, with young writers unsure of how to frame their presentation for impact and efficiency. Here, Fahnestock and Secor provide direction on technique and organization, outlining the theory of argument and then guiding the student through its myriad landscapes. Over 60 new readings on the subject are included as a means of presenting first-class examples on how to effectively write in order to alter your audience’s perception of an issue or subject. Appropriate for English Composition courses as a supportive text. Further recommended as course text in specialized Philosophy courses which offer in depth study of logical argument.

CRIMINOLOGY. Freda Adler. Gerhard O.W. Mueller. William S. Laufer. McGraw-Hill. Now in its fifth edition, this text has been a main-stay in many University-level Criminology courses for years because of its readability and thorough analysis of a complicated subject. Adler and co-authors do a deft job at providing an over-view of Criminology before moving into specific study of selected topics. There is an important chapter on terrorism and related crimes that is particularly relevant to our present-day world. Also note the new material on white-collar crime -- a topic that has captured the attention of our current student communities in the wake of the Enron, PG&E and Martha Stewart scandals. Recommended for any Sociology and Criminal Justice course focused on the study of crime’s impact on the society.

STATISTICS FOR CRIMINOLOGY AND CRIMINAL JUSTICE. Ronet Bachman. Raymond Pateanoster. McGraw-Hill. Now in its second edition, this text by Bachman (University of Delaware) and Pateanoster (University of Maryland) would make an excellent primary course book for any class dedicated to applying statistics to criminology. Here, the authors teach students how to compile, test and interpret statistics so as to allow crime patterns to be anticipated, analyzed - and then mitigated. In depth and impeccably researched, Statistics For Criminology breaks a lot of new ground as it artfully marries pure mathematical concepts to the study of these specialized sociological issues. Although appropriate for undergraduate course work, it is advised that students have a college-level mathematical background and previous exposure to statistical study in order to take full advantage of the breadth of this text. Recommended for all Criminal Justice or Sociology classes at the college level where crime patterns are studied through statistical analysis.

AGING AND THE LIFE COURSE: An Introduction to Social Gerontology. Jill Quadagno. McGraw-Hill. In light of the increased awareness on the elderly in America, subjects like Alzheimer’s Disease, Medicare, Social Security and Geriatric Healthcare are at the top of everyone’s hot topic list. And in terms of student study of the subject, Aging and the Course of Life is a hallmark text that deserves to be required reading in order to obtain a four-year college degree - it is simply that important. Why so vital? you ask. Well, for starters, it’s the first book we’ve seen to tackle the issues of growing old in these terms: rather then cover the subject in the same old way, Quadagno incorporates thought on how cultural factors and the life choices one makes as a young person come together to determine the quality of the "golden years." This is a unique platform in that so much has been written about how governmental forces determine our ability to gain happiness and peace-of-mind. And to a partial extent, that platform is an accurate one. But just as important is the role each of us play in the equation: If we make bad choices as young people, we must obviously suffer the consequences as old people. Just as important as any political issue on the table is an individual’s willingness to take some personal responsibility for himself and his actions. Quadagno reminds students of this throughout this well-detailed text, in the hopes of building a mind-set conducive to smart decision-making before "old age" has determined their path. Recommended to all Sociology courses that touch on the aging process.

Each of these selections is recommended to college-level libraries for their immense long-term reference value and readability.

Order from Amazon.com

~John Aiello


TECHNOLOGY


Spotlighting John Wiley Technology

WINDOWS VISTA FOR DUMMIES. Preview Edition. Andy Rathbone. For Dummies/JohnWiley.

Like it or not, change is a fact of life with the PC – as user-demands spawned by gains in technology mandate that Windows ‘keep up with the times’ it in fact created. In turn, Vista is on point to be the first system-upgrade in Windows since the launch of XP. In addition, the Office features we all have come to depend on will also be upgraded. Accordingly, Rathbone’s preview serves as a handy primer outlining changes from XP to Vista, further analyzing things users will need to know in order to be able to effectively navigate these swelling seas of information. Here, tech-writer Rathbone covers everything you will need to know to assess how the Vista upgrade will affect your ability to optimize your system. After a tidy refresher course of Windows basics that “everybody thinks [they] know,” we embark on a journey into the major changes coming with Vista, including navigation through Windows-based folders; use of desktop and sidebar features; location of lost files; creating documents and utilizing editing features; upgrades to office 2007; and an indispensable chapter on how to keep your system from going down. If you’re thinking about upgrading to Vista now or at some point in the future you will require this book: It’s an easy-to-follow road-map through the webs and intricacies of what promises to be the most fluid Windows operating program to ever hit the bins. ~John Aiello

Of related Interest

PCS FOR DUMMIES. All-on-one Desk Reference. Mark L. Chambers. For Dummies/John Wiley.

Anybody who owns a personal computer needs this book - in today’s tech-driven landscape, it’s as necessary as a dictionary or the phone book. Readers will find Chambers an obvious master of the PC who possesses the innate ability to write in sharp clear tones. And, since many of us boast only a limited understanding as to the nuts-and-bolts of computer systems, unobtrusive writing is usually the yardstick with which such manuals are measured. Here, Chambers wraps up “8 books in one,” covering PC Hardware; the specifics of Windows XP; use of the Internet; Microsoft Works; Office 2003; optimizing enjoyment of music, movies and photos; system upgrades; and the basics on how to establish a solid home-network. What makes this title noteworthy is its breadth: Instead of forcing users to buy separate books for each sub-topic, Chambers has created a single volume which provides all home users and small business owners with snapshots of the fundamentals in bite-sized chunks. ~JohnAiello

Of related Interest

WEB DESIGN FOR DUMMIES. Lisa Lopuck. For Dummies/John Wiley.

As everyone knows, the internet has literally changed the way the world does business. Entities like Amazon, Google and E-Bay have changed the face of commerce and advertising, further altering the shape of the media. Accordingly, many small businesses are now driven by a need to have a presence on the internet. And that presence can only be realized through effective web sites. Here, Lopuck (a web design consultant) presents an effective guidebook that surveys how to shape a web site to fit your particular needs and the particular demographic you are trying to reach. Topics covered include creating a user- friendly design that facilitates easy navigation; designing web graphics; managing the finished site; and tips on how to maximize traffic and bolster the impact of your web presence. As Lopuck notes, the first thing any web-based business owner should do is assess who is likely going to be coming to the site and what their reasons are for being there. Once this is done, it then becomes imperative to tailor your site to meet your reader’s needs. No PC user should venture into the world of the web without having a basic knowledge of what they are getting into - and this Dummies guide provides a perfect introductory course. If nothing else, having this basic knowledge of web design will allow you to work with a designer more effectively, likely saving you money along the way. Priced at under $30, this is an investment internet-based business owners would be ill-advised to pass up. ~John Aiello

CRYSTAL XCELSISUS FOR DUMMIES. Michael Alexander. For Dummies (An imprint of John Wiley). As the personal computer has evolved, so has the need for better operating programs. Today, PC users want to be able create different panels of data into order to make their systems run more efficiently. Here, Alexander (a Microsoft Certified Application Developer with well over a decade of experience building better ways for users to compile and catalog information) presents a handy and affordable manual that anyone with basic competency should be able to digest. As Alexander notes in his introductory chapter, “Crystal Xcelsius bridges the gap between data analysis and presentation” – its mission to allow users with basic skill levels to be able to synthesize data and build purposeful presentations. In short, the goal of Crystal Xcelsius is to create more self-sufficient computer users who do not have to rely so heavily on commercial web designers to meet their office needs. Basically, Crystal Xcelsius is an interactive program that has myriad functions. Among other things, the program enables users to build dashboards with gauges and sliders and implement color to explain data – immediately promoting interaction between audience and author. The key with these types of guidebooks is that they must speak clearly and present direction in simplified and sharp terms: The point is for readers of varying skill levels to be able to comprehend the presentation. Wiley’s Dummies series is respected throughout the world for this fact, and Alexander’s contribution is especially noteworthy for the way it takes a complicated and cutting-edge topic and reduces it to digestible portions. Accordingly, this text is recommended to all PC users who might be considering adding Crystal Xcelsius to their arsenal. ~John Aiello

Of related Interest

ORACLE - PL/SQL FOR DUMMIES. Michael Rosenblum. Dr. Paul Dorsey. John Wiley. Also part of the Dummies series, this text presumes some level of understanding of basic code and its role in the functionality of the computer. Accordingly, Oracle provides a complete and comprehensive overview of the PL/SQL programming language as a way to help programmers be able to effectively write code that avoids bugs and system meltdowns. Rosenblum and Dorsey have basically created a course outline which provides developers with the fundamental information they must master in order to communicate via PL/SQL. Again, it should be stressed that this is not a beginner’s manual; simply, it is impractical to think that someone who is not familiar with computer languages will be able to pick up this text and start writing useable code. Instead, this book is geared towards advanced students of the discipline who might need a refresher course to reconnect themselves with advances in the field. As withthe entire Dummies series, notable for the way it conveys material in a clear and compact manner. ~John Aiello

Of related Interest

WEB ENGINEERING. Edited by Gerti Kappel;. Birgit Proll. Siegfried Reich. Werner Retschitzegger. John Wiley. In keeping with the road the Oracle title forges, Web Engineering speaks to the other side of the spectrum: Rather than focusing solely on software design, web engineering focuses on ways the engineer applies theory in order to design, implement, operate and maintain myriad web applications. Most readers know that as the capabilities of the internet increased, so did the buzz of traffic. In turn, wed designers and engineers are increasingly under-the-gun to do their jobs faster and more efficiently -- at less than last year’s cost. It is all a 24-hour-a-day challenge, to say the least. Here, Kappel and co-editors examine the process of web engineering in thorough terms, deftly linking theories of design with issues of practical application in a text that writes a bridge from the classroom to the corporate office. Broad in scope and impeccably researched, this book will be of long-term value to systems engineers looking for ways to cut costs while simultaneously increasing services. ~John Aiello

GEEKS ON CALL. PCS: 5-MINUTE FIXES. J. Geir. E. Geir. J.R. King. John Wiley. If you have a PC (even for play and not the home-office), then you should own this book. It is an outstanding primer allowing the general user to maintain their computer. Information is included here on how to get to ‘know’ your PC and it capabilities and functions; how to use your PC effectively; in addition to an invaluable chapter on troubleshooting common operating glitches and background on popular programs like Microsoft Word, Outlook and Excel. Well-written and sharply organized, with a format/design geared to readers with limited technical abilities – the idea here is for novices to be able to increase their over-all skill level in a short amount of time. At a cover price of $15, this book should be on racks in stores that market computer systems to the public. ~John Aiello

ADOBE PHOTOSHOP CS2. VISUAL ENCYCLOPEDIA. Stephen Romaniello. John Wiley. The internet has literally changed the way the world communicates. Initially, the web was thought to be a big email center offering a pathway to instant communication. Well, after a decade, it certainly is that – and a whole lot more. Today, the internet is a publishing force as writers and artists have used it to level the playing field and get work out to large segments of the community. In addition, sites like Dabble.com have come along to bring video and film to the steps of your home PC. In turn, such advances in technology have given each of us the opportunity to have an identity on the internet. To this end, Adobe Photoshop is an invaluable tool providing an encyclopedic reference on how to use Photoshop in conjunction with the PC in order to create illustrations and graphics of high impact. Simply, the ability for businesses to reproduce magazine-quality pictures and immediately upload them onto the world-wide web has changed the direction of publishing, altering the way companies advertise/market themselves. In Adobe Photoshop, Romaniello has drafted a visually-based one-stop manual that shows readers how to use Photoshop to its fullest capabilities, as Romaniello’s text is quite informative in terms of demonstrating how to enhance color quality and definition and implement automated image adjustments. Even though the book is geared toward the graphic designer, it will also be of use to practicing graphic journalists as well, providing the definitive Photoshop reference now available. ~John Aiello

Of related Interest

FLASH 8 ACTIONSCRIPT BIBLE. Joey Lott. Robert Reinhardt. John Wiley. Focused on readers with at least a working knowledge of code, this book provides comprehensive insight into the marvels of Flash 8. In their treatise, Lott and Reinhardt cover all the ground that would enable anyone with a fundamental background in writing code to build interactive platforms – platforms rich with animation and layered with graphics. On today’s internet, the ability to captivate and amuse and challenge users is what sets the successful site apart from the also-ran. In turn, the landscape of the web in 2006 hungers for motion and quick bursts of animation. Accordingly, Flash 8 is the key to these hidden doors of wonder. Like its title implies, this will serve as a ‘bible’ for code writers looking to investigate how to manipulate the face of Flash 8 with the very essence of their own creativity (comprehensive and cutting edge, providing the latest on this ever-evolving subject). ~John Aiello

Order each from Amazon.com


OTHER REFERENCE SUBJECTS


TROY: FROM HOMER’S ILIAD TO HOLLYWOOD EPIC. Edited by Martin M. Winkler. Blackwell Publishing.

Reviewed by Frank Aiello

When Wolfgang Peterson’s Troy was first released in 2004, many critics were dismayed by his liberal use of the original story - especially noteworthy is the fact that although Menelaus is challenged by Paris to a duel on the plains of Troy (as in the epic telling), in the film version, Paris is not spared from death by the intercession of the Goddess, Aphrodite.

Instead, a defeated Paris crawls back to the Trojan lines seeking the protection of his brother, Hector. As Helen watches from the ramparts and Menelaus (played by veteran character actor Brendon Gleeson) roars, “Is this what you left me for?” At this point, Hector intercedes and slays Menelaus.

As Monica S. Cyrino appropriately notes in her analysis of the film from Helen’s perspective:

The death of Menelaus midway through the film has elicited much dismay and criticism from viewers, since the Greek epic tradition records that Menelaus retrieves Helen after the fall of Troy and takes her back to Sparta where they resume their lives together. [fn]

Yet, the removal of his character at this point has a strong motivation: it effectively erases Helen’s function as the reason for the war and reinforces one of the film’s major themes, that the true cause of the war is Agamemnon’s outrageous greed for power.”[p. 144]

In fact, Peterson has made little pretense of the fact that he was making a film not so much about the Iliad, but rather about the “[p]ower-hungry Agamemnons who wants to create a new world order …”[p.7]

In the perceptive and incisive essay, Troy and Memorials of War, Frederick Ahl writes that “loyalty…has a sinister side. Without it, there would be no tyrants.”

And Ahl goes on:

It is not far apart from the way the word ‘patriotism’ is currently misunderstood. Laelius, one of Julius Caesar’s centurions and winner of the highest military award available to someone not a commanding general, the ‘civil oak’ (quercus civilis, the Roman equivalent of the Victoria Cross, Congressional Medal of Honor or Iron Cross), shows the extremes to which this kind of loyalty may go…” [pp.182-183]

In sum, Troy is a cinematic examination of the abuses of power and arrogance which serve as an excuse for conflict – men manipulating traits of loyalty and self-sacrifice in the defense of the Trojan/Spartan “homeland.” As such, Peterson demands that his audience accept the lessons of recent history: In Peterson’s world, empires go to war to plunder the resources of other empires, or to pursue their proprietary brand of imperialism. However, empires do not go to war over a woman’s love affair.

This well-written analysis will appeal to both students and historians of the era. In addition, instructors in courses which explore the psychology of loyalty and betrayal and the insatiable need to pursue power might consider this as a supporting class text – the essays rich and evocative bring the reader to true points of introspection. ~The Editor

Order from Amazon.com


© Frank Aiello. 2006. All rights reserved. Frank Aiello and The Electric Review.
Frank Aiello is an attorney who has practiced law in California since the 1970s, including criminal defense, civil and probate work (with a particular expertise in matters of insurance law). He holds a History degree from the University of California at Berkeley, and a Law degree from Hastings College of the Law in San Francisco. Reach him via
The Electric Review.

CULTURAL COMPETENCE. A Primer For Educators. Jerry V. Diller. Jean Moule. Thomson/Wadsworth. This slim volume will prove invaluable to students in the midst of completing their credential programs in education. Diller (a master educator who has served on the faculty of U.C. Berkeley and The Wright Institute) and Moule (Oregon State University) have come up with a text that presents the things an instructor is likely to find in school rooms across America. As we move into the 21st century, the operative word is diversity; to this end, Cultural is a first-rate manual dedicated to helping young instructors reach out to students of varied cultural backgrounds. What’s best about this text is that it focuses the student-teacher on the idea that a typical classroom is filled with 30 kids from 30 different environments - some rich, some poor, some black, some white, some Latino, some Asian. Accordingly, the teacher has to be able to create a program that can reach each of them in a compassionate, empathetic and meaningful way. Although they touch on myriad concepts in this treatise, the underlying idea here is about molding teachers who understand that the key to the process is in (1) awareness of the cultural differences between students; and (2) in the acceptance of those differences as a first step in building trust between instructor and pupil. Readers of this text will embark on a rich journey that uses educational theory in conjunction with real-life vignettes (and practice exercises) to create a classroom tool with true long-range reference value.

Recommended to instructors in programs that prepare the student-teacher for the actual battle-lines of the classroom. Further recommended to all college-level libraries as a general reference text with both educational and sociological value. One of the top reference books of the year so far in the realm of teacher-education.

Of Related Interest

THE SCHOOL COUNSELOR AS CONSULTANT. An Integrated Model For School-Based Consultation. Richard D. Parsons. Wallace J. Kahn. Thomson/Brooks-Cole. This text serves nicely as a companion text To Cultural Competence in that it provides a model for the school counselor, offering direction on how a person in this role can deal with the various demands of the position. Often, a student’s problems in school are directly tied to cultural differences and to the inability to assimilate into a typical educational environment. Here, Parsons and Kahn offer new insight, encouraging the counselor to change their personal approach to confronting student-problems in an attempt to break down old walls of resistance.

Recommended to all school counselors at both the high school and college level. Further recommended to all college-level libraries as a general reference text.

Order from Amazon.com or go to www.wadsworth.com





Website copyright 2002-2003 The Electric Review. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of material from any Electric Review pages without written permission is strictly prohibited.